Agilent Technologies HP 8566B Specifications

About this Manual

We’ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product. This manual is the best copy we could find; it may be incomplete or contain dated information. If we find a more recent copy in the future, we will add it to the Agilent website.

Support for Your Product

Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from

Agilent is available. You will find any other available product information on the

Agilent Test & Measurement website,

www.tm.agilent.com

.

HP References in this Manual

This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that

Hewlett-Packard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have made no changes to this manual copy. In other documentation, to reduce potential confusion, the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix: where a product number/name was HP XXXX the current name/number is now Agilent XXXX. For example, model number

HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.

Performance Tests and

Adjustments Manual

HP 8566B Spectrum Analyzer

F!a

HEWLETT

PACKARD

HP Part No. 08566-90168

Printed in USA September 1993

Notice.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

@ Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1993

All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

1400 Fountaingrove Parkway, Santa Rosa CA, 95403-1799, USA

Certification

Warranty

Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory.

Hewlett-Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and

Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute’s calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards

Organization members.

This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective.

For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett-Packard and Hewlett-Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to

Hewlett-Packard from another country.

Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated by Hewlett-Packard for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.

L

IMITATION OF

W

ARRANTY

The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.

NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.

HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

E

XCLUSIVE

R

EMEDIES

THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND

EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT,

TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.

Assistance

Product maintenance agreements and other customer omistance agreemxmts are available for Hewlett-Rzckard products.

Fbr any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Fbckard Sales and

Service Ome.

Safety Notes

Caution

Warning

Instruction

Manual

The following safety notes are used throughout this manual.

Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument.

Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.

Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in

injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.

The instruction manual symbol. The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the manual.

iv

General Safety

Considerations

Warning

Warning

Caution

Before this instrument

is switched on, make sure it has been properly grounded through the protective conductor of the ac power cable to a socket outlet provided with protective earth contact.

Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor, inside or outside the instrument, or disconnection of the protective earth terminal can result in personal injury.

There are many points in the instrument which can, if contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful.

Any adjustments or service procedures that require operation of the instrument with protective covers removed should be performed only by trained service personnel.

Before this instrument is switched on, make sure its primary power circuitry has been adapted to the voltage of the ac power source.

Failure to set the ac power input to the correct voltage could cause damage to the instrument when the ac power cable is plugged in.

V

How to Use This

Manual

This manual uses the

Front-Panel Ke r) This represents a key physically located on the following instrument.

conventions:

Screen Text This indicates text displayed on the instrument’s screen.

HP 8566B

Documentation

Description

HP 8566B Installation and Verification

Manual

HP 8566B Operating and Programming

Manual

Included with the HP Model 8566B spectrum analyzer are manuals:

The Installation and Verification Manual, the Operating and

Programming Manual, and the Performance Tests and Adjustments

Manual.

HP part number 08566-90169

Contents: General information, installation, specifications, characteristics, and operation verification.

HP 8566B

Performance Tests and

Adjustments Manual

HP 8566B RF Section

Troubleshooting and

Repair Manual

HP 8566B IF-Display

Section

Troubleshooting and

Repair Manual


Contents: Manual and remote operation, including complete syntax and command description. Accopanying this manual is the seperate, pocket-sized Quick Reference Guide, HP part number 5955-8970.


Contents: Electrical performance tests and adjustment procedures.


Contents: RF section service information.


Contents: IF-Display section service information.

vi

Contents

1. General Information

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . .

Operation Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Option 462 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Option 857 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Performance Tests

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verification of Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Performance Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test . . . .

2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . .

3. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test . . . . . .

4. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test . . . . . .

5. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test

6. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test . . . . . .

7. IF Gain Uncertainty Test . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. Amplitude Fidelity Test . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test . . . . . . .

10. Frequency Response Test . . . . . . . . . . .

11. Sweep Time Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . .

12. Noise Sidebands Test . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. Line-Related Sidebands Test . . . . . . . . . .

14. Average Noise Level Test . . . . . . . . . . .

15. Residual Responses Test . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. Harmonic and Intermodulation Distortion Test .

17. Image, Multiple, and Out of Band Responses Test

18. Gain Compression Test . . . . . . . . . . . .

19. 1st LO Output Amplitude Test . . . . . . . . .

20. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy Test . . . . . . .

21. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test (~20 ms) . . . .

22. Frequency Reference Error Test . . . . . . . .

‘Iable 2-24. Performance Test Record . . . . . . . . . .

Test 1. Center Frequency Readout Accuracy . . . . .

Test 2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test . . . . . . . .

Test 3. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test . . . . .

Test 4. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity . . . . . . .

Test 5. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty .

Test 6. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test . . . . .

Test 7. IF Gain Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test 8. Amplitude Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test 9. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy . . . . . . . .

Test 10. Frequency Response Test . . . . . . . . . .

2-93

2-94

2-95

2-96

2-99

2-100

2-101

2-53

2-58

2-61

2-65

2-73

2-77

2-81

2-82

2-84

2-87

2-89

2-90

2-91

2-92

2-14

2-17

2-19

2-21

2-27

2-31

2-32

2-46

2-49

2-3

2-4

2-8

2-12

2-l

2-l

2-2

2-3 l-l l-2 l-2 l-2 l-2

Contents-l

Contents-2

Test 11. Sweep Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . .

2-103

Test 12. Noise Sidebands Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104

Test 13. Line-Related Sidebands . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105

Test 14. Average Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106

Test 15. Residual Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-107

Test 16. Harmonic And Intermodulation Distortion . . 2-108

Test 17. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses . 2-109

Test 18. Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-l 11

Test 19. 1st LO Output Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . 2-112

Test 20. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy . . . . . . . . 2-113

Test 21. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy (< 20 ms) . . . .

2-l 14

Test 22. Frequency Reference Error Test . . . . . . .

2-115

3. Adjustments

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Factory-Selected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Location of Test Points and Adjustments . . . . . . . .

1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments . . . . . .

2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and Below) . .

2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3004A and Above) . .

3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and

Below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and

Above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Final Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below) .

4. Final Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above) .

5. Log Amplifier Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Video Processor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .

7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments . . . . . . .

8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments . . . . .

9. 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . . .

10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments . . . . . . . .

12. 10 MHz Standard Adjustment (SN 2637A and

Below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12. 10 MHz Standard Adjustment (SN 2728A and

Above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13. Sweep, DAC, and Main Coil Driver Adjustments . .

14. 100 MHz VCXO Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .

15. MN Loop Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16. YT.0 Loop Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17. 20/30 Loop Phase Lock Adjustments . . . . . . .

18. RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments . . . . . . .

19. CAL Output Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20. Last Converter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .

2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments . . . . . . . .

22. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments . . . . .

23. Track and Hold Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .

24. Digital Storage Display Adjustments . . . . . . .

Low-Noise DC Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-48

3-94

3-100

3-104

3-108

3-113

3-126

3-132

3-135

3-146

3-160

3-166

3-169

3-174

3-206

3-209

3-212

3-218

3-56

3-63

3-65

3-69

3-73

3-76

3-82

3-89

3-3

3-3

3-25

3-31

3-41

3-l

3-2

3-2

3-2

3-3

Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration . . . . .

3-219

4.

Option 462

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test . . . . .

3. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test .

4. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test . . . .

4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test .

5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching

Uncertainty Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test 3. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test (p/o lhble 2-24, Performance Test Record) . . . . . . .

Test 3. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

Test (p/o ‘Ihble 2-24, Performance Test Record) . .

Test 4. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity (p/o

Table 2-24, Performance Test Record) . . . . . . .

Test 4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

(p/o Table 2-24, Performance Test Record) . . . . .

Test 5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching

Uncertainty (p/o ‘Ihble 2-24, Performace Test

Record) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . .

9. Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . .

4-l

4-2

4-4

4-10

4-13

4-16

4-18

4-19

4-21

4-22

4-23

4-24

4-27

5.

Option 857

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Performance Test . .

Performance Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test 8. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity . . . . . . . .

6.

Major Assembly and Component Locations

IF-Display Section Figure Index . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Section Figure Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-l

5-2

5-6

5-7

6-l

6-2

Contents3

Figures

l-l. Service Accessories, HP Part Number 08566-60001 . .

2-l. Center Frequency Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2. Center Frequency Accuracy Measurement . . . . . .

2-3. Narrow Span Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4. Wide Span Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5. Resolution Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . . . . .

2-6. 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement . . .

2-8. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Measurement . . . .

2-9. IF Gain Uncertainty Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . .

2-10. IF Gain Uncertainty Measurement . . . . . . . . . .

2-l 1. Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12. Amplitude Fidelity Measurement . . . . . . . . . .

2-13. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup . . . . . .

2-14. Frequency Response Test Setup (100 Hz to 100 kHz) .

2-15. Frequency Response Measurement (1 kHz to 100 kHz)

2-16. Frequency Response Test Setup (100 kHz to 60 MHz) .

2-17. Frequency Response Measurement (100 kHz to 4 MHz)

2-18. Frequency Response Measurement (4 MHz to 60 MHz)

2-19. Frequency Response Test Setup (60 MHz to 2.5 GHz, 2 to22GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-20. Frequency Response Measurement (60 MHz to 2.5 GHz)

2-21. Sweep Time Accuracy Test Setup . . . . . . . . . .

2-22. Noise Sidebands Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-23. Noise Sidebands Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-24. Line Related Sidebands Test Setup . . . . . . . . . .

2-25. Line-Related Sidebands Measurement . . . . . . . .

2-26. Average Noise Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . .

2-27. Residual Responses Measurement . . . . . . . . . .

2-28. Harmonic Distortion Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . .

2-29. Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup . . . . . . . .

2-30. Third Order Intermodulation Products . . . . . . . .

2-31. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses Test Setup

2-32. Gain Compression Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-33. 1st LO Output Amplitude Test Setup . . . . . . . . .

2-34. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy Test Setup . . . . . . .

2-35. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy (~20 ms) Test Setup . . . .

2-36. Fast Sweep Time Measurement (~20 ms) . . . . . . .

2-37. Frequency Reference Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . .

3-l. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments Setup . . . .

3-2. IF-Display Section Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below)

3-3. IF-Display Section Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above)

3-4. Location of RF Section Low-Voltage Adjustments . . .

3-5. High Voltage Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6. Location of High Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . .

3-7. Location of Label and Test Point . . . . . . . . . . .

2-39

2-41

2-46

2-50

2-51

2-53

2-55

2-59

2-62

2-66

2-69

2-71

2-73

2-77

2-81

2-82

2-84

2-85

2-88

3-25

3-26

3-27

3-29

3-32

3-33

3-34 l-9

2-4

2-6

2-8

2-10

2-13

2-15

2-18

2-20

2-21

2-23

2-27

2-29

2-31

2-33

2-35

2-36

2-37

2-38

Contents-4

3-8. Location of AlA Components . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9. CRT Cut-Off Voltage

3-10. Waveform at AlA3TP5’ : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 : :

3-l 1. Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable . . . . .

3-12. High Voltage Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13. Location of High Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . .

3-14. Location of AlA Label and Test Point . . . . . . . .

3-15. Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable . . . . .

3-16. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup . . . . . . .

3-17. Location of AlA2, AlA4, AlA5, and A3A2 . . . . .

3-18. AlA2, AlA4, and AlA Adjustment Locations . . . .

3-19. X+ and X- Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-20. Composite X Deflection Waveform . . . . . . . . . .

3-21. Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment

Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-22. 5OV,, Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup . . . . . . .

3-24. Location of AlA and A3A2 . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-25. AlA Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-26. X+ and X- Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-27. Composite X Deflection Waveform . . . . . . . . . .

3-28. Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment

Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-29. 5OV,, Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-30. Location of Final Display Adjustments on AlA2, AlA4, and AlA5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-31. Final Display Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . . . .

3-32. Location of Final Display Adjustments on AlA . . .

3-33. Log Amplifier Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . . .

3-34. Location of Log Amplifier Adjustments . . . . . . . .

3-35. Video Processor Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . .

3-36. Location of Video Processor Adjustments . . . . . . .

3-37. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup . . . . .

3-38. Location of Center, Symmetry, and 10 Hz Amplitude

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-39. Location of 3 MHz Peak Adjustments . . . . . . . . .

3-40. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup . . . .

3-41. Location of A4A4 21.4 MHz LC Filter Adjustments . .

3-42. Location of A4A4 21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments

3-43. Location of A4A8 21.4 MHz LC Filter and Attenuation

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-44. Location of A4A8 21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments

3-45. Location of 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . .

3-46. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-47. Location of IF Gain Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .

3-48. Location of 10 dB Gain Step Adjustments . . . . . .

3-49. Location of .l dB Gain Step, 18.4 MHz LO, and + 1OV

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-50. Down/Up Converter Adjustments Setup . . . . . . .

3-51. Location of Down/Up Converter Adjustments . . . . .

3-52. 10 MHz Frequency Standard Adjustments Setup . . .

3-53. Location of 10 MHz Standard Adjustments . . . . . .

3-54. 10 MHz Frequency Standard Adjustments Setup . . .

3-55. Location of 10 MHz Standard Adjustments . . . . . .

3-60

3-62

3-85

3-86

3-90

3-94

3-96

3-97

3-98

3-100

3-101

3-105

3-107

3-109

3-112

3-53

3-54

3-57

3-58

3-58

3-59

3-60

3-64

3-65

3-66

3-69

3-70

3-73

3-74

3-76

3-36

3-37

3-38

3-40

3-42

3-43

3-44

3-47

3-49

3-50

3-50

3-51

3-52

3-78

3-80

3-82

3-83

3-84

Contents-5

Contents-6

3-56. Sweep and DAC Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . .

3-114

3-57. OV to + 1OV Sweep Ramp at A16TP3 . . . . . . . . .

3-115

3-58. Location of Sweep and DAC Adjustments . . . . . . .

3-116

3-59. Properly Adjusted DC Levels Between Sweep Ramps . 3-117

3-60. Improperly Adjusted DC Levels Between Sweep Ramps 3-117

3-61. YTO Main Coil Driver Adjustments Setup . . . . . . .

3-120

3-62. Location of YTO Main Coil Driver Adjustments . . . .

3-121

3-63. YTO Main Coil Driver Adjustments Setup (Alternate

Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3- 122

3-64. 100 MHz VCXO Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . .

3-126

3-65. Location of 100 MHz VCXO Adjustments . . . . . . .

3-127

3-66. Typical Tuning Range of A7A2 100 MHz VCXO . . . .

3-128

3-67. M/N Loop Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-132

3-68. Location of PLL Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-133

3-69. YTO Loop Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-136

3-70. Location of Assemblies, Cables, and Test Points . . . .

3-136

3-71. All YTO Loop Service Position . . . . . . . . . . .

3-137

3-72. Typical YTO Loop Swept Frequency Response at AllAl 3-139

3-73. AllA Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-140

3-74. Sampler Waveform at AllA5TPl . . . . . . . . . .

3-142

3-75. 30 MHz YTO Loop Sampler Response at AllJ5 IF OUT 3-143

3-76. Tuning the IF OUT Fundamental . . . . . . . . . .

3-144

3-77. 20/30 PLL Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-147

3-78. Location of PLLl Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-149

3-79. Location of PLL2 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-154

3-80. Location of PLL3 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-156

3-81. RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments Setup . . . . . .

3-161

3-82. Location of RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments . . .

3-161

3-83. A Sampler Balance Adjustment Waveform . . . . . .

3-164

3-84. Cal Output Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-166

3-85. Location of CAL OUTPUT Adjustment . . . . . . . .

3-167

3-86. CAL OUTPUT Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-168

3-87. Last Converter Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . . .

3-170

3-88. Location of Last Converter Adjustments . . . . . . .

3-171

3-89. Frequency Response Preliminary Adjustments Setup . 3-176

3-90. Location of Frequency Response Adjustments . . . .

3-177

3-91. Frequency Response Adjustments Setup (10 MHz to 2.5

GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-179

3-92. Typical Coarse Frequency Response (10 MHz - 2.5 GHz) 3-181

3-93. Typical Frequency Response (10 MHz - 2.5 GHz) . . .

3-182

3-94. Frequency Response Adjustments Setup (2.0 GHz to

22.0 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-185

3-95. Typical Coarse Frequency Response (2 GHz - 5.8 GHz) 3-187

3-96. Typical Frequency Response (2.0 GHz - 5.8 GHz) . . .

3-188

3-97. Typical Coarse Frequency Response (5.8 GHz - 12.5

GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-191

3-98. Typical Frequency Response (5.8 GHz - 12.5 GHz) . . 3-193

3-99. Frequency Response Adjustments Setup (18.6 to 325

GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-204

3-100. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments Setup . . . .

3-206

3-101. Location of Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments . 3-208

3-102. Track and Hold Adjustments Setup : . . . . . . . .

3-209

3-103. Location of Track and Hold Adjustments . . . . . . .

3-210

3-104. Digital Storage Display Adjustments Setup . . . . . .

3-212

3-105. Location of Digital Storage Display Adjustments . . .

3-213

3-106. Sample and Hold Balance Adjustment Waveforms . . .

3-107. Waveform Before Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-108. Low-Noise DC Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-109. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configurations . . . . .

4-l. Resolution Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . . . . .

4-2. Impulse Bandwidth Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . .



4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement . . .

4-7. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . .

4-8. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . .

5-l. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup . . . . . .

6-l. RF Section, Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2. RF Section, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3. RF Section, Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4. IF Section, Top View (SN 3001A and Below) . . . . .

6-5. IF Section, ‘Ibp View (SN 3004A and Above) . . . . .

6-6. IF Section, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7. IF Section, Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-14

4-17

4-25

4-28

5-2

6-3

6-4

6-5

6-6

6-7

6-8

6-9

3-215

3-215

3-218

3-219

4-3

4-4

4-8

4-11

Contents-7

!Ihbles

2-l. Performance Test Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . .

2-2. Center Frequency Readout Accuracy . . . . . . . . .

2-3. Narrow Span Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4. Wide Span Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5. Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity . . . . . . . . . .

2-7. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . .

2-8. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . .

2-9. IF Gain Uncertainty, 10 dB Steps . . . . . . . . . .

2-10. IF Gain Uncertainty, 2 dB Steps . . . . . . . . . . .

2-l 1. IF Gain Uncertainty, 0.1 dB Steps . . . . . . . . . .

2-12. Log Scale Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-13. Linear Amplitude Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-14. 100 Hz to 2.5 GHz Frequency Band . . . . . . . . .

2-15. Frequency Response (Flatness) . . . . . . . . . . .

2-16. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times 220 ms . . . . .

2-17. Sweep Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-18. Average Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-19. TO1 Measurement Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-20. Image and Out-of-Band Response . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 1. Multiple Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-22. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-23. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy (~20 ms) . . . . . . . . .

2-24. Frequency Response (Flatness) . . . . . . . . . . .

3-l. Adjustment Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2. Adjustable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3. Factory-Selected Components . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4. Standard Value Replacement Capacitors . . . . . . .

3-5. Standard Value Replacement 0.125 Resistors . . . . .

3-6. Standard Value Replacement 0.5 Resistors . . . . . .

3-5. Initial Adjustment Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6. Initial Adjustment Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-7. Standard Values for A7A2L4 . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8. Limits for 100 MHz Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9. Selection Chart for Attenuator Resistors . . . . . . .

3-10. Resistor Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-11. Power Level of Fundamental Signal . . . . . . . . .

3-12. Standard Values for AlOA4C49

3-13. Standard Values for AlOA4R29 and’AliA4R33 : : : :

3-14. Frequency Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-15. Preselector Delay Compensation DAC Values . . . . .

3-16. A6A12 YTX Driver Assembly Factory-Select Capacitor

Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-17. Parts for Low-Noise DC Supply . . . . . . . . . . .

3-18. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for A4A4 and A4A8 (21.4 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

2-7

2-9

2-11

2-25

2-29

2-30

2-37

2-45

2-48

2-48

2-60

2-72

2-13

2-16

2-18

2-20

2-23

2-24

2-75

2-76

2-83

2-86

2-102

3-4

3-5

3-13

3-20

3-21

3-23

3-63

3-66

3-128

3-130

3-130

3-131

3-144

3-157

3-158

3-174

3-202

3-203

3-218

3-219

Contents-8

3-19. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for A4A7

(3MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-l. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . .

4-2. Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . .

4-4. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity . . . . . . . .

4-5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity . . . .

4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . .

5-l. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 Hz RBW; Option 857) . . .

5-2. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 kHz RBW; Option 857) . .

5-3. Linear Amplitude Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-219

4-3

4-9

4-9

4-12

4-15

4-17

5-4

5-5

5-5

Contents-9

General Information

Introduction

Warning

This HP 8566B Tests and Adjustments Manual contains two main sections: Performance Tests and Adjustments Procedures. This chapter lists the required test equipment for both sections. The performance tests provided should be performed for the following reasons: w If the test equipment for the Operation Verification Program is not available.

w If the instrument does not pass all of the Operation Verification tests.

n

For complete verification of specifications not covered by the

Operation Verification program.

The adjustment procedures should be performed for the following reasons: w If the results of a performance test are not within the specifications.

w After the replacement of a part or component that affects electrical performance.

The adjustment procedures require access to the interior of the instrument and therefore should only be performed by qualified service personnel. There are voltages at many points in the instrument which can, if contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful. Adjustments should be performed only by trained service personnel.

Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in

STANDBY. There is no OFF position on the LINE switch. Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board, remove the power cord from the rear of both instruments and wait for the MAINS indicators (red LEDs) to go completely out.

Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of power. Use a non-metallic tuning tool whenever possible.

1

General Information 1-l

Instruments Covered

This manual contains procedures for testing and adjusting HP by this Manual 8566B spectrum analyzers, including those with Option 400 (400 Hz operation), Option 462 (impulse bandwidths and 6 dB bandwidths), and Option 857 installed. The procedures in this manual can also be used to adjust HP 8566A spectrum analyzers that have been converted into HP 8566B spectrum analyzers through the installation of an HP 8566AB Retrofit Kit (formerly HP 8566A+OlK Retrofit Kit).

Operation Verification

A high confidence level in the instrument’s operation can be achieved by running only the Operation Verification Program, since it tests most of the instrument’s specifications. It is recommended that the

Operation Verification Program be used for incoming inspection and after repairs, since it requires much less time and test equipment.

A description of the program can be found in the Installation and

Verification manual.

Option 462

Option 462 instruments require that the performance tests and

Instruments adjustment procedures listed below be performed instead of their standard versions included in chapters two and three. Information on

Option 462 versions is located in Chapter 4, Option 462.

6 dB Bandwidths:

Test 3, 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

Test 4, 6 dB Resolution Selectivity Test

Adjustment 9, 6 dB Bandwidth Adjustment Procedure

Impulse Bandwidths:

Test 3, Impulse Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

Test 4, Impulse and Resolution Selectivity Test

Test 5, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth

Switching Uncertainty Test

Adjustment 9, Impulse Bandwidth Adjustment Procedure

Option 867

Option 857 instruments are used in EMC receiver applications.

Instruments Information on Option 857 is located in Chapter 5, Option 857.

1-2 General Information

Instrumenl

‘lhble l-l. Recommended Test Equipment (1 of 6)

Critical Specifications for

Equipment Substitution

Recommended

Model

Perf.

Test

Adj.

SIGNAL

SOURCES

Synthesized

Sweeper

Frequency: 10 MHz to 22 GHz

Output Power: + 10 dBm maximum (leveled)

Aging Rate: ~1 x 10mg/day

Spurious Signals: 135 dBc (~7 GHz)

125 dBc (<20 GHz)

Amplitude Modulation: dc to 100 kHz

Leveling: Internal, External Power Meter

HP 8340A/B X X

HP 8672A

X X

Synthesized

Signal

Generator

Frequency: 2 - 18 GHz

Stability: ~5 x lo-lo

HP 3335A X X

Frequency

Synthesizer

Frequency: 200 Hz to 80 MHz

Stability: fl x IO-“/day

Amplitude Range: + 13 to -86 dBm with 0.01 dB resolution

Attenuator Accuracy: < f0.07 dB (+ 13 to -47 dBm)

Pulse

Generator

Function

Generator

Pulse Width: 10 nsec to 250 nsec

Rise and Fall Times: ~6 ns

Output Level: +2.5V

Output: Sine Wave and Triangle Wave, BVp-p

Range: 100 Hz to 500 kHz (Sweep Function Available)

(2 required)

HP 8116A

HP 3312A

X

X

X

Frequency

Standard

Output: 1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz

Accuracy: <hl x lo-lo

Aging Rate: < 1 x lo-lo/day

HP 5061B

X X

General Information 1-3

Instrument

ANALYZERS

Spectrum

Analyzer

Active Probe

‘able l-l. Recommended Test Equipment (2 of 6)



Recommenda

Model

Frequency: 100 Hz to 2.5 GHz

2 to 22 GHz Preselected

HP 8566A/B

Perf

Test

X

-

Adj

-

X

Resistive Divider for measuring fast transition signals

HP 10020A X

HP 1122A X Probe Power

SUPPIY

For use with HP 10020A

High Frequency

Active Probe

Bandwidth: 5 Hz to 500 MHz

Input R:lOO k62 Input C: 3 pF

COUNTERS

HP 41800A X

Frequency

Counter

Frequency: 20 MHz to 400 MHz

Sensitivity: -30 dBm

HP-IB Compatible

HP 5343A X

Electronic

Counter

HP 5345A X

UniversaI

Counter bnge: >lO MHz

Xesolution: 2 x 10Wg gate time

Zxt. Time Base: 1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz

+equency: dc to 100 MHz

Time Interval A + B: 100 ns to 200s sensitivity: 50 mV rms

Eange: 30 mV to 5V p-p

HP 5316B

HP 5334AB

X

DSCILLOSCOPE

Digitizing

3scilloscope

1 Channel

“requency: 100 MHz sensitivity: .005V/Division

HP 54501A X

1scilloscope

‘robe

.O: 1 Divider, compatible with oscilloscope

2 reauired 1

HP 10432A X

-

1-4 General Information

Instrument

METERS

Digital

Voltmeter

‘Ihble l-l. Recommended Test Equipment (3 of 6)



Recommended

Model

Perf,

Test

Adj

X X Resolution: fO.l mV

Range: 0 Vdc to 100 Vdc

Input Impedance 100 V Range: 10 M62

HP-IB Compatible

HP 3456A or

HP 3455A

DC High Voltage

Probe

1000: 1 Divider

Impedance: lOM62

Power Meter Range: -20 dBm to + 10 dBm

Accuracy: f0.02dB

HP 34111A

HP436A X

X

X

Power Sensor Frequency: .Ol to 18 GHz

Compatible with HP 436A Power Meter

HP 8481A X

X Power Sensor Frequency: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz

Compatible with HP 436A Power Meter

HP8485A

Digital

Photometer

Photometer

Probe for Tektronix J-16 range: 1 to 100 NITS (cd/m”) acceptance angle: 8” spectral response: CIE Photopic curve

Tektronix J-16

Option 02

Tektronix

56503

Interconnect

Zable for Tektronix J-16 Tektronix

012-0414-02

Photometer

Light Occluder

Por Tektronix J-16 Tektronix

016-0305-00

YITENUATORS

10 dB Step

4ttenuator

3teps: 10 dB from 0 to 120 dB

?requency: 20 MHz to 1500 MHz

2alibrated to uncertainty error of ~t(O.02 dB to.01 dB/lO dB step) at 20 MHz from

1 dB to 120 dB

HP 355D-H89

X

X

X

X

X

General information l-5

Instrument

1 dB Step

Attenuator

3 dB

Attenuator

30 dB

Attenuator

I’ERMINATIONS krmination




Steps: 1 dB from 0 to 12 dB

Frequency: 20 MHz to 1500 MHz

Calibrated to uncertainty error of f(0.02 dB

+O.Ol dB/lO dB step) at 20 MHz from

0 dB to 12 dB

Recommended

Model

HP 355C-H25

Perf,

Test

Adj,

X

Frequency: 200 Hz to 18 GHz

SMA Connectors

HP 8493B,

Option 003

X

Frequency: 200 Hz to 18 GHz

SMA Connectors (2 required)

Impedance: 5OQ; BNC rermination

Fermination

Impedance: 500; SMA (m)

I’ype N Male Connector

Frequency: dc to 18 GHz

[mpedance: 5061

FIIXERS

Jaw-Pass Filter

Jaw-Pass Filter kt-off Frequency: 250 MHz

Rejection at 460 MHz: >60 dB kt-off Frequency: 8 GHz iejection at 14 GHz: >80 dB

Jaw-Pass Filter ht-off Frequency: 1200 MHz

Xejection at 1500 MHz: >50 dB vlISCELLANEOUS

IEVICES

‘recision

‘ower Supply

I-20 volts, O-2 amperes

HP 8493B,

Option 020

HP 11593A

HP 1810-0118

HP 909A,

Option 012

K&L 5L380-

250-B/B

K&L 6L250-

8000-NP/N

HP 360B

HP 6114A

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X l-6 General information

Instrument

AC Line-Power

Source

(Rx- Option 400)

Power

Splitter

‘able l-l. Recommended Test Equipment (5 of 6)



Frequency: 400 Hz

Voltage :lOO, 120, 220, or 240 V,,

Power: >6OOVA

Recommended

Model

California Instruments Model

153T Opt. 400

Perf,

Test

X

Adj.

Frequency: 1 MHz to 22 GHz

Tracking: ~0.2 dB

HP 11667B X

10 MHz to 33 GHz HP 8473D/

HP 8474C

X Planar-doped

Barrier Diode

Detector

Reactive Power

Divider

SPECIAL

DEVICES

Range: 2 to 22 GHz

Isolation: 220 dB

Omni-Spectra

2090-6202-00

Display

Adjustment

PC Board*

Low-Noise

DC Supply

Required for preliminary display adjustment!

(Optional) Refer to Figure 3-108.

Crystal Filter

Bypass Network

CABLES

Refer to Figure 3-109. (4 required)

Low-Loss Microwave

Cable

APC 3.5 (m)

Cable BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (3 required)

IP 85662-60088

HP 8120-4921

Cable SMA (m) to SMA (m)

10503A

5061-1086

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Test Cable* BNC (m) to SMB Snap-On (f) IP 85680-60093

X

General Information 1-7

l-8 General Information

Instrument




Recommended Perf.

Model Test

ADAPTERS

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Adapter

Type N (f) to BNC (m)

SMB snap on (m) (m)

SMB (m) to SMA (f)

SMB (m) bulkhead

Type N (f) to N (f)

Type N (m) to N (m)

Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required,

BNC Tee (m)(f)(f) (2 required)

SMA (f) to SMA (f)

SMA (m) to SMA (m)

BNC (f) to SMA (m)

BNC (f) to SMB (f)

Type N (m) to SMA (f)

BNC to aligator clip

Type N (f) to BNC (m)

APC-3.5 (m) to Type N (m)

Type N (m) to APC-3.5 (f)

APC-3.5 (f) TO N (f) (2 required)

APC-3.5 (f) to APC-3.5 (f)

APC-3.5 (m) to Type N (f)

BNC (f) to dual bannana plug

Type N (f) to SMA (f)

1250-0077

1250-0672

1250-0674

1250-0691

1250-1477

1250-0778

1250-0780

1250-0781

1250-l 158

1250-1159

1250-1200

X

1250-1236

1250-1250

1250-1292

1250-1477

1250-1743

1250-1744

1250-1745

1250-1749

X

1250-1750

1251-2277

HP 86290-60005 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Adj,

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

BOARD

EXTENDERS

See Figure l-l.

?C Board

Xxtractor

PC Board extracting tool t Part of Service Accessories

HP 03950-4001 X

6X2 18 x 2 18 x 2 kern

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

1

3

1

1

2

G

1

2

2

Description

Extender Board: 20 contacts, 2 rows of 10

Extender Board: 12 contacts, 2 rows of 6

Cable: 4-foot long; BNC to SMB snap-on

Adapter: SMB snap-on male to SMB snap-on male

PC Board: Display Adjustment Test

Extender Board: 30 contacts; 2 rows of 15




I HP Fart Number I

8 5 6 8 0 - 6 0 0 2 8

08505-60109

85680-60093

1250-0669

8 5 6 6 2 - 6 0 0 8 8

0 8 5 0 5 - 6 0 0 4 1

0 8 5 0 5 - 6 0 1 0 7

8 5 6 8 0 - 6 0 0 3 4

0 8 5 0 5 - 6 0 0 4 2

Figure l-l. Service Accessories, HP Part Number 08566-60001

General Information l-9

Performance Tksts

Introduction

The procedures in this section test the instrument’s electrical performance using the Specifications in the Installation and

Verification Manual as the performance standards. None of the tests require access to the interior of the instrument. The manual

Performance Tests provided in this section should be performed only if semi-automatic test equipment (for Operation Verification) is not available or the Performance Test is not in the Operation Verification

Program. (Refer to the Installation and Verification Manual for information on Operation Verification.)

2

Verifkation of

Specifications

When a complete verification of specifications is required, proceed as follows:

1. Run the Operation Verification Program.

2. The Operation Verification Program verifies compliance with specifications of all tests it performs. The tests not performed by the Operation Verification Program must be done manually and are as follows: n Sweep Time Accuracy (including Fast Sweep Time Accuracy) n

Noise Sidebands n

Harmonic and Intermodulation Distortion n Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses n Frequency Reference Error n Center Frequency Readout Accuracy

If the results of a performance test are marginally within specification, go to the Adjustments section of this manual and perform the related adjustments procedures. When an adjustment is directly related to a performance test, the adjustment procedure is referenced under RELATED ADJUSTMENT in the performance test.

Performance Tests 2-l

‘Ihble 2-1. Performance Test Cross-Reference

Function or Characteristic Tested Test

No.

Performance Test

Center Frequency Readout

Frequency Spans

3-dB Bandwidths*

Bandwidth Shape*

Bandwidth Amplitudes*

Log Scales

IF Gains

Log and Linear Amplifier Fidelityt

CAL OUTPUT Level

Frequency Response

Sweep Times

4

5

6

1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test

2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test

3 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test

Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test

7 IF Gain Uncertainty Test

8 Scale Fidelity Test

9 Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test

10 Frequency Response Test

11 Sweep Time Accuracy Test

12 Noise Sidebands Test Noise Sidebands

Line-Related Sidebands

Noise Floor

Residual Responses

Harmonic and Intermodulation Distortion

13 Line-Related Sidebands Test

14 Average Noise Level Test

15 Residual Responses Test

16 Harmonic and Intermodulation Distortion Test

Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses 17 Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses Test

Gain Compression

1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude

18 Gain Compression Test

19 1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude Test

SWEEP+ TUNE OUT 20 SWEEP + TUNE OUT Amplitude Test

Fast Sweep Times

Frequency Reference

21 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test (~20 ms)

22 Frequency Reference Error Test

‘For Option 462 instruments, refer to Chapter 4.

tFor Option 857 instruments, refer to Chapter 5.

Calibration Cycle

This instrument requires periodic verification of performance. The instrument should have a complete verification of specifications at least every six months.

2-2 Performance Tests

Equipment Required

Equipment required for the manual performance tests and adjustments is listed in ‘Ikble l-l, Recommended Test Equipment. Any equipment that satisfies the critical specifications given in the list may be substituted for the recommended model.

Performance Test

The Operation Verification Program provides a detailed test record

Record when a printer is used with the controller. If manual performance tests are done, the results of the performance tests may be tabulated on the HP 8566B Performance Test Record at the end of this chapter.

The HP 8566B Performance Test Record lists all of the tested specifications and the acceptable ranges for the measurement values obtained during the tests.

Note

Allow l/2 hour warm up time for the HP 8566B before beginning the

Performance Tests.

Performance Tests 2-3

1. Center

Frequency Readout

Accuracy ‘l&t

Related Adjustments

10 MHz Standard Adjustment

Sweep, DAC, and Main Coil Driver Adjustments

Specifications

For spans <n X 5 MHz, f (2% of frequency span + frequency reference error X center frequency + 10 Hz).

For spans >n X 5 MHz, f (2% of frequency span + n X 100 kHz + frequency reference error X center frequency).

n* Center Frequency

1 100 Hz to 5.8 GHz

2 5.8 GHz to 12.5 GHz

3 12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz

4 >18.6 GHz

* n is the harmonic mixing number, depending on center frequency.

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

FAEOUENCY

STANDARD

Figure 2-l. Center Frequency Test Setup

24 Performance Tests

Description

Equipment

Procedure

1. Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test

A synthesized signal source that is phase-locked to a known frequency standard is used to input a signal to the analyzer. The frequency readout of the analyzer is compared to the actual input frequency for several different frequency settings over the analyzer’s range.

The signal source is phase-locked to a standard known to be as accurate as the analyzer’s internal frequency reference to minimize the “frequency reference error X center frequency” term of the specifications.

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8340A

Frequency Standard . . . . . a 10 MHz standard with accuracy within f 1 part in lOlo such as HP 5061A

Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1250

Adapter, SMA (f) to SMA (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1158

Cable Assembly, SMA Male Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5061-1086

1.

Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.

2.

Press c$???KJ IRECALL) @.

3.

Adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude trace.

4.

Press (2-j.

5.

Set the synthesized sweeper for a 2.000000 GHz signal at a level of approximately 0 dBm.

6.

Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-l.

7.

Set analyzer CCENTER

FREQUENCY

) and (

FREQUENCY

SPAN) and synthesized sweeper frequency according to Table 2-2. At each setting, press CPEAK

SEARCH

], c-1 to center the signal.

Adjust CREFERENCE

LEVEL

) as necessary to place signal peak at a convenient level.

8.

Record the CENTER FREQUENCY readout in the table for each setting. The limits for this frequency are given in the table. Refer to Figure 2-2.



Note

Figure 2-2. Center Frequency Accuracy Measurement

The spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQUENCY readout may fall outside of the specified limits if the internal frequency reference of the analyzer has not been calibrated within the past year. To eliminate the “frequency reference error X center frequency” error, the analyzer’s 10 MHz Frequency Reference Output (on the rear panel) may be substituted for the frequency standard.



‘lhble 2-2. Center Frequency Readout Accuracy

I synthesized (

FREQUENCY SPAN

] I [CENTER

FREQUENCY

]

Sweeper

Frequency I

T

Min

Center Frequency

Readout

1 Actual

2 GHz

2 GHz

2 GHz

2 GHz

9 GHz

9 GHz

9 GHz

9 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

18 GHz

18 GHz

18 GHz

18 GHz

18 GHz

3 GHz

3 GHz

3 GHz

3 GHz

6 GHz

6 GHz

6 GHz

6 GHz

9 GHz

1 MHz

10 MHz

100 MHz

1 GHz

1 MHz

10 MHz

100 MHz

1 GHz

1 MHz

10 MHz

100 MHz

1 GHz

1 MHz

10 MHz

100 MHz

1 GHz

10 GHz

1 MHz

10 MHz

100 MHz

1 GHz

10 GHz

1 MHz

10 MHz

100 MHz

1 GHz

10 GHz

2 GHz

2 GHz

2 GHz

2 GHz

3 GHz

3 GHz

3 GHz

3 GHz

6 GHz

6 GHz

6 GHz

6 GHz

9 GHz

9 GHz

9 GHz

9 GHz

9 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

12 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

15 GHz

1.999 98 GHz

1.999 7 GHz

1.998 GHz

1.98 GHz

2.999 98 GHz

2.999 7 GHz

2.998 GHz

2.98 GHz

5.999 98 GHz

5.999 8 GHz

5.998 GHz

5.98 GHz

8.999 98 GHz

8.999 8 GHz

8.998 GHz

8.98 GHz

8.8 GHz

11.999 98 GHz

11.999 8 GHz

11.998 GHz

11.98 GHz

11.8 GHz

14.999 98 GHz

14.999 8 GHz

14.998 GHz

14.98 GHz

14.8 GHz

17.999 98 GHz

17.999 8 GHz

17.998 GHz

17.98 GHz

17.8 GHz l&IX

2.000 02 GHz

2.000 3 GHz

2.002 GHz

2.02 GHz

3.000 02 GHz

3.000 3 GHz

3.002 GHz

3.02 GHz

6.000 02 GHz

6.000 2 GHz

6.002 GHz

6.02 GHz

9.000 02 GHz

9.000 2 GHz

9.002 GHz

9.02 GHz

9.2 GHz

12.000 02 GHz

12.000 2 GHz

12.002 GHz

12.02 GHz

12.2 GHz

15.000 02 GHz

15.000 2 GHz

15.002 GHz

15.02 GHz

15.2 GHz

18.000 02 GHz

18.000 2 GHz

18.002 GHz

18.02 GHz

18.2 GHz


2. Frequency Span

Accuracy ‘I&t

Related Adjustment


Specification

For spans In X 5 MHz, fl% of indicated frequency separation.

For spans >n X 5 MHz, f 3% of indicated frequency separation.

1 n* 1 Center Frequency

1

1 100 Hz to 5.8 GHz

2 5.8 GHz to 12.5 GHz

3 12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz

4 >18.6 GHz

* n is the harmonic mixing number, depending on center frequency.

Description

Spans less than 100 MHz are checked with a frequency synthesizer by comparing the displayed frequency span of two signals with their known span. Wider spans are tested by tuning a synthesized sweeper from one edge of the analyzer display to the other and measuring the frequency change with a frequency counter.

FAEOUENCY SYNTHESIZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Note


Figure 2-3. Narrow Span Test Setup

Equipment listed is for two test setups, Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4.

Equipment

2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test

Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3335A

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8340A

Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0780

Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1250

Adapter, SMA Female Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1158

Cable Assembly, SMA Male Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5061-1086

Procedure

1. Press (2].

2. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-3.

3. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 40 MHz and an output power level of -10 dBm.

4. Key in the following analyzer settings:

[

CENTER FREQUENCY

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 MHZ

(

FREQUENCY SPAN ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 kHz

5. Set the frequency synthesizer to 39,992,OOO Hz. (See Table 2-3.)

6. Press MARKER (~j and (

PEAK SEARCH

).

7. Press MARKER la] and set the frequency synthesizer to

40,008,OOO Hz. (See ‘Ihble 2-3.) Press MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ].

8. Using the procedure of steps 5, 6, and 7, measure the frequency separation of the indicated signals for each setting in ‘fable 2-3.

The MARKER A frequency should be within the limits given in the table.

‘Ihble 2-3. Narrow Span Accuracy

Spectrum Analyzer Frequency Synthesizer

[ FREQUENCY SPAN) Low w

High m

MARKER A Frequency

Min

20 kHz 39,992,OOO 40,008,OOO 15.84 kHz

Actual Max

16.16 kHz

50 kHz 39,980,OOO 40,020,OOO 39.60 kHz

150 kHz 39,940,OOO 40,060,OOO 118.80 kHz

40.40 kHz

121.20 kHz

200 kHz 39,920,OOO 40,080,OOO 158.4 kHz 161.6 kHz

808.00 kHz 1 MHz 39,600,OOO 40,400,000 792.00 kHz

2 MHz 39,200,OOO 40,800,OOO 1.584 MHz

6 MHz 37,600,OOO 42,400,OOO 4.656 MHz

10 MHz 36,000,OOO 44,000,000 7.76 MHz

50 MHz 20,000,OOO 60,000,OOO 38.80 MHz

1.616 MHz

4.944 MHz

8.240 MHz

41.2 MHz

9. Disconnect the frequency synthesizer from the analyzer input.

Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-4.


2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER

ADAPTER

Figure 2-4. Wide Span Test Setup

10. Press ~NSTR

PRESET

) on HP 8340A Synthesized Sweeper.

11. Set the synthesized sweeper to a 4 GHz CW signal and power level of -10 dBm.

12. Press C-1 on the analyzer.

13. Set spectrum analyzer as follows:

[CENTER

FREQUENCY

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(FREQUENCY SPAN )

4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..50 0

GH~

MHZ

14. Set the synthesized sweeper to 3.8 MHz. (See ‘fable 2-4.) Press

[PEAK SEARCH).

15. Press MARKER [NORMAL-) and [

PEAK SEARCH

).

16. Press MARKER A and set the synthesized sweeper to 4.2 GHz.

(See Table 2-4.) Press CPEAK SEARCH ).

17. The MARKER A frequency should be between 388 MHz and 412

MHz.

18. Set spectrum analyzer ~FREQUENCY

SPAN

) and (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) according to Table 2-4 and measure the frequency span by the procedure of steps 13 through 16. The limits for the difference between the two frequency measurements are given in the table.

'PUT

P

AD

1APTER


2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test

‘able 2-4. Wide Span Accuracy

Spectrum Analyzer Synthesized Sweeper

C

E N T E R

FREQUENCY I [FREQUENCYSPAN) Low

GW

4GHz

High

WW

500 MHz 3.800

4.200

10GHz 500MHz 9.800 10.200

15GHz

20GHz

500MHz 14.800 15.200

500MHz 19.800 20.200

4GHz

10GHz

15GHz

20GHz

1 GHz 3.600

4.400

1 GHz 9.600 10.400

1 GHz 14.600 15.400

1 GHz 19.600 20.400

10GHz

15GHz

18GHz

10GHz

15GHz

5 GHz 8.000 12.000

5 GHz 13.000 17.000

5 GHz 16.000 20.000

10 GHz 6.000 14.000

10GHz 11.000 19.000


Min Actual Max

388MHz

388 MHz

388MHz

388MHz

776MHz

776MHz

776 MHz

776 MHz

3.88 GHz

3.88 GHz

3.88 GHz

7.76 GHz

7.76 GHz

4.12 GHz

4.12 GHz

4.12 GHz

8.24 GHz

8.24 GHz

412 MHz

412 MHz

412 MHz

412 MHz

824MHz

824 MHz

824MHz

824MHz


3. Resolution

Bandwidth

Accuracy ‘Ikst

Related Adjustment

Specification

(For instruments with Option 462, refer to Chapter 4.)

3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments f20%, 10 Hz to 1 kHz and 3 MHz bandwidths f lO%, 3 kHz to 1 MHz bandwidths

30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidth accuracy figures only applicable 190%

Relative Humidity.

Description

The 3 db bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting is measured with the MARKER function to determine bandwidth accuracy. The CAL OUTPUT is used for a stable signal source.

Equipment

Procedure

None required

1.

Press @YZiG].

2.


3.

Key in spectrum analyzer settings as follows:

[CENT ER FREQUENCY ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,100 MHZ

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MHz

;-, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 MHz

( REFERENCE LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 dBm

4.

Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press (SHIFT, m (resolution bandwidth) for units in dBm.

5.

Adjust [ REFERENCE LEVEL ) to position peak of signal trace at (or just below) reference level (top) graticule line. Press SWEEP (SINGLE).

6.

Press MARKER [NORMAL] and place marker at peak of signal trace with DATA knob. Press MARKER [al and position movable marker

3 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive-going edge of the signal trace (the MARKER A amplitude readout should be

-3.00 dB &0.05 dB). It may be necessary to press SWEEP ICONT) and adjust [

CENTER FREQUENCY

) to center trace on screen.

7.

Press MARKER @ and position movable marker 3 dB down from the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the trace (the

MARKER A amplitude readout should be .OO dB f0.05 dB). The 3 dB bandwidth is given by the MARKER A frequency readout. (See

Figure 2-5.) Record this value in ‘Ihble 2-5.


3. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test i

Figure 2-5. Resolution Bandwidth Measurement

8. Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to ‘Ihble 2-5. Press

SWEEP (SINGLE) and measure the 3 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 6 and 7 and record the value in Table 2-5. The measured bandwidth should fall between the limits shown in the table.

‘Ihble 2-5. Bandwidth Accuracy

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

‘RESJ ~FREQUENCY

SPAN

]

5 MHz

2 MHz

500 kHz

200 kHz

50 kHz

20 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

500 Hz

200 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

MARKER A Readout of 3 dB Bandwidth 1

Min Actual

2.400 MHz

900 kHz

270.0 kHz

90.0 kHz

27.00 kHz

9.00 kHz

2.700 kHz

800 Hz

240 Hz

80 Hz

24.0 Hz

8.0 Hz

3.600 MHz

1.100 MHz

330.0 kHz

110.0 kHz

33.00 kHz

11.00 kHz

3.300 kHz

1.200 kHz

360 Hz

120 Hz

36.0 Hz

12.0 Hz


4. Resolution

Bandwidth

Selectivity YLkst

Related Adjustments


Specification

Description

Equipment

Note

3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments

21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments

Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments

60 dB/3 dB bandwidth ratio:

<15:1, 3 MHz to 100 kHz bandwidths

<13:1, 30 kHz to 10 kHz bandwidths

< 11: 1, 3 kHz to 30 Hz bandwidths

60 dB points on 10 Hz bandwidths are separated by ~100 Hz

Bandwidth selectivity is found by measuring the 60 dB bandwidth and dividing this value by the 3 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting from 30 Hz to 3 MHz. The 60 dB points for the 10

Hz bandwidth setting are also measured. The CAL OUTPUT provides a stable signal for the measurements.

None required

Performance Test 3, RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH ACCURACY TEST, must be performed before starting this test.

Procedure

1. Press @7ZiZj.

2. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.

3. Key in analyzer control settings as follows:

&ENTER FREQUENCY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-, ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VIDEO BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SWEEP @Z%j

100 MHz

.20 MHz

. 3 MHz

. . 100 Hz

4. Press MARKER (j-j and position marker at peak of signal trace. Press MARKER (ZJ and position movable marker 60 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive-going edge of the signal trace (the MARKER A amplitude readout should be -60.00 dB f 1.00 dB). It may be necessary to press SWEEP

ICONT) and adjust (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) so that both 60 dB points are displayed. (See Figure 2-6.)

5. Press MARKER In] and position movable marker 60 dB down from the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the signal trace (the

MARKER A amplitude readout should be .OO dB f0.50 dB).

6. Read the 60 dB bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth setting from the MARKER A frequency readout (Figure 2-6) and record the value in Table 2-6.


4. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test

7. Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 2-6. Press

SWEEP [SINGLE) and measure the 60 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 4 through

6. Record the value in ‘lhble 2-6.

8. Record the 3 dB bandwidths from Table 2-5 in Table 2-6.

9. Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing the 60 dB bandwidth by the 3 dB bandwidth. The bandwidth ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in

Table 2-6.

10. The 60 dB bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting should be less than 100 Hz.

Figure 2-6. 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement

Performance Tests 2-l 5

4. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test

‘Ihble 2-6. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

Spectrum Analyzer

L-1 (FREQUENCY

SPAN

] (VIDEOJ

Measured

60 dB

Bandwidth

20 MHz

15 MHz

5 MHz

2 MHz

500 kHz

200 kHz

50 kHz

10 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

500 Hz

100 HZ

100 Hz

300 Hz

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

Measured Bandwidth

3dB

Bandwidth (60 dB BW +

3dBBW)

Maximum

Selectivity Selectivity Ratia

11:l

11:l

11:l

60 dB points separated by cl00 Hz

11:l

15:l

15:l

15:l

15:l

13:l

13:l

11:l


5. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test

5. Resolution

Bandwidth

Switching

Uncertainty TLkst

Related Adjustments


Specification



Down/Up Converter Adjustments

(uncorrected; referenced to 1 MHz bandwidth; 20 to 30” C) f 2 . 0 dB f0.8 dB

I

Resolution Bandwidth

10 Hz

30 Hz f 0 . 5 dB fl.O dB

100 Hz to 1 MHz

3 MHz

Description

The CAL OUTPUT signal is applied to the input of the spectrum analyzer. The deviation in peak amplitude of the signal trace is then measured as each resolution bandwidth filter is switched in.

Equipment

None required

Procedure

1.

Press (j-j.

2 .


3 .

Key in the following control settings:

[ CENTER FREQUENCY~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHZ

(FREQUENCY SPAN ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MHZ

REFERENCE LEVEL ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-8 dBm t&Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz

4 .

Press LOG [

ENTER da/oh/j and key in 1 dB. Press MARKER

[PEAK SEARCH], [al.

5 .

Key in settings according to ‘Ihble 2-6. Press MARKER

[

PEAK SEARCH

] at each setting, then read the amplitude deviation from the MARKER A readout at the upper right of the display. (See

Figure 2-7.) The allowable deviation for each resolution bandwidth setting is shown in the table.

Performance Tests 2.17

5. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test


Figure 2-7. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement able 2-7. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

D e v i a t ] i o n Allowable

(MKR A

Readout, dB)

Deviation

WV

1 MHz 5 MHz 0 (ref) 0 (ref)

3 MHz 5 MHz fl.OO

300 kHz 5 MHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

500 kHz

500 kHz f0.50

f0.50

f0.50

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

50 kHz

50 kHz

10 kHz f0.50

f0.50

300 Hz

100 Hz

1 kHz

1 kHz f0.50

f0.50

f0.50

30 Hz

10 Hz

200 Hz

100 Hz f0.80

f2.00

6. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test

6. Log Scale

Switching

Uncertainty Tkst

Related Adjustment

Specification

Description

Video Processor Adjustments f0.5 dB (uncorrected; 20” to 30°C)

Equipment

Procedure

The log scale is stepped from 1 dB/DIV to 10 dB/DIV and the variation in trace amplitude from the 1 dB/DIV setting at each step is measured.

None required

1. Press @ZZiZj.

2. Key in analyzer settings as follows:

[CENTER

FREQUENCY

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,100

(

FREQUENCY

SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MHZ

100 kHz

REFERENCE LEVEL

]

&TiQ

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-8 dBm

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 kHz

3. Press LOG (

ENTER

dB/DIv) and key in a log scale of 1 dB per division.

4.


5.

Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

] and (MKR +

REF

LVL). Record the marker amplitude (upper right of display) in ‘Iable 2-8.

6. Step up through the log scales with @. At each step, press

MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

], then record the marker amplitude in

Table 2-8. Refer to Figure 2-8.

7. Subtract the marker amplitude at the 1 dB/DIV setting from the marker amplitudes recorded for the 2, 5, and 10 dB/DIV settings to obtain the amplitude deviations. The deviation should be less than f0.5 dB for each log scale.


6. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test rp

REF -8.8 d0m

2 aw

ATTEN 10 aB

MKR 100.001 0 Mr.

-9.02 ah

/

CENTER 100.000 MHz

RES DW 30 kHt

I

, I

VW 100 ktiz

I \ ,

SPAN

100 Is!42

SWP 20.0 InPPC

Figure 2-8. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Measurement

‘Ihble 2-8. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty

SCALE MKR Amplitude I I

PW

Deviation

W)

0 (ref)

Allowable

Deviation

WV

0 (ref) f0.5

f0.5

f0.5


7. IF Gain Uncertainty Test

7. IF Gain


Related Adjustments



Specification

Assuming the internal calibration signal is used to calibrate the reference level at -10 dBm and the input attenuator is fixed at 10 dB, any changes in reference level from the -10 dB setting will contribute to IF gain uncertainty as shown:

Range Uncertainty (uncorrected; 20 to 30°C)

0 dBm to -55.9 dBm Res BW 230 Hz, f0.6 dB; Res BW = 10 Hz, f1.6 dB

-56.0 dBm to -129.9 dBm Res BW 230 Hz, &l.O dB; Res BW = 10 Hz, f2.0 dB

Description

The IF gain steps are tested over the entire range from 0 dBm to

-129.9 dBm using an RF substitution method. The 10 dB, 2 dB, and

0.1 dB steps are compared against a calibrated signal source provided by an HP 3335A Frequency Synthesizer.

FREOUENCY SYNTHESIZER SPECTRUM ANALYZEA

Q

.-.IWCUT

ADAPTER

Figure 2-9. IF Gain Uncertainty Test Setup



Equipment

Procedure

Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

HP 3335A

Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0780

1.

2.

Press (j2).


3.

Press m @. Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of -10.00 dBm f0.02 dB.

4.

Press @YZZQ

10 dB Gain Steps

Note

5. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20.0010

MHz and an output power level of -2.0 dBm. Set the amplitude increment for 10 dB steps.

6. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-9.


(

CENTER

FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[

FREQUENCY SPAN

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20.001 MHz

. . . . . . 2 kHz

8.

Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

], (j-1 or adjust

[

CENTER FREQUENCY

) to center signal trace on display.

9.

Set analyzer as follows:

@iEEGii- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz

(RES=j ..................................................... 1 kHz

LOG [

ENTER

dB/DIvj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 dB

10.

Press MARKER (

PEAK

SEARCHJ Ia].

11.

Press [sHIFTI), CATTEN)’ to permit extended reference level settings.

12.

Set the analyzer (

REFERENCE LEVEL

], (j\/IDEOj, and frequency synthesizer amplitude according to ‘Iable 2-9 settings. (Use the frequency synthesizer QlJ for 10 dB steps.) At eachsetting, note the MKR A amplitude displayed in the upper right corner of the analyzer display (deviation from the 0 dB reference setting) and record it in the table. See Figure 2-10.

After measurement at the ( REFERENCE LEVEL ] = -70 dBm setting, press m), CENTER dB/DIVp as indicated in Table 2-9.



I’ 1 I cENTE* 22.021 04 LHI

PIES mu I Ill41

I I I I I I y

Pm 2.22 L”,

CREFERENCE LEVEL) Frequency @iE?EZBW) Deviation

Pm)

Synthesizer

Amplitude m (Marker A

Amplitude ww WV

0 - 2 100 0 (ref.)

- 1 0

- 2 0

-12

-22

100

100

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

- 6 0

- 7 0

-32

-42

-52

-62

-72

100

100

100

10

10

(rn]

[ ENTER dB/DIv~

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-32

-42

-52

-62

-72

100

100

10

10

10



2 dB Gain Steps

13. Press [2], ~jG?iTLT) (FJ.

14. Set [

REFERENCE LEVEL

] to -1.9 dBm.

15. Press MARKER (OFFS. Set (jVloEoj to 100 Hz.

16. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of -3.9

dBm. Set the amplitude increment for 2 dB steps.

17. Press MARKER CPEAK

SEARCH

), (KJ

18. Set the analyzer REFERENCE

LEVEL

] and the frequency synthesizer amplitude according to Table 2-10. At each setting, note the MKR

A amplitude and record it in the table.

‘Ihble 2-10. IF Gain Uncertainty, 2 dB Steps

( REFERENCE LEVEL )

Pm)

Frequency Deviation

Synthesizer (MARKER A

Amplitude Amplitude

Wm) (W

-1.9

-3.9

0 (ref)

-3.9

-5.9

-5.9

-7.9

-7.9

L -9.9

-9.9

-11.9

0.1 dB Gain Steps

19. Set [ REFERENCE LEVEL ) to 0 dB.

20. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of -2.00

dBm. Set the amplitude increment for 0.1 dB steps.

21. Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

), a.

22. Set the analyzer ( REFERENCE LEVEL] and the frequency synthesizer amplitude according to ‘fable 2-11. At each setting, note the MKR

A amplitude and record it in the table.


-0.6

-0.7

-0.8

-0.9

-1.0

-1.1

-1.2

-1.3

-1.4

0.0

-0.1

-0.2

-0.3

-0.4

-0.5

-1.5

-1.6

-1.7

-1.8

-1.9


‘lhble 2-11. IF Gain Uncertainty, 0.1 dR Steps

(REFERENCE

LEVEL

’

WW

Deviation

(MKR A

AAplitude w9

0 (ref)

-2.70

-2.80

-2.90

-3.00

-3.10

-3.20

-3.30

-3.40

-3.50

-3.60

Frequency

Synthesize1

Amplitude

WW

-2.00

-2.10

-2.20

-2.30

-2.40

-2.50

-2.60

-3.70

-3.80

-3.90



23. Find the largest positive deviation and the largest negative deviation for reference level settings from 0 dBm to -70 dBm in

‘fable 2-9. Also, find the largest positive and negative deviations for the last five settings in the table.

Reference Level Range:

I

A

0 to -70 dBm

B

-80 to -120 dBm

Largest Positive Deviation:

Largest Negative Deviation: dB dB dB dB

24. Find the largest positive and negative deviations in Table 2-10 and

Table 2-11:

C

‘able 10

D

Yhble 11

Largest Positive Deviation:

Largest Negative Deviation: dB dB dB dB

25. The sum of the positive deviations recorded in A, C, and D should not exceed 0.6 dB.

26. The sum of the negative deviations recorded in A, C, and D should not be less than -0.6 dB.

27. The sum of the positive deviations recorded in A, B, C, and D should not exceed 1.0 dB.

28. The sum of the negative deviations recorded in A, B, C, and D should not exceed - 1 .O dB.


8. Amplitude Fidelity Test

8. Amplitude

Fidelity Test


Related Adjustment

Log Amplifier Adjustments

Specification

Log:

Incremental fO.l dB/dB over 0 to 80 dB display

Cumulative

3 MHz to 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth s&l.0 dB over 0 to 80 dB display (20 to 30°C) sf1.5 dB over 0 to 90 dB display Linear:

4~3% of Reference Level for top 9 l/2 divisions of display

Description

Amplitude fidelity in log and linear modes is tested by decreasing the signal level to the spectrum analyzer in 10 dB steps with a calibrated signal source and measuring the displayed amplitude change with the analyzer’s MARKER A function.

FREOUENCY SYNTHESIZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER

TER

Figure 2-11. Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup



Equipment

Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3335A

Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0780

Procedure

Log Fidelity

1. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20.000

MHz and an output power level of + 10 dBm. Set the amplitude increment for 10 dB steps.

2. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-l 1.

3. Press [mj on the analyzer. Key in analyzer settings as follows:

[ CENTER FREQUENCY ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.20 MHz

( FREQUENCY SPAN ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 kHz

( REFERENCE LEVEL ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 10 dBm

4. Press MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ], I-1, [MKR + REF LVL] to center the signal on the display.


FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O Hz km, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Hz

6. Press MARKER Ia]. Step the frequency synthesizer output amplitude from + 10 dBm to -80 dBm in 10 dB steps, noting the MARKER A amplitude (a negative value) at each step and recording it in column 2 of Table 2-12. Allow several sweeps after each step for the video filtered trace to reach its final amplitude.

(See Figure 2-12.)

7. Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for each setting to find the fidelity error.

8. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10 dB to -80 dB. The result should be 51.0 dB dB

9. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10 dB to -90 dB. The result should be 5 1.5 dB dB



‘Ihble 2-12. Log Scale Fidelity

-50

-60

-70

-80

- 1 0

-20

- 3 0

-40

Frequency 1

Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER


(am) Step w9

2 Fidelity Error

A Amplitude (Column 2 - Column 1)

W) c-1

+lO 0 (ref) 0 (ref) 0 (ref)

0 - 1 0

- 2 0

-30

- 4 0

-50

-60

-70

- 8 0

- 9 0 ip R’

10 dB/

EF 9.7 dBm ATTEN 20 d0

WKR A 0.000 w-c

-i0.00 dB

CENTER 20.000 iS0 MHz

AES EW 1 kHz VBW i HZ

SPAN 0 Hz

SWP 300 “em=

Figure 2-12. Amplitude Fidelity Measurement



Linear Fidelity


(VIDEOj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,300 Hz

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz km, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz

11. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of + 10 dBm.

12. Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

),

(MKR’ to center the signal on the display.

13. Set CFREQUENCY

SPAN

] to 0 Hz and (V1DEOj to 1 Hz. Press (SHIFT),

(AUTOP (resolution bandwidth), MARKER [a.

14. Decrease frequency synthesizer output amplitude by 10 dB steps, noting the MARKER A amplitude and recording it in column 2 of

Table 2-13.

‘lhble 2-13. Linear Amplitude Fidelity

0

- 1 0

-10.87 -9.21

-23.10 -17.72


9. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test

9. Calibrator

Amplitude

Accuracy Test

Related Adjustment

CAL OUTPUT Adjustment

Specification

-10 dBm f0.3 dB; 100 MHz

Description

The output level of the calibrator signal is measured with a power meter.

SPECTRUM ANALYZER POWER METER

Equipment

Figure 2-13. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436 A

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP8481 A

Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1477

Procedure


2. Measure output level of the CAL OUTPUT signal. The value should be - 10.0 dBm f0.3 dB.

dBm


10. Frequency

Response ‘Ikst

Related Adjustments

Specifications

Frequency Response Adjustments

(Includes input attenuator flatness in the 10 dB setting and mixing mode gain variations, and assumes PRESELECTOR PEAK in current instrument state.)

Tuned Frequency

100 Hz to 2.5 GHz non-preselected band

I

Flatness (20 to 30°C)

4~0.6 dB

2 to 12.5 GHz preselected bands

12.5 to 18.6 GHz preselected band

18.6 to 20 GHz preselected band

20 to 22 GHz preselected band

Cumulative f1.7 dB f2.2 dB f2.2 dB f3.0 dB

100 Hz to 20 GHz

100 Hz to 22 GHz

Absolute Amplitude Calibration k2.2 dB

4~3.0 dB f0.6 dB

Description

Frequency response is checked across the full range of the spectrum analyzer. In the non-preselected range from 100 Hz to 2.5 GHz, three signal sources are used to make swept measurements: a function generator (100 Hz to 100 kHz), a frequency synthesizer (100 kHz to 60 MHz), and a synthesized sweeper (60 MHz to 2.5 GHz). In the preselected bands from 2 GHz to 22 GHz, a synthesized sweeper is used to check the frequency response. From 100 Hz to 60 MHz, the source flatness permits a direct display of analyzer response. Above

60 MHz, the externally levelled source is first characterized with a power meter. The power sensor Cal Factor % switch is used to compensate for the frequency response of the power meter.


10. Frequency Response Test


FUNCTION

GENERATOR

OUTPUT V,p.p

RF

INPUT

4

ADAPTER

/

Note

Equipment

Figure 2-14. Frequency Response Test Setup (100 Hz to 100 Id&)

Equipment listed is for three test setups, Figure 2-14, Figure 2-16, and

Figure 2-18.

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 8340A/B


Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3312A

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436 A

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..H P 8485A

Adapter, Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1743

Adapter, Type N Male Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0778

Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0780

Adapter, APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) (two required) . . . . . . . . 1250-1749

Power Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11667B

Low-loss Microwave Test Cable (APC 3.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8120-4921



Procedure

100Hzto 1OOkHz

1. Connect CAL OUTPUT to the RF INPUT on the spectrum analyzer.

2. Press C-J, (RECALL) @, MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

], and adjust

AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of -10.00 dBm f0.02 dB.

3. Press (-1 on the spectrum analyzer. Connect function generator to analyzer RF INPUT as shown in Figure 2-14.


@TART FREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kHz

(sTop- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..10 0 kHz

5. Set function generator controls as follows:

RANGE Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 K

FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,

OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL

AMPLITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V

AMPLITUDE VERNIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . midrange

SYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL

TRIGGER PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREE RUN

MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all out

MODULATION RANGE Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MODULATION RANGE Hz VERNIER . . . . . . . . 10 o’clock

MODULATION SYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL

Percent Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..fullycw

6. Adjust function generator FREQUENCY to place generator signal near the center graticule on the analyzer display.

7. Adjust the AMPLITUDE VERNIER on the function generator until the peak of the generator signal is at the reference level line on the analyzer display.

8. Press LOG [

ENTER dB/plv] on the analyzer and key in 1 dB per division.

9. Adjust function generator AMPLITUDE VERNIER to place peak of generator signal 2 dB (2 divisions) down from the reference level.

Do not readjust AMPLITUDE VERNIER during test.

10. Adjust FREQUENCY on the function generator to position the signal trace at the right edge of the analyzer display.,

11. Press TRACE A (MAX]. Press MODULATION SWP on the function generator. When function generator completes one sweep, press TRACE A (VIEW). Trace should appear as in

Figure 2-15.



Figure 2-15.

Frequency Response Measurement (1 kHz to 100 kHz)

12. The closely spaced series of signal peaks on the display defines the analyzer response over this frequency range. The maximum and minimum peak amplitudes should not differ by more than 1.2 dB.

The MARKER A function may be used to measure this amplitude difference.

Deviation 1 kHz to 100 kHz

13. Press [2-22GHT) on the analyzer. Key in the following settings:

[ CENTER FREQUENCY ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

HZ

[

FREQUENCY

SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz

14. Press LOG (

ENTER

dB/DIv) and key in 1 dB.


RANGE Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all out

16. Adjust function generator FREQUENCY to center signal on analyzer display.

17. Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

). The MKR amplitude should be

-2.00 dBm f0.6 dB.



18. Set [CF STEP SIZE ) to 100 Hz. Step analyzer ( CENTER FREQUENCY ) from 100 Hz to 1 kHz with 0J and set function generator

FREQUENCY to center signal on display at each step. Press

MARKER CPEAK SEARCH ) at each frequency. The MKR amplitude should be -2 dBm f0.6 dB.

Deviation 100 Hz to 1 kHz

100 kHzt0 4MHz


SPECTRUM ANALYZER FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER


Figure 2-16.

Frequency Response Test Setup (100 kHz to 60 MHz)

20. Press @7ZX) on the analyzer. Key in the following settings:

[ CEN T ER FREQUENCY )

C ENTER dB/DIV)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MHZ

(

FREQUENCY SPAN

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MHz

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB

21. Set the controls of the frequency synthesizer as follows:

FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MHz

AMPLITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -2 dBm

22. Adjust the output amplitude of the frequency synthesizer to place the signal at the 8th graticule line.

23. Key in the analyzer settings as follows:

(jsTop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MHz

(

START

FREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O Hz

24. Key in the frequency synthesizer settings as follows:

FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,000,100 Hz

SWEEP WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,998,OOO Hz

25. Press TRACE A [

CLEAR

-

WRITE

] and [MAX) on the analyzer.

Note


26. Press START SINGLE 50 SEC SWEEP on the frequency synthesizer. Wait for completion of the sweep.

27. Activate MARKER [NORMAL) on the analyzer. Determine minimum and maximum amplitude points by using DATA knob to position the marker. Record the amplitude and frequency for each of the minimum and maximum points in ‘l%ble 2-14.

Disregard any response 1100 kHz.

L REP, 0.0 darn

1 dB/

ATTLN 10 dB

START II

SWP 20.0 In.*=

Figure 2-17.

Frequency Response Measurement (100 kHz to 4 MHz)

Spectrum

Analyzer

START STOP

FRJ3Q F R E Q

60 MHz 2.5 GHz lfdble 2-14. 100 Flz to 2.5 GHz Frequency Rand

Frequency

Synthesizer

Freq Sweep

Width

Synthesized

Sweeper

Sweep Time

150 s

START STOP

FmQ J=EQ

Trace

Limits

Spec f0.6 dEI

Minimum Maximum

Amp Freq Amp Freq

2,000,lOO Hz 3,998,OOO Hz

30050 kHz 59900 kHz

60MH]Ilb/l 1 1 1 /



4MHzto60MHz

28. Press t-1 on the spectrum analyzer. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

[

CENTER FREQUENCY

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

M H Z

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.4

MHz km, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz

(ENTER dB/DIV_) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dB

29. Set the frequency of the frequency synthesizer to 4 MHz.

30. Adjust the output amplitude of the frequency synthesizer to place the signal at the 8th graticule line.

31. Key in the analyzer settings as follows:

START FREQ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 kHz

Note

32. Key in the frequency synthesizer settings as follows:

FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,050,OOO Hz

SWEEP WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59,900,000 Hz

33. Press TRACE A (

CLEAR

-

WRITE

) and C-1 on the analyzer.

34. Press START SINGLE 50 SEC SWEEP on the frequency synthesizer. Wait for completion of the sweep.

35. Activate MARKER [NORMAL] on the analyzer. Determine minimum and maximum amplitude points by using the DATA knob to position the marker. Record the amplitude and frequency for each of the minimum and maximum points in ‘Iable 2-14.

Disregard any response below 4 MHz.

iTTEN 10 QB

1

2.36 Performance Tests t i

100 *Hz i

AES S W 300 kHz i i i i

VBW 1 M H Z i i i

S T O P 6 0 . 0 NH,

SWP 2 8 . 0 rnew2

Figure 2-18.

Frequency Response Measurement (4 MHz to 60 MHz)

\

ADAPTER

’ Q

PDWER UETER

B

SENSOR


Figure 2-19.

Frequency Response Test Setup (60 MHz to 2.5 GHz, 2 to 22 GEIz)

60 MHz to 2.5 GHz

36. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-19, with one resistive output of the power splitter connected to the power meter/power sensor, and the second resistive output connected to the spectrum analyzer RF INPUT using an APC 3.5 (m) to Type N (m) adapter.

Connect the power meter rear panel RECORDER OUTPUT to the synthesized sweeper front panel LEVELING EXT INPUT.

37. On the power meter, verify that the [

RANGE HOLD

) switch is off.

Consult the power sensor Cal Factor versus Frequency graph or table and set the power meter CAL FACTOR % switch to the 100

MHz calibration setting.

38. Press ~NSTR

PRESET

] on the synthesized sweeper. Set the controls of the synthesized sweeper as follows:

CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz

POWER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -9.0 dBm

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT

39. On the synthesized sweeper, press (

POWER

LEVELS and adjust the

ENTRY knob for a power meter indication of -15.00 dBm fO.10

dB at 100 MHz.

40. On the power meter, press (

RANGE HOLD

) (turning it on).

41. On the synthesized sweeper, press [ POWER LEVEL ) and adjust the

ENTRY knob for a power meter indication of -10.00 ho.03 dB at

100 MHz.

42. On the synthesized sweeper, press (meter_) leveling and adjust the

ENTRY knob (REF in dBV with ATN: 0 dB) for a power meter indication of -10.00 dBm f0.03 dB at 100 MHz.

Note

Do not vary the synthesized sweeper POWER LEVEL setting (internal leveling) or METER REF and METER ATN settings (external power meter leveling) for the remaining steps in this test procedure.



Note lb provide the spectrum analyzer with a 60 MHz to 22 GHz input signal of sufficient flatness for measuring frequency response and absolute amplitude accuracy, the synthesized sweeper must be externally leveled with a power meter, using a relatively slow sweep time (at least 40 seconds).

43. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (2-22J, LSHIFT) TRACE A he spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

VIDEO BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/DIV

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

44. On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ) and adjust the front-panel AMPTD CAL control for a MARKER indication of -10.00 dBm fO.O1 dB.

45. On the synthesized sweeper, key in [ START FREQ] 60 MHz, kz] 2.5 GHz, CsWEEPj 150 s, SWEEP C-1, SWEEP

46. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @TART FREQ) 60 MHz, k-1 2.5 GHz, TRACE B ( CLEAR WRITE ), TRACE B

MAX HOLD .

47. On the synthesized sweeper, press SWEEP (SINGLE_) and wait for a sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off.

As the synthesized sweeper tunes from 60 MHz to 2.5 GHz, the spectrum analyzer frequency response is displayed as TRACE B

(TRACE A displays the current input signal). When the sweep has completed, the display should appear as shown in Figure 2-20.


P O S P K


0.a5 dB

I I I I I

S T A R T 6 0 M H z

R E S BW 3 MHz V B W 3 M H z

S T O P 2 . 5 0 GHz

S W P 6 2 . 3 rnsec

Figure 2-20.

Frequency Response Measurement (60 MHz to 2.5 GHz)

48.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B LVIEW), TRACE A c-1, MARKER (NORMAL_) and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Record the amplitude and frequency for this maximum point in

‘Iable 2-14. The maximum absolute amplitude should be less than

-8.80 dBm.

49.

On the spectrum analyzer, use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Record the amplitude and frequency for this minimum point in

‘Iable 2-14. The minimum absolute amplitude should be greater than - 11.20 dBm.

50.

On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [al and use the DATA knob to position a second marker on the highest point on the

TRACE B waveform. Flatness (total peak-to-peak amplitude deviation) of the displayed trace should be less than 1.20 dB.

2 to 22 GHz

51.

(Preselected Range)

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (2-221, [SHIFT) [PRESEL

PEAK

)

(KS=), ISHIFT) TRACE A C-1 (KSb). Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.0 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9 GHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

VIDEO BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/DIV

52.

Consult the power sensor Cal Factor versus Frequency graph or table and set the power meter CAL FACTOR % switch to the 3

GHz calibration setting.



53. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw) 3.0 GHz, CSTART

FREQ

) 2.0

GHz, @7?FEZT) 3.9 GHz, [

SWEEP TIME

) 150 s, SWEEP [ml,

SWEEP (-1.

54. On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B [

CLEAR

-

WRITE

), TRACE

B (j-1, (SHIFT) (GHz) (KS/).

55. On the synthesized sweeper, key in [ START FREQ), SWEEP [SINGLE] and wait for a sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP

LED to turn off. As the synthesized sweeper tunes from 2.0 GHz to 3.9 GHz, the spectrum analyzer frequency response is displayed as TRACE B (TRACE A displays the current input signal).

56. On the synthesized sweeper, press Icw) and use the ENTRY knob to position the peak of the displayed TRACE A signal at the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform.

57. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (

PRESEL PEAK

) and wait for the

PEAKING! message to clear from the CRT.

58. Repeat steps 55 through 57 until the level of the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform does not change.

59. On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B (VIEW), TRACE A ljj], MARKER (J-1 and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the highest point on the TRACE B waveform. Record the amplitude and frequency for this maximum point in Column

4 of Table 2-15. The maximum absolute amplitude should be less than -7.70 dBm.

60. On the spectrum analyzer, use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform. Record the amplitude and frequency for this minimum point in Column 4 of Table 2-15. The minimum absolute amplitude should be greater than -12.30 dBm.

61. On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [al, and use the DATA knob to position a second marker on the highest point on the


62. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8 GHz

63. Consult the power sensor Cal Factor versus Frequency graph or table and set the power meter CAL FACTOR % switch to the 5

GHz calibration setting.

64. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw] 5.0 GHz, CSTART

FREQ

) 3.9

GHz, CsTop- 5.8 GHz.

65. On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE A [ CLEAR WRITE ), TRACE

B (

CLEAR

-

WRITE

), TRACE B l-1, [SHIFT] IGHz) (KS/).

66. On the synthesized sweeper, key in [

START FREQ

), SWEEP (-1 and wait for a sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP

LED to turn off. As the synthesized sweeper tunes from 3.9 GHz to 5.8 GHz, the input signal is displayed as a TRACE A response, and the spectrum analyzer frequency response is displayed as

TRACE B.



67. On the synthesized sweeper, press [cwl and use the ENTRY knob to position the peak of the displayed TRACE A signal at the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform.

68. On the spectrum analyzer, key in CPRESEL PEAK ) and wait for the

PEAKING! message to clear from the CRT.

69. Repeat steps 66 through 68 until the level of the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform does not change.

70. On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B (VIEW], TRACE A

(XXX], MARKER (ml and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the highest point on the TRACE B waveform. Record the amplitude and frequency for this maximum point in Column

4 of ‘Iable 2-15. The maximum absolute amplitude should be less than -7.70 dBm.

71. On the spectrum analyzer, use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform. Record the amplitude and frequency for this minimum point in Column 4 of Table 2-15. The minimum absolute amplitude should be greater than -12.30 dBm.

72. On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER a], and use the DATA knob to position a second marker on the highest point on the


73. Repeat steps 62 through 72 for the six remaining frequency ranges listed in ‘Ihble 2-15, setting both the power meter CAL FACTOR 96 switch and the synthesized sweeper Icw] frequency for the power sensor Cal Frequency listed in Column 3.

74. For each frequency band tested, calculate the overall flatness by subtracting the maximum amplitude value from the minimum amplitude value recorded in Column 4 of ‘Ihble 2-15. Record the result for each frequency band in Column 5 of ‘Iable 2-15.

Flatness (total peak-to-peak amplitude deviation) for each frequency band should be less than the specified values listed in

Column 5 of Table 2-15.

75. Calculate the cumulative flatness for both the 100 Hz to 20 GHz and the 100 Hz to 22 GHz frequency ranges by subtracting the appropriate maximum amplitude value from the appropriate minimum amplitude value recorded in either ‘Iable 2-14 or Column

4 of Table 2-15. Record the result for both frequency ranges at the bottom of ‘Ihble 2-15.

External Mixer Bands

76. Connect the low-loss microwave test cable to the synthesized

(18.6 GHz to 325 GHz) sweeper RF OUTPUT using an APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) adapter.

Connect the power meter/power sensor to the opposite end of the test cable using an APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) adapter.

77. Press ~NSTR PRESET ) on the synthesized sweeper. Set the controls of the synthesized sweeper as follows:

CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321.4 MHz

POWER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20.0 dBm

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on



LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT


POWER LEVEL

] and adjust the

ENTRY knob for a power meter indication of -20.00 dBm f0.03

dB at 321.4 MHz (with the power meter RANGE HOLD switch off).

79. On the synthesized sweeper, key in [ POWER LEVEL ) (JJ to decrease the output power by 10.0 dB to -30 dBm.

80. Disconnect the jumper cable from between the spectrum analyzer front panel 321.4 MHz IF INPUT and IF OUTPUT connectors.

81. Disconnect the low-loss microwave test cable from the power meter/power sensor, and connect the test cable to the spectrum analyzer front panel 321.4 MHz IF INPUT connector.

82. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @??i%), ISHIFT) @) (KSU),

6 Hz, ISHIFT) [

REFERENCE

LEVEL) (KSZ) 0 dB, setting the K-band conversion loss to 30 dB. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +3 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/DIV

83. On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [????%Q The

MARKER indication should be 0.00 dBm fl.OO dB. Subtract 0.00

dBm from the MARKER amplitude, and record the result.

321.4 MHz IF INPUT Sensitivity dB

84. Disconnect the low-loss microwave test cable from the spectrum analyzer front panel 321.4 MHz IF INPUT connector. Reconnect the jumper cable between the spectrum analyzer front panel

321.4 MHz IF INPUT and IF OUTPUT connectors.

85. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (SHIFT) m (KSU), 6 Hz, (SHIFT)

[ REFERENCE LEVEL) (KSZ) -12 dBm, setting the K-band conversion loss to 18 dBm (default value).


1

Frequent y

Rand


‘Ihble 2-15. Frequency Response (Flatness)

2

Spectrum Analyzer and

Synthesized Sweeper

3

C d

Frequent y

START

FREQ

STOP

FREQ

Power

Sensor

Minimum

4

Trace Limits

Maximum

Amplitude Frequent y Amplitude Frequent y

@Bm) WW

6

Flatness

(W i0 MHz - 2.5 GHz 60 MHz

Spec

2.5 GHz 100 MHz

-11.20

-8.80

1.20

2 - 5.8 GHz 2 GHz

3.9 GHz

Spec

3.9 GHz

5.8 GHz

3 GHz

5 GHz

- 12.30

5 . 8 - 1 2 . 5 GHz 5 . 8 GHz 9.15 GHz

9.15 GHz 12.5 GHz

Spec

7 GHz

11 GHz

- 12.30

12.5 - 18.6 GHz 12.5 GHz 15.55 GHz

15.55 GHz 18.6 GHz spec

14 GHz

17 GHz

-12.80

18.6 - 20 GHz 18.6 GHz

Spec

20 GHz 19 GHz

- 12.80

20 - 22 GHz 20 GHz

Spec umulative Flatness (dB)

100 Hz to 20 GHz

Specification: 4.40 dB

22 GHz 21 GHz

-13.60

100 Hz to 22 GHz


-7.70

-7.70

-7.20

-7.20

-6.40

3.40

3.40

4.40

4.40

6.00


Procedure

11. Sweep Time Accuracy Test


2. Press [mj SWEEP C-1 on the analyzer.

3. Key in the following settings:

[CENTER FREQUENCY_) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(

FREQU

EN

CY SPAN

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

500 MHz

. . . . . OHz

4. Set up the universal counter as follows: a. Set all front panel keys in “out” position.

b. Set POWER switch to ON.

c. Set GATE TIME vernier control to 9 o’clock.

d. Set SEP/COM A switch to COM A position.

e. Depress T.I. A + B switch (making sure the blue shift key is out).

f. Set Channel A trigger level to trigger on negative slope.

g. Set Channel B trigger level to trigger on positive slope.

h. Set both Channel A and Channel B ac/dc switches to dc.

i. Connect the digital voltmeter to Channel A TRIGGER LEVEL

OUT. (Be sure to ground the DVM properly.) j. Adjust Channel A trigger level to set a DVM voltage reading of

0 . 3 v .

k. Repeat steps i and j for Channel B.

5. Set analyzer @WEEP

TIME

] to 20 ms. Reset the universal counter and press SWEEP C-1 on the spectrum analyzer.

6. Note the measured sweep time on the universal counter and record this value in ‘Ihble 2-16. The measured sweep time should be a value between the minimum and maximum values given in

‘Ihble 2-16.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each sweep time setting in Iable 2-16.


11. Sweep Time Accuracy Test

‘Ihble 2-16.

Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times 120 ms

LSWEEP TIME]

Min

Sweep Time

Measured

20 ms 18 ms

30 ms 27 ms

50 ms 45 ms

70 ms 63 ms

90 ms 81 ms

110 ms 99 ms

170 ms 153 ms

200 ms 180 ms

2 s 1.8 s

Max

22 ms

33 ms

55 ms

77 ms

99 ms

121 ms

187 ms

220 ms

2.2 s

8. Press MARKER @Z%iQ

9. Use ($J to place the marker at the second vertical graticule.

10. Press (SHIFT), (GZiX~.

11. Set analyzer [

SWEEP

TIME) to 20 s. Allow the universal counter enough time to settle at this sweep time.

12. Note the measured sweep time on the universal counter and record this value in Table 2-17. The measured sweep time should be a value between the minimum and maximum values given in

‘Iable 17.

13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for 200 s and 240 s sweep times.

‘Ihble 2-17. Sweep Time Accuracy

[

SWEEP

TIME)

Min

MARKER A Time

M e a s u r e d M a x

20 s

200 s

240 s

3.6 s

36 ms

33.6 ms

4.4 s

44 ms

62.4 ms

246 Performance Tests

12. Noise Sidebands Test

12. Noise

Sidebands ‘lkst

Related Adjustments

Specification

100 MHz Voltage-Controlled Crystal Oscillator Adjustments


M/N Loop Adjustments

RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments

YTO Loop Adjustments

20/30 Phase Lock Adjustments

For Frequency Span 125 kHz (except 100 kHz offset) and Center

Frequencies from 100 Hz to 5.8 GHz:

Offset from Carrier Sideband Level

(dBc/Hz)

320 Hz

1 kHz

10 kHz

100 kHz

- 8 0

-85

- 9 0

-105

Description

A 5.7 GHz signal with low phase noise is input to the spectrum analyzer. The signal and noise sidebands are displayed on the analyzer and the trace is video-averaged. The displayed noise sideband level at various frequency offsets is measured and the measured values are corrected for log amplification and detection errors, then normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth. A second HP 8566A/B Spectrum Analyzer is used as the signal source for this test. Therefore, if the measured values are not within specification limits, either analyzer may be at fault.



SPECTRUM ANALYZER

(SOURCE)

CAUE AssElluv

ADAPTER

ADAPTER

L

Equipment

Procedure

Note

Figure 2-22. Noise Sidebands Test Setup

Spectrum Analyzer (1ST LO OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8566A/B

Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1250

Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0077

Cable Assembly, SMA Male Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5061-1086

1. Allow both analyzers to warm up for at least one-half hour with

LINE switch in either the STANDBY or ON position.

2. On one of the analyzers, connect the CAL OUTPUT to the RF

INPUT. Press (2) then LRECALL) @ and adjust FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude. Repeat this frequency calibration on the other analyzer. When completed, press

(21 again on each of the analyzers.

3. Connect 1ST LO OUTPUT of source analyzer to RF INPUT of analyzer under test as shown in Figure 2-22.

Do not connect the frequency reference (on the rear panel) of the analyzers to a common frequency reference.

4. Key in the following on the source analyzer:

(

CENTER

FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(

FREQUENCY SPAN

) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SHIFT MKR + REF LVL (Display diagnostics

[SHIFT] lREsBW_)P (YTO Pretest Mode)

SWEEP (SINGLE]

. . . .

5.7 GHz

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OHz for convenience)

The first line of the diagnostic display and the CENTER readout should both now indicate 5.700 000 000 GHz. This is the 1ST LO

OUTPUT frequency.



Figure 2-23. Noise Sidebands Measurement

5. Key in the following on the analyzer under test:

(CENTER FREQUENCY ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7 GHZ

[

FREQUENCY SPAN

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 kHz

6.

Wait for completion of the sweep (the asterisk * at the upper right of the display will disappear), then press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

),

(j-1, CMKR + REF LVL).

7.

Change [

FREQUENCY SPAN

) to 700 Hz. Wait for completion of the sweep, then press MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ), (j-1. Wait again for the completion of the sweep.

8.

Press [SHIFT) (VIDEoJG to initiate video averaging. When the

VID AVG readout at the left edge of the display reaches 20, press m), TRACE B (mj.

9.

Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

], In] and key in 320 Hz.

Record the MARKER A amplitude: dBc.

See Figure 2-23.

10.

Find the equivalent noise power bandwidth, BWenp, for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth filter by multiplying the 3 dB bandwidth recorded in Table 2-5 of the Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test by 1.13:

BWen, = 1 .

1 3 x H z

= Hz



11. A correction factor of 2.5 dB must be added to the value measured in step 9 to compensate for logarithmic amplification and envelope detection. Add this correction, then subtract 10 log

(BW,,,) to compute the noise sideband level in dBc referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth: dBc + 2.5 dB - 10 log(BW enp) = dBcil Hz

The result should be < -80 dBc/l Hz.

12.

Press (SHIFT) [

SWEEP

TIMES.

13.

Change CFREQUENCY SPAN ) to 2.5 kHz.

14.

Press [SHIFT) (VlDEoJ G. When the VID AVG readout reaches 10, press @iYiF), TRACE B @LXiZ].

15.

Press MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ), Ln] and key in 1 kHz.


16.

Compute the noise sideband level at a 1 kHz offset by the procedure of steps 10 and 11, but find BW,,, for the 30 Hz resolution bandwidth filter: dBc + 2.5 dB -10 log(BW,,,) = dBcil Hz

The result should be c-85 dBc/l Hz.

17.

Press @iF) [ SWEEP m4tE~.

18.

Change ~FREQUENCY

SPAN

) to 25 kHz.

19.

Press (SHIFT) (VIDEO]G. When the VID AVG readout reaches 20 or higher, press cm] TRACE B @FiFJ

20.

Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

], la] and key in 10 kHz.


21.

Compute the noise sideband level at a 10 kHz offset by the procedure of steps 10 and 11, using the 3 dB bandwidth recorded in Table 2-5 for the 300 Hz resolution bandwidth filter: dBc + 2.5 dB - 10 log(BW,,,) = dBc/l Hz

22.

The result should be c-90 dBc/l Hz.

P r e s s (SiYiFj ( S W E E P .

23.

Change [ FREQUENCY SPAN ] to 250 kHz.

24.

Press [SHIFT) I-1G. When the VID AVG readout reaches 30 or greater, press (*I, TRACE B (j-j.

25.

Press MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ) Ia] and key in 100 kHz.


26.

Compute the noise sideband level at a 100 kHz offset by the procedure of steps 10 and 11, using BW,,, for the 3 kHz filter: dBc + 2.5 dB - 10 log (BW,,,) = dBc/l Hz.

The result should be c-105 dBc/I Hz.


13. Line-Related Sidebands Test

13. Line-Related

Sidebands Test

Specification

I

Offset from Carrier Center Frequency Sidebands

I

<360 HZ

1 360 Hz to 2 kHz 1 100 Hz to 100 MHz 1 -75 dBc 1

Option 400: For center frequencies >lOO Hz and ~5.8 GHz:

Offset from Carrier Center Frequency Sidebands 3

Description

The line-related sidebands are measured on signals of 100 MHz, 2.4

GHz, 2.6 GHz, and 5.7 GHz. A second HP 8566AIB Spectrum Analyzer is used as the signal source for this test. Therefore, if measured values are not within specified limits, either analyzer may be at fault.

SPECTRUN A N A L Y Z E R fSOURCEl

SPECTRUN ANALYZER

7

ADAPTER

CAUE AUENDLV

ADAPTER

ADAPTER t

1 I

I i

Figure 2-24. Line Related Sidebands Test Setup



Equipment

Spectrum Analyzer (1ST LO OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8566A/B

AC Power Source (Option 400 ONLY) . . California Instruments Model

153T

Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1250

Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0077

Cable Assembly, SMA Male Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5061-1086

Procedure

1 .

Allow both analyzers to warm up for at least one-half hour with

LINE switch in either the STANDBY or ON position.

2.

Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT on one of the analyzers.

Press C-1 then m @ and adjust FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude. Repeat this frequency calibration on the other analyzer. When complete, press C-22 on each analyzer.

3.

Connect CAL OUTPUT of source analyzer to RF INPUT of analyzer under test as shown in Figure 2-24.

4.

Key in the following on the analyzer under test:

[CENTER

FREQUENCY

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CFREQUENCY

SPAN

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100

MHZ

1.2 kHz

Wait for asterisk (*) in upper-right of display to disappear.

5.

Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

], (jMKR], (

MKR

+

REF

LVL] and wait for asterisk (*) to disappear. Trace should now be centered on display.

6.

Press cm] (mjG, SWEEP m, (iJ @J (J-1 to initiate video averaging of 10 sweeps.

7.

When VID AVG = 10, press [SHIFT), TRACE B (j-1, TRACE A

IVIEW).

8.

Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

) [al and position the marker at the peaks of the line-related sidebands separated from the signal by multiples of the line frequency (e.g., 120, 180, 240, 300, 360, 420,

480, and 540 Hz for a 60 Hz line frequency). The fundamental line frequency cannot be resolved. Refer to Figure 2-25.



Figure 2-25. Line-Related Sidebands Measurement

9.

The MARKER A amplitude for all line-related sidebands ~360

Hz away from the signal should be c-70 dB. The MARKER A amplitude for all line-related sidebands from 360 Hz to 600 Hz away from the signal should be c-75 dB.

Largest Level ~360 Hz dB a t H z

Largest Level 360 to 600 Hz

H Z dB at

10.

Press Cm) ( SWEEP TIMES, SWEEP (CONT), TRACE A

(-).

11.

Connect 1ST LO OUTPUT of source analyzer to RF INPUT of analyzer under test as shown in Figure 2-24.

12.

Key in the following on the source analyzer:

&ENTER FREQUENCY_) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[ FREQU E NCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SHIFT

] [

MKR

+

REF

LVL (Display diagnostics

CSHIFT] [REsjr (YTO Pretest Mode)

SWEEP [SINGLE-

. . . .

for

. . . . .

2.4 GHz

. . . . . . . . . . . . OHz convenience)

The first line of the diagnostic display and the CENTER readout should both now indicate 2.400 000 000 GHz. This is the 1ST LO

OUTPUT frequency.

13.

Key in ( CENTER FREQUENCY ] 2.4 GHz and [ REFERENCE LEVEL ) + 10 dBm on the analyzer under test. Wait for asterisk (*) to disappear.

14.

15.

Repeat steps 5 through 8.

The MARKER A amplitude for all line-related sidebands ~360 Hz away from the signal should be c-60 dB.




16. Press CsHlFTl (

SWEEP

TIMEJ*, SWEEP (CONT), TRACE A f--).

17. Change (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) of both the source and test analyzer to 2.6 GHz. Wait for asterisk (*) to disappear.

18. Press MARKER (OFF), CPRESEL PEAK] and wait for PEAKING!

message to disappear from the CRT.

19. Repeat steps 5 through 8.

20. The MARKER A amplitude for all line-related sidebands ~360 Hz away from the signal should be c-60 dB.


21. Press (SHIFT] (

SWEEP

TIMES, SWEEP (CONT), TRACE A

@ExiGEEj.

22. Change [ CENTER FREQUENCY ] of both the source and test analyzer to 5.7 GHz. Wait for asterisk (*) to disappear.

23. Press MARKER m CPRESEL

PEAK

] and wait for the PEAKING!

message to disappear from the CRT.


25. The MARKER A amplitude for all line-related sidebands ~360 Hz away from the signal should be c-60 dB.


Option 400

1. Set the AC power source output equal to the required line voltage and frequency. The analyzer under test should be operated at 400

Hz and the source analyzer at 50 to 60 Hz.

2. Allow both analyzers to warm up for at least one-half hour with

LINE switch in either STANDBY or ON position.

3. Perform frequency calibration of each analyzer as specified in step

2 of standard instrument procedure.

4. Connect 1ST LO OUTPUT of source analyzer to RF INPUT of analyzer under TEST and key in settings on source analyzer as specified in step 12 of standard instrument procedure.

5. Key in (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 2.4 GHz, [

FREQUENCY SPAN

] 1 MHz on analyzer under test.

6. Press MARKER (

PRESEL

PEAK) and wait for PEAKING! message to disappear from display.

7. Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

], (jj), (

MKR

--)

REF

LVL],

CSIGNAL TRACK).

8. Change [

FREQUENCY SPAN

] to 12 kHz. Wait for signal trace to be centered.

9. Change L-j to 30 Hz.

10. Press ISHIFT), (jjjG, SWEEP Cm], (iJ @ (j-/Iv to initiate video averaging of 10 sweeps.

11. When the VID AVG readout reaches 10, press [SHIFT), TRACE B

C-j, TRACE A (VIEW).



12. Press MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ), [al and position the marker at the peaks of the line-related sidebands separated from the signal by multiples of the line frequency; for example, 400 Hz, 800 Hz, 1200

Hz, . . .

13. The MARKER A amplitude for all line sidebands below 2 kHz should be c-55 dB. The A amplitude for sidebands from 2 kHz to

5.5 kHz should be c-65 dB.

Largest Level <2 kHz dB a t H z

Largest Level <2 kHz to 5.5 kHz

H Z dB at

14. Change (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) of source analyzer to 5.7 GHz and repeat steps 5 through 13 for 5.7 GHz.


14. Average Noise

Level Test

Related Adjustment

Specification

Last Converter Adjustments

Displayed average noise level (0 dB input attenuation, 10 Hz resolution bandwidth):

Non-Preselected c-95 dBm, 100 Hz to 50 kHz c-112 dBm, 50 kHz to 1 MHz c-134 dBm, 1 MHz to 2.5 GHz

Preselected c-132 dBm, 2.0 GHz to 5.8 GHz c-125 dBm, 5.8 GHz to 12.5 GHz c-119 dBm, 12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz c-114 dBm, 18.6 GHz to 22 GHz

Description

Equipment

Procedure

The displayed average noise level is measured in a 10 Hz bandwidth at various frequencies with no signal applied to the analyzer input.

50 Ohm Coaxial Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 909A, Option 012

1. Press C-1.


3. Press LRECALL) @. Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of -10.00 dBm f0.02 dB.

4. Disconnect CAL OUTPUT. Terminate RF INPUT with a 50 ohm coaxial termination.

5. Press @YYZZ]. Key in settings as follows:

START FREQ]

[&Ti?Ei,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..8 0 Hz

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Hz

REFERENCE LEVEL

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -70 dBm

[m, ......................................................

0

VIDEO BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dB

Hz

6 .

Press (SHIFT) (VIDEO) G. Wait about 2 minutes for the VID AVG readout to reach 10 sweeps or more, then press [SHIFT), TRACE B

@iiimJ

7. Press MARKER (NORMAL). Tune to 100 Hz, or the nearest frequency that is not on the slope of the LO feedthrough or on a line-related sideband (e.g., 120 Hz). Refer to Figure 2-26.


14. Average Noise Level Test

Figure 2-26. Average Noise Level Measurement

8.

Read the noise level from the MARKER amplitude readout.

value should be less than -95 dBm.

The dBm

9.

Key in the following settings:

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

51 kHz

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. OHz

20 ms

10.

Wait several seconds for the trace to stabilize (VID AVG >20).

Read the amplitude from the MARKER readout. The value should be less than -112 dBm.

11.

Set (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) according to Table 2-18. At each setting allow several seconds for the trace to stabilize before reading the amplitude from the MARKER readout. The maximum allowable level for each frequency is given in the table.


14. Average Noise Level Test

2.0 MHz

1.001 GHz

2.499 GHz

2.510 GHz

5.799 GHz

5.810 GHz

12.499 GHz

12.510 GHz

18.59 GHz

18.61 GHz

22.0 GHz lttble 2-18. Average Noise Level

(CENTE R FREQUENCY] MARKER Amplitude

WW

Maximum Amplitude

Pm)

-134

-134

-134

-132

-132

-125

-125

-119

-119

-114

-114


15. Residual Responses Test

15. Residual

Responses ‘Ikst

Specification c-100 dBm, 100 Hz to 5.8 GHz c-95 dBm, 5.8 GHz to 12.5 GHz c-85 dBm, 12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz c-80 dBm, 18.6 GHz to 22 GHz

Description

The spectrum analyzer is tested for residual responses across its frequency range with no signal applied and 0 dB input attenuation.

50 Ohm Coaxial Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 909A, Option 012

Equipment

Procedure

Note

1.

Press 1-j.

2.

Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT. Press (RECALL) @J.

3.

Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of -10.00 dBm f0.02 dB.

4. Press (O]. Disconnect CAL OUTPUT and terminate RF

INPUT with a 50 ohm coaxial termination.

5. Key in the following:

REFERENCE LEVEL

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 dBm km, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dB

(VIDEO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz

[sTop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 GHz

6.

Press DISPLAY LINE [ENTER] and key in -100 dBm.

There should be at least 3 dB margin between the noise trace and the display line so that any residual responses may be distinguished from the noise. It may be necessary to reduce the resolution or video bandwidths from the settings given in this procedure to achieve this margin. If this causes the MEAS UNCAL message to appear, it will be necessary to reduce the frequency span and use more sweeps to cover the frequency range.

7. Press TRACE A ( CLEAR WRITE ), SWEEP [SINGLEj. Wait for completion of the sweep. (See Figure 2-27.)




Figure 2-27. Residual Responses Measurement

8. Look for any residual responses at or above the display line. If a residual is suspected, press SWEEP C-j again and see if the response persists. A residual will persist on repeated sweeps, but a noise peak will not. Any residual responses must be below the display line.

Largest Residual Level

H Z dBm at

9. If a response appears to be marginal, perform the following check to determine whether or not it exceeds the specification: a.

Press ISAVE_) 0.

b.

Press MARKER (-1 and place the marker on the peak of the response in question.

C.

Press MARKER ( SIGNAL TRACK) then activate SWEEP ICONT).

d.

Reduce (

FREQUENCY SPAN

) to 1 MHz. Reduce (RESJ until there is at least a ‘7 dB margin between the display line and the average noise level. The amplitude of the response must be less than the display line setting.

e. Press B @ to resume the search for residuals.

10. Key in control settings as follows:

START FREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 GHz

[&FTEj-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5GHz


11. Follow the procedure of steps 7 through 9 to determine if there are any residuals >-lo0 dBm in this frequency range.


H Z dBm at


(jREsj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 kHz

[V’DEOBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 kHz

START FREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.4 GHz km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8 GHz

13. Look for residual responses >-lo0 dBm by using steps 7 through

9.


H Z dBm at

14. Key in settings as follows:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 GHz

‘990 MHz

. . . 1 GHz

. . 1 kHz

15. Set the display line at -95 dBm. Check for residual responses

>-95 dBm by using steps 7 through 9.


Hz dBm at

16. Step [

CENTER FREQUENCY

) to 11.150 GHz with Q) and check for residual responses >-95 dBm at each step by using steps 7 through 9.


H Z dBm at


START FREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.6 GHz

$TFEj-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 GHz

(jiiZZTBW_) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 kHz

18. Check for residual responses >-95 dBm by using steps 7 through

9.


Hz dBm at


( START FREQ ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.4 GHz

(-j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..18.6 GHz

(RES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 kHz

(VlDEo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 kHz



20. Set the display line at -85 dBm.

21. Check for residual responses x-85 dBm by using steps 7 through

9.


H Z dBm at

22. Key in the following:

@TART FREQ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.5 GHz

[sTopI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2 2 GHz

23. Set the display line at -80 dBm.

24. Check for residual responses >-80 dBm by using steps 7 through

9.


H Z dBm at


16. Harmonic and Intermodulation Distortion Test

16. Harmonic and

Intermodulation

Distortion Test

Specification Second Harmonic Distortion

Center Frequency Level at Mixer Harmonic Distortion

50 MHz to 700 MHz

Non-Preselected

S-40 dBm <-80 dBc s-40 dBm <-70 dBc 100 Hz to 2.5 GHz

Non-Preselected

2 to 22 GHz

Preselected s-10 dBm <-100 dBc

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

Third-Order Intercept (TOI): > +5 dBm, 100 Hz to 5 MHz

> +7 dBm, 5 MHz to 5.8 GHz

> +5 dBm, 5.8 GHz to 18.6 GHz

Description

Second harmonic distortion in the non-preselected and preselected bands is checked with a signal source and low-pass filter. The low-pass filter ensures that the harmonics measured are due to the analyzer and not the source. Third-order intermodulation distortion is measured in the non-preselected and preselected bands with two signal sources. To prevent source interaction, the synthesizer outputs are padded and combined in a reactive power divider.



SPECTRUM ANALYZER S Y N T H E S I Z E 0 W E E P E R

ADAPTER

L P F (PI0 WHZl

L P F 11200 M H Z )

-

----_

Note

Equipment

Figure 2-28. Harmonic Distortion Test Setup

Equipment listed is for two test setups, Figure 2-28 and Figure 2-29.

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8340A

Synthesized Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8672A

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436 A

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8485A

Reactive Power Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omni-Spectra 2090-6202-00

20 dB Attenuator (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8493B, Option 020

3 dB Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8493B, Option 003

Low-Pass Filter (250 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K&L 5L380-250-B/B

Low-Pass Filter (8 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K&L 6L250-8000-NP/N

Low-Pass Filter (1200 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 360B

61 cm (24 in.) Cable Assembly, SMA Male Connectors (2 required)

5061-1086

Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-0780

Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1250

Adapter, Type N (f) to SMA (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86290-60005

Adapter, SMA Female Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-l 158

Adapter, SMA Male Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1159

BNC Tee (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-0781

Procedure

‘TER

‘TER



Harmonic Distortion

1.

Set the synthesized sweeper for an output CW frequency of

230.00 MHz and an output level of approximately -30 dBm.

2.

Press C2J on the analyzer. Key in the following settings:

CCENTER

FREQUENCY

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(

FREQUENCY SPAN

]

230 MHz

......................................... 100 kHz

( REFERENCE LEVEL ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 dBm

3.

Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-28, using the 250 MHz low-pass filter. Adjust the synthesized sweeper output level to place peak of signal trace at the top graticule line.

4.

Press DISPLAY LINE (ENTER] and key in - 110 dBm.

5.

Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

], (j-j, CMKR/A-+

STP SIZE

).

6.

Activate ( CENTER FREQUENCY ] and press ch) to tune to the second harmonic of the input signal.

7.

Reduce ( FREQUENCY SPAN ) to 10 kHz and c-1 to 30 Hz.

Reduce (RES] if necessary, for a margin of 15 dB between the displayed noise and the display line.

8.

The second harmonic should be below the display line (c-80 dBc).

Second harmonic level of 230 MHz dBc

9.

Replace the 250 MHz low-pass filter with the 1200 MHz low-pass filter.

10.

Set the synthesized sweeper for an output CW frequency of

800.000 MHz.

11.

Press (21 on the analyzer. Key in:

[

CENTER FREQUENCY

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

800 MHz

[

FREQUENCY

SPAN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,100 kHz

[

REFERENCE LEVEL

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 dBm

12.

Adjust synthesized sweeper output level to place peak of signal trace at the reference level line.

Note

If unable to locate a harmonic distortion product, increase the output level by 10 dB. Be sure to return the output level to the original setting before making a measurement.

13. Press DISPLAY LINE fjjj and key in -100 dBm.

14. Press MARKER CPEAK

SEARCH

), (MKR), [MKR/A+

STP

SIZE],

[ CENTER FREQUENCY ) m, @EQUENCY SPAN ) 10 kHz.

15. The second harmonic of the input signal should be below the display line (c-70 dBc).


16. Replace the 1200 MHz low-pass filter with the 8 GHz low-pass filter.

17. Set the synthesized sweeper for an output frequency of 7200.000

MHz and an output level of 0 dBm.



18. Press @ZZi%J on the analyzer. Key in the following:

&ENTER

FREQUENCY _) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CFREQUENCY SPAN)

7.2 GHz

......................................... 100 kHz

19.

Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

), (GiCCXF].

20.

Set ( FREQUENCY SPAN) to 10 kHz. Press MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ),

MKR/A+ STP SIZE .

21. Adjust synthesized sweeper output level to place peak of signal trace at the reference level line.

22.

Press DISPLAY LINE CENTER] and key in -80 dBm.

23.

Activate (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) and press @) to tune to the second harmonic of the input signal.

24.

Key in the following:

(

REFERENCE LEVEL

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 dBm

[

FREQUENCY SPAN ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 kHz

25. The second harmonic should be below the display line (<- 100 dBc).


Intermodulation

2 6 .

Distortion

Set both synthesized sources as follows:

RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 10 dBm

METER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEVEL

RF OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

ALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

FM DEVIATION MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

27. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-29 with “output” of power divider connected to power sensor. The FREQ

REFERENCE switch on the rear panel of the analyzer should be set to INT and the FREQ REFERENCE switch on both synthesized source rear panels should be set to EXT.

28. Set one synthesized source for an output frequency of 2099.500

MHz, the other to 2100.500 MHz.

29. Set one synthesized source RF OUTPUT switch to ON and adjust the output power level for a power meter indication of -25.00

dBm f0.20 dB. Return the RF OUTPUT switch to the OFF setting.


Note


30. Set the other synthesized source RF OUTPUT switch to ON and adjust the output power level for a power meter indication of

-25.00 dBm f0.20 dB. Set both synthesized source RF OUTPUT switches to the ON position (power meter reading should be approximately -22 dBm).

31. Connect output of power divider to analyzer RF INPUT as shown in Figure 2-29.

Be careful to flex the cable assemblies as little as possible, as flexing can cause a change in the measured power level. To minimize flexing, place the power sensor close to the analyzer input.

32. Press @7GZiZJ on the spectrum analyzer.


JUT l-4

%

POWER NETER

FllEO

RVElEYCE

I

‘I

POWER

SENSOR

ADAPTER

3 DB

ATTENUATOR

POWER

D I V I D E R

SIBNAL BENERATOR

Figure 2-29. Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup


[

CENTER FREQUENCY

] t&E@

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2099.5 MHZ

[CF STEP SIZEj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MHz

2 kHz dB

34. Wait for completion of the sweep (asterisk should not appear on display), then press MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ), (MKR). Wait for completion of the sweep.

35. Press MARKER a]. Activate [

CENTER FREQUENCY

] and press @J once to tune to the third order product at 2098.5 MHz.



36. Wait for completion of the sweep, then press MARKER

(PEAK SEARCH].

Record the MKR A amplitude: dB.

37. Press @J three times to tune to the third order product at 2101.5

MHz. Wait for completion of the sweep, then press MARKER

SPEAK SEARCH].


38. Choose the smallest MKR A amplitude in steps 36 and 37.

Record its absolute value: dB.

(For example, if one MKR A amplitude is -82 dB and the other is -79 dB, record +79 dB.) This value is S, the third order suppression.

39. Compute the third order intercept (TOI) as follows:

TO1 = P + S/2, where P = input signal power, and S = third order suppression from step 38.

TO1 = -25 dBm +

= dBm dBl2

40. The result should be > + 7 dBm. Refer to Figure 2-30.

TO1 for signals of 2099.5 MHz and 2100.5 MHz dBm



. - - --

2f1-1,

‘I

FREQUENCY

--f 2

---r

212-f,

Figure 2-30. Third Order Intermodulation Products

41. Set one synthesizer to 3999.500 MHz, the other to 4000.500 MHz.

42. Connect the output of the power divider to the power sensor as shown in Figure 2-29.

43. Set RF OUTPUT switch on both synthesizers to the OFF position.

Set output levels of synthesizers according to the procedure of steps 29 and 30.

44. Connect the output of the power divider to the analyzer input as shown in Figure 2-29.


CCENTER

FREQUENCY

] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3999.5 MHZ

(

FREQUENCY SPAN

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l MHZ

[

REFERENCE LEVEL

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 dBm

46. Press MARKER (OFF), (

PEAK SEARCH

] and wait for PEAKING!

message to disappear from display.

47. Set (

FREQUENCY SPAN

) to 2 kHz and wait for completion of the sweep.

48. Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

], [MKR -+

REF

LVL). Wait for completion of the sweep.



49. Press MARKER @. Activate [ CENTER FREQUENCY ) and press (JJ once to tune to the third order product at 3998.5 MHz. Wait for completion of the sweep.

50. Press MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH )

Record the MKR A amplitude: dB

51. Press @) three times to tune to the third order product at 4001.5

MHz. Wait for completion of the sweep, then press MARKER

( PEAK SEARCH].


52. Choose the smallest MKR A amplitude in steps 50 and 51.

Record its absolute value: S = dB.

53. Compute the TOI:

TO1 = P + S/2

= -25 dBm +

= dBm dB/2

54. The result should be > + 7 dBm.

TO1 for signals of 3999.5 MHz and 4000.5 MHz dBm

55. Repeat steps 41 through 53 for the input signal frequencies and the third order products shown in ‘Ikble 2-19. The TO1 for each setting should be > + 5 dBm.

‘Ihble 2-19. TO1 Measurement Settings

Input Signal Frequencies Third Order Products Third Order Suppression TOI

PW ww 0-w Pm)

8999.500

9000.500

8998.500

9001.500

13999.500 14000.499

13998.501 14001.498


17. Image, Multiple, and Out of Rand Responses Test

17. Image,

Multiple, and Out of Band Responses

Tkst

Description

Image and out-of-band responses are checked by setting the analyzer center frequency to several frequencies across the analyzer range and tuning a leveled signal source to the frequencies determined by the tuning equation, Fsiz = nFLof FIF. Input signals at these frequencies will excite all possible image and out-of-band responses for a given

1st LO frequency and all positive integer values of n. In this test, only values of n corresponding to the analyzer mixing modes are used. Multiple responses are checked by applying an input signal and measuring the response at those center frequencies for which a harmonic of the 1st LO mixes with the input signal.


BNC

‘TEE

Q

ADAPTER lPo1

ADAPl ‘ER

MA CMLE ACNIIBLV

Equipment

Figure 2-31. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Rand Responses Test Setup

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8340A

61 cm (24 in.) Cable Assembly, SMA Male Connectors .... 5061-1086

Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1250

Adapter, SMA Female Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1158

BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781



Procedure

1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-31 with the synthesized sweeper RF OUTPUT connected to the analyzer input.

2. Press INSTR PRESET on the synthesized sweeper. Key in the following sweeper settings:

CW FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000.000 MHz

POWER LEVEL .......................................... 0.0 dBm

3. Press (2) on the analyzer. Key in the following analyzer settings:

[CENTER FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[

FREQUENCY

SPAN)

3 GHz

......................................... 100 kHz

4. Press DISPLAY LINE (ENTER) and key in -70 dBm.

5. Press MARKER [PRESEL

PEAK

) and wait for PEAKING! message to disappear from the display. Press MARKER (j).

6. Adjust the power level of the synthesized sweeper to place the peak of the signal trace at the top CRT graticule line.

Note

If the maximum output power level of the synthesized sweeper is not enough to place the signal peak at the top CRT graticule line, then adjust the spectrum analyzer REFERENCE LEVEL as.required to place the signal peak at the top CRT graticule line.

7. Press MARKER Ia]. Using the DATA knob, determine the amplitude of the spurious response and enter the result in

‘Ihble 2-20.

8. Set the synthesized sweeper to the frequencies in ‘Pable 2-20 corresponding to an analyzer center frequency of 3 GHz. The maximum allowable amplitude of the spurious response at the analyzer center frequency for each setting is shown in the table.


17. Image, Multiple, and Out of Band Responses Test

1

9

7

5

12

9

6

3

WW

‘I&ble Z-20. Image and Out-of-Rand Response

Spectrum Analyze] r I

[ CENTER FREQUENCY]

I


Frequency

(MW r

1

Displayed Spurious

Measured it.1 ide

’ Maximum

WC) WC)

3642.800

6321.400

--

--

- 7 0

- 6 0

6964.200

-60

2517.900

-60

3160.700

-60

5357.200

- 7 0

4017.900

4660.700

--

--

- 6 0

- 6 0

8357.200

- 7 0

1 12696.500

I 13339.300

5517.900

--

--

--

- 6 0

-60

-60

6160.700

-60

1 -1357.200

-70

1 .7196.500

-- 6 0

7839.300

1 - 6 0

4571.500

-60

5214.300

-60

9464.300

-60

1 0107.100

-60

1 4357.200

- 7 0

5238.100

- 6 0

5880.900

- 6 0

1 0797.700

-60

1 1440.500

-60

1 6357.200

- 7 0

4348.300

- 6 0

4991.100

- 6 0

9017.900

- 6 0

9660.700

-60

1 3687.600

- 6 0

1 4330.400

-60

1 8357.200

-60

4848.300

-60

5491.100

-60

10017.900

-60

1 10660.700

- 6 0

1 15187.600

- 6 0

1 15830.400

-60

-

; ZO357.200

L

- 5 0



I

I

9. Repeat steps 4 through 9 for all remaining (

CENTER FREQUENCY

] and synthesized sweeper settings in Table 2-20. Steps 4 through 8 need only be done once for each (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) setting.

10. Set the synthesized sweeper for an output CW frequency of

5700.000 MHz.


(CENTER FREQUENCY ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

( REFERENCE LEVEL ]

5.7 GHZ

........................................ 0.0 dBm

12. Press MARKER CPRESEL

PEAK

) and wait for PEAKING! message to disappear from display. Press MARKER (jj].

13. Change FREQUENCY

SPAN

] to 5 kHz. Adjust the synthesized sweeper output power level to place peak of signal trace at the top CRT graticule line.

14. Press MARKER a]. Using the DATA knob, determine the amplitude of the spurious response and enter the result in

Iable 2-21.

15. Change ( CENTER FREQUENCY ) to 2.36790 GHz. The multiple response at the center frequency should be below the m),

SWEEP (CONT)’ display line (s-70 dBc).

Multiple response at 2.36790 GHz

16. Press ISHIFT), (MKR/A+

STP

SIZE)Q.

dBc

17. Set the synthesized sweeper output CW frequency and analyzer

( CENTER FREQUENCY ) according to Table 2-21. Before checking the amplitude of the multiples for a given signal frequency, set the input signal amplitude by the procedure of steps 11 through 14.

5700.000

6000.000

12000.000

13000.000

15000.000

‘Ibble 2-2 1. Multiple Responses

I

I

2.68930

1.18930

8.107133

8.535667

Displayed S purious

Amplit tde

Measured Maximum ww WV

- 7 0

-50

- 7 0

- 7 0

1.06790

1.9107

0.53395

10.107133

10.535667

-45

-45

-45

- 6 0

- 6 0


18. Gain Compression Test

18. Gain

Compression Wst

Specification cl.0 dB, 100 Hz to 22 GHz with s-5 dBm at the input mixer

Description

Gain compression is measured by changing the power level at the spectrum analyzer input mixer from -15 dBm to -5 dBm (2 to 22

GHz). The displayed signal level will change by less than 10 dB, indicating gain compression of the input mixer. Since a 10 dB change in IF gain is used to keep the signal trace near the same point on the display when the input power is increased, the error due to this

IF gain change is first measured, then subtracted from the displayed deviation to give the deviation due to gain compression only.

SPECTAUW ANALYZER

YER

Equipment

Figure 2-32. Gain Compression Test Setup

Synthesized Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8340A

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436 A

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP8485 A

Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1250

Adapter, Type N Female Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0777

Adapter, SMA (f) to SMA (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1158

Adapter, BNC Tee (m)(f)(f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Low Loss Microwave Test Cable (APC 3.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921

Procedure

1. Press (21, lsHlFTl lATTENj, CsHiFTl $oj 0 dBm on the spectrum analyzer. Set FREQ REFERENCE switch on rear panel of analyzer to INT and set FREQ STANDARD switch on rear panel of synthesizer to EXT.

2. Set synthesizer frequency to 2000.000 MHz. Set other synthesizer controls as follows:

ALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT

AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

RF OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON



Note

OUTPUT LEVEL RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 dBm

Care should be taken to disturb the cable assembly as little as possible, since flexing may cause a change in the measured power level. The power sensor should be placed near the spectrum analyzer input to minimize flexing when the cable is moved.

3.

Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-32, with output of synthesizer connected to power sensor. Power is measured at the end of the cable assembly, not at the synthesizer output connector. Adjust synthesizer output level for a power meter indication of -25.00 dBm f0.05 dB.

4.

Disconnect cable assembly from power sensor and connect free end to spectrum analyzer RF INPUT as indicated in Figure 2-32.

Key in analyzer settings as follows:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

2 GHz

. . . OHz

.OdB

-15 dBm

. . . 30 Hz

. . . 3 MHz

5.

Press the SCALE LIN pushbutton, then press (SHIFT) IREs]

(AUTOY to obtain amplitude readouts in dBm. Turn the AMPTD

CAL control fully clockwise.

6.

Press MARKER (NORMAL) @.

7.

Connect cable to power sensor and adjust synthesizer output level for a power meter reading of -15.00 dBm f0.02 dB.

8.

Reconnect cable to the spectrum analyzer RF INPUT.

9.

Change spectrum analyzer [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) to -5 dBm.

Record the MKR A amplitude: dB. This is the IF gain error in changing the reference level from -15 dBm to -5 dBm with 0 dB input attenuation.

10.

Set [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) to -15 dBm. Adjust AMPTD CAL to place the signal trace approximately 1 division down from the reference level line.

11.

Press MARKER w, a.

12.

Connect cable to power sensor and adjust synthesizer output level for a power meter indication of -5 dBm f0.02 dB. Reconnect cable to spectrum analyzer input.

13.

Change [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) to -5 dBm.


14.

Subtract the value obtained in step 9 from the value recorded in step 13 to find the gain compression: dB. The result should be >-1.0 dB (less than 1 dB compression).

15.

Press Cm) on the spectrum analyzer. Press (SHIFT) 1-J)

[SHIFT) v[o) 0 dBm.



16. Set synthesizer to 3000.000 MHz. Connect cable to power sensor and adjust output level of synthesizer for an indication of -15.00

f0.05 dB on the power meter. Reconnect cable to the spectrum analyzer input.


[

C

ENTER

FREQUENCY

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREQUENCY SPAN)

3 GHZ

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MHz

& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OdB

18. Press MARKER (

PRESEL PEAK

) and wait for PEAKING! message to disappear from the display.

19. Press SCALE LIN pushbutton, then press [SHIFT) (RES) (AUTOP.

Key in:

(

REFERENCE LEVEL

]

FREQUENCY SPAN]

17,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -15 dBm

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

......................................................................................................

.O Hz

30 Hz

RES BW . MHz

20. Press MARKER INORMAL_), Ia].

21. Connect the cable to the power sensor and adjust synthesizer level for a power meter indication of -5.00 dBm f0.02 dB.

Reconnect cable to spectrum analyzer input.

22. Change [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) to -5 dBm. Record the MKR

Aamplitude: dB.

23. Subtract the value recorded in step 9 from the value obtained in step 22 to find the gain compression: dB. The result should be >-1.0 dB (less than 1 dB compression).

24. Press @FZiYYJ on the spectrum analyzer. Press CsHlFTl [ATTENY,

(SHIFT) ~1~~ 0 dBm.

25. Set synthesizer to 9000.000 MHz. Connect cable from synthesizer to power sensor and adjust synthesizer output level for a power meter reading of -15.00 ho.02 dB. Reconnect cable to spectrum analyzer input.


&ENTER FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 GHz

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MHz

;EEi-) ....................................................... 0 dB

27. Press MARKER [PRESEL

PEAK

) and wait for the PEAKING! message to disappear from the display.

28. Press the SCALE LIN pushbutton, then press (SHIFT) [BW]

(AUTO). Key in the following:

PREFERENCE

LEVEL

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -15 dBm

FREQUENCY SPAN]

17,.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .o Hz

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz

RES BW .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. MHz

29. Press MARKER [NORMAL), [a.

Performance Tests 2.79


30. Connect cable to power sensor and adjust output level of synthesizer for a power meter indication of -5.00 ho.02 dB.

Reconnect cable to spectrum analyzer input.

31. Change [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) to -5 dBm.


32. Subtract the value recorded in step 9 from the value obtained in step 31 to find the gain compression: dB. The result should be >- 1.0 dB (less than 1 dB compression).

33. Disconnect cable from the spectrum analyzer RF INPUT. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.

34. Press c-1 @, MARKER (P

EAK SEARCH

). Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of -10.00 dBm f0.02 dB.


19. 1st LO Output Amplitude Test

19. 1st LO output

Amplitude Test

Specification

> + 5 dBm from 2.3 GHz to 6.1 GHz

Description

The power level at the 1ST LO OUTPUT connector is measured as the first LO is swept over its 2.3 GHz to 6.1 GHz range.

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

B

SENSOR

Equipment

Figure 2-33. 1st LO Output Amplitude Test Setup

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436A

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP8485A

Procedure

1. Press (2’. Key in a (sTop) of 5.8 GHz.

2. Set [

SWEEP

TIME) to 100 seconds.

3. Calibrate power meter and sensor. Connect equipment as shown in

Figure 2-33.

4. Observe the meter indication as the analyzer sweeps from 2.0 to

5.8 GHz. The indication should be > + 5 dBm across the full sweep range.

dBm


20. Sweep + Tune

Out Accuracy List

Specification

-1 V/GHz X Center Frequency (GHz) f(2% + 10 mV)

Description

The spectrum analyzer is set to zero frequency span and the SWEEP

+ TUNE OUT auxiliary output is measured with a voltmeter as the analyzer is tuned across its frequency range.

SPECTRUM ANALYZER DIGITAL VOLTMETER

Equipment

Figure 2-34. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy Test Setup

Digital Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3456A

Procedure

1. Press @7ZK) on the analyzer. Set (

FREQUENCY SPAN

) to 0 Hz

2. Connect digital voltmeter to the SWEEP + TUNE OUT auxiliary output on the rear panel of the analyzer as indicated in

Figure 2-34.

3. Set (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) according to Table 2-22 and record the voltmeter readings in the table. The allowable range for each measurement is shown in the table.


20. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy Test

‘able 2-22. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy

CENTER

FREQUENCY

0 Hz

Voltmeter Reading

(Volts)

Min 1 Actual

-0.010

I Max

+ 0.010

1 MHz -0.011

+ 0.009

1 2 MHz -0.022

130 MHz -0.143

670 MHz -0.693

1.3 GHz - 1.336

5.7 GHz -5.824

-0.002

-0.117

-0.647

-1.264

-5.576

-12.240

12.5 GHz -12.760

18.6 GHz -18.982

22 GHz -22.450

-18.218

-21.550


21. Fast Sweep

Time Accuracy

YLkst (<20 ms)

Related Adjustment

None

Specification flO% for sweep times 1100 seconds

Description

The triangular wave output of a function generator is used to modulate a 500 MHz signal which is applied to the spectrum analyzer

RF INPUT. The signal is demodulated in the zero span mode to display the triangular waveform. Sweep time accuracy for sweep times

~20 ms is tested by checking the spacing of the signal peaks on the displayed waveform.

SPECTRUM ANALVZER

SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER

Equipment

Procedure

Figure 2-35. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy (~20 ms) Test Setup

Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3312A

Universal Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP5316 A

Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8340A


2. Press @ZZQ on spectrum analyzer.


( CENTER FREQUENCY ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 MHZ

[FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..10 0 kHz

4. Set synthesized sweeper for an output frequency of 500 MHz and an output power level of -10 dBm.


21. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test (~20 ms)

5. Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

), (MKR], loFF).

6. Set [ FREQUENCY SPAN ] to 0 Hz, (RES] to 3 MHz, [VlDEoj to 3

MHz, and press TRIGGER [VIDEO).

7. Set synthesized sweeper for an amplitude-modulated output.


FUNCTION . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . triangular wave

AMPLITUDE . . . .

. . . . . .

. .

. . . . . .

approximately 1 Vp-p

OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. .

. . . . . .

. . . . . CAL position (in)

SYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

.

. . . . .

. . . . . CAL position (in)

TRIGGER PHASE .

. . . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . FREE RUN

MODULATION . . . .

.

. . . .

.

. . . . .

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all out

9. Key in (

SWEEP TIME

] 5 ms and set function generator for a reading of 2.00 f0.02 kHz.

10. Adjust spectrum analyzer TRIGGER LEVEL to place a peak of the triangular waveform on the first graticule from the left edge of the CRT display as a reference. (Adjust function generator amplitude, if necessary, to provide a signal large enough to produce a stable display.) The fifth peak from the reference should be within ~tO.5 division of the sixth graticule from the left edge of the display. (See Figure 2-36.)

11. Using sweep times and function generator frequencies in

Table 2-23, check sweep time accuracy for sweep times ~20 ms by the procedure of step 10.

Figure 2-36. Fast Sweep Time Measurement (~20 ms)


21. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test (~20 ms)

‘Jhble 2-23. Fhst Sweep Time Accuracy (~20 ms)

SWEEP TIME

] Function Generator Frequency Sweep Time Error wa

(divisions)

5 ms 2.00 f0.02

2 ms

1 ms

200 ps

100 ps

5.00 f0.05

10.0 zto. 1

50.0 f0.5

100 fl


22. Frequency Reference Error Test

22. Frequency

Reference Error

Test

Related Adjustment


Specification

Aging Rate: <l X 10mg/day and ~2.5 X 10s7 year; attained after 30 days warm-up from cold start at 25’C.

Temperature Stability: <7 X 1O-gOo to 55°C

Frequency is within 1 X lo-” of final stabilized frequency within 30 minutes.

Description

The frequency of the spectrum analyzer time base oscillator is measured directly using a frequency counter locked to a frequency reference which has an aging rate less than one-tenth that of the time base specification. After a 30-day warm-up period, a frequency measurement is made. The analyzer is left undisturbed for a 24-hour period and a second reading is taken. The frequency change over this

24-hour period must be less than one part in log.

Note

This test requires that the spectrum analyzer be turned on (not in

STANDBY) for a period of 30 days to ensure that the frequency reference attains its specified aging rate. However, after the aging rate is attained, the frequency reference typically attains its aging rate again in 72 hours of operation after being off for a period not exceeding 24 hours.

Because the frequency reference is sensitive to shock and vibration, care must be taken not to disturb the spectrum analyzer during the 24 hour period in which the frequency measurement is made.

The frequency reference should remain within its attained aging rate if: the instrument is left on; the instrument orientation with respect to the earth’s magnetic field is maintained; and the instrument does not sustain any mechanical shock. Frequency changes due to orientation with respect to the earth’s magnetic field and altitude changes will usually be nullified when the instrument is returned to its original position. Frequency changes due to mechanical shock will usually appear as a fixed frequency error.

The frequency reference is also sensitive to temperature changes; for this reason, the ambient temperature near the instrument at the first measurement time and the ambient temperature at the second measurement time should not differ by more than 1°C. Placing the spectrum analyzer in STANDBY turns the instrument off while continuing to provide power for the frequency reference oven, which minimizes warm up time. However, the spectrum analyzer must be ON to allow the frequency reference to attain its specified aging rate.


22. Frequency Reference Error Test


ElECTRONiC COUNTER

FREQUENCY

STANDARD

Equipment

Figure 2-37. Frequency Reference Test Setup

Electronic Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5345A

1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz Frequency Reference with again rate <l X lo-lo/day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5061A

BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Procedure

1. Allow analyzer to warm up at 25’C ambient temperature for a period of 30 days.

2. Set controls of electronic counter as follows:

FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREQ A

DISPLAY POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO

GATE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 S

CHANNEL A Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

CHANNEL A ATTEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xl

CHANNEL A Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC

CHANNEL A LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . midrange


4. Record the frequency of the analyzer time base as measured by the counter:

Frequency: 10. M

Date:

Ambient Temperature:

H

Time: z

5. Allow the analyzer to remain undisturbed for 24 hours, then note the time base frequency again:

Frequency: 10. M

Date:

Ambient Temperature:

H

Time: z

Note

If the ambient temperatures recorded in steps 4 and 5 differ by more than l°C, the frequency measurements may be invalid.

6. The difference in frequency between the two measurements should be <l part in log (co.01 Hz at 10 MHz).

H Z


Table 2-24.

Performance Tkst

Record

Hewlett-Packard Company

Model HP 8566B

Serial No.

IF-Display Section

RF Section

Tested by

Report No.

Date


1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

GHz

GHz

GHz

GHz

GHz

15 GHz

15GHz

15GHz

1 5 GHz

1 5 GHz

18GHz

18GHz

18GHz

1 8 GHz

1 8 GHz

3GHz

3GHz

3GHz

3GHz

6GHz

6GHz

6GHz

6GHz

9GHz

9GHz

9GHz

9GHz

9GHz

Tkst 1. Center

Frequency Readout

Accuracy

Synthesized

Sweeper

Frequency

2GHz

2 GHz

2 GHz

2 GHz

( FREQUENCY SPAN ]

T

1MHz

10MHz

100MHz

1GHz

Step 8. CENTER Readout

[ CENTER FREQUENCY_)

Min

2 GHz 1.998 GHz

2 GHz 1.98 GHz

Center Frequency

Readout

Actual I

2 GHz 1.999 98GHz

2 GHz 1.999 7GHz

I&%X

2.000 02 GHz

2.000 3 GHz

2.002 GHz

2.02 GHz

1

1MHz

10MHz

100 MHz

1GHz

1MHz

10MHz

100MHz

1GHz

1MHz

10MHz

100MHz

1GHz

10GHz

1MHz

10MHz

100 MHz

1GHz

10GHz

1MHz

10MHz

100MHz

1GHz

10GHz

1MHz

10MHz

100MHz

1GHz

10GHz

3 GHz 2.999 98 GHz

3 GHz 2.999 7 GHz

3 GHz 2.998 GHz

3 GHz 2.98 GHz

6 GHz 5.999 98 GHz

6GHz 5.999 8GHz

6 GHz 5.998 GHz

6 GHz 5.98 GHz

9GHz 8.999 98GHz

9GHz 8.999 8GHz

9 GHz 8.998 GHz

9GHz 8.98 GHz

9GHz 8.8GHz

12 GHz 11.999 98 GHz

12 GHz 11.999 8 GHz

12 GHz 11.998 GHz

12 GHz 11.98 GHz

12 GHz 11.8 GHz

15 GHz 14.999 98 GHz

15 GHz 14.999 8 GHz

15 GHz 14.998 GHz

15 GHz 14.98 GHz

15 GHz 14.8 GHz

18 GHz 17.999 98GHz

18 GHz 17.999 8 GHz

18 GHz 17.998 GHz

18 GHz 17.98 GHz

18 GHz 17.8 GHz

3.000 02 GHz

3.000 3 GHz

3.002 GHz

3.02 GHz

6.000 02 GHz

6.000 2 GHz

6.002 GHz

6.02 GHz

~ 9.000 02 GHz

~ 9.000 2 GHz

~ 9.002 GHz

9.02 GHz

9.2 GHz

12.000 02 GHz

12.000 2 GHz

12.002 GHz

12.02 GHz

12.2 GHz

15.000 02 GHz

15.000 2 GHz

15.002 GHz

15.02 GHz

15.2 GHz

18.000 02 GHz

18.000 2 GHz

18.002 GHz

18.02 GHz

18.2 GHz

2-90 PerformanceTests

Test 2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test

Test 2. Frequency

Span Accuracy Test


Step 7. Narrow Span Accuracy

T

Frequency Synthesizer

T


[FREQUENCYSPAN] Low m

High

(W

Min Actual

20 kHz 39,992,ooo 40,008,OOO 15.84 kHz 16.16 kHz

50 kHz 39.60 kHz 40.40 kHz

150 kHz

200 kHz

1 MHz

2 MHz

6 MHz

10 MHz

50 MHz

39,980,OOO

39,940,ooo

39,920,ooo

39,600,OOO

39,200,000

37,600,OOO

36,000,OOO

20,000,000

40,020,OOO

40,060,OOO

40,080,OOO

40,400,000

40,800,OOO

42,400,OOO

44,000,000

60,000,OOO

118.80 kHz

158.4 kHz

792.00 kHz

1.584 MHz

4.656 MHz

7.76 MHz

38.80 MHz

121.20 kHz

161.6 kHz

808.00 kHz

1.616 MHz

4.944 MHz

8.240 MHz

41.2 MHz

1

Step 18. Wide Span Accuracy

Spectrum Analyzer 1 Synthesized Sweeper

(

C E N T E R

FREcjumc~J CFREQUENCYSPAN) Low

(GW

4 GHz 500 MHz 3.800

High

WW

4.200

10 GHz

15 GHz

20 GHz

500 MHz 9.800 10.200

500 MHz 14.800 15.200

500 MHz 19.800 20.200

4 GHz

10 GHz

15 GHz

20 GHz

10 GHz

15 GHz

18 GHz

1 GHz

1 GHz

3.600

4.400

9.600 10.400

1 GHz 14.600 15.400

1 GHz 19.600 20.400

5 GHz 8.000 12.000

5 GHz 13.000 17.000

5 GHz 16.000 20.000

10 GHz

15 GHz

10 GHz 6.000 14.000

10 GHz I 11.000 I 19.000

MARKER A Fret

Min Actual lency

Max

388 MHz

388 MHz

388 MHz

388 MHz

776 MHz

776 MHz

776 MHz

776 MHz

3.88

GHz

3.88

GHz

3.88

GHz

7.76

GHz

7.76

GHz

412 MHz

412 MHz

412 MHz

412 MHz

824 MHz

824 MHz

824 MHz

824 MHz

4.12 GHz

4.12 GHz

4.12 GHz

8.24

GHz

8.24

GHz

1


Test 3. Resolution

Bandwidth

Accuracy Test

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

5 MHz

2 MHz

500 kHz

200 kHz

50 kHz

20 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

500 Hz

200 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

Step 8. Bandwidth Accuracy

MARKER

A

Readout of 3 dB Bandwidth 1

Min Actual

2.400 MHz

900 kHz

3.600 MHz

1.100 MHz

270.0 kHz

90.0 kHz

27.00 kHz

9.00 kHz

2.700 kHz

800

240

80

24.0

8.0

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

330.0 kHz

110.0 kHz

33.00

3.300 kHz

11.00 kHz kHz

1.200 kHz

360 Hz

120 Hz

36.0 Hz

12.0 Hz


Test 4. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

3 MHz

1 MHz

10 kHz

IO kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

Test 4. Resolution

Bandwidth

Selectivity

ESBW)

Step 9. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity r


T

FREQUENCY SPAN) (jjBW]

Measured

60 dB

Bandwidth

Measured

3dFS

Bandwidth

Bandwidth

Selectivity

(60 dH BW +

3dBBW)

20 MHz

15 MHz

5 MHz

2 MHz

500 kHz

200 kHz

50 kHz

10 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

500 Hz

100 HZ

100 Hz

300 Hz

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

Maximum

Selectivity Ratic

SO dB points sewrated bs cl00 Hz

11:l

11:l

11:l

11:l

15:l

15:l

15:l

15: 1

13:l

13:l

11:l


lkst 5. Resolution

Bandwidth

Switching

Uncertainty

1 MHz

3 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

Step 5. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

:RESFREQUENCY SPAN)

5 MHz

5 MHz

5 MHz

500 kHz

500 kHz

50 kHz

50 kHz

10 kHz

1 kHz

1 kHz

200

Hz

100 Hz

Deviation

(MKR A

Readout, dB)

0 (ref)

Allowable

Deviation

WV

3 (ref) fl.OO

f0.50

f0.50

kO.50

Ito.

f0.50

f0.50

f0.50

f0.50

f0.80

f2.00


lkst 6. Log Scale

Switching

Uncertainty Test

Test 6. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test

SCALE MKR Amplitude

(dB/DIV) Wm)

5

10

2

1

Step 6. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty

I

I

Deviation

WV

0 (ref)

I

Allowable

Deviation

(ml

0 (ref) f0.5

f0.5

I f0.5


‘I&t 7. IF Gain

Uncertainty

Step 12. IF Gain Uncertainty, 10 dB Steps

[

REFERENCE LEVEL

)

VW

Frequency (VlDEo] Deviation

Synthesizer

Amplitude

(W (Marker A

Amplitude

Wm) @J%

0 - 2 100 0 (ref.)

- 1 0 -12 100

-20

- 3 0

- 4 0

-22

-32

-42

100

100

100

- 5 0

-60

-70

ISHIFT)

(

ENTER

df3pvJ

-52

-62

-72

100

10

10

-80

- 9 0

-100

-110

-120

-32

-42

-52

-62

-72

100

100

10

10

10

Step 18. IF Gain Uncertainty, 2 dB Steps

-7.9

-9.9

(

REFERENCE LEVEL

) Frequency

Wm) Synthesizer

Amplitude

VW

-1.9

-3.9

-5.9

-3.9

-5.9

-7.9

u

0-m

0 (ref)

Deviation

(MARKER A

Amplitude

-9.9

-11.9


[

REFERENCE LEVEL

]

Wm)

0.0

Frequency

Synthesizer

Amplitude ww

-2.00

-0.1

-0.2

-0.3

-0.4

-0.5

-0.6

-0.7

-0.8

-0.9

-1.0

-1.1

-1.2

-1.3

-1.4

-1.5

-1.6

-1.7

-1.8

-1.9

Test 7. IF Gain Uncertainty

Step 22. IF Gain Uncertainty, 0.1 dB Steps

Deviation

(MKR A

Amplitude

(9

0 (ref>

-2.10

-2.20

-2.30

-2.40

-2.50

-2.60

-2.70

-2.80

-2.90

-3.00

-3.10

-3.20

-3.30

-3.40

-3.50

-3.60

-3.70

-3.80

-3.90


Test 7. IF Gain Uncertainty

Steps 23 through 28.

Steps

23. Recorded deviations from step 12.

Largest Positive 0 to -70 dBm

Largest Negative 0 to -70 dBm

Largest Positive -80 to -120 dBm

Largest Negative -80 to -120 dBm

24. Recorded deviation from steps 18 and 22.

Largest Positive step 18

Largest Negative step 18

Largest Positive step 22

Largest Negative step 22

25.

Sum of Positive Deviations of steps 23 and 24

Min Measured Max

26.

Sum of Negative Deviations of steps 23 and 24 -0.6 dB

27.

Sum of Positive Deviations of steps 23 and 24

28.

Sum of Positive Deviations of steps 23 and 24 -1.0 dB

0.6 dB

1.0 dB

2.99 Performance Tests

lkst 8. Amplitude Fidelity

l&t 8. Amplitude

Fidelity

Step 6. Log Scale Fidelity

- 5 0

-60

-70

-80

Frequency 1

Synthesizer Calibrated


WW Step

+ 10 0 (ref)

0

- 1 0

- 1 0

- 2 0

-20

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

- 6 0

- 7 0

- 8 0

- 9 0

2

MARKER A Amplitude

WV

0 (ref)

Fidelity Error

:Column 2 - Column 1)

P9

0 (ref)

Cumulative

Error

0 to 80 dB

WV sk1.0 dB

Cumulative

Error

0 to 90 dB

(9 sf1.5 dB

Step 14. Linear Scale Fidelity

MARKER A Allowable Range

Amplitude (53% of Reference Level)

WV WV

0

- 1 0

-10.87

-9.21

-23.10 - 17.72


Test 9. Calibrator

Amplitude

Accuracy

Step 2. CAL OUTPUT Level

Min

1 Cal OUTPUT level I- 10.30 dB 1

Measured Max

I-9.70 dB I


Test 10. Frequency Response Test


Response ‘I&t

Step 12

Min Measured Max

Deviation 1 kHz to 100 kHz 1.2 dB

Step 18

Signal Level Min

100 Hz

200 Hz

300

Hz

400 Hz

500 Hz

600 Hz

700 Hz

800 Hz

900 Hz

1 kHz

Deviation

100 Hz to 1 kHz

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

-1.4 dB

Measured Max

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

-2.6 dB

1.2 dB

Spectrum

Analyzer

START STOP mQ F=Q

Steps 27, 35 and 49. 100 Hz to 2.5 GHz Frequency Rand

Frequency

Synthesizer

Freq Sweep

Width

Synthesized

Sweeper

Sweep Time

150 s

START STOP

FRRQ FRRQ

Trace

Limits

Spec f0.6 dR

Minimum Maximum

Amp 1 Freq 1 Amp 1 Freq

100 kHz 4 MHz

4 MHz 60 MHz

60 MHz 12.5 GHz

2,000,lOO Hz 3,998,OOO Hz

30050 kHz 59900 kHz

60 MHz 2.5 GHz


Test 10. Frequency Response Test

‘Bble 2-24. Frequency Response (Flatness)

1

Frequent y

Rand

2

Spectrum Analyzer and


3

Cal

Frequent y

START

FREQ

STOP

FREQ

Power

Sensor

Minimum

4

Trace Limits

Maximum

Amplitude Frequent y Amplitude Frequent y

Wm) VJW

6

Flatness

WI

MHz - 2.5 GHz 60 MHz

Spec

2.5 GHz 100 MHz

-11.20

-8.80

1.20

2 - 5.8 GHz 2 GHz

3.9 GHz

Spec

3.9 GHz

5.8 GHz

3 GHz

5 GHz

- 12.30

-7.70

3.40

i.8 - 12.5 GHz 5.8 GHz

9.15 GHz

Spec

9.15 GHz

12.5 GHz

7 GHz

11 GHz

- 12.30

-7.70

3.40

2.5 - 18.6 GHz 12.5 GHz 15.55 GHz

15.55 GHz 18.6 GHz

Spec

14 GHz

17 GHz

- 12.80

-7.20

4.40

18.6 - 20 GHz 18.6 GHz spec

20 GHz 19 GHz

- 12.80

-7.20

4.40

20 - 22 GHz 20 GHz

Spec emulative Flatness (dB)

100 Hz to 20 GHz

Specikation: 4.40 dB

22 GHz 21 GHz

- 13.60

100 Hz to 22 GHz


-6.40

6.00


Test 11. Sweep

Time Accuracy

Test 11. Sweep Time Accuracy

Step 6. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times 220 ms

[ SWEEP TIME)

Min

Sweep Time

M e a s u r e d M a x

20 ms

30 ms

50 ms

70 ms

18 ms

27 ms

45 ms

63 ms

90 ms

110 ms

170 ms

81 ms

99 ms

153 ms

200 ms

2 s

180 ms

1.8 s

22 ms

33 ms

55 ms

77 ms

99 ms

121 ms

187 ms

220 ms

2.2 s

I I

(

Step 12. Sweep Time Accuracy

I

SWEEP TIME )

I

MARKER A Time

I


‘I&t 12. Noise

Sidebands lkst

Steps

11. Noise Sideband Level

~ Max

320 Hz offset


1 kHz offset

2 1. Noise Sideband Level

10 kHz offset


100 kHz offset


Test 13. Line-Related Sidebands

Tkst 13.

Line-Related

Sideb nds

Steps

9. Line-Related Sidebands Levels for 100 MHz signal

Largest level ~360 Hz away from signal

Largest level 360 Hz to 600 Hz away from signal

15. Line-Related Sidebands Levels for 2.4 GHz signal




25. Line-Related Sidebands Levels for 5.7 GFlz signal


Min Measured

-dB a t H z

-dB a t H z

- 7 0 dB

-75 dBm

-dB a t H z -60 dBm

-dB a t H z

-dB a t H z

Max

- 6 0 dB

- 6 0 dB

Option 400


Largest level ~2 kHz away from signal

Largest level 2 kHz to 5.5 kHz away from signal

-dB a t H z

-dB a t - H z

- 5 5 dB

- 6 5 dB


‘I&t 14. Average

Noise Level

Steps

8 and 10. Marker Amplitude Readout

I Min Measured Max

100 Hz -95 dBm

51 kHz -112 dBm

Step 11. Average Noise Level

CENTER FREQUENCY] MARKER Amplitude ww

2.0 MHz

1.001 GHz

2.499 GHz

Maximum Amplitude tam)

-134

-134

-134

2.510 GHz

5.799 GHz

-132

- 132

5.810 GHz

12.499 GHz

12.510 GHz

-125

-125

18.59 GHz

18.61 GHz

!2.0 GHz

-119

-119

-114

-114


Test 15. Residual Responses

II&t 15. Residual

Response!

Steps

8. Residual Responses 0 Hz to 1.5 GHZ


11. Residual Responses 1.4 to 2.5 GE&


13. Residual Responses 2.4 to 5.8 GHz




16. Residual Responses 6.690 to 11.650 GHJ






24. Residual Responses 18.5 to 22 GEz


-

-

I Measured MaX

-dBm a t H z -100 dBm







-



‘I&t 16. Harmonic

And

Intermodulation

Distortion

Steps

8. Second Harmonic Level of 230 MHz

15. Second Harmonic Level of 800 MHz

Min Measured Max

-80 dBc

-70 dBc

-100 dBc 25. Second Harmonic Level of 7200 MHz

40. TO1 for signals of 2099.5 and 2100.5 MHz +7 dBm

54. TO1 for signals of 3999.5 and 4000.5 MHz

55. TO1 for signals of 8999.5 and 9000.5 MHz

TO1 for signals of 13999.500 and 14000.499 MHz

+7 dBm

+5 dBm

+5 dBm

2-l 08 Performance Tests

Test 17. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Rand Responses

Test 17. Image,

Multiple, and

Out-of-Band

Responses

12

15

17

9

6

3

Spectrum Analyzer Synthesized Sweeper

(

CENTER

FREQUENCY) Frequency

(GW (MW

.1

-


Amplit

Measured

[de

Maximum

1

VW ww

-70 3642.800

-

-60 6321.400

-

6964.200

-60

-

2517.900

3160.700

5357.200

-

-60

-60

-70

4017.900

4660.700

8357.200

12696.500

13339.300

5517.900

6160.700

11357.200

17196.500

17839.300

4571.500

5214.300

9464.300

10107.100

14357.200

5238.100

5880.900

10797.700

11440.500

16357.200

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-60

-60

-60

- 6 0

-70

-60

- 6 0

-60

-60

-70

-60

-60

-70

-60

-60

-60

-60

-70

-60

- 6 0


Test 17. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Rand Responses

Step 8. Image and Out-of-Rand Response (continued)


[

CENTER

FREQUENCY]

WW


Frequency

WW

T


Amplit

Measured

[de

Maximum ww

1

WC)

4348.300

- 6 0

4991.100

9017.900

9660.700

-60

-60

-60

13687.600

14330.400

18357.200

4848.300

5491.100

10017.900

10660.700

15187.600

15830.400

20357.200

-60

-60

-60

- 6 0

-60

-60

-60

-60

-60

- 5 0

I

Synthesized

Sweeper

Frequency (MHz)

[

CENTER

FREQUENCY)

(Multiple Response)

W-W

5700.000

6000.000

12000.000

13000.000

15000.000

Step 17. Multiple Responses

2.68930

1.18930

8.107133

I

8.535667

1.06790

1.9107

0.53395

10.107133

10.535667

Displayed s

Amplit

Measured

WC) purious tde

Maximum tdw

-70

-50

- 7 0

-70

-45

-45

-45

- 6 0

-60


Test 18. Gain Compression

Wst 18. Gain

Compression

Steps Min

14. Gain Compression for input -10 to 0 dBm at 2 GHz -1.0 dB

27. Gain Compression for input -15 to -5 dBm at 3 GHz -1.0 dB

36. Gain Compression for input -15 to -5 dBm at 9 GHz -1.0 dB

Measured Max 7l


Test 19. 1st LO

Output Amplitude

Steps Min Measured Max

4. 1st LO OUTPUT Level + 5 dBm


Test 20. Sweep +

Tune Out Accuracy

Test 20. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy

Step 3. Sweep + Tune Out Accuracy

CENTER

FREQUENCY

Min

Voltmeter Reading

(Volts)

Actual Max

1

0 Hz

1 MHz

1 2 MHz

130 MHz

-0.010

-0.011

-0.022

670 MHz

1.3 GHz

5.7 GHz

12.5 GHz

18.6 GHz

22 GHz

-0.143

-0.693

-1.336

-5.824

-12.760

- 18.982

-22.450

+ 0.010

+ 0.009

-0.002

-0.117

-0.647

-1.264

-5.576

-12.240

-18.218

-21.550


‘l&t 21. Fast

Sweep Time

Accuracy (< 20 ms)

Step 10. Fhst Sweep Time Accuracy (~20 ms)

Function Generator Frequency

(W)

2.00 f0.02

5.00 f0.05

10.0 fO.1

50.0 f0.5

100 fl I

2-l 14 Performance Tests

Test 22. Frequency Reference Error Test


Reference Error

T&t

Steps

4. Initial Frequency

5. Frequency after 24 hours

6. Difference between 4 and 5

Measured I Max I

1 0 . M H z

1 0 . M H z

H Z 0.01 Hz


3

Adjustments

Introduction

Warning

The procedures in this section are for the adjustment of the instrument’s electrical performance characteristics.

The procedures require access to the interior of the instrument and therefore should only be performed by qualified service

personnel. Refer to S’uJZ%z/ Considerations in this introduction.

1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and Below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3004A and Above) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below) .... .3-48

3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above) .... 3-56

4. Final Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below) . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64

4. Final Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above) . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66

5. Log Amplifier Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-70

6. Video Processor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78

8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84

9. 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-92

10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments ...... 3-96

11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102

12. 10 MHz Standard Adjustment (SN 2637A and Below) ..... .3-106

12. 10 MHz Standard Adjustment (SN 2728A and Above) ..... .3-110

13. Sweep, DAC, and Main Coil Driver Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114

14. 100 MHz VCXO Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-126

15. M/N Loop Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-133

16. YTO Loop Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137

17. 20/30 Loop Phase Lock Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-148

18. RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-161

19. CAL Output Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-167

20. Last Converter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-171

21. Frequency Response Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-176

22. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-207

23. Track and Hold Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210

24. Digital Storage Display Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-213

The adjustment procedures should not be performed as routine maintenance, but only when Performance Tests cannot meet specifications. Before attempting any adjustment, allow the instrument to warm up for one hour. Table 3-l is a cross reference of

Function Adjusted to the related Adjustment procedure. Table 3-2 lists all adjustable components by name, reference designator, and function.

Adjustments 3-1

Safety

Considerations

Warning

Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety standards, this manual contains information, cautions, and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operations and to retain the instrument in safe condition. Service and adjustments should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

Adjustments in this section are performed with power supplied to the instrument while protective covers are removed. There are voltages at many points in the instrument which can, if contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful.

Adjustment should be performed only by trained service personnel.

Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in

STANDBY. There is no OFF position on the LINE switch. Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board, remove the power cord from the rear of both instruments and wait for the MAINS indicators (red LEDs) to go completely out.

Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of power.

Use a non-metallic tuning tool whenever possible.

Equipment

Required

The equipment required for the adjustment procedures is listed in Table l-l, Recommended Test Equipment, at the beginning of this manual. If the test equipment recommended is not available, substitutions may be used if they meet the “Critical Specifications” listed in the table. The test setup used for an adjustment procedure is referenced in each procedure.

Adjustment Tools

For adjustments requiring a non-metallic tuning tool, use fiber tuning tool HP Part Number 8710-0033. In situations not requiring non-metallic tuning tools, an ordinary small screwdriver or other suitable tool is sufficient. However, it is recommended that you use a non-metallic adjustment tool whenever possible. Never try to force any adjustment control in the analyzer. This is especially critical when tuning variable slug-tuned inductors and variable capacitors.

3-2 Adjustments

Factory-Selected

Components

Factory-selected components are identified with an asterisk (*) on the schematic diagram. For most components, the range of their values and functions are listed in ‘Iable 3-3, Factory-Selected Components.

Part numbers for selected values are located in ‘Iable 3-4 through

‘Iable 3-6, Standard Value Replacement components.

Related

Adjustments

Any adjustments which interact with, or are related to, other adjustments are indicated in the adjustments procedures. It is important that adjustments so noted are performed in the order indicated to ensure that the instrument meets specifications.

Location of Test

Points and

Adjustments

Illustrations showing the locations of assemblies containing adjustments, and the location of those adjustments within the assemblies, are contained within the adjustment procedures to which they apply. Major assembly and component location illustrations are located at the rear of this manual.

Adjustments 3-3

Function Adiusted

Low Voltage

High Voltage

CRT Display (Standard)

CRT Display (Digital Storage)

IF Gains

Log Scales

Bandwidth Amplitudes

3 dB Bandwidth

10 MHz Internal Time Base

CAL OUTPUT Level

Frequency Span

START and STOP Frequency

Sweep Times

Frequency Tuning

Phase Lock Loops

Frequency Response

Digital Storage Video Processing

‘Ihble 3-1. Adjustment Cross Reference

RF Signal Conversion and RF Gains lkst Number

2

1

10

18

16

17

13

14

15

20

21

21

22

23

11

9

12

6

7

8

19

13

13

13

3

4

24

5

Adjustment Procedure

Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments

High Voltage Adjustment

Preliminary Display Adjustment

Final Display Adjustments

Digital Storage Display Adjustments



Video Processor Adjustments



Down/Up Converter Adjustments

3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments


CAL Output Adjustments





100 MHz VCXO Adjustments

MM Loop Adjustments

RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments

YTO Loop Adjustments

20/30 Loop Phase Lock Adjustments

Last Converter Adjustments



Analog-to-Digital Converter Adjustments

Track and Hold Adjustments

3-4 Adjustments

Reference

Designator

AlA2C308

AlA2R308

AlA2R319

AlA2R409

AlA2R426

AlA2R427

AlA2R437

AlA2R440

AlA2R512

AlA2R513

AlA2R515

AlA2R517

Adjustment

Name c307

ZHF GAIN

INT GAIN

FOCUS COMP

T/B FOC

TB CTR

R/L FOC

R/L CTR

ORTHO

3 D

INTENSITY

LIMIT

ASTIG

‘Ihble 3-2. Adjustable Components

Adjustment

Number

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

Adjustment Function

Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse.


Sets adjustment range of front-panel INTENSITY control.

Corrects focus for beam intensity.

Magnitude of top/bottom focus correction.

Centering of top/bottom focus correction.

Magnitude of right/left focus correction.

Centering of right/left focus correction.

Sets orthogonality of CRT.

Adjusts spot size.


Adjusts astigmatism of CRT.

FOCUS LIMIT 3 AlA3R14

AlA4C204

AlA4C209

AlA4R227

AlA4R219

AlA4R217

AlA5C104

AlA5C109

AlA5R127

AlA5R120

AlA5R117 c204 c209

X POSN

X GAIN

XHF GAIN

Cl04

Cl09

Y POSN

Y GAIN

YHF GAIN

3

3

3

3,4

3

3

3

374

3,4

394

Coarse adjusts CRT focus.

Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier pulse.


Adjusts horizontal position of trace.

Adjusts horizontal gain of trace.

Adjusts rise and fall times or X deflection amplifier pulse.

Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier pulse.


Adjusts vertical position of trace.

Adjusts vertical gain of trace.


AlA6R9

AlA6R103

+ 15 ADJ

HV ADJUST 2

1 Adjusts + 15 V dc supply voltage.

Adjusts CRT high voltage.

par

Serial Prefix 3001A and below, see back of table for exceptions to AlA through AlA6.

Adjustments 3-5

‘lhble 3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)

Reference Adjustment idjustmenl

Designatol Name Number t

A3AlR34 SWEEP OFFSET 25

A3A2R12

A3A2R50

A3A2R5 1

LL THRESH

X S&H

Y S&H

25

25

25


Adjusts digital sweep to begin at left edge of graticule.

Adjusts point at which graticule lines switch from short to long lines.

Adjusts horizontal sample and hold pulse.

Adjusts vertical sample and hold pulse.

A3A3Rl

A3A3R2

A3A3R4

A3A3R5

A3A3R6

A3A3R7

A3A3R8

A3A3R9

A3A3R43

A3A8R5

A3A8R6

X EXP

Y EXP

X GAIN

Y GAIN

XLL

XSL

YSL

YLL

YOS

GAIN

OFFS

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

23

23

Adjusts horizontal position of annotation.

Adjusts vertical position of annotation.

Adjusts horizontal gain of graticule lines.

Adjusts vertical gain of graticule lines.

Adjusts horizontal long lines on graticule information.

Adjusts horizontal short lines on graticule information.

Adjusts vertical short lines on graticule information.

Adjusts vertical long lines on graticule information.

Adjusts bottom line of graticule to align with fast sweep signal.

Adjusts high end of digitized sweep.

Adjusts low end of digitized sweep.

A3A9R36

A3A9R39

A3A9R44

A3A9R52

A3A9R57

A3A9R59

OFS NEG

GPOS

OFS POS

GNEG

T/II GAIN

(T/H) OFS

24

24

24

24

24

24

Adjusts offset of negative peak detect mode.

Adjusts gain for positive peak detect mode.

Adjusts offset of positive peak detect mode.

Adjusts gain for negative peak detect mode.

Adjusts overall gain of track and hold.

Adjusts overall offset of track and hold.

A4AlR2

A4AlR14

A4AlR32

A4AlR36

LG OS

OS

ZERO

FS

6

6

6

6

Adjusts linear gain offsets.

Adjusts video processor offset.

Adjusts low end of video processor sweep.

Adjusts high end of video processor sweep.

A4A2R14

A4A2R79

A4A2R61

LG20

ZERO

-12 VTV

Adjusts 20 dB linear gain step.

Adjusts log amplifier offset.

Adjusts log amplifier tuning voltage.

A4A3C55

A4A3R67

A4A3R83

CTR

AMPTD

LGlO

Adjusts log amplifier center to IF

Adjusts amplitude of log amplifier bandpass filter.

Adjusts 10 dB linear gain step.

3-6 Adjustments

A4A7C6

A4A7C7

A4A7C13

A4A7C14

A4A7C15

A4A7C22

A4A7C23

A4A7C24

A4A7C3 1

A4A7C32

A4A7C33

A4A7C40

A4A7C4 1

Reference

Designator

A4A4C9

A4A4C19

A4A4C20

A4A4C39

A4A4C41

A4A4C43

A4A4C65

A4A4C67

A4A4C73

A4A4C74

A4A4R43

A4A4R49

A4A5ClO

A4A5R2

A4A5R32

A4A5R33

A4A5R44

A4A5R5 1

A4A5R54

CTR

CTR

LC

XTAL

‘Ihble 3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)

Adjustment

Name

SYM

LC CTR

CTR

SYM

LC DIP

LC DIP

SYM

LC CTR

Adjustment

Number

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8


Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole #l symmetry.

Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole #l.

Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole #l.

Adjusts A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole #2 symmetry.

Dips A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole #l.

Dips A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole #2.


Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole #2.

Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole #3.


Adjusts LC filter amplitudes.

Adjusts crystal filter amplitudes.

FREQ ZERO

COARSE

+ 1OV ADJ

SGlO

CAL

SG20- 1

VR

SG20-2

A4A6AlC31

A4A6AlR29

18.4 MHz NULL

WIDE GAIN

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

11

Coarse-adjusts 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator to set adjustment range of front-panel FREQ ZERO control.

Adjusts + 1OV temperature compensation supply.

Adjusts 10 dB step gain.

Adjusts IF gain.

Adjusts first 20 dB step gain.

Adjusts variable step gain.

Adjusts second 20 dB step gain.

Nulls 18.4 MHz local oscillator signal.

Adjusts gain of down/up converter.

SYM

CTR

PK

SYM

CTR

PK

SYM

CTR

PK

SYM

CTR

PK

SYM

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole #l symmetry.

Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole #l.

Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole #2.

Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole #2 symmetry.

Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole #2.









Adjustments 3-7

Reference

Designator

A4A7C42

A4A7R30

A4A7R4 1

A4A8C13

A4A8C29

A4A8C32

A4A8C42

A4A8C44

A4A8C46

A4A8C66

A4A8C67

A4A8R6

A4A8R7

A4A8R35

A4ASR40

A4A9R60

A4A9R6 1

A4A9R62

A4A9R65

A4A9R66

A4A9R73

A6A3AlC8

A6A3AlC9

A6A3AlClO

A6A3AlCll

A6A3AlC12

A6A3AlC23

Adjustment

Name

CTR

10 Hz AMPTD

10 Hz AMPTD

SYM

CTR

LC CTR

SYM

CTR


LC CTR

LC DIP

LC DIP

A20 dB

A10 dB

LC

XTAL

Adjustmen

Number

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

7

7

7



Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter 10 Hz bandwidth amplitude.

Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter 10 Hz bandwidth amplitude.

Adjusts A4A8 bandwidth filter crystal pole #l symmetry.

Centers A4A8 bandwidth filter crystal pole #l.

Centers A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole #l.



Centers A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole #2.

Dips A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole #l.

Dips A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole #2.

Adjusts attenuation of 21.4 MHz bandwidth filter

20 dB step.

Adjusts attenuation of 21.4 MHz bandwidth filter

10 dB step.

Adjusts LC filter amplitudes.

Adjusts crystal filter amplitudes.

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

C8 c9

Cl0

Cl1

Cl2

10.7 MHz

NOTCH

A6A9AlC29

A6A9AlRll

A6A9AlR38

TRIPLER

MATCH

CAL OUTPUT

BALANCE

9

9

9

9

9

9

20

20

20

20

20

20

18

19

21

Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth.

Adjusts 1 MHz bandwidth.

Adjusts 300 kHz bandwidth.



Adjusts 1 kHz bandwidth (Option 067).

Adjusts 321.4 MHz bandpass filter.




Adjusts 32 1.4 MHz bandpass filter.

Adjusts 10.7 MHz notch filter.

Adjusts for maximum 300 MHz output.

Adjusts output level of CAL OUTPUT.

Adjusts phase lock tune voltage level.

3-8 Adjustments

Reference

Designator

AGAlORl

A6AlOR9

A6AlOR12

A6AlOR15

A6AlOR18

A6AlOR21

A6AlOR23

A6AlOR25

A6AlOR27

A6AlOR29

A6AlOR31

A6AlOR34

A6AlOR37

A6AlOR40

A6AlOR41

A6AlOR42

A6AlOR70

A6AlOR76

A6AlOR81

A6Al lR48

A6Al lR51

A6Al lR54

A6Al lR57

A6Al lR60

A6A 1 lR66

A6Al lR69

A6Al lR72

A6Al lR75

A6Al lR78

A6Al lR84

A6A12R24

A6A12R25

A6A12R26

A6A12R63

A6A12R66

Al

Bl

Cl

Dl

El

A2

B2 c2

D2

E2

GAIN

IO

VE

VD

LB1

LB2

LB3

LB4

LR4

GF v c

VB

GA

GB

GC

GD

GE

LRl

LR2

LR3 lfdble 3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)

Adjustment

Name

Adjustment

Number

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21


Adjusts 3.3 GHz oscillator drive current.

Adjusts mixer bias 18.6 to 22 GHz.

Adjusts mixer bias 12.5 to 18.6 GHz.

Adjusts mixer bias 5.8 to 12.5 GHz.

Adjusts mixer bias 2 to 5.8 GHz.

Adjusts IF gain 0.01 to 2.5 GHz.

Adjusts IF gain 2 to 5.8 GHz.



Adjusts IF gain 18.6 to 22 GHz.

Adjusts linearity 5.8 to 12.5 GHz (high end).

Adjusts linearity 12.5 to 18.6 GHz (low end).


Adjusts linearity 5.8 to 12.5 GHz.

Adjusts linearity 12.5 to 18.6 GHz (low end).


Adjusts linearity 18.6 to 22 GHz.

Adjusts linearity 18.6 to 22 GHz (high end).

Adjusts IF gain in external mixer band.

D3

D2

Dl

5.8 GHz

2 GHz

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

Adjusts flatness 0.01 to 2.5 GHz (low end).

Adjusts flatness 2 to 5.8 GHz (low end).



Adjusts flatness 18.6 to 22 GHz (low end).

Adjusts flatness 0.01 to 2.5 GHz (high end).

Adjusts flatness 2 to 5.8 GHz (high end).



Adjusts flatness 18.6 to 22 GHz (high end).

Adjusts overall slope gain.

Adjusts auto-sweep tracking.



Adjusts tracking at 5.8 GHz (2 to 5.8).

Adjusts tracking at 2 GHz (2 to 5.8).

Adjustments 3-9

Reference

Designator

A6A12R82

A6A12R83

A6A12R84

A6A12R85

A6A12R98

A6A12Rll3


Adjustment Adjustmen

Name Number

E

D

C

21

21

21

B

ZERO

- 9 v

21

21

21


Adjusts tracking at 18.6 GHz (18.6 to 22).

Adjusts tracking at 12.5 GHz (12.5 to 18.6).

Adjusts tracking at 5.8 GHz (5.8 to 12.5).

Adjusts tracking at 4 GHz (2 to 5.8).

Sets SWEEP + TUNE OUT zero indication.

Sets -9 V and +9 V dc reference supplies.

A7A2C 1

A7A2C2

A7A2C3

A7A2C4

400 MHz OUT

400 MHz OUT

400 MHz OUT

100 MHz

A7A4AlAlCl

A7A4AlAlC5

FREQ ADJUST

PWR ADJUST

14

14

14

14

15

15

Peaks 400 MHz output signal.



Adjusts VCXO frequency.

Adjusts VCO frequency.

Adjusts VCO output level.

A8R2

AlOAlL7

AlOAlL8

1

17

17

Sets +22 V dc supply voltage.

Nulls 50 kHz output.

Nulls 50 kHz output.

AlOA3Lll

AlOA3L12

AlOA3L13

AlOA4C50

4lOA4Lll

410A4L16

910A4L17

410A5R2

410A5R4

+ 22V ADJUST

50 kHz NULL

50 kHz NULL

165 MHz NULL

160 MHz NULL

170 MHz NULL

160 MHz PEAK

VCO ADJ

160 MHz PEAK

160 MHz PEAK

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

17

Nulls signal at 165 MHz.




Adjusts PLL3 VCO frequency.



Adjusts VCO TUNE voltage at 150 MHz.

Adjusts VCO TUNE voltage at 100 MHz.

410A8R4

410A8R9

410A8R25

410A8R27

41 lA2R2

150 MHz ADJ

100 MHz ADJ

.2 MHz

.3 MHz

.5 MHz SCAN

5 MHz SCAN

;ATE BIAS ADJ

17

17

17

17

16

Sets discriminator pretune at 0.2 MHz.

Sets discriminator pretune at 0.3 MHz.

Adjusts frequency span accuracy (20/30 sweep).

Adjusts frequency span accuracy (20/30 sweep).

Adjusts CIA amplifier gate biasing.

3-10 Adjustments

A16R62

A16R67

A16R68

A16R71

A16R72

A17R50

A19R9

A19R19

A19R32

A19R41

A19R43

A19R50

A19R56

Reference Adjustment Adjustment

Designator Name Number

Al lA5Cl

Al lA5C2

Al lA5Rl


IMPEDANCE

MATCH

IMPEDANCE

MATCH

IF GAIN

16

16

13


Optimizes sampler output.

Optimizes sampler output.

Adjusts level of 30 MHz output.

A20R25

A20R34

A22A2

OFFSET

SWEEPTIME

AUX

GAIN 2

GAIN 1

13

13

13

13

13

Adjusts scan ramp offset.

Adjusts time of sweep ramp.

Adjusts AUX OUT sweep ramp.

Adjusts frequency span accuracy (YTO sweep).

Adjusts frequency span accuracy (YTO sweep).

+ 20V ADJ

-12.6 VR

OFFSET

2.5 GHz SPAN

25 GHz SPAN

OFFSET

25 GHz SPAN

+lOVR

2.5 GHz SPAN

OFFSET

1

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

Adjusts + 20 V dc supply voltage.

Adjusts -12.6 V reference for YTO dAC high end

(6.2 GHz).

Adjusts summing amplifier offset.

Adjusts 5.8 GHz switchpoint overlap.

Adjusts 25 GHz span offset.

Adjusts 5.8 and 12.5 GHz switchpoint overlaps.

Adjusts HOV reference for YTO DAC low end (2

GHz).

Adjusts 2.5 GHz span offset.

6.15 GHz

2.3 GHz

13

13

Sets high-end frequency of YTO.

Sets low-end frequency YTO.

FREQ ADJ 12 Adjusts reference oscillator frequency.

For Serial Prefix 2737A and below, see back of table for A22 exceptions.

IF Serial Prefix 3001A and Below

AlABClO

AlA2R5

AlA2R22

AlA2R30

Cl0

INTENSITY

GAIN

HF GAIN

FOCUS GAIN

3

3

3

3




Coarse adjusts CRT focus; sets range of front-panel

FOCUS control.

Adjustments 3-11


Reference Adjustment Adjustment

Designator Name Number

AlA2R31

AlA2R32

AlA2R35

ORTHO

PATTERN

INTENSITY

3

3

3


Sets orthogonality of CRT.

Adjusts for optimum rectangular shape of CRT display.


AlA2R36

AlA2R30

LIMIT

ASTIG

FOCUS GAIN

3

4

Adjusts astigmatism of CRT.

Adjusts for optimum focus of CRT display.

AlA3R14 FOCUS LIMIT 3 Coarse adjusts CRT focus.

AlA4ClO

AlA4Cll

AlA4R7

AlA4R27

AlA4R28

AlA5ClO

AlA5Cll

AlA5R7

AlA5R27

AlA5R28

AlA6R9

AlA6R32

Cl0

Cl1

X POSN

X GAIN

HFGAIN

Cl0

Cl1

Y POSN

Y GAIN

HF GAIN

+ 15 SV ADJ

HV ADJUST

3

3

3

3,4

3

3

3

3,4

394

374

1

2



Adjusts horizontal position of trace.

Adjusts horizontal gain of trace.

Adjusts rise and fall times or X deflection amplifier pulse.



Adjusts vertical position of trace.

Adjusts vertical gain of trace.


Adjusts + 15 V dc supply voltage.

Adjusts CRT high voltage.

A3A8R9

A3A8R14

FS

ZERO

23

23

Adjusts high end of digitized sweep.

Adjusts low end of digitized sweep.

IF Serial Prefix 2637A and Below

A22

A22

COARSE

FINE

12

12

Coarse-adjusts reference oscillator frequency.

Fine-adjusts reference oscillator frequency.


44A3C51

A4A3C52

A4A3C53

A4A3R15

A4A3R25

A4A3R29

A4A3R35

A4A3R38

A4A3R47

A4A3R54

A4A3R66

A4AlRlO

A4AlR67

A4A2R18

A4A2R22

A4A2R24

A4A2R36

A4A2R62

44A2R86

44A2R88

44A2R89

44A2R96

44A2R97

44A2R99

‘Ikble 3-3. Fhctory-Selected Components

Reference Adjustment Range of Values

Designator Procedure (0 or PF)

AlA2R9 3 2.87

Function of Component

K to 6.19 K Sets intensity level.

A3AlR72

A3A2R17

A3A2R2 1

19.6 K to 42.2 K Sets intensity level.

121 K to 162 K Sets intensity level.

10.0 K to 26.1 K Sets intensity level.

A3A3C27

A3A3C32

A3A3R47

A3A3R48

Open or 1.0-10.0 Compensates for feedthrough of INTG signal to Ul.

1.0 to 10.0

Compensates for feedthrough of INTG signal to Ull.

5.0 K to 12.5 K Compensates for DAC ladder resistance.

5.0 K to 12.5 K Compensates for DAC ladder resistance.

5

5

5

5

5

5

562 to 1.33 K Sets adjustment range of A4AlR36 FS

56.2 K to 825 K Compensates for ON resistance of A4AlQ6

68.1 to 178 Sets adjustment range of LG20.

1.96 K to 5.11 K Adjusts log fidelity.

1 K to 31.6 K Log fidelity.

90.9 to 237 Adjusts overall linear gain.

1 6 . 2 t o 4 6 . 4 Sets adjustment range of ATTEN.

100 to OPEN Temperature compensation

1 K to OPEN Temperature compensation





3 9 0 t o 6 8 0 Adjusts bandpass filter shape in wide bandwidths (> 100 kHz).

OPEN or 5.6-15.0 Sets adjustment range of CTR.

91 to 130 Sets adjustment range of CTR.

10.0 to 82.5

19.6 to 82.5

Log fidelity

Log fidelity

51.1 to 1 K

10.0 to 61.9

Log fidelity

Log fidelity

61.9 to 1.96 K Log fidelity

2.15 K to 13.3 K Log fidelity

5 1 . 1 t o 1 3 3 Sets adjustment range of LGlO.

46.4 K to 215 K Sets adjustment range of AMPTD.


‘Ihble 3-3. F&tory-Selected Components (continued)



A4A3R74 1.78 K to 13.3 K Log fidelity


A4A3R79

A4A3R80

A4A3R81

A4A4ClO

A4A4C 17

A4A4C38 8

8

8

8

8.25 K to 82.5 K Bandpass filter temperature compensation

1.0 K to 6.81 K Bandpass filter temperature compensation

1 K-OPEN

1.0 to 8.2

180 to 270

1.0 to 8.2

Bandpass filter temperature compensation

Sets adjustment range of SYM.

Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.


A4A4C66

A4A4C70

A4A4C92

8

8

8

1.0 to 8.2

180 to 270

180 to 270




A4A4C97

A4A4R3

A4A4R16

180 to 270

0 to 9.09

Matches amplitude of LC to XTAL bandwidths.

3.16 K to 8.25 K Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.

A4A4R20

A4A4R35

A4A4R40

A4A4R42

A4A4R44

A4A4R45

A4A4R60

A4A4R64

A4A4R65

A4A4R94

6.19 K to 12.1 K Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.

383 to 825

1 K to OPEN

0 to 100

100 K to 1M

Matches amplitude of LC to XTAL bandwidths.


1 K to OPEN Sets level of + 10 V TC supply.

Sets level of + 10 V TC supply.

Adjusts bandwidth shape in 10 kHz bandwidth.

3.1 6 K to 8.25 K Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.


909 to 2.73 K Adjusts positive feedback.

Sets adjustment range of LC amplitudes.

A4A5C9

A4A5RlO

A4A5R62

A4A5R70

A4A5R86

A4A6A2R33

10

11

10

10

10

O-16 Sets adjustment range of FREQ ZERO COARSE.

1.62 K to 2.61 K Sets 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator power.

1.33 K to 3.48 K Adjusts A8dB step.

472 to 1.62 K Adjust A4dB step.

215 to OPEN Adjusts A2dB step.

42.2 to 75.0

Adjusts level of 3 MHz output.

A4A7C5

A4A7C 12

A4A7C2 1

A4A7C30

A4A7C39

A4A7C93

A4A7R12

A4A7R13

A4A7R23

A4A7R24

7

7

7

7

7

56 to 82

56 to 82

56 to 82

56 to 82

56 to 82

Centers first pole.

Sets adjustment range of second pole P K.

Sets adjustment range of third pole P K.

Sets adjustment range of fourth pole P K.

Sets adjustment range of fifth pole P K.

1.5 to 12.0

Centers first pole.






Reference

Designator

A4A7R34

A4A7R35

A4A7R45

A4A7R46

A4A7R56

A4A7R57

A4A7R60

A4A7R66

A4A7R68

A4A7R70

A4A7R72

A4A7R74

A4A7R76

A4A7R78

A4A7R80

A4A7R82

A4A7R84

A4A7R86

A4A7R88

A4A7R90

A4A7R92

A4A7R94

A4A7R96

A4A7R98

A4A7RlOO

A4A7R102

A4A7R104

‘Ihble 3-3. Factory-Selected Components (continued) adjustment

Procedure

10

Range of Values

(0 or PF)

10.0 K to 17.8 K

10.0 K to 17.8 K

10.0 K to 17.8 K

10.0 K to 17.8 K

7.50 K to 13.3 K

7.50 K to 13.3 K

38.3 to 68.1

38.3 to 68.1

100 to 178

383 to 681

1.47 K to 2.61 K

38.3 to 68.1

100 to 178

383 to 681

1.47 K to 2.61 K

38.3 to 68.1

100 to 178

383 to 681

1.47 K to 2.61 K

3.83 to 68.1

100 to 178

383 to 681

1.47 K to 2.61 K

3.83 to 68.1

100 to 178

383 to 681

1.47 K to 2.61 K


Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.






Compensates for gain of A4A6Al.





















Tar Ootion 462. see back of this (able for excentions to A4A7.

A4A8C14

A4A8C35

A4A8C43

A4A8C49

A4A8C78

A4A8C81

1.0 to 8.2

180 to 270

1.0 to 8.2

180 to 270

180-270

180-270



Sets adjustment range of WM.




1


A4A9R3

A4A9R6

A4A9R7

A4A9RlO

A4A9R 11

A4A9R46

A4A9R48

A4A9R50

A4A9R52

A4A9R55

A4A9R57

A4A9R59

A4A9R70

A4A9R72

A4A9R74

A4A9R83

A4A9R84

A4A9R85

A4A9R86

A4A9R87

Reference

Designator

A4A8R19

A4A8R24

A4A8R26

A4A8R29

A4A8R30

A4A8R34

A4A8R36

A4A8R36

A4A8R52

A4A8R55

‘Ihble 3-3. Fhctory-Selected Components (continued)

Adjustment

Procedure

Range of Values

(fl or PP)

100 Kl to 1M

0 to 100

3.83 K to 9.09 K

909 to 2.37 K

3.16 K to 8.25 K

100 K to OPEN

100 K to OPEN

10 K to OPEN

3.83 K to 9.09 K

3.16 K to 8.25 K


Sets adjustment range of LC amplitude.

Adjusts bandwidth shape in 10 kHz bandwidth.


Adjusts LC mode feedback.

Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.

(85662-60131 only)

(85662-60190 only)


Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.

6.81 K to 10.0 K

38.3 K to 56.2 K

28.7 K to 42.2 K

6.19 K to 9.09 K

1.96 K to 2.87 K

82.5 K to 147 K

261 K to 464 K

56.2 K to 100 K

562 K to 1M

46.4 K to 82.5 K

316 K to 562 K

422 K to 750 K

619 K to l.lM

90.0 K to 162 K

61.9 K to 110 K

2.15 K to 8.25 K

42.2 K to 100 K

75 K to 178 K

10.0 K to 17.5 K

100 to 5.11 K

Sets TC of 3 kHz RBW



Sets TC of 1 MHz RBW

Sets TC of 3 MHz RBW

Sets 1.0 dB step size







Sets 0.1 dB step size.



Centers 3 kHz BW adjustment range.



Centers 1 MHz BW adjustment range.

Centers 3 MHz BW adjustment range.

For Serial Prefix 2813A to 2816A, and Serial Prefix 2810A md below, see the back of this table for exceptions to A4A9.


A6A12Cl

A6A12C2

A6A12C3

A6A12Cll

A6A12C23

A6A12R64

A7A2C8

A7A2L4

A7A2R3

A7A2R67

A7A2R68

A7A2R69

Reference

Designatol

A6A9AlR5

A6A9AlRlf

A6A9AlR2;

‘Ibble 3-3. F&tory-Selected Components (continued)

Adjustmenl

Procedure

18

19

18

Range of Values

(0 or PF)

23.7 to 180

909 to 1.21 K

56.2 K


Sets sampler drive level

Sets adjustment range of A6A9AlRll CAL

OUTPUT

Sets HET UNLOCK delay time constant for HP

85660B (10 K=HP 85660A)

A6AlOR86

A6AlOR87

A6AlOR88

A6AlOR89

A6AlOR90

A6AlOR91

A6Al lR2

21

21

21

21

21

21

21

10 to 40 K

10 to 40 K

10 to 40 K

10 to 40 K

10 to 40 K

10 to 40 K

Sets adjustment range of A6AlOR21 GA

Sets adjustment range of A6AlOR23 GB

Sets adjustment range of A6AlOR25 GC

Sets adjustment range of A6AlOR27 GD

Sets adjustment range of A6AlOR29 GE

Sets adjustment range of A6AlOR81 GF

100 K to 196 K Adjusts band A breakpoint for best flatness.

A8R6

AlOA3C26

AlOA4C49

AlOA4C49

AlOA4R29

AlOA4R33

21

21

21

21

21

14

14

14

14

14

1

17

17

17

17

0.1 to 0.68 PF Sets YTX delay compensation.


OPEN Not loaded for HP 85660B



13.356 K/15 K Sets adjustment range of A6A12R63 5.8 GHz

Open to 15 pF

0.22 to 0.68 PH

196 to 511

Open to 825

6.8 to 61.9

110 to 825

213 to 261 oto15

10 to 15 pF

10 to 15 pF

68.1 to 90.9

68.1 to 90.9

Sets tuning range of A7A2C4.

Centers the adjustment range of A7A2 around

100 MHz.

Sets biasing of A7A2Q5

Sets -10 dBm output level of the 400 MHz signal.



Sets adjustment range of A8R2 +22 V ADJ

Selected to minimize mixer distortion.

Sets adjustment range of AlOA4C50 160 MHz

PEAK

Sets adjustment range of AlOA4C50 160 MHz

PEAK

Sets output power to -20 dBm at AlOA4J2

Sets output power to -20 dBm at AlOA4J2


Al lA4R24

Table 3-3. Fhctory-Selected Components (continued)



348 to 562


Sets YTO loop gain crossover to 20 f2 kHz.

Al lA5C22

Al lA5LlO

Al lA5R22

A13C22

16

16

16

130 to 220 pF Sets YTO loop response ~20 MHz.

2.2 to 3.3 PF Sets YTO loop response.

15 to 51.1 62

A15ClO

620 to 1300

62 to 91

Sets period of microprocessor clock.

Sets oscillator frequency to 10 MHz ho.75

MHz.

A16R46 13 73.874 K/74.25 K Sets adjustment range of A16R72 GAIN 1

Serial Prefix 2813A to 2816A

A4A9R3

A4A9R6

A4A9R7

A4A9RlO

A4A9R 11

A4A9R46

A4A9R48

A4A9R50

A4A9R52

A4A9R55

A4A9R57

A4A9R59

A4A9R70

A4A9R72

A4A9R74

8.25 to 12.1 K Centers 3 kHz BW adjustment range

82.5 to 121 K Centers 10 kHz BW adjustment range

110 to 162 K Centers 300 kHz BW adjustment range

14.7 to 21.5 K Centers 1 MHz BW adjustment range

162 to 237 K Centers 3 MHz BW adjustment range

82.5 to 147 K Sets 1.0 dB step size

261 to 464 K Sets 0.2 dB step size


562 K to 1 MO Sets 0.4 dB step size

46.4 to 82.5 K Sets 1.8 dB step size



619 K to 1.1 Mdl Sets 0.1 dB step size



Serial Prefix 2810A and Below

A4A9R69

A4A9R70

A4A9R7 1

196 K to 348 K Sets 1.4 dB step size.

215 K to 383 K Sets 1 dB step size.

147 K to 261 K Sets 1.8 dB step size.


able 3-3. Factory-Selected Components (continued)




Option 462

A4A7R12

A4A7Rl3

A4A7R23

A4A7R24

A4A7R34

A4A7R35

A4A7R45

A4A7R46

A4A7R56

A4A7R57

A4A7R68

A4A7R70

A4A7R76

A4A7R84

A4A7R86

A4A7R92

A4A7R94

A4A7RlOO

A4A7R102

A4A8R30

A4A8R55

A4A8C43

A4A9R3

A4A9R6

A4A9R7

A4A9RlO

A4A9Rll

A4A9R83

A4A9R85

A4A9R86

A4A9R87

Option 067

5.62 K to 7.5 K

5.62 K to 7.5 K

5.62 K to 7.5 K

5.62 K to 7.5 K

5.62 K to 7.5 K

5.62 K to 7.5 K

5.11 K to 6.81 K

5.11 K to 6.81 K

5.11 K to 6.81 K

5.11 K to 6.81 K

99 to 133

383 to 681

99 to 133

99 to 133

316 to 619

99 to 133

316 to 619

99 to 133

316 to 619

6.19Kto 16K

6.8 K to 17.6 K

1.0 to 8.2

4.22 K to 6.19 K

21.5 K to 34.8 K

51.1 K to 75.0 K

11.0 K to 16.2 K

2.87 K to 4.22 K

7.50 K to 14.7 K

162 K to 348 K

28.7 K to 61.9 K

4.22 K to 8.25

44A9R2

215 K to 316 K Sets TC of 1 kHz RBW (Opt 067)

100 K to 511 K Centers 1 kHz BW adjustment range. (Option

067)

388 to 550 K 1 Centers 1 kHz BW adjustment range (Opt 067)

Adjustments 3-l 9


9.1

10.0

11.0

12.0

13.0

15.0

16.0

18.0

20.0

22.0

24.0

3.9

4.3

4.7

5.1

5.6

6.2

6.8

7.5

8.2

2.4

2.7

3.0

3.3

3.6

1.0

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.0

2.2

0160-2236

0160-2237

0150-0091

0160-2239

0160-2240

0160-2241

0160-2242

0160-2243

0160-2244

0150-0059

0160-2246

0160-2247

0160-2248

0160-2249

0160-2250

0160-2251

0160-2252

0160-2253

0160-2254

0160-2255

0160-2256

0160-2257

0160-2258

0160-2259

0160-2260

0160-2261

0160-2262

0160-2263

0160-2264

0160-2265

0160-2266 r

‘Ihble 3-4. Standard Value Replacement Capacitors

Caoacitors s

Type: Tubular

Range: 1 to 24 pF

I’olerance: 1 to 9.1 pF = f0.25 pF

Type: Dipped Mica

Range: 27 to 680 pF

Tolerance: f5%

10 to 24 DF = f5%

V&he (pF) KP Part Number Value (pF) EP Part Number

1

0

8

9

2

5

8

3

4

2

3

1

0

4

9

5

8

8

6

7

8

9

8

4

1

0

2

1

3

6

7

180

200

220

240

270

300

330

360

390

430

470

510

560

620

680

43

47

51

56

62

27

30

33

36

39

68

75

82

91

100

110

120

130

150

160

0140-0194

0160-2205

0140-0195

0140-0196

0160-2206

0140-0197

0140-0198

0160-0134

0140-0199

0140-0210

0160-2207

0160-2208

0160-2209

0140-0200

0160-0939

0160-3533

0160-3534

0160-3535

0160-3536

0160-3537

0160-2306

0160-2199

0160-2150

0160-2308

0140-0190

0160-2200

0160-2307

0160-2201

0140-0191

0140-0205

0140-0192

0160-2202

0140-0193

0160-2203

0160-2204

-

4

6

2

1

5

3

0

4

4

5

0

2

1

3

4

9

1

0

8

0

9

3

2

2

1

6

4

7

8

5

5

5

7

3

2

1

‘Ihble 3-5.

Standard Value Replacement 0.125 Resistors

90.9

100

110

121

133

147

162

178

46.4

51.1

56.2

61.9

68.1

75.0

82.5

196

215

237

261

287

316

348

383

10.0

11.0

12.1

13.3

14.7

16.2

17.8

19.6

21.5

23.7

26.1

28.7

31.6

34.8

38.3

42.2

0757-0346 2

0757-0378 0

0757-0379 1

0698-3427 0

0698-3428 1

0757-0382 6

0757-0294 9

0698-3429 2

0698-3430 5

0698-3431 6

0698-3432 7

0698-3433 8

0757-0180 2

0698-3434 9

0698-3435 0

0757-0316 6

0698-4037 0

0757-0394 0

0757-0395 1

0757-0276 7

0757-0397 3

0757-0398 4

0757-0399 5

0757-0400 9

0757-0401 0

0757-0402 1

0757-0403 2

0698-3437 2

0698-3438 3

0757-0405 4

0698-3439 4

0698-3440 7

0698-3441 8

0698-3442 9

0698-3 132 4

0698-3443 0

0698-3444 1

0698-3445 2

0698-3446 3

Resistors

Type: Fixed-Film

Range: 10 to 464K Ohms

Wattage: 0.125 at 125°C

Tolerance: f 1 .O%

Value (fl) EIP Part Number CD Value (0) HP Fart Number CD

422

464

511

562

619

1.78K

1.96K

2.15K

2.37K

2.61K

2.87K

3.16K

3.4813

681

750

825

909 l.OK

l.lK

1.21K

1.33K

1.47K

1.62K

3.83K

4.22K

4.64K

5.11K

5.62K

6.19K

6.81K

7.50K

8.25K

9.09K

lO.OK

ll.OK

12.1K

13.3K

14.7K

16.2K

0698-3447 4

0698-0082 7

0757-0416 7

0757-0417 8

0757-0418 9

0757-0419 0

0757-0420 3

0757-0421 4

0757-0422 5

0757-0280 3

0757-0424 7

0757-0274 5

0757-03 17 7

0757-1094 9

0757-0428 1

0757-0278 9

0698-0083 8

0698-0084 9

0698-3150 6

0698-0085 0

0698-3151 7

0757-0279 0

0698-3152 8

0698-3153 9

0698-3154 0

0698-3155 1

0757-0438 3

0757-0200 7

0757-0290 5

0757-0439 4

0757-0440 7

0757-0441 8

0757-0288 1

0757-0442 9

0757-0443 0

0757-0444 1

0757-0289 2

0698-3156 2

0757-0447 4



17.8K

19.6K

21.5K

23.7K

26.1K

28.7K

31.6K

34.8K

38.3K

42.2K

46.4K

51.1K

56.2K

61.9K

68.1K

75.OK

82.5K

90.9K

‘Ihble 3-5.


(continued)

Resistors

Type: Fixed-Film

Range: 10 to 464K Ohms

Wattage: 0.125 at 125°C lbleran

Value (0) BP Fart Number Value (n) HP Fart Number

-

0698-3136

0698-3157

0757-0199

0698-3158

0698-3159

0698-3449

0698-3160

0757-0123

0698-3161

0698-3450

0698-3162

0757-0458

0757-0459

0757-0460

0757-0461

0757-0462

0757-0463

0757-0464

9

0

3

9

7

8

2

1

3

4

5

8

4

5

3

3

6

8

196K

215K

237K

261K

287K

316K

348K

38313

422K

464K

1OOK

1lOK

121K

133K

147K

162K

178K

0757-0465

0757-0466

0757-0467

0698-345 1

0698-3452

0757-0470

0698-3243

0698-3453

0698-3454

0698-3266

0698-3455

0698-3456

0698-3457

0698-3458

0698-3459

0698-3460

0698-3260

2

3

3

8

4

5

7

8

5

6

9

1

8

1

0

6

7

A.

90.0

100

110

121

133

147

162

178

42.2

46.4

51.1

56.2

61.9

68.1

75.0

82.5

196

215

237

261

287

316

348

10.0

11.0

12.1

13.3

14.7

16.2

17.8

19.6

21.5

23.7

26.1

28.7

31.6

34.8

38.3

‘able 3-6. Standard Value Replacement 0.5 Resistors

Value (Q:

Resistors

Type: Fixed-Film

Range: 10 to 1.47M Ohms

Watt

TO1

w

e: 0.5 at 125°C an fl.O%

EP Part Number Value (fl: ElP Fart Number

0757-0795

0757-0796

0757-0797

0757-0198

0757-0798

0757-0799

0698-3399

0698-3400

0757-0802

0698-3334

0757- 1060

0698-3401

0698-3102

0757- 1090

0757-1092

0698-3402

0698-3403

0757-0984

0575-0985

0757-0986

0757-0001

0698-3388

0757-0989

0698-3389

0698-3390

0698-3391

0698-3392

0757-0003

0698-3393

0698-3394

0698-3395

0698-3396

0698-3397

0698-3398

0757-1000

0757-1001

0757-1002

0757-0794

0698-3404

0698-3405

0698-0090

0757-0814

0757-0815

0757-0158

0757-0816

0757-08 17

0757-08 18

0757-08 19

0757-0159

0757-0820

0757-082 1

0698-3406

0757-1078

0757-0873

0698-0089

0698-3407

0698-3408

0698-3409

0698-0024

0698-3101

0698-3410

0698-3411

0698-3412

0698-3346

0698-3348

0757-0833

0757-0834

0757-0196

0757-0835

0757-0836

0757-0837

0757-0838

0757-0839

0757-0841

0698-3413

0698-3414

1.96K

2.15K

2.37K

2.61K

2.87K

3.16K

3.48K

3.83K

4.22K

4.64K

5.11K

5.62K

6.19K

6.81K

7.50K

8.25K

9.09K

lO.OK

12.1K

13.3K

14.7K

383

422

464

511

562

619

681

750

825

909 l.OOK

l.lOK

1.21K

1.33K

1.47K

1.62K

1.78K

9

4

8

7

3

4

7

2

5

6

2

9

6

6

4

5

2

1

0

8

9

7

8

3

6

5

1

7

2

9

0

8

5

8

5

9

8

9

-

2

4

2

2

3

1

7

8

7

6

7

0

4

5

9

3

0

4

5

6

2

4

7

8

5

2

1

4

0

3

4

5

7

8

7

9

4

3



68.1K

75.OK

82.5K

90.9K

1OOK

1lOK

121K

133K

147K

16.2K

17.8K

19.6K

21.5K

23.7K

26.1K

28.7K

31.6K

34.8K

38.313

42.2K

46.4K

51.1K

56.2K

61.9K

Value (ff

‘able 3-6.


(continued)

Resistors

Type: Fixed-Film

Range: 10 to 1.47M Ohms

Wattage: 0.5 at 125°C

To1 ‘an fl.O%

EIP Part Number Value (a) EIP Fart Number

0757-0844

0698-0025

0698-3415

0698-3416

0698-3417

0698-3418

0698-3103

0698-3419

0698-3420

0698-342 1

0698-3422

0698-3423

0757-0853

0757-0854

0757-0309

0757-0855

0757-0856

0757-0857

0757-0858

0757-0367

0757-0859

0757-0860

0757-0310

0698-3175

7

2

0

5

5

0

6

7

5

8

8

9

9

1

0

9

8

7

6

7

5

6

3

4

-

162K

178K

196K

215K

237K

261K

287K

316K

348K

383K

422K

464K

511K

562K

619K

681K

750K

825K

909K

1M l.lM

1.21M

1.33M

1.47M

0757-0130

0757-0129

0757-0063

0757-0127

0698-3424

0757-0064

0757-0154

0698-3425

0757-0195

0757-0133

0757-0134

0698-3426

0757-0135

0757-0868

0757-0136

0757-0869

0757-0137

0757-0870

0757-0138

0757-0059

0757-0139

0757-0871

0757-0194

0698-3464

0

9

8

5

6

9

7

7

1

2

9

0

8

4

9

7

0

7

3

4

1

8

8

5

-

1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments

1. Low-Voltage

Power Supply

Adjustments

Reference

IF-Display Section:

AlA f15 V Regulator

AlA + 120 V, +5.2 V Regulator (Serial Number Prefix 3004A and above)

AlA + 100 V, +5.2 V Regulator (Serial Number Prefix 3001A and below)

RF Section:

A8 Rectifier

Al7 Positive Regulator

A 18 Negative Regulator

Description

The + 15 Vdc power supply is adjusted for the IF-Display Section, and the +22 Vdc and +20 Vdc power supplies are adjusted for the RF

Section. All other low-voltage supplies are measured to ensure that they are within tolerance.

Equipment

Figure 3-1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments Setup

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3456A



Procedure

IF-Display Section

1. Position the instrument on its right side with the IF-Display

Section facing right, as shown in Figure 3-l. Remove the top cover of the IF-Display Section and the bottom cover of the RF

Section.

2. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. The MAINS power-on indicator AlABDSl (red LED) in the IF-Display Section should be lit. See Figure 3-2 or Figure 3-3 for the location of

AlABDSl.

Note

Use Figure 3-2 for IF-Display Sections with serial number prefix 3001A and below. Use Figure 3-3 for IF-Display Sections with serial numbers

3004A and above.

3. Verify that the + 15 V indicator AlAGDSl (yellow LED) is lit.

4. Connect the DVM to AlA6TP3 on the IF-Display Section. The

DVM indication should be + 15.000 fO.O1O V dc. If the voltage is out of tolerance, adjust AlA6R9 + 15 V ADJ for the specified voltage.

AlA6R9

AlA6DS2

AlA6TP4

AlA’DS2

AlA7TP3

Figure 3-2.

IF-Display Section Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below)



AlAGDSl

AlA6TP3

/

AlA7TP2

, AlA7DSl

/

AlA8DSl

AlAGR9

AlA6DS2

’ AlA7DS2 i AlA7TP3

Note

Note

Figure 3-3.

IF-Display Section Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above)

5. Verify that the -15 V indicator AlA6DS2 (yellow LED) is lit.

6. Connect the DVM to AlA6TP4. The DVM indication should be

-15.000 f0.050 V dc. The -15 V supply is referenced to the + 15

V supply; therefore, if the -15 V supply is out of tolerance, a circuit malfunction is indicated.

7. Verify that the + 120 V indicator AlA7DS2 (yellow LED) is lit.

On IF-Display Sections with serial number prefix 3001A and below, indicator AlA7DS2 is a + 100 V indicator.


+ 120.0 f3.0 V dc. The + 120 V supply is referenced to the + 15

V supply; therefore, if the + 120 V supply is out of tolerance, a circuit malfunction is indicated.

On IF-Display Sections with serial number prefix 3001A and below, the DVM indication should be + 100.0 f2.0 V dc.

9. Verify that the +5.2 V indicator AlA7DSl (yellow LED) is lit.


+5.200 f0.050 V dc. The +5.2 V supply is referenced to the + 15

V supply; therefore, if the +5.2 V supply is out of tolerance, a circuit malfunction is indicated.



RF Section

11. With the LINE switch still ON, the RF Section’s +22 V indicator

A8DSl (yellow LED) should be lit. See Figure 3-4.

12. Connect the DVM to A8TPl and the DVM ground lead to chassis ground. Adjust A8R2 +22 V ADJ for a DVM indication of

+22.000 f0.020 V dc.

Note

If A8R2 +22V ADJ does not provide sufficient adjustment range, select a new value for factory-select component A8R6. An increase in the value of A8R6 decreases the voltage at A8TPl. Conversely, a decrease in the value of A8R6 increases the voltage at A8TPl. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for the acceptable range of values and corresponding HP part numbers for A8R6, and to Figure 3-4 for the location of A8R6.

13. Verify that the +20 V indicator A17DS2 (yellow LED) is lit.

14. Connect the DVM to A17TP4. Adjust A17R50 +20 V ADJ for a

DVM indication of +20.000 fO.OO1 V dc.

15. Verify that the + 12 V indicator A17DS4 (yellow LED) is lit.

16. Connect the DVM to A17TP6. The DVM indication should be + 12.25 LO.30 V dc. The + 12 V supply voltage is set by a precision voltage regulator; therefore, if the + 12 V supply is out of tolerance, a circuit malfunction is indicated.

17. Verify that the +5.2 V indicator A17DSl (yellow LED) is lit.



24. Connect the DVM to A18TP4. The DVM indication should be

-10.0 3~0.1 V dc. The -10 V supply is referenced to the +20 V supply; therefore, if the -10 V supply is out of tolerance, a circuit malfunction is indicated.


2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and Below)

2. High-Voltage

Adjustment (SN

3001A and Below)

Note

Note

This procedure is for IF-Display Sections with serial number prefixes

3001A and below. The procedure for serial prefixes 3004A and above is located immediately after this procedure.

This procedure should be performed whenever the AlAll High

Voltage Multiplier, AlVl CRT, or AlA High Voltage Regulator

Assembly is repaired or replaced.

Reference

IF-Display Section:

AlA Z-Axis Amplifier

AlA High-Voltage Regulator

AlA f15 V Regulator

AlA + 100 V, +5.2 V Regulator

Description

Warning This procedure is intended for adjustment purposes only.

Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Approximately -4000 V dc can be present on the AlA High Voltage assembly even when the ac line cord is disconnected. Do not attempt to remove the AlA High-Voltage

Assembly from the instrument. Do not disconnect the CRT’s post-accelerator cable; the CRT can hold a + 18 kV dc charge for several days.

If for any reason the AlA High Voltage Assembly or the postaccelerator cable must be removed, refer to “Discharge

Procedure for High Voltage and CRT” at the end of this adjustment procedure.

A 1OOO:l divider probe is used to measure the CRT cathode voltage.

First, the high-voltage probe is calibrated by comparing measurements of the + 100 V dc supply voltage with and without the probe. Any measurement error due to the use of the high-voltage probe is calculated into the adjustment specification of the CRT cathode voltage, which is adjusted with the AlA HV ADJUST control. When the CRT cathode voltage is properly adjusted, the CRT filament voltage will be +4.45 f0.04 V rms measured with CRT beam at cut-off, which is required for maximum CRT life. The filament voltage is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and can only be measured directly with special equipment.

Adjustments 3-3 1


DIGITAL VDLTMTER

HI-VDLTAGE

Equipment

SIGNAL ANALYZER

Figure 3-5. High Voltage Adjustment Setup

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3456A

DC High-Voltage Probe (1000: 1 divider) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 34lllA

Display Adjustment PC Board (service accessory) ... HP 85662-60088

Digitizing Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 54501A

1O:l Divider Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10432A

Function Generator (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 3312A

High-Voltage

Adjustment Procedure

Warning

Warning

Note

In the following procedure, it is necessary to probe voltages which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Use a nonmetallic alignment tool when making adjustments. Be extremely careful.

Do not attempt to measure the CRT filament voltage directly. The filament voltage is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and can only be measured safely with a special high-voltage true-rms voltmeter and probe.

1. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY.

2. Remove the top cover from the IF-Display Section, and connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-5 and described in the following steps.

3. Set the DVM to the 100 V range, and connect the DVM to

AlA7TP3 (+ 100 V). Do not use the high-voltage probe. See

Figure 3-6 for the location of AlA7TP3.

The accuracy of the high-voltage probe is specified for a probe connected to a dc voltmeter with 10 M62 input resistance. HP 3456A and HP 3455A digital voltmeters have a 10 Md) input resistance on the

100 V and 1000 V ranges. All measurements in this procedure should


2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and Below) be performed with the DVM manually set to the 100 V range (*OO.OOO

on the HP 3456A display).

Warning

Warning

, AlA8DSl

AlA H I G H

V O L T A G E

R E G U L A T O R

+ AlA7TP3

. AlA6R32

Figure 3-6. Location of High Voltage Adjustments

4. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. Set the front-panel

INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise (CRT beam at cut-off) to prevent possible damage to the CRT.

5. Note .the DVM indication at AlA7TP3.

DVM Indication:

6. Connect the high-voltage probe to the DVM. Connect the probe to

AlA7TP3.

7. Note the DVM indication.

DVM Indication:

8. Divide the DVM indication in step 7 by the DVM indication in step 5. This gives the calibration factor needed to compensate for high-voltage probe error.

Calibration Factor:

9. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from AlA7TP3. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the ac line cord from both instrument sections.

The MAINS power-on indicator AlASDSl (red LED) should be completely off before proceeding with this procedure. See

Figure 3-6. The indicator will remain lit for several seconds after the ac line cord has been removed, and will go out slowly (the light becomes dimmer until it is completely out).

With the protective cover removed in the following step, do not place hands near the AlA High-Voltage assembly. High voltage

(approximately -4000 V dc) can be present even when the ac line cord is disconnected.



Note

10. Wait at least one minute for capacitors to discharge to a safe level.

11. Remove the protective cover from the AlA High-Voltage

Regulator. A label should be visible on the AlA3Tl High-Voltage

Transformer. Record the voltage listed on the label for use in step

15.

If the label is missing, use the nominal value of -3790 Vdc.

Warning

12. Connect the high-voltage probe to AlA3TP3. See Figure 3-7 for the location of the test point.

With power supplied to the instrument, AlA3TP3 is at a voltage level of approximately -4000 V dc. Be extremely careful.

AlA

H i g h V o l t a g e

R e g u lotor

/

L o b e I

AlA3TP3

H V T P AlA3TP5

Figure 3-7. Location of Label and Test Point

13. Reconnect ac line cords to both instrument sections. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON.

14. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the dc regulator circuits to stabilize.

15. Adjust AlA6R32 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the calibration factor (calculated in step 8) times the voltage labeled on the top of AlA High-Voltage Regulator (noted in step 11). See

Figure 3-6 for the location of the adjustment.

V dc

E XAMPLE :

If the calibration factor calculated in step 8 is 0.00099, and

AlA3Tl is labeled for -3875 V, then adjust AlA6R32 HV ADJ for a DVM indication of:

0.00099 x (-3875 V) = -3.836 V dc

16. With the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise, wait approximately 30 minutes to allow the high-voltage supply to


2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and Below) stabilize and the CRT to normalize. This so$ turn-on will extend

CRT life expectancy, particularly if a new CRT has just been installed.

17. Readjust AlA6R32 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 15.

18. If a new CRT has just been installed do the following: a. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control so the CRT trace is barely visible.

b. Wait an additional 30 minutes for the CRT to normalize.

c. Readjust AlA6R32 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 15.

Focus and Intensity

19. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the

Adjustments ac line cord from each instrument section.

20. Wait at least one minute for the MAINS power-on indicator

AlA8DSl (red LED) to go out completely before proceeding.

21. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from AlA3TP3.

22. Remove the A3A2 Intensity Control Assembly from the IF-Display

Section and install in its place the Display Adjustment Board,

HP part number 85662-60088. Set the switch on the Display

Adjustment Board in the “down” position. (This applies approximately +2.7 V dc to the front-panel INTENSITY control.)

23. Connect a calibrated 1O:l divider probe to the oscilloscope

Channel 1 input.

24. On the oscilloscope, press CRECALL) [ml to perform a soft reset.

25. On the oscilloscope, press m), rn~xe preae% probe , select channel 1, and use the front-panel knob to select a 10: 1 probe.

26. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:

Press (CHAN):

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on

amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lO.OV/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6O.OOOOV

coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc

Press @iKXiZj+: time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5O~s/div

Press ITRIG):

EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . auto, edge source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l

level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75.0000 V, rising edge

Press (DISPLAY): connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

27. On the oscilloscope press m.

28. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to AlA3TP5 using a long probe extension. See Figure 3-7 for the location of AlA3TP5.

29. Reconnect the ac line cords to each instrument section. Adjust the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter-clockwise, and


2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and Below) then set the LINE switch to ON (the INSTR CHECK I LED will light.)

30. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the dc regulator circuits to stabilize again.

31. With the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise, adjust AlA2R35 INT LIMIT (clockwise) until a spot is just visible in the lower left corner of the CRT. See Figure 3-8 for the location of the adjustment.

Note

The AlA2R35 INT LIMIT adjustment compensates for the variation in beam cut-off voltage of different CR’& and indirectly sets the maximum beam intensity. AlA2R35 INT LIMIT should have enough range to turn the CRT spot on and off. If the spot is always on, decrease the value of AlA2R9. If the spot is always off, increase the value of AlA2R9. Refer to %ble 3-3 for the acceptable range of values, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers. Refer to Figure 3-8 for the location of AlA2R9.

R36

ASTIG

\

R35 R5

I N T I NT

L I M I T G A I N R9

I /

-I

/

Figure 3-8. Location of AlA Components

32. Using a non-metallic alignment tool, center the front panel FOCUS control and adjust AlA2R36 ASTIG and AlA3R14 FOCUS LIMIT for a sharp, focused dot on the CRT display.

33. Adjust AlA2R35 INT LIMIT until the dot just disappears.

34. On the oscilloscope, adjust the channel 1 offset voltage as necessary to measure the peak-to-peak CRT cut-off voltage, V,,, at AlA3TP5. See Figure 3-9. This peak-to-peak voltage should be between 45-75 V,-,. Note this voltage for use in step 39.

V

CO: VW


2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and Below) i ..___ -_.- ..~................~. - ._.. i .._..... - .._.........................................--..................... !

-250.000 US 0.00000 s 250.000 us

50.0 us/div

1 f 75.00 v

Figure 3-9. CRT Cut-Off Voltage

35. Connect a separate function generator to each of the X and Y inputs of the Display Adjustment Board, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Set the function generators as follows:

X input Jl: frequency . .

.

.

. . . . . . . .

wave . . . , , . .

amplitude . .

. .

.

Y input 52: frequency . .

. . . . . . .

. . .

wave . . . . . .

. . . .

amplitude . .

.

. .

.

. .

. . . .

. .

.

. .

. . . . . . . .

5 0 0

. .

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

.

. .

kHz

1 kHz

36. Adjust AlA2R35 INT LIMIT clockwise until the display is just visible.

37. Adjust AlA4R7 POS, AlA5R7 POS, and if necessary the function generator dc offsets for a full-screen illumination.

38. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter-clockwise, and, if it is not sealed, adjust AlA2R5 INT GAIN fully clockwise.

Adjust AlA2R35 INT LIMIT just below the threshold at which the display illumination becomes visible.

39. Slowly adjust the front-panel INTENSITY control through its entire range while monitoring the peak-to-peak voltage at

AlA3TP5. As the INTENSITY control is turned clockwise, the peak-to-peak voltage at AlA3TP5 will drop. To prevent long-term

CRT damage, this voltage should not drop below (V,, - 5O)V,, or



12 VP+, whichever is greater. See Figure 3-10. (The value of V,, was recorded in step 34.)

If the front-panel INTENSITY control cannot be set fully clockwise without dropping below this minimum peak-to-peak voltage, then perform the following: a. Set the INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise.

b. Set the LINE switch to STANDBY.

c. Increase the value of AlA2R9.

d. Return to step 34.

Note

Maximum CRT life expectancy is obtained when the peak-to-peak voltage at AlA3TP5 is as large as possible with the INTENSITY control set fully clockwise. The display illumination must fully disappear with the INTENSITY control set fully counter clockwise.

+ r u n n i n g

1 0 . 0 V/dlv

.+

.+

.+

4.

,......,....,.......... i ..__.......................~....~.....

0 . 0 0 0 0 0 s

5 0 . 0 us/div

1 f 85.00 v

Figure 3-10. Waveform at AlA3TP5

40. Replace the cover on the AlA High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.



41. The High-Voltage Adjustment is completed. If an AlA2, AlA4, or AlA assembly has been repaired or replaced, perform adjustment procedure 3, “Preliminary Display Adjustment (SN

3001A and Below)“, and then adjustment procedure 4, “Final

Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below)“. If the AlA2,

AlA4, and AlA assemblies function properly and do not require compensation, proceed directly to adjustment procedure 4, “Final

Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below)“.

Discharge Procedure

The adjustment procedures in this manual do not require the removal for High Voltage and or discharge of the AlA High-Voltage Regulator or CRT assemblies.

CRT However, if for any reason the AlA High Voltage Regulator Assembly or the post-accelerator cable must be removed, the following procedure ensures the proper safety.

Warning This procedure should be performed by qualified personel only.

Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Approximately -4000 V dc is present on the

AlA High-Voltage Regulator assembly even when the ac line cord is disconnected. The CRT can hold a + 18 kV dc charge for several days if the post-accelerator cable is improperly disconnected.

Warning Do not handle the AlA High-Voltage Regulator Assembly or

AlAl 1 High-Voltage Multiplier until the following high-voltage discharge procedure has been performed.

Warning

Warning

1. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to STANDBY, remove the ac line cords, and remove the AlA High Voltage Regulator safety cover.

With the ac power cord disconnected, voltages are still present which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury.

In the following step, a large arc of high voltage should be drawn.

Be careful.

2. Locate the snap connector on the CRT post-accelerator cable.

It is shown in Figure 3-11 as item 1. Using a long flat-bladed screwdriver with an insulated handle, carefully pry the connector loose but do not disconnect the cable.

a. Using one hand, remove the end of the cable labeled item 2 in Figure 3-l 1. As the end of the cable becomes free, touch the end of the cable to the CRT’s metal cover. A large arc of high voltage should ground to the CRT cover. The CRT is not discharged yet!

b. Reconnect the CRT post-accelerator cable, and repeat the above step until high-voltage arcs no longer appear.

3. Leave the CRT post-accelerator cable disconnected, and remove the cover on the AlA High Voltage Regulator.



4. Connect a jumper wire (insulated wire and two alligator clips) between the shaft of a small screwdriver and the chassis ground lug on the inside of the high-voltage shield.

5. While holding the insulated handle of the screwdriver, touch the grounded blade to the following connections: a. Both brown wires going to the rear of the CRT from AlA via cable harness W2 1.

b. The yellow, blue, and orange wires in the same cable as “a. ” above.

c. The top lead of each of the 11 large vertical capacitors on the

AlA High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.

6. Connect the jumper wire from chassis ground to the black wire coming from the AlAll High-Voltage Multiplier at the wire’s connection to AlASTl.

w21 AlAl 1

AIA3

H i g h V o l t a g e

R e g u l a t o r AlA3T

II / /

AlA3Tl AlA

Figure 3-11. Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable

7. Remove all jumper wires. The AlA High-Voltage Regulator, AlAll

High-Voltage Multiplier, and AlVl CRT assemblies should now be discharged.

8. A small bracket and screw secure the AlA High-Voltage Regulator

Assembly to the AlAlO Display Motherboard Assembly. The bottom cover of the IF-Display Section must be removed to gain access to this screw prior to removal of the AlA High-Voltage

Regulator Assembly.


2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN 3004A and Above)

2. High-Voltage

Adjustment (SN

3004A and Above)

Note

Note

This procedure is for IF-Display Sections with serial number prefixes

3004A and above. The procedure for serial prefixes 3001A and below is located immediately before this procedure.

This procedure should be performed whenever the AlVl CRT or

AlA High Voltage Regulator Assembly is repaired or replaced.

Reference

IF-Display Section:


AlA High-Voltage Regulator

AlA f15 V Regulator

AlA + 120 V, +5.2 V Regulator

Description

Warning This procedure is intended for adjustment purposes only.

Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Approximately -2400 V dc can be present on the AlA High Voltage Regulator Assembly even when the ac line cord is disconnected. Do not attempt to remove the AlA

High-Voltage Regulator Assembly from the instrument. Do not disconnect the CRT’s post-accelerator cable; the CRT can hold a

+ 9500 V dc charge for several days.

If for any reason the AlA High Voltage Assembly or the postaccelerator cable must be removed, refer to “Discharge

Procedure for High Voltage and CRT” at the end of this adjustment procedure.

A 1OOO:l divider probe is used to measure the CRT cathode voltage.

First, the high-voltage probe is calibrated by comparing measurements of the + 120 V dc supply voltage with and without the probe. Any measurement error due to the use of the high-voltage probe is calculated into the adjustment specification of the CRT cathode voltage, which is adjusted with the AlA HV ADJUST control. When the CRT cathode voltage is properly adjusted, the CRT filament voltage will be +6.00 60.05 V rms measured with CRT beam at cut-off, which is required for maximum CRT life. The filament voltage is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and can only be measured directly with special equipment.



Equipment

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 3456A

DC High-Voltage Probe (1OOO:l divider) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 34111A

High-Voltage


Warning In the following procedure, it is necessary to probe voltages which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Use a nonmetallic alignment tool when making adjustments. Be extremely careful.

Warning Do not attempt to measure the CRT filament voltage directly. The filament voltage is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and can only be measured safely with a special high-voltage true-rms voltmeter and probe.


2. Remove the top cover from the IF-Display Section and connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-12.

Note

DIGITAL VOLTETER cm$

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Figure 3-12. High Voltage Adjustment Setup

3. Set the DVM to the 1OOV range, and connect the DVM to

AlA7TP3 (+ 120V) without the high-voltage probe. See

Figure 3-13.

The accuracy of the high-voltage probe is specified for a probe connected to a dc voltmeter with 10 MO input resistance. HP 3456A and HP 3455A digital voltmeters have a 10 MO input resistance on the

100 V and 1000 V ranges. All measurements in this procedure should be performed with the DVM manually set to the 100 V range (kOO.000

on the HP 3456A display).



AlA8DSl

AlA7TP3

AlA H I G H

V O L T A G E

R E G U L A T O R

AlA6R103

Warning

Warning

Figure 3-13. Location of High Voltage Adjustments

4. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. Set the front-panel

INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise (CRT beam at cut-off) to prevent possible damage to the CRT.

5. Note the DVM indication at AlA7TP3.

DVM Indication:

6. Connect the high-voltage probe to the DVM, and connect the probe to AlA7TP3.

7. Note the DVM indication.

DVM Indication:

8. Divide the DVM indication in step 7 by the DVM indication in step 5. This gives the calibration factor needed to compensate for high-voltage probe error.

Calibration Factor:

9. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from AlA7TP3. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the ac line cord from both instrument sections.

The MAINS power-on indicator AlASDSl (red LED) should be completely off before proceeding with this procedure. See

Figure 3-13 The indicator will remain lit for several seconds after the ac line cord has been removed, and will go out slowly (the light becomes dimmer until it is completely out).

With the protective cover removed in the following step, do not place hands near the AlA High-Voltage assembly. High voltage

(approximately -2400 V dc) can present even when the ac line cord is disconnected.

10. Wait at least one minute for capacitors to discharge to a safe level.



Warning

11. Remove the protective cover from the AlA High-Voltage

Regulator Assembly. A label should be visible on the

AlA3Al HighVoltage Assembly. (AlA3Al is mounted on the non-component side of the High-Voltage Regulator Assembly as shown in Figure 3-14.) Record the voltage listed on the label for use in step 15. In cases where more than one voltage is listed on this label, record the value which is closest to -2400 Vdc.

V dc

With power supplied to the instrument, AlA3TP2A is at a voltage level of approximately -2400 V dc. Be extremely careful.

12. Connect the high-voltage probe to AlA3TP2A. See Figure 3-14 for the location of the test point.

AlA3Al L A B E L AlA3TPZA

AlA3TPZA

Figure 3-14. Location ’ AlA Label and Test Point

13. Reconnect ac line cords to both instrument sections. Set the LINE switch to ON.

14. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the dc regulator circuits to stabilize.

15. Adjust AlA6R103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the calibration factor (calculated in step 8) times the voltage labeled on the top of the AlA3Al High-Voltage Assembly (noted in step

11). See Figure 3-13 for the location of the adjustment.

V dc

E

XAMPLE

:

If the calibration factor calculated in step 8 is 0.00099, and

AlA3Al is labeled for -2400 V, then adjust AlA6R103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication of:

0.00099 x (-2400 V) = -2.376 V dc

16. With the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise, wait approximately 10 minutes to allow the high-voltage supply to stabilize and the CRT to normalize. This soj% turn-on will extend



CRT life expectancy, particularly if a new CRT has just been installed.

17. Readjust AlA6R103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 15.

18. If a new CRT has just been installed do the following: a. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control so the CRT trace is barely visible.

b. Wait an additional 30 minutes for the CRT to normalize.

c. Readjust AlA6R103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 15.

19. Set the LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the ac line cord from each instrument section.

20. Wait at least one minute for the MAINS power-on indicator

AlA8DSl (red LED) to go out completely before proceeding.

21. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from AlA3TP2A.

22. Replace the cover on the AlA High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.

23. The High-Voltage adjustments are now completed. If the AlA assembly has been repaired or replaced, perform adjustment procedure 3, “Preliminary Display Adjustment (SN 3004A and

Above)“, and then adjustment procedure 4, “Final Display

Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above)“. If the AlA assembly functions properly and does not require compensation, proceed directly to adjustment procedure 4, “Final Display Adjustments

(SN 3004A and Above)“.



Discharge Procedure

The High-Voltage Adjustment procedure does not require the removal for High Voltage and or discharge of the AlA High-Voltage Regulator or AlVl CRT

CRT assemblies. However, if for any reason the AlA High Voltage

Regulator Assembly, the CRT, or the CRT post-accelerator cable must be removed, perform the following procedure to ensure proper safety.

Warning This procedure should be performed by qualified personnel only.

Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Approximately -2400 V dc can be present on the

AlA High-Voltage Regulator assembly even when the ac line cord is disconnected. The CRT can hold a +9500 V dc charge for several days if the post-accelerator cable is improperly disconnected.

Warning

1. Remove the ac line cord from both instrument sections.

With the ac power cords disconnected, voltages can still be present which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury.

2. Obtain an electrician’s screwdriver which has a thin blade at least eight inches long. The handle of the screwdriver must be made of an insulating material.

3. Connect one end of a jumper wire (made of insulated wire and two alligator clips) to the blade of the screwdriver. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the metal chassis of the IFDisplay

Section. This grounds the screwdriver.

4. Slide the screwdriver’s blade between the CRT and the sheet metal as shown in Figure 3-15. Gently work the tip of the screwdriver under the post-accelerator cable’s rubber shroud. Make sure that the screwdriver’s tip touches the connection between the postaccelerator cable and the CRT. You should hear a cracking sound when the cable discharges.

5. Remove the cover from the AlA High-Voltage Regulator assembly.

6. Touch the screwdriver’s tip to the top lead of each of the 11 large vertical capacitors on the AlA High-Voltage Regulator assembly.

7. The AlA High-Voltage Regulator and AlVl CRT assemblies should now be discharged.


G r o u n d i n g

W i r e


Note

Figure 3-15. Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable

A small bracket and screw secure the AlA High-Voltage Regulator

Assembly to the AlAlO Display Motherboard Assembly. The bottom cover of the IF-Display Section must be removed to gain access to this screw prior to removal of the AlA High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.


3. Preliminary

Display

Adjustments (SN


Reference

Note

Note

AlAl Keyboard


AlA X-Deflection Amplifier

AlA Y-Deflection Amplifier

Adjustment 2, “High-Voltage Adjustment,” should be performed before performing the following adjustment procedure.

Perform this adjustment only if components have been replaced on the AlA Z-Axis Amplifier, AlA X-Deflection Amplifier, or AlA

YDeflection Amplifier Assemblies. Components AlA2R22 HF GAIN,

AlA2C10, AlA4R28 HF GAIN, AlA$ClO, AlA4Cl1, AlA5R28 HF

GAIN, AlA5C10, and AlA5Cll are factory adjusted and normally do not require readjustment.

Description

Caution

The Al Display Section is adjusted to compensate the CRT drive circuits for proper horizontal and vertical characteristics. These preliminary adjustments are necessary only when a major repair has been performed in the display section (for example, replacement or repair of the AlA Z Axis Amplifier, AlA X-Deflection Amplifier, or

AlA Y-Deflection Amplifier assemblies). For routine maintenance,

CRT replacement, or minor repairs, only adjustment procedure 4,

“Final Display Adjustments,” needs to be performed.

Be sure not to allow a high intensity spot to remain on the spectrum analyzer CRT. A fixed spot of high intensity may permanently damage the CRT’s phosphor coating. Monitor the CRT closely during the following adjustment procedures. If a spot occurs, move it off-screen by adjusting either the front-panel INTENSITY control, or the horizontal or vertical deflection position controls.

Equipment

Digitizing Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 54501A

Pulse/Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8 116A

1O:l Divider Probe, 10 MW7.5 pF (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 10432A

Display Adjustment PC Board (serwice accessory) . . . . . . .85662-60088

Termination, BNC 5061 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11593A

Adapters:

Adapter, BNC tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-0781

Adapter, BNC(f) to SMB(f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1236


3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below)

Procedure

X and Y Deflection

Amplifier Pulse

Response Adjustments

Note

1. Connect a 10: 1 (10 MQ) divider probe to the oscilloscope’s channel

1 input and a 1O:l divider probe to the channel 4 input.

2. On the oscilloscope, press CRECALL] [GK] to perform a soft reset.

3. On the oscilloscope, press (CHAN] more preset probe , select channel 1, and use the front-panel knob to select a 10: 1 probe.

4. Select channel 4, and use the front-panel knob to select a 10: 1 probe.

5. Press @iGiQ

6. Connect the channel 1 probe to the oscilloscope rear panel PROBE

COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector. Press

[ AUTO - SCALE ). Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum square wave display on the oscilloscope.




Each probe is now compensated for the oscilloscope input to which it is connected. Do not interchange probes without recompensating.

8. Connect the channel 1 1O:l divider probe to AlA4E1,and the channel 4 probe to AlA4E2, as shown in Figure 3-16. Connect the probe ground leads to chassis ground. See Figure 3-17 and

Figure 3-18 for the location of the assemblies and test points.

PULSE/FUNCTION

GENERATOR

I

SPECTRUl ANALYZER

OUTPUT

Figure 3-16. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup

9. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the cover over A3 Digital Storage Section and remove A3A2 Intensity

Control Assembly. Insert the Display Adjustment PC board (HP part number 85662-60088) into the A3A2 slot. See Figure 3-17 for the location of the A3A2 assembly.



AlA

AlA

AtA

/ A3A2

Figure 3-17. Location of AlA2, AlA4, AlA5, and A3A2

R 2 2

Hf G A I N

\

IYT

G A I N 11 E.2

/


Note

L

~ooooooooooooooor

AlA

AlA4/AlA5

GA15

Figure 3-18. AlA2, AlA4, and AlA Adjustment Locations

10. Set the pulse/funtion generator controls as follows:

MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM

Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..pulse

Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 kHz

Width (WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ns

Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.00 V

Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OOO mV

Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off (OUTPUT enabled)

11. Connect the output of the pulse/function generator to Jl (X input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in the A3A2 slot as shown in

Figure 3-16.

The pulse/function generator output must be terminated with 50 ohms. Use a BNC tee, a 500 termination, and a BNC female to SMB female adapter. Install the 500 termination as close to the Display

Adjustment PC Board as possible.



Press (CHAN]:

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on amplitude scale ...................................... 10.0 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..25.0000 V

Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..lO.OV/di v offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..60.000 0 V

Press ITRIG): source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0000 V

Press (TIME]: time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50.0 ns/div delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.000 ns

Press (-1: connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press ISHOW).

13. Set the spectrum analyzer front-panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise, and then set the LINE switch to ON.

14. The X+ deflection and X- deflection waveforms should be superimposed on the oscilloscope display, as shown in Figure 3-19.

If necessary, adjust AlA4R7 X POSN and AlA4R27 X GAIN for a centered display of at least four vertical divisions. See Figure 3-18 for the location of the adjustments.

hp s t o p p e d t-mote l i s t e n

1 0 . 0 Vfdtv

I .._._...................

- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 “ s

..--..........

(8

.I..I

- -- - ........

.._. I

1 2 5 . 0 0 0 “s 3 7 5 . 0 0 0 ns

5 0 . 0 ns/dtv

1 0 . 0 V/div

; 10.00 : 1 d c

1 f 25.00 v

Figure 3-19. X + and X- Waveforms


Press [WF~RM

MATH

): f l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .channel 1 - channel 4 sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25.0 V/div

16. Three waveforms should be displayed on the oscilloscope, as shown in Figure 3-20. The lower composite waveform represents


3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below) the combined X deflection voltage applied to the CRT. Use the oscilloscope front-panel knob to adjust waveform fl sensitivity for approximately 8 vertical divisions.

hp r u n n i n g

Note i . . ..~...............~....

- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 ns 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 ns

5 0 . 0 ns/div

3 7 5 . 0 0 0 rls

1 f 25.00 v

Figure 3-20. Composite X Deflection Waveform

17. Adjust AlA4R28 HF GAIN, AlA4C10, and AlA4Cll for minimum overshoot and minimum rise and fall times of the composite

X-deflection waveform. See Figure 3-18 for the location of the adjustments.

Always adjust AlA4ClO and AlA4Cll in approximately equal amounts. Do not adjust one to its minimum value and the other to its maximum value.

18. Use the oscilloscope m markers to measure the risetime, falltime, and percent overshoot of the composite Xdefection waveform. Rise and fall times should both be less than approximately 65 ns between the 10% and 90% points on the waveform. Overshoot should be less than 3% (approximately 0.25

divisions). See Figure 3-21.



O V E R S H O O T

OVERSHOOl

Figure 3-2 1.

Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment Waveform

19. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to AlA5El and the channel 4 probe to AlA5E2. See Figure 3-18 for the location of the test points. Connect the output of the pulse/function generator to 52 (Y input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in the A3A2 slot.

20. The Y Deflection Amplifier is identical to the X Deflection

Amplifier. Repeat steps 12 through 18 for the Y Deflection

Amplifier using R7, R27, R28, ClO, and Cl1 respectively.

Pulse Response of

21. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 4 probe from the spectrum

Control Gate Z analyzer. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to AlA2TP2,

Amplifler to BLANK and connect the probe ground lead to chassis ground.

Input

22. On the oscilloscope, press [RECALL) (CLEAR) to perform a soft reset.

23. Press (CHAN), CHHNEL 1 on, more preset probe , and use the front-panel knob to set the probe to lO.OO:l. Press more .


Press m): amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..25.OOOOV

Press (TIME]: time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50.0 ns/div delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.000 ns

Press L‘TRIG]: level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.00000 v connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press m).

25. Connect the output of the pulse/function generator to 53 (Z input) on the Display Adjustment PC Board in the A3A2 slot. Set the board’s switch to the down position.



Note



26. Set the pulse/function generator controls as follows:

MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM

Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..pulse

Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 kHz

Width (WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ns

Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.OOV

Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.OOV

27. Set the spectrum analyzer front-panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise. Adjust the oscilloscope trigger level for a stable display.

Note the display on the oscilloscope. The pulse should be >55V peak-to-peak.


Press m):

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8.0 V/div

Press m).

29. Adjust AlA4R7 X POS and AlA5R7 Y POS to either extreme to position the CRT beam off-screen (to prevent possible damage to the CRT phosphor). If it is not sealed, adjust AlA2R5 INT GAIN fully clockwise.

30. Adjust the spectrum analyzer front-panel INTENSITY control for

50 V peak-to-peak (6.25 divisions) as indicated on the oscilloscope.

See Figure 3-22.

. .._...............

_................... ,.. ,.. _._ . ..-.....................................................~ .._.............

.I.

1 8 . 0 0 V/div

,rrset: 4 5 . 0 0 v

10.00 : I dc

.:.

i .._.............................-...........~......~........................................... I .._............................................................................. “.. ,,,,,,.,,,,,,,..,. *

- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 ns 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 “ s

5 0 . 0 ns/div

37s.000 ns

1 f 50.00 v

Figure 3-22. 5OV,., Signal

31. Adjust AlA2R22 HF GAIN and AlA2ClO for minimum overshoot on rise and minimum rise and fall times of the pulse waveform.



32. Use the oscilloscope [@iGJ markers to measure the risetime, falltime, and percent overshoot of the pulse waveform. Rise and falltimes should be less than 50 ns and 90 ns respectively.

Overshoot on the rise should be less than 5% (approximately 0.4

divisions).

33. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY, and center potentiometers AlA4R7 X POSN and AlA5R7 Y POSN.

34. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe from the spectrum analyzer. Remove the Display Adjustment PC board from the

A3A2 slot, and reinstall the A3A2 Intensity Control Assembly.

Replace the A3 Section cover and cables.

35. Perform Adjustment Procedure 4, Final Display Adjustment (SN

3001A and Below).


3. Preliminary

Display

Adjustments (SN


Reference

Note

AlAl Keyboard

AlA X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier

Adjustment Procedure 2, “High-Voltage Adjustment,” should be performed before performing the following adjustment procedure.

Note

Perform this adjustment only if components have been replaced on the AlA X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier Assembly. Components R117, R217,

R308, C104, C109, C204, C209, and C307 are factory adjusted and normally do not require readjustment. Components affecting these adjustments are located in function blocks F, H, M, N, 0, P, R, and S of the AlA X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier Assembly schematic diagram.

Description

Caution

The X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier Assembly is adjusted to compensate the

CRT drive circuits for proper horizontal and vertical characteristics.

These preliminary adjustments are necessary only after replacement or repair of the AlA X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier Assembly). For routine maintenance, CRT replacement, or minor repairs, only Adjustment

Procedure 4, “Final Display Adjustments,” needs to be performed.

Be sure not to allow a fixed spot of high intensity to remain on the spectrum analyzer CRT. A high intensity spot may permanently damage the CRT’s phosphor coating. Monitor the CRT closely during the following adjustment procedures. If a spot occurs, move it off-screen by adjusting either the front-panel INTENSITY control, or the horizontal or vertical deflection position controls.

Equipment

Digitizing Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 545OlA

Pulse/Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8116A

10: 1 Divider Probe, 10 MW7.5 pF, (2 required) . . . . .

HP 10432A

Display Adjustment PC Board (service accessory) . . . . . .85662-60088

Termination, BNC 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11593A

Adapters:

Adapter, BNC(f) to SMB(f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-1236

Adapter, BNC tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-0781


3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above)

Procedure

X and Y Deflection

Amplifier Pulse

Response Adjustments

Note

1. Connect a 10: 1 (10 Ma) divider probe to the oscilloscope’s channel

1 input and a 10: 1 divider probe to the channel 4 input.

2. On the oscilloscope, press [RECALL) [ZK) to perform a soft reset.

3. On the oscilloscope, press

(CHAN) more preset probe , select channel 1, and use the front-panel knob to select a 10: 1 probe.

4. Select channel 4, and use the front-panel knob to select a 1O:l probe.

5. Press @iG].



CAUTO-

SCALE

). Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum square wave display on the oscilloscope.




Each probe is now compensated for the oscilloscope input to which it is connected. Do not interchange probes without recompensating.

8. Connect the channel 1 1O:l divider probe to AlA2TP204, and the channel 4 probe to AlA2TP205, as shown in Figure 3-23.

Connect the probe ground leads to AlA2TP106. See Figure 3-24 and Figure 3-25 for the location of the assemblies and test points.

500

TERYINATION

PULSE/FUNCTION

GENERATOR

WIrYI

SPECTRIJY ANALYZER L

Figure 3-23. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup

9. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to standby. Remove the cover over A3 Digital Storage Section and remove A3A2 Intensity

Control Assembly. Insert the Display Adjustment PC board (HP part number 85662-60088) into the A3A2 slot. See Figure 3-24 for the location of the A3A2 assembly.



A3A2

A3Al

Figure 3-24. Location of AlA and A3A2

R 1 2 7 R120 C l 0 9 T P 1 0 5 R 2 2 7 C204 R220 R217 JS

T P 5 0 1

GND c307


Note

Figure 3-25. AlA Adjustment Locations

10. Set the pulse/funtion generator controls as follows:

MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM

Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..pulse

Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,200 kHz

Width (WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ns

Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.00 V

Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O.OOO mV

Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off (OUTPUT enabled)

11. Connect the output of the pulse/function generator to Jl (X input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in the A3A2 slot as shown in

Figure 3-23.





Press m):

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on

amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..25.OOOOV

Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6O.OOOOV

Press (TRIG): source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l

level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.0000 V

Press @KKK]: time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50.0 ns/div delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.000 ns

Press (jjj: connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press m.

13. Set the spectrum analyzer front-panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise, and then set the LINE switch to ON.

14. The X+ deflection and X- deflection waveforms should be superimposed on the oscilloscope display, as shown in Figure 3-26.

If necessary, adjust AlA2R227 X POSN and AlA2R220 X GAIN for a centered display of at least four vertical divisions. See

Figure 3-25 for the location of the adjustments.

: ..~.-.-........................-............................................... ” .,..,..._.._.....,.. ...” ,,,..,,,,..,,.,...,..,,...,...,.,..,..~.,.....~..~..~...... i

!I

1 0 . 0 V/diV

‘T /

!

.+

I'Y"

:

.:.

..__................_................._... 1.. .._..............................................-~................... i

- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 ns 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 " s

5 0 . 0 ns/div

3 7 5 . 0 0 0 ns

1 f 25.00 v

Figure 3-26. X+ and X- Waveforms


Press CWFORM rani]: f l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . channel 1 - channel 4 sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..25.0V/di v

16. Three waveforms should be displayed on the oscilloscope, as shown in Figure 3-27. The lower composite waveform represents


3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above) the combined X deflection voltage applied to the CRT. Use the oscilloscope front-panel knob to adjust waveform fl sensitivity for approximately 8 vertical divisions.

hp r u n n i n g i _,..._......_,........................

2 0 . 0 V/div


Note

1 2 5 . 0 0 0 ns

5 0 . 0 ns/div

1 f 25.00 v

Figure 3-27. Composite X Deflection Waveform

17. Adjust AlA2R217 HF GAIN, AlA2C204, and AlA2C209 for minimum overshoot and minimum rise and fall times of the composite Xdeflection waveform.

Always adjust AlA2C204 and AlA2C209 in approximately equal amounts. Do not adjust one to its minimum value and the other to its maximum value.

18. Use the oscilloscope Cntav) markers to measure the risetime, falltime, and percent overshoot of the composite Xdefection waveform. Rise and fall times should both be less than approximately 65 ns between the 10% and 90% points on the waveform. Overshoot should be less than 3% (approximately 0.25

divisions). See Figure 3-28.



Figure 3-28.

Rise and I%11 Times and Overshoot Adjustment Waveform


19.

Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to AlA2TP104 and the channel 4 probe to AlA2TP105. See Figure 3-25 for the location of the test points. Connect the output of the pulse/function generator to 52 (Y input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in the A3A2 slot.

20.

The Y Deflection Amplifier is identical to the X Deflection

Amplifier. Repeat steps 12 through 18 for the Y Deflection

Amplifier using R127, R120, R117, C104, and C109, respectively.

Pulse Response of 21.

Control Gate Z

Amplifier to BLANK

Input 22.

Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 4 probe from the spectrum analyzer. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to

AlA2TP301, and connect the probe ground lead to AlA2TP501.

On the oscilloscope, press [RECALL) [m) to perform a soft reset.

23.

Press CCHAN], CHAl&EL 1 on, more preset probe, and use the front-panel knob to set the probe to lO.OO:l. Press more .


25.

Press -1: amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20.0 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45.0000 V

Press I-): time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50.0 ns/div delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.000 ns

Press (TRIG]: level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50.00000 V

Press (jjj: connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press [SHOW).

Connect the output of the Pulse/Function Generator to 53 (Z input) on the Display Adjustment PC Board in the A3A2 slot. Set the board’s switch to the down position.

Note

The pulse/function generator output must be terminated with 50 ohms. Use a BNC tee, a 506) termination, and a BNC female to SMB female adapter. Install the 500 termination as close to the Display


26. Set the pulse/function generator’s controls as follows:

MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM

Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..pulse

Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 kHz

Width (WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ns

Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.OOV

Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.OOV

27. Disconnect the black connector with three wires (8, 98, and 96) from AlA2J5, and set AlA2R319 INT GAIN fully clockwise.

28. Set the spectrum analyzer front-panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise. Adjust the oscilloscope trigger level for a stable display.

Note the display on the oscilloscope. The pulse should be L55V peak-to-peak.




Press (ZiZi):

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.00 V/div

Press (SHOW].

30. Adjust the spectrum analyzer front-panel INTENSITY control for

50 V peak-to-peak (6.25 divisions) as indicated on the oscilloscope.

See Figure 3-29.


1 8 . 0 0 V/div offset: 4 5 . 0 0 v

10.00 : 1 dc

..!..

1,

I

I

- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 “ s

i ..~..~.................~.....~....~.~~. -

1 2 5 . 0 0 0 “s

5 0 . 0 “s/div

3 7 5 . 0 0 0 “5

1 f 50.00 v

Figure 3-29. 5OV,, Signal

31. Adjust AlA2R308 HF GAIN and AlA2C307 for minimum overshoot on rise and minimum rise and fall times of the pulse waveform.

32. Use the oscilloscope Intav] markers to measure the risetime, falltime, and percent overshoot of the pulse waveform. Rise and falltimes should be less than 50 ns and 90 ns respectively.

Overshoot on the rise should be less than 5% (approximately 0.4

divisions).


34. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe from the spectrum analyzer. Remove the Display Adjustment PC board from the

A3A2 slot, and reinstall the A3A2 Intensity Control Assembly.

Replace the A3 Section cover and cables.

35. Reconnect the black connector with three wires (8, 98, and 96) to

AlA2J5, and set AlA2R319 INT GAIN approximately two-thirds clockwise.

36. Perform Adjustment Procedure 4 Final Display Adjustment (SN

3004A and Above).

3.62 Adjustments

4. Final Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below)

4. Final Display

Adjustments (SN


Reference

Description

Note

AlAl Keyboard

Al A2 Z Axis Amplifier

AlA X Deflection Amplifier

AlA Y Deflection Amplifier

This procedure is used to optimize the appearance of the CRT display during routine maintenance or after CRT replacement or minor repairs. First, the display is adjusted for best focus over the full CRT, then the graticule pattern is adjusted for optimum rectangular display.

Adjustment Procedure 2, High Voltage Adjustment (SN 3001A and

Below) should be performed prior to performing the following adjustment procedure.

Procedure

Note

1. With the spectrum analyzer LINE switch set to STANDBY, set the potentiometers listed in Table 3-5 as indicated. See Figure 3-30 for the location of the adjustments.

In this procedure, do not adjust the following potentiometers and precision variable capacitors on the AlA Z-Axis Amplifier, AlA

X-Axis Amplifier, or AlA Y-Axis Amplifier Assemblies: AlA2R36

INT LIMIT, AlA2R22 HF GAIN, AlABClO, AlA4R28 HF GAIN,

AlA4C10, AlA4Cl1, AlA5R28 HF GAIN, AlA5C10, or AlA5Cll.

These components are adjusted in Adjustment Procedure 2, High

Voltage Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below) and Adjustment Procedure

3, Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below).

‘Ihble 3-5. Initial Adjustment Positions

Front-panel INTENSITY fully clockwise

~

2. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the CRT and high-voltage circuits to warm up.

The spectrum analyzer power-up annotation should be visible on the CRT display.

3. For an initial coarse focus adjustment, adjust AlA3R15 FOCUS

LIMIT, AlA2R36 ASTIG, and AlA2R30 FOCUS GAIN in sequence for best displayed results.

4. Adjust AlA4R7 X POSN, AlA4R27 X GAIN, AlA5R7 Y POSN, and

AlA5R27 Y GAIN for optimum centering of the display annotation and graticule pattern.


4. Final Display Adjustments (SN 3001A and Below)

5. For best overall focusing of the display, adjust the following potentiometers in the sequence listed below: a. AlA3R14 FOCUS LIMIT for best focus of graticule lines (long vectors) b. AlA2R36 ASTIG c. AlA2R30 FOCUS GAIN for best focus of annotation (short vectors)

6. Adjust AlA2R31 ORTHO, the front-panel ALIGN control, and

AlA2R32 PATT to optimize the orientation and appearance of the rectangular graticule pattern on the CRT display.

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 as needed to optimize overall display focus and appearance.

PZN

\

R 2 7

G A I N

R 3 1

O R T H O

R 3 2

PATT

R36

ASTIG

R 3 0

F O C U S G A I N

AlA4/AlA5 AlA

Figure 3-30.

Location of Final Display Adjustments on AlA2, AlA4, and AlA


4. Final Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above)

4. Final Display

Adjustments (SN


Reference

Description

Equipment

AlAl Keyboard

AlA X, Y, Z Axis Amplifiers

This procedure is used to optimize the appearance of the CRT display during routine maintenance or after CRT replacement or minor repairs. First, the display is adjusted for best focus over the full CRT, then the graticule pattern is adjusted for optimum rectangular display.

Digital Photometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tektronix J-16, Option 02

Photometer Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tektronix 56503

Photometer interconnect cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tektronix 012-0414-02

Photometer light occluder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tektronix 016-0305-00

Procedure

Note

Adjustment Procedure 2, High Voltage Adjustment (SN 3004A and

Above) should be performed prior to performing the following adjustment procedure.

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-31.

Note

Figure 3-31. Final Display Adjustments Setup

2. Set the photometer probe to NORMAL. Press [POWER] on the photometer to turn it on and allow 30 minutes warm-up. Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

3. With the spectrum analyzer LINE switch set to STANDBY, set the potentiometers listed in the Table 3-6 as indicated. See

Figure 3-32 for the location of the adjustments.

In this procedure, do not adjust the following potentiometers and variable capacitors on the AlA X, Y, Z Amplifier Assembly: C104,

C109, C204, C209, C307, R117, R217, or R308. These components are adjusted in the factory and in Adjustment Procedure 3, Preliminary

Display Adjustments (SN 3004A and Above).



R120 R220 R 5 1 2 R 5 1 3 R 3 1 9 R 4 2 6 R 4 3 7


Figure 3-32. Location of Final Display Adjustments on AlA

‘Ihble 3-6. Initial Adjustment Positions

Adjustment Position

AlA R120 Y GAIN

AlA R127 Y POSN

AlA R220 X GAIN

AlA R227 X POSN

AlA R319 INT GAIN centered centered centered centered two-thirds clockwise

AlA R409 FOCUS COMP centered

AlA R426 T/B FOC

Al A2 R427 T/B CTR

AlA R437 R/L FOC centered centered centered

Al A2 R440 R/L CTR

AlA R512 ORTHO centered centered

AlA R513 3D

AlA R516 INT LIM centered fully counterclockwise

AlA R517 ASTIG centered

Front-panel INTENSITY fully counterclockwise

Front-panel FOCUS centered

Front-panel ALIGN centered

4. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to ON, and wait at least

5 minutes to allow the CRT and high-voltage circuits to warm up.

5. Set the front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise and adjust AlA2R516 INT LIM until the display is just visable. See

Figure 3-32.

6. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise.

7. Adjust AlA2R220 X GAIN, AlA2R227 X POSN, AlA2R120 Y

GAIN, and AlA2R127 Y POSN for optimum centering of the display annotation and graticule pattern.

8. For an initial coarse focus, adjust the following potentiometers in the sequence listed:

AlA3R14 FOCUS LIMIT

Note

Note


AlA2R517 ASTIG

AlA2R513 3D

AlA2R409 FOCUS COMP

9.

Press (o--2.5), (

REFERENCE LEVEL

] and then adjust the reference level to bring the displayed noise to the top division of the graticule ((REFERENCE-LEVEL]). Press (ENTER~~B/DIV) and key in 1 dB/DIV. The noise should now completely fill the CRT graticule pattern, illuminating a large rectangular area. If necessary, adjust the reference level until the graticule pattern is completely filled.

10.

Press SWEEP CslNGLE), [SHIFT) DISPLAY LINE m, and then

@i!iKj THRESHOLD (OFFS to turn off the CRT annotation and graticule pattern.

Connect a 56503 photometer probe to the Tektronix J-16 digital photometer. Set the photometer to the Xl range.

11.

Place the photometer light probe hood against the IF-Display

Section glass RF1 filter, and adjust AlA2R319 INT GAIN for a photometer reading of 80 NITS (cd/m2).

This reading must be made with the glass RF1 filter in place in front of the CRT. It might be necessary to slightly trim the top and bottom of the photometer probe’s hood so that it will fit flush against the glass

RF1 filter.

If a standard J-16 photometer is used (instead of metric option 02), adjust AlA2R319 for a photometer reading of 23.5 fl (foot-lamberts).

12. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY and then back to ON. The spectrum analyzer power-up annotation should be visible on the CRT display. (This includes the firmware datecode.)

13. For the best focus near the center of the CRT display, adjust the following potentiometers in the sequence listed below. Repeat as needed to optimize center-screen focus.

AlA3R14 FOCUS LIMIT

AlA2R517 ASTIG

AlA2R513 3D for best focus of annotation (short vectors)

AlA2R409 FOCUS COMP for best focus of graticule lines (long vectors)

14. Adjust AlA2R426 T/B FOC for best focus at the top and bottom of the display.

15. Adjust AlA2R437 R/L FOC for best focus at the right and left sides of the display.

16. If the top and bottom (or right and left sides) of the display achieve best focus at different potentiometer settings, adjust

AlA2R427 T/B CTR or AlA2R440 R/L CTR, and then readjust

AlA2R426 T/B FOC or AlA2R437 R/L FOC to optimize overall focus.



17. Adjust AlA2R512 ORTHO and the front-panel ALIGN control to optimize the orientation and appearance of the rectangular graticule pattern on the CRT display.

18. Repeat steps 13 through 17 as needed to optimize overall display focus and appearance.


5. Log Amplifier Adjustments

5. Log Amplifier

Adjustments

Reference

IF-Display Section

A4A3 Log Amplifier-Filter

A4A2 Log Amplifier-Detector

Related Performance

Tests

Note

Scale Fidelity Test

The A4A3 Log Amplifier-Filter and A4A2 Log Amplifier Detector are temperature compensated as a matched set at the factory. In the event of a circuit failure, a new matched set must be ordered.

Contact your nearest HP Service Center.

Description

The A4A2 Log Amplifier-Detector ZERO adjustment is checked and adjusted if necessary, then the A4A3 Log Amplifier-Filter is set for center frequency by injecting a signal and adjusting the bandpass filter center adjustment for maximum DVM indication. The bandpass filter amplitude is adjusted by monitoring the output of the filter control line shorted and not shorted to the + 15V supply. Next, log fidelity

(gain and offset of the log curve) is adjusted by adjusting the -12 VTV and the PIN diode attenuator. Last, the linear gain step adjustments are performed to set the proper amount of step gain in the linear mode of operation.

Equipment

Figure 3-33. Log Amplifier Adjustments Setup

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3456A

Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3335A



Procedure

1. Position the spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure 3-33.

Remove the IF-Display section top cover.

2. Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press (2-22).

Offset Adjustment

Check

3. Key in FREQUENCY SPAN ] 0 Hz, CCENTER FREQUENCY ) 7.6 MHz,

( REFERENCE LEVEL _) + 10 dBm, (jREs) 10 kHz, and press LIN pushbutton.

4. Connect DVM to A4AlTPl and DVM ground to the IF casting.

Connect the frequency synthesizer to the RF INPUT. Key in cm) 80 MHz and c-1 -86.98 dBm. The frequency synthesizer provides a 5OQ load to the spectrum analyzer RF

INPUT.

5. Check A4A2R79 ZERO for a DVM indication of 0.0000 f0.0005 V dc. See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If A4A2R79 ZERO requires adjustment, perform Adjustment Procedure 6, “Video

Processor Adjustment” before continuing.

R 6 2

R 7 9 R6 1 R91

Z E R O ATTEN - 1 2 V T V

RI4

L G 2 0 R18

/

A4A3 A4A2

IFIER-

O R

A4A3

Figure 3-34. Location of Log Amplifier Adjustments



Bandpass Filter

6. Press LOG C

ENTER

dB/DIv).

Center Adjustment

7. Set the frequency synthesizer for 7.6000 MHz at +5.0 dBm outpu level.

t

8. Adjust A4A3C55 CTR for maximum DVM indication. See

Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If A4A3C55 is at an extreme of its adjustment range (fully meshed, maximum capacitance, or unmeshed, minimum capacitance), increase or decrease value of A4A3C52 and A4A3C53. Refer to lhble 3-3 for range of values.

Note

A4A3C52 is a fine adjustment, and A4A3C53 is a coarse adjustment.

If A4A3C55 is fully meshed, increase the value of A4A3C52 or

A4A3C53.

Bandpass Filter

9. Connect one end of a jumper wire to A4A3TP8. Connect the

Amplitude Adjustment other end of the jumper to A4A3TP7 (+ 15V). Connecting the jumper to A4A3TP8 first reduces the chance of shorting the + 15V to ground. Note DVM indication.

V dc

10. Remove the jumper from between A4A3TP7 and A4A3TP8.

11. Adjust A4A3R67 AMPTD for DVM indication the same as that noted in step 9 f0.0005 V dc. See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If unable to adjust A4A3R67 AMPTD for proper indication, increase or decrease value of A4A3R66. (If A4A3R67 is fully counter-clockwise, increase the value of A4A3R66.)

Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values.

12. Repeat steps 9 through 11 until DVM indication is the same f0.0005 V dc with A4A3TP7 jumpered to A4A3TP8, and with

A4A3TP7 and A4A3TP8 not jumpered. Remove the jumper.

-12 VTV and ATTEN

13. Press the LIN pushbutton.

Adjustments

14. Adjust frequency synthesizer output level for DVM indication of + 1.000 f0.0002 V dc, and note the frequency synthesizer amplitude setting.

Frequency Synthesizer output level:

15. Press LOG [ENTER dB/DIV).

dBm

16. Wait three minutes for the A4A3 Log Amplifier-Filter and A4A2

Log Amplifier Detector to stabilize.

17. Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 50 dB.

18. Adjust A4A2R91 -12 VTV for DVM indication of +500 fl mV dc.

See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment.

19. Increase the frequency synthesizer output level by 50 dB (to the level of step 14).



20. Adjust A4A2R61 ATTEN for DVM indication of + 1.000 fO.OOO1 V dc. See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If unable to adjust

A4A2R61 ATTEN for proper indication, increase or decrease value of A4A2R62. (If A4A2R61 is fully clockwise, increase the value of

A4A2R62.) Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values.

21. Repeat steps 17 through 20, until specifications of steps 18 and 20 are achieved without further adjustment. Because adjustments

A4A2R61 and A4A2R91 are interactive, several iterations are needed.

Linear Gain

22. Press the LIN pushbutton. DVM indication at A4AlTPl should be

Adjustments + 1.000 f0.020 V dc (+0.980 to + 1.020 V dc). If indication is not within this range, repeat steps 14 through 21. If indication is within this range, press (ml [

ENTER

dB/DIv] q. This disables the

IF step gains.

23. Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level 10 dB. Press

(

REFERENCE LEVEL

) 0 dBm, and adjust the frequency synthesizer output level for a DVM indication of + 1.00 f.OO1 Vdc.

24. Verify that attenuator is set at 10 dB. Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 10 dB. Press (‘JEFERENCE

LEVEL

) -60 dB.

25. Adjust A4A3R83 LGlO for DVM indication of + 1.000 fO.O1O V dc.

See Figure 3-34 location of adjustment. If unable to adjust LGlO for proper indication, increase or decrease value of A4A3R54.

Refer to ‘Iable 3-3 for range of values.

26. Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 10 dB.

27. Key in (

REFERENCE LEVEL

) -70 dB.

28. Adjust A4A2R14 LG20 for DVM indication of + 1.000 fO.O1O

V dc. See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If unable to adjust LG20 for proper indication, increase or decrease value of

A4A2R18. Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.

29. Press (2-22) to reenable the IF step gains.


6. Video Processor Adjustments

6. Video Processor

Adjustments

Reference

IF-Display Section

A4Al Video Processor

Related Performance

Test

Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test

Description

The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT through a step attenuator. The instrument is placed in zero frequency span to produce a dc level output from the log amplifier. The A4A2R79 ZERO adjustment, which sets the dc offset of the output buffer amplifier of the log board, is checked and adjusted if necessary. The dc level into the video processor is is adjusted by’varying the input signal level and reference level. The offsets and gains on the A4Al Video Processor are adjusted for proper levels using a DVM.

Equipment

Note cd

1OdB S T E P A T T E N U A T O R

Figure 3-35. Video Processor Adjustments Setup


10 dB Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 355D

The voltage at A4AlTP3 may drift noticeably with temperature during this adjustment. Allow the A4Al Video Processor to warm up at least one-half hour prior to adjustment.

Procedure 1.

Position the spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure 3-35.

Remove the IF-Display Section top cover.

2.

3.

4.

Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press @YXiGJ

Connect DVM to A4AlTPl and DVM ground to the IF casting.

Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 10 dB step attenuator.

5.

Key in [ CENTER FREQUENCY ]

Press the LIN pushbutton.

100 MHz and [ FREQUENCY SPAN ) 0 Hz.



6. Set step attenuator to 120 dB. DVM indication should be 0.0000

f0.0005 V dc. If DVM indication is out of tolerance, adjust

A4A2R79 ZERO on A4A2 Log Amplifier-Detector. See Figure 3-34 for the adjustment location.

7. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.

8. Key in (

REFERENCE LEVEL

) and adjust DATA knob, and then the front panel AMPTD CAL control, for DVM indication as close to

+ 1.000 fO.OO1 Vdc as possible.

9. Connect DVM to A4AlTP2.

10. Adjust A4AlR14 OS for a DVM indication of 0.000 ho.003 Vdc.

See Figure 3-36 for the location of the adjustment.

A4Al V i d e o P r o c e s s o r

R 3 6 R 3 2

F S Z E R O

A4Al

Figure 3-36. Location of Video Processor Adjustments

11. Connect the DVM to A4AlTP3.


13. Adjust A4AlR32 ZERO for a DVM indication of 0.000 fO.OO1 Vdc.


15. Adjust A4AlR36 FS for DVM indication of +2.000 f 0.001 Vdc.

16. Repeat steps 12 through 15 until no further adjustments are required.

LOG Offset Adjust

17. Set step attenuator to 40 dB.

18. Key in m), CATTEN] I, LOG [ ENTER dB/DwJ, @iTiF] [ENTER dB/DIv) q, ( REFERENCE LEVEL ) -50 dBm.

19. Connect DVM to A4AlTPl. Record DVM indication. Indication should be approximately +0.500 Vdc.

Vdc

20. Decrease reference level to -60 dBm using the step key.

21. Adjust A4AlR2 LG OS for DVM indication of +O.lOO fO.OO1

Vdc greater than the DVM indication recorded in step 19. See

Figure 3-36 for location of adjustment.




23. DVM indication should be +0.200 f0.002 V dc greater than the indication recorded in step 19. If not, readjust A4AlR2 LG OS.


25. DVM indication should be +0.400 ho.004 V dc greater than the indication recorded in step 19. If not, readjust A4AlR2 LG OS.



7. 3 MHz

Bandwidth Filter

Adjustments

Reference

IF-Display Section

A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter

Related Performance

Test



Description

With the CAL OUTPUT signal connected to the RF INPUT, the 18.4

MHz oscillator is adjusted with the FREQ ZERO control (on the front panel) to peak the IF signal for maximum amplitude for the center of the 3 MHz bandpass. Each of the five stages of the 3 MHz Bandwidth

Filter is adjusted for bandpass centering and symmetry. Four crystal filter bypass networks are required for alignment of the filter stages.

See Figure 3-109 or information concerning the bypass networks.

A stable 21.4 MHz signal is then applied to the IF section of the instrument from a frequency synthesizer. Each of the first four stages of the 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter is peaked in a 10 Hz bandwidth using an oscilloscope display. The final stage is peaked using the spectrum analyzer CRT display.

After all five filter stages are adjusted for centering, symmetry, and peaking, the CAL OUTPUT signal is used to match the 10 Hz and 1 kHz bandwidth amplitudes.

OlClTlZlNC

OSCILLO!XOPE

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

Figure 3-37. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup


Equipment

Procedure

7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments

1O:l Divider Probe, 10 MW7.5 pF (2 required). . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10432A

Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP3335A

Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 54501A

Crystal Filter Bypass Network (4 req&-ed) . . . . . . . . . See Figure 3-109

Test Cable: BNC to SMB snap-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85680-60093

1.

Position the spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure 3-37 and remove the IF-Display Section top cover.

2.

Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press (2-22).

Frequency Zero Check

Filter Center and

Symmetry

Adjustments

Note

3.

Connect CAL OUTPUT signal to RF INPUT

4.

Key in IRECALL) @.

5.

Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display.

6.

Key in (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 100 MHz, [

FREQUENCY

SPA~I~

[

REFERENCE LEVEL

) and adjust reference level, using step keys and front-panel knob to place signal peak near top CRT graticule line.

7.

On A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Assembly connect crystal filter bypass networks between the two test points above C41 SYM, C32

SYM, C23 SYM, and Cl4 SYM. See Figure 3-38 for the location of

A4A7 3MHz Bandwidth filter.

8.

Adjust A4A7C7 CTR for minimum amplitude of the displayed signal peak. Adjust A4A7C6 SYM for best symmetry of the displayed signal. Repeat adjustments to ensure that the displayed signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.

You may find it helpful to widen and narrow the spectrum analyzer frequency span to adjust the bandpass symmetry and centering for each filter stage.



A4A7

3 MHz Bandwidth Filter


A4A7

Figure 3-38.

Location of Center, Symmetry, and 10 Hz Amplitude

Adjustments

9. Remove crystal filter bypass network near Cl4 SYM.

10. Adjust A4A7C15 CTR for minimum amplitude of the displayed signal peak. Adjust A4A7C14 SYM for best symmetry of the displayed signal. Repeat adjustments to ensure that the signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.

11. Remove crystal filter bypass network near C23 SYM.

12. Adjust A4A7C24 CTR for minimum amplitude of the displayed signal peak. Adjust A4A7C23 SYM for best symmetry of the displayed signal. Repeat adjustments to ensure that signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.


14. Adjust A4A7C33 CTR for minimum amplitude of the displayed signal peak. Adjust A4A7C32 SYM for best symmetry of the displayed signal. Repeat adjustments to ensure that signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.


16. Adjust A4A7C42 CTR for minimum amplitude of the displayed signal peak. Adjust A4A7C41 SYM for best symmetry of the displayed signal. Repeat adjustments to ensure that the signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.

17. Signal should be centered on center graticule line on CRT display.

If signal is not centered, repeat steps 3 through 16 to readjust each filter stage.


Filter Peak Adjust

Note

The adjustment ranges of A4A7C13 PK, A4A7C22 PK, A4A7C31

PK, and A4A7C40 PK are all indirectly affected by factory-select components A4A7C93 and A4A7C5. A4A7C93 and A4A7C5 set the peak frequency for the first 3 MHz filter pole, setting the reference for peaking the amplitudes of the remaining 4 poles. In the following steps, decrease or increase the value of A4A7C93 and A4A7C5 as necessary only if adjustments A4A7C13 PK, A4A7C22 PK, A4A7C31

PK, and A4A7C40 PK are all near the same end of their adjustment range (fully meshed, maximum capacitance, or unmeshed, minimum capacitance). If the adjustable capacitors are fully meshed, decrease the value of A4A7C93.

18. Press @?ZZiQ

19. Key in [ SWEEP TIME ] 20 ms, [ FREQUENCY SPAN ) 0 Hz, @iZZZ@ 10 Hz,

( REFERENCE LEVEL ] -20 dBm.

20. Set the frequency synthesizer for 21.400 MHz at an amplitude level of -25.0 dBm.

21. Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from A4A8Jl and connect output of the frequency synthesizer to A4A8Jl using BNC to SMB snap-on cable.

2 2 Set the oscilloscope following Settings:

Press ICHANl

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on

probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1O:l amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 mV/div coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ac

Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1O:l amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 mV/div coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ac

Press m

EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . auto, edge source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Channell

P r e s s ( T I M E ) time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ns/div

Press (DISPLAY) connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press (SHOWI)

23. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to A4A7TP7 (left side of

Cl4 SYM) and the channel 4 probe to A4A7TP5 (left side of C23

SYM).

24. Adjust the frequency synthesizer output frequency for maximum peak-to-peak signal on the oscilloscope channel 1 display.

25. Adjust A4A7C13 PK for maximum peak-to-peak signal on channel

4 display. See Figure 3-39 for location of adjustment. If unable to achieve 1 “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A7C12. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values.



A4A7

3 MHz Bandwidth Filter


Figure 3-39. Location of 3 MHz Peak Adjustments

26. Move the oscilloscope channel 4 probe to A4A7TP3 (left side of

C32 SYM).

27. Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak the oscilloscope channel 1 display.

28. Adjust A4A7C22 PK for maximum peak-to-peak signal on channel

4 display. See Figure 3-39 for location of adjustment. If unable to achieve a “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A7C21. Refer to l%ble 3-3 for range of values.

29. Move the oscilloscope channel 4 probe to A4A7TPl (left side of

C41 SYM).


31. Adjust A4A7C31 PK for maximum peak-to-peak signal on the oscilloscope channel 4 display. See Figure 3-39 for location of adjustment. If unable to achieve a “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A7C30. Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.

32. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 4 probe from A4A7TPl.


34. On the spectrum analyzer, adjust ( REFERENCE LEVEL ] using step keys to place signal near top CRT graticule line.

35. Adjust A4A7C40 PK for maximum signal amplitude on the spectrum analyzer CRT display. See Figure 3-39 for the location of adjustment. If unable to achieve a “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A7C39. Refer to ‘Iable 3-3 for range of values.

36. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe from A4A7TP7.

Disconnect frequency synthesizer output from A4A8Jl and reconnect cable 97 (white/violet) to A4A8Jl.


10 Hz Amplitude

37. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT. Key in (-1, C-1 9,

Adjustments @E--ET) 10 Hz.

38. Adjust the spectrum analyzer front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display.

39. Key in [RESBW) 1 kHz and DISPLAY LINE C-1. Using the

DATA knob, place the display line at the signal trace.

40. Key in (REs] 10 Hz.

41. Adjust the spectrum analyzer front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display.

42. Adjust A4A7R30 10 Hz AMPTD and A4A7R41 10 Hz AMPTD equal amounts to set the signal level the same as the reference level set in step 39. See Figure 3-38 for location of 10 Hz AMPTD adjusts.

43. Repeat steps 37 through 42 until no further adjustment is required.

Note

Factory-select component A4A7R60 sets the overall gain of the A4A7

3 MHz Bandwidth Filter, and is selected as required in Adjustment

Procedure 10, “Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments.”

This procedure should be performed if the A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth

Filter or the A4A5 Step Gain Assembly is replaced or repaired.

Note

The remaining adjustments and selection of factory-select components for the A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter are performed in Adjustment

Procedure 9, “3-dB Bandwidth Adjustments. n This procedure should be performed if the A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter is replaced or repaired.

Adjustments 3.91

8. 21.4 MHz

Bandwidth Filter

Adjustments

Reference

Related Performance

Tests

Description

IF-Display Section

A4A4 Bandwidth Filter

A4A8 Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter

IF Gain Uncertainty Test

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty test


First the LC Filters (100 kHz to 3 MHz bandwidths) on the A4A4

Bandwidth Filter are adjusted. The crystal filter poles (3 kHz to 30 kHz bandwidths) are then adjusted for center and symmetry by bypassing all but one pole at a time and adjusting the active pole.

Next, the LC filters and the crystal filter poles on the A4A8

Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter are adjusted in the same manner as on the A4A4 Bandwidth Filter.

Last, the 10 dB and 20 dB attenuators on the A4A8 Attenuator-

Bandwidth Filter are adjusted for the proper amount of attenuation.

This is done by connecting the CAL OUTPUT signal to the RF INPUT through two step attenuators, keying in the necessary reference level to activate the 10 dB and the 20 dB control lines, adjusting the step attenuators to compensate for the attenuation, and adjusting the attenuators for the proper amount of attenuation.

1dB STEP

Figure 3-40. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup


Equipment

Procedure

+ 10 V Temperature

Compensation Supply

Check

A4A4 LC Adjustments

8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3456A

10 dB Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 355D, Option H89

1 dB Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3556, Option H25

Crystal Filter Bypass Network (2 required) . . Refer to Figure 3-109

1.

Position the spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure

Figure 3-40 and remove the IF-Display Section cover.

2. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press @Y??iQ.

3.

Connect DVM to A4A5TPl(+ 10 VF).

4.

DVM indication should be between +9.0 V dc and + 10.0 V dc. If voltage is not within tolerance, perform Adjustment Procedure 10,

“Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments,” before continuing.

5.

Connect spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 1 dB and 10 dB step attenuators, as shown in Figure 3-40. Set step attenuators to 0 dB.

6. Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from A4A8Jl and connect to cable A4A6J 1.

7. Key in ( CENTER FREQ] 100 MHz, CREs] 100 kHz,

CFREQUENCY SPAN ) 200 kHz, and press LIN pushbutton.

8. Press [ REFERENCE LEVEL] and adjust front-panel knob to set signal peak approximately 2 divisions down from top CRT graticule line.

9. Adjust A4A4C67 LC CTR and A4A4C19 LC CTR for maximum

MARKER level as indicated by CRT annotation. See Figure 3-41 for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust LC CTR adjustments for satisfactory signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A4C17 and A4A4C70. Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.

Figure 3-41.

Location of A4A4 21.4 MHz LC Filter Adjustments

10. Key in (RESBW) 1 MHz, and (SPAN) 2 MHz, MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

),

MARKER a.



11.

Key in [RESBW) 100 kHz, C-SPAN) 200 kHz and MARKER

(PEAK SEARCH).

12.

Adjust A4A4R43 LC to align markers on display. MARKER A level should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-41 for location of adjustment.

13.

Repeat steps 10 through 12 until no further adjustment is necessary.

A4A4 XTAL

1 4 .

Adjustments

15.

Key in MARKER loFF) @TiiT) 30 kHz and [

FREQUENCY

SPAN) 100 kHz.

Press [

REFERENCE LEVEL

] and adjust DATA knob to set signal peak approximately 2 divisions down from the top CRT graticule line.

16.

Connect crystal filter bypass networks between A4A4TPl and

A4A4TP2 and between A4A4TP4 and A4A4TP5.

17.

Adjust A4A4C20 CTR to center signal on center graticule line. Adjust A4A4C9 SYM for best symmetry of signal. See

Figure 3-42 for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust SYM for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of

A4A4ClO. Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.

A4A4

Bandwidt\h Fi I ter


L

A4A4

Figure 3-42.

Location of A4A4 21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments

18.

Remove crystal filter bypass network from between A4A4TP4 and

A4A4TP5.

19.

Adjust A4A4C74 CTR to center signal on center graticule line.

Adjust A4A4C39 SYM for best symmetry of signal. See Figure 3-42 for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust A4A4C39 SYM for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of

A4A4C38. Refer to l?rble 3-3 for range of values.

20.

Remove crystal filter bypass network from between A4A4TPl and

A4A4TP2.

21.

Adjust A4A4C73 CTR to center signal on center graticule line.

Adjust A4A4C65 SYM for best symmetry of signal. See Figure 3-42 for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust A4A4C65 SYM

A4A8 LC Adjustments


22.

for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of

A4A4C66. Refer to ‘Iable 3-3 for range of values.

All crystal filter bypass networks are removed. Signal should be centered and symmetrical. If not, go back to step 14 and repeat adjustments.

23.

Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

) and MARKER Ln].

24.

Key in ( FREQUENCY SPAN ) 20 kHz, (RES] 3 kHz, and MARKER

[PEAK SEARCH).

25.

Adjust A4A4R49 XTAL to align markers on display. MARKER

A level should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-42 for location of adjustment.

26.

Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from A4A6Jl and reconnect cable to A4A8Jl. Reconnect cable 89 (gray/white) to A4A6Jl.

27.

Key in (jj] 100 kHz and (

FREQUENCY SPAN

] 200 kHz.

28.

Press CREFERENCE

LEVEL

_) and adjust DATA knob to place signal peak approximately two divisions down from the top graticule line.

29.

Adjust A4A8C32 LC CTR and A4A8C46 LC CTR for maximum

MARKER level as indicated by CRT annotation. See Figure 3-43 for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust A4ASC32 and

A4A8C46 LC CTR adjustments for satisfactory signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A8C35 and A4A8C49. Refer to

‘Iable 3-3 for range of values.

A4A8

A t t e n u a t o r B a n d w i d t h F i l t e r

A4A8

Figure 3-43.

Location of A4A8 21.4 MHz LC Filter and Attenuation

Adjustments

30.

Key in (j-1 1 MHz and (j-1 2 MHz, MARKER

(

PEAK SEARCH

] and MARKER la].

31.

Key in (REs) 100 kHz, (j-1 200 kHz, and MARKER

(PEAK SEARCH].



32. Adjust A4A8R35 LC to align markers on display. MARKER A level should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-43 for location of adjustment.

33. Repeat steps 30 through 32 until no further adjustment is necessary.

A4A8 XTAL 34. Key in (RESBW,) 30 kHz, [

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 100 kHz MARKER m).

Adjustments

35. Press CREFERENCE) and adjust DATA knob to set signal peak approximately 2 divisions down from top CRT graticule line.

36. Connect crystal filter bypass network between A4A8TPl and

A4A8TP2.

37. Adjust A4A8C44 CTR to center signal on center graticule line.


A4A8C43. Refer to ‘Iable 3-3 for range of values.

At

A4A8 tenuator-Bandwidth Filter

A4A8

Figure 3-44.

Location of A4A8 21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments

38. Remove crystal filter bypass network from between A4A8TPl and

A4A8TP2.

39. Adjust A4A8C29 CTR to center signal on center graticule line.


A4A8C14. Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.

40.

Key in CFREQUENCY SPAN] 10 kHz, MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

), and

MARKER [LI)

41. Key in CRESBW) 3 kHz and MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ).

42. Adjust A4A8R40 XTAL to align markers on display. MARKER

A level should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-44 for location of adjustment.



A10 dB and A20 dB

43. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 1 dB and 10 dB step

Adjustments attenuators. Set step attenuators to 25 dB.

4 4 .

Key in (

CENTER FREQUENCY

_) 100 MHz, ( FREQUENCY SPAN] 3 kHz,

(mj 0 dB, [RES’ 1 kH z, (

REFERENCE LEVEL

) -30 dBm.

45. Key in LOG C

ENTER dB/blv] 1 dB, MARKER [al

46. Key in (

REFERENCE LEVEL

] -20 dBm. Set step attenuators to 15 dB.

47. Adjust A4A8R7 AlOdB to align markers on display. MARKER

A level should indicate 0.00 dB. See Figure 3-43 for location of adjustment.

48. Key in [

REFERENCE LEVEL


49. Adjust A4A8R6 A2OdB to align markers on display. MARKER

A level should indicate 0.00 dB. See Figure 3-43 for location of adjustment.

50. Refer to Performance Test 5, “Resolution Bandwidth Switching

Uncertainty Test”, and check the amplitudes of resolution bandwidths from 1 kHz through 3 MHz. If the amplitude of the

300 kHz resolution bandwidth is more than 0.3 dB low relative to the 100 kHz and 1 MHz resolution bandwidths, perform steps 51 through 71, LC Dip Adjustments.

If the amplitudes of the 3 kHz, 10 kHz, and 30 kHz resolution bandwidths are not within 50.4 dB of the amplitude of the 1

MHz resolution bandwidth, perform steps 1 through 12 (Bandpass

Filter Adjustments) of Adjustment Procedure 5, “Log Amplifier

Adjustments” and then check the amplitudes of the resolution bandwidths from 3 kHz through 3 MHz again. If the amplitudes of the 3 kHz, 10 kHz, and 30 kHz resolution bandwidths are still not within f0.4 dB of the 1 MHz resolution bandwidth, change the value of factory-select component A4A4R35 or A4A4R3.

An increase of one standard value of A4A4R35 decreases the amplitudes of the 100 kHz through 3 MHz resolution bandwidths by approximately 0.15 dB. An increase of one standard value of

A4A4R3 decreases the amplitudes of the 3 kHz through 30 kHz resolution bandwidths by approximately 0.05 dB.

If the amplitudes of the 3 kHz through 3 MHz resolution bandwidths are not within f0.4 dB of the amplitude of the 1 kHz resolution bandwidth, perform Adjustment Procedure 7, “3 MHz

Bandwidth Filter Adjustments, n and Adjustment Procedure 11,

“Down/Up Converter Adjustments. n

LC Dip Adjustments

51. Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY.

52. Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from A4A8Jl and connect cable to A4A6Jl.

53. Remove A4A4 Bandwidth Filter and install on 2 extender boards.

54. Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. Press (2-22-I.

5 5 .

Key in ( CENTER FREQUENCY ] 100 MHz, (jREsBW) 100 kHz,

CFREQUENCY SPAN) 1 MHz, (m) 0 dB, LOG [ ENTER dB/DIv] 2 dB.

56. Set step attenuators to 0 dB. Short A4A4TP3 to ground.



57.

Adjust A4A4C41 LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak. See Figure 3-41 for location of adjustment. Key in

MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

), MARKER a], and then press MARKER

( PEAK SEARCH ) and re-adjust LC DIP to offset the signal peak approximately -17 kHz (to the left). This is done to compensate for operating the A4A4 Bandwidth Filter on extender boards. If unable to achieve a “dip” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A4R16. Refer to ‘Pable 3-3 for range of values.

58.

Remove short from A4A4TP3 and short A4A4TP8 to ground.

59.


MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ] MARKER a], and then press MARKER

(

PEAK SEARCH

] and re-adjust LC DIP to offset the signal peak approximately -17 kHz (to the left). If unable to achieve a “dip” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A4R60. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values.

60.

Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY.

61.

Reinstall A4A4 Bandwidth Filter without extender boards.

Short A4A4TP3 and A4A4TP8 to ground. Remove A4A8

Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter and install on extenders. Reconnect cable 97 to A4A8Jl and reconnect cable 89 to A4A6Jl.

62.

Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. Press (2-22).

63.

Key in (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 100 MHz, (j-1 100 kHz,

(

FREQUENCY

SPANS 1 MHz, [m) 0 dB, LOG (

ENTER

dB/DIvj 2 dB.

64.

65.

Short A4A8TP6 to ground.


MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

) MARKER Ia], and then press MARKER

(

PEAK SEARCH

) and re-adjust LC DIP to offset the signal peak approximately -17 kHz (to the left). If unable to achieve a “dip” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A8R30. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values.

66.

Remove short from A4A8TP6 and short A4A8TP3 to ground.

67.


MARKER (

PEAK

SEARCH] MARKER [a, and then press MARKER

(

PEAK SEARCH

) and re-adjust LC DIP again to offset the signal peak approximately -17 kHz (to the left). If unable to achieve a “dip” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of A4A8R55. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values.

68.


69.

Reinstall A4A8 Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter without extender boards. Remove short from A4A8TP3.

70.

71.

Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. Press [m).

Repeat LC adjustments for both the A4A4 Bandwidth filter (steps

5 through 13) and the A4A8 Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter (steps

26 through 33).


9. 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments

9. 3 dB Bandwidth

Adjustments

Reference


Related Performance

Test

Description

Equipment

Procedure

IF-Display Section

A4A9 IF Control

Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

The spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF

INPUT. Each of the adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the proper 3-dB bandwidth.

No test equipment is required for this adjustment.

1. Position the spectrum analyzer upright and remove the IF-Display

Section top cover.

2. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press 1-J.

3. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the RF INPUT.

4. On the spectrum analyzer, key in the following settings:

(

CENTER

F

REQUEN

CY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100 MHz

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (SHIFT) RES BW A [AUTO),

(

REFERENCE LEVEL

] and use the DATA knob to position the signal peak near the reference level (top graticule line).


PEAK SEARCH

), MARKER @, and press @J several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

7. Adjust A4A9R60 3 MHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB

*0.05 dB. See Figure 3-45 for location of adjustment.

8. On the spectrum analyzer, press m several times to position the second marker at the rightmost graticule line. Then, press

($sTopFREQ) and use the DATA knob to adjust the centering of the displayed signal for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05

dB.



A4A9

I F C O N T R O L


A4A9

Figure 3-45. Location of 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments

9. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 3 MHz,

MARKER (OFF), (

PEAK

SEARCHJ, MARKER Ia], and press @J several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

10. Readjust A4A9R60 3 MHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB

410.05 dB.

11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 as necessary until no further adjustment is required.


&ENTER FREQUENCY )

FREQUENCY SPAN)

..................................... 100 MHZ

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MHz km, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz

13. On the spectrum analyzer, press [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) and use the

DATA knob to position the signal peak near the reference level

(top graticule line).


PEAK SEARCH

), MARKER @, and press @) several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

15. Adjust A4A9R61 1 MHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05 dB.

16. On the spectrum analyzer, press m several times to position the second marker at the rightmost graticule line. Then, press

[sTopI and use the DATA knob to adjust the centering of the displayed signal for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05

dB.


FREQUENCY SPAN

) 1 MHz,

MARKER m), [

PEAK

SEARCHI), MARKER la], and press @j several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

18. Readjust A4A9R61 1 MHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB

410.05 dB.


Note



(

CENTER FR

E

QUENCY ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREQUENCY SPAN)

100 MHz

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz

;&VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz

21. On the spectrum analyzer, press ( REFERENCE LEVEL ] and use the




PEAK SEARCH

], MARKER [n], and press Q) several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

23. Adjust A4A9R62 300 kHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05 dB.

24. On the spectrum analyzer, press ch) several times to position the second marker at the rightmost graticule line. Then, press

[STOPFREQJ and use the DATA knob to adjust the centering of the displayed signal for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05

dB.

25.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (

FREQUENCY

SPAN) 300 kHz,

MARKER (OFF), ( PEAK SEARCH ], MARKER a], and press (JIJ several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

26.

Readjust A4A9R62 300 kHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00

dB f0.05 dB.


The 100 kHz 3-dB bandwidth is set with factory-select components

A4A8R30, A4A8R55, A4A4R16, and A4A4R60. If it is necessary to increase the 100 kHz 3-dB bandwidth, increase the value of one or more of these factory-select components. The 30 kHz 3-dB bandwidth is set with factory-select components A4A8R26, A4A8R52, A4A4R20,

A4A4R40, and A4A4R64. If it is necessary to increase the 30 kHz

3-dB bandwidth, decrease the value of one or more of these factoryselect components. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A4A8R30, A4A8R55, A4A4R16, A4A4R60, A4A8R26,

A4A8R52, A4A4R20, A4A4R40, and A4A4R64, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers.


(

CENTER FREQUENCY

)

FREQUENCY SPAN]

.....................................

100

MHZ

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 kHz

&CiiV, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 kHz

29. On the spectrum analyzer, press [ REFERENCE LEVEL ) and use the




PEAK SEARCH

], MARKER (a, and press (JJJ several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.



31. Adjust A4A9R65 10 kHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB

&0.05 dB.

32. On the spectrum analyzer, press QfJ several times to position the second marker at the rightmost graticule line. Then, press

[sTopI and use the DATA knob to adjust the centering of the displayed signal for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05

dB.

33. On the spectrum analyzer, key in CFREQUENCY

SPAN

] 10 kHz,

MARKER (OFF, [ PEAK SEARCH ], MARKER (iYJ and press @ several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

34. Readjust A4A9R65 10 kHz for a MARKER [nl indication of -3.00

dB f0.05 dB.



[ CENTER FREQUENCY )

FREQUENCY SPAN)

.....................................

100

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MHZ

3 kHz

)W, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 kHz

37.

On the spectrum analyzer, press CREFERENCE LEVEL ) and use the



38. On the spectrum analyzer, key in CPEAK

SEARCH

], MARKER [n], and press (JJ several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

39. Adjust A4A9R66 3 kHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05 dB.

40. On the spectrum analyzer, press Q) several times to position the second marker at the rightmost graticule line. Then, press

[SToPI and use the DATA knob to adjust the centering of the displayed signal for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05

dB.

41. On the spectrum analyzer, key in FREQUENCY SPAN ) 3 kHz,

MARKER IOFF), (SPEAK SEARCH ], MARKER Ln], and press a several times to position the second marker at the leftmost graticule line.

42. Readjust A4A9R66 3 kHz for a MARKER A indication of -3.00 dB f0.05 dB.


Note

The 1 kHz 3-dB bandwidth is set with factory-select components

A4A7R12lA4A7R13, A4A7R23iA4A7R24, A4A7R34lA4A7R35,

A4A7R45lA4A7R46, and A4A7R56lA4A7R57. If it is necessary to increase the 1 kHz 3-dB bandwidth, increase the value of one or more pairs of these factory-select components. The 300 Hz, 100

Hz, 30 Hz, and 10 Hz 3-dB bandwidths are set with factory-select components A4A7R66, A4A7R68, A4A7R70, A4A7R72, A4A7R74,

A4A7R76, A4A7R78, A4A7R80, A4A7R82, A4A7R84, A4A7R86,

A4A7R88,A4A7R90, A4A7R92,A4A7R94,A4A7R96,A4A7R98,



A4A7R100, A4A7R102, and A4A7R104. If it is necessary to increase one of these 3-dB bandwidths, increase the value of one or more of these factory-select components. Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A4A7R12lA4A7R13, A4A7R23/A4A7R24,

A4A7R34lA4A7R35, A4A7R45lA4A7R46, A4A7R56lA4A7R57,




A4A7R102, and A4A7R104, and to ‘lhble 3-4 for HP part numbers.


10. Step Gain and

18.4 MHz Local

Oscillator

Adjustments

Reference

Related Performance

Tests

Description

IF-Display Section

A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter

A4A5 Step Gain


IF Gain Uncertainty Test

Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test

First, the IF signal from the RF Section is measured with a power meter and adjusted for proper level. Next, the 10 dB gain steps are adjusted by connecting the CAL OUTPUT signal through two step attenuators to the RF INPUT and keying in the REFERENCE LEVEL necessary to activate each of the gain steps, while compensating for the increased gain with the step attenuators. The 1 dB gain steps are checked in the same fashion as the 10 dB gain steps, and then the variable gain is adjusted. The 18.4 MHz oscillator frequency is adjusted to provide adequate adjustment range of front-panel FREQ

ZERO control; and last, the + 1OV temperature compensation supply used by the A4A4 Bandwidth Filter and A4A8 Attenuator-Bandwidth

Filter is checked and adjusted if necessary.

DIGITAL VOLTMETER

ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR

Figure 3-46.

Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments Setup


Equipment

10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments


Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436 A

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A

10 dB Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3&D, Option H89

1 dB Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 355C, Option H25

Procedure

Note

Adjustment A4A5R33 CAL sets the gain of the A4A5 Step Gain

Assembly with no gain steps enabled. Perform Adjustment Procedure

5, “Log Amplifier Adjustments,” (steps 1-12) Adjustment Procedure 6,

“Video Processor Adjustments, ” Adjustment Procedure 8, “2 1.4 MHz

Bandwidth Filter Adjustments,” and Adjustment Procedure 23, “Track and Hold Adjustments” to ensure that the signal level at the top CRT graticule line is properly set before adjusting A4A5R33 CAL.

1.

Position the spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure

Figure 3-46 and remove the IF-Display Section top cover.

2.

Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press 1-1.

3.

Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the RF INPUT.

4.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (j-1 8 and adjust the front panel AMPTD CAL control for a displayed signal level of -10.00

dBm.

5.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (jj] 9 and adjust the front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum amplitude of the displayed signal trace.

+ 10 V Temperature

6.

Compensation Supply 7.

Adjustment

Connect DVM to A4A5TPl (+ 1OVF).

If DVM indication is between +9 V dc and 10.0 V dc, no adjustment is required.

8.

If DVM indication is not within tolerance of step 5, adjust A4A5R2

+ 1OV ADJ for DVM indication of +9.5 fO.l V dc at normal room temperature of approximately 25’C. Voltage change is approximately 30 mV/OC. Therefore, if room temperature is higher or lower than 25”C, adjustment should be made higher or lower, accordingly.

IF Gain Adjustment 9.

Key in (

CENTER FREQUENCY

] 100 MHz,

@EEKQ 0 dB, CFREQUENCY

SPAN

) 0 Hz,

100 Hz, and [ SWEEP TIME ) 20 ms.

CREFERENCE

LEVEL

] -10 dBm,

[RES- 1 kHz, [V’DEOBW]

10.

Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from A4A8Jl and connect cable to the calibrated power meter/power sensor. Refer to Figure 3-47 for location of cable 97 and A4A8Jl.

11.

Adjust front-panel AMPTD CAL adjustment for a power meter indication of -5 dBm.

12.

Disconnect power meter and reconnect cable 97 to A4A8Jl.

13.

Press LIN pushbutton and MARKER fjj).



14. Note MARKER amplitude in mV and adjust A4A5R33 CAL to

70.7 mV (top CRT graticule line). See Figure 3-47 for location of adjustment.

A4A8Jl

A4A7

3 M H z B A N D W I D T H

F I LTER

A4A5

S T E P G A I N

R 3 3

C A L

A4A.5

Figure 3-47. Location of IF Gain Adjustment

15.

If A4A5R33 CAL adjustment does not have sufficient range to adjust trace to the top CRT graticule line, increase or decrease the value of A4A7R60 as necessary to achieve the proper adjustment range of A4A5 CAL adjustment. See Figure 3-39 for the location of A4A7R60. Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values for A4A7R60.

10 dB Gain Step

16.

Adjustment

17.

Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 10 dB step attenuator and 1 dB step attenuator.

Key in LOG C

ENTER

dB/DIvI) 1 dB, c-1 3 Hz, and

(

REFERENCE LEVEL

] -30 dBm.

18.

Set step attenuators to 25 dB.

19.

Key in MARKER A. Signal trace should be at the center CRT graticule line, and MKR A level, as indicated by CRT annotation, should be .OO dB.

20.

Key in (

REFERENCE LEVEL


21.

Adjust A4A5R32 SGlO for MKR A level of .OO dB (CRT MKR A annotation is now in upper right corner of CRT display). See




A4A5 S T E P G A I N

R 3 2

SGlO

R 4 4

SGZO-1

R 5 4

SGZO-2 R 7 0 R 6 2

A4A5

Figure 3-48. Location of 10 dB Gain Step Adjustments

22. If A4A5R32 SGlO adjustment does not have sufficient range to perform adjustment in step 19, increase or decrease the value of

A4A7R60 as necessary to achieve the proper adjustment range of

A4A5 SGlO. See Figure 3-39 for the location of A4A7R60. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values for A4A7R60. Repeat steps 9 through 21 if the value of A4A7R60 is changed.

23. Key in [ REFERENCE LEVEL ) -50 dBm. Set step attenuators to 45 dB.

24. Adjust A4A5R44 SG20-1 for MKR A level of .OO dB. See


25. Key in [

REFERENCE LEVEL


26. Adjust A4A5R54 SG20-2 for MKR A level of .OO dB. See


1 dB Gain Step Checks

27. Key in CREFERENCE

LEVEL

] -19.9 dBm. Set step attenuators to 15 dB. Press MARKER Ia] twice to establish a new reference.

28. Key in REFERENCE

LEVEL

) -17.9 dBm. Set step attenuators to 13 dB.

29. MKR A level, as indicated by CRT annotation, should be .OO f0.05

dB. If not, increase or decrease the value of A4A5R86. Refer to

Table 3-3 for range of values.

30. Key in (

REFERENCE LEVEL

] -15.9 dBm. Set step attenuators to 11 dB.

31. MKR A level should be .OO f0.05 dB. If not, increase or decrease the value of A4A5R70. Refer to ‘Ikble 3-3 for range of values.

32. Key in [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) -11.9 dBm. Set step attenuators to 7 dB.

33. MKR A level should be .OO f0.05 dB. If not, increase or decrease the value of A4A5R62. Refer to ‘Ihble 3-3 for range of values.



0.1 dB Gain Step

34.

Adjustment

Key in LIN, ISHIFT) * [AUTO) (resolution bandwidth), and

(

REFERENCE LEVEL

] -19.9 dBm. Set step attenuators to 13 dB. Press

MARKER [nl twice to establish a new reference.

35.

Key in (

REFERENCE LEVEL

] -18.0 dBm. Set step attenuators to 11 dB.

36.

Adjust A4A5R51 VR for MKR A level of +O.lO dB. See Figure 3-49 for location of adjustment.

37.

Remove all test equipment from the spectrum analyzer. Connect

CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.

18.4 MHz Local

38.

Oscillator Adjustment 39.

Press (2-22] and IRECALL) @.

Set front-panel FREQ ZERO control to midrange.

40.

Adjust A4A5ClO FREQ ZERO to peak signal trace on CRT. See


A4A5 S T E P G A I N

R2

+lOV A D J RlO

Cl0 F R E Q

Z E R O C O A R S E C9

R51

V R

A4A5

Figure 3-49.

Location of .l dB Gain Step, 18.4 MHz LO, and + 1OV

Adjustments

41. Key in ( FREQUENCY SPAN ] 1 kHz, l-j-j] 100 Hz, and

(PEAK SEARCH] [a.

42. Adjust front-panel FREQ ZERO control fully clockwise. Press

CPEAK

SEARCH

]. Signal should move at least 60 Hz away from center CRT graticule line.

43. Adjust front-panel FREQ ZERO control fully counterclockwise.

Press ( PEAK SEARCH ). Signal should move at least 60 Hz away from center CRT graticule line.

44. If proper indications are not achieved, increase or decrease value of A4A5C9 and repeat adjustment from step 33. Refer to ‘Iable

3-3 for range of values.

45. Press @?XiGj and (RECALL) @.

46. Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO for maximum amplitude of the displayed signal trace.


Note


Factory-select component A4A7R60 affects the adjustment of

A4A6AlR29 WIDE GAIN. If the value of A4A7R60 is changed, perform Adjustment Procedure 11, “Down/Up Converter

Adjustments”.


11. Down/Up

Converter

Adjustments

Reference

IF-Display Section

A4A6 Down/Up Converter

Related Performance

Test


Description

The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT connector of the spectrum analyzer and controls are set to display the signal in a narrow bandwidth. A marker is placed at the peak of the signal to measure the peak amplitude. The bandwidth is changed to a wide bandwidth and the Down/Up Converter is adjusted to place the peak amplitude of the signal the same as the level of the narrow bandwidth signal. Optionally, the input signal is removed and the IF signal is monitored at the output of the Bandwidth Filters using a spectrum analyzer with an active probe. The 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator and all harmonics are then adjusted for minimum amplitude.

HP 55024A

HIGH FREQUENCY PROBE

SPECTRW

I SPECTRUM ANALYZER

PROBE

PWER SUPPLY

Equipment

Figure 3-50. Down/Up Converter Adjustments Setup

Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8566B

Active Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85024A

Probe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 1122A

Procedure

Note

Adjustment A4A6AlR29 WIDE GAIN adjusts the amplitude of the

21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filters (3 kHz through 3 MHz) relative to the amplitude of the 3 MHz Bandwidth Filters (1 kHz through 10 Hz).

Perform Adjustment Procedure 6, “Log Amplifier Adjustments,”

(steps 1-12) Adjustment Procedure 8, “21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter

Adjustments,” and Adjustment Procedure 7, “3 MHz Bandwidth Filter

Adjustments” to ensure that the amplitudes of the bandwidth filters are optimized before adjusting A4A6AlR29 WIDE GAIN (steps 14-17).


Note

11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments

The adjustment of A4A6AlR29 WIDE GAIN is affected by factory-select component A4A7R60, which sets the overall gain of the A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Assembly. If the A4A7 3 MHz

Bandwidth Filter Assembly or the A4A5 Step Gain Assembly is repaired or replaced, perform Adjustment Procedure 10, “Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments” to select (if necessary)

A4A7R60 before adjusting A4A6AlR29 WIDE GAIN (steps 14-17).

1. Position the spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure 3-50 and remove the IF-Display Section top cover.

2. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press [GHz_).

3. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to the RF INPUT.

4. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [RECALL-] 8 and adjust the front-panel AMPTD CAL control for a displayed signal level of

-10.00 dBm.

5. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (ml 9 and adjust the front-panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum amplitude of the displayed signal.

A4A6 D O W N / U P C O N V E R T E R

A4A6

Figure 3-51. Location of Down/Up Converter Adjustments

Down Converter Gain

Adjustment

Note

Perform steps 6 through 15 if the A4A6 Down/Up Converter Assembly has been repaired, or if factory-select component A4A7R60 has insufficient adjustment range. Otherwise, skip to step 17.

6. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove

A4A6 Down/Up Converter Assembly from the IF-Display Section and install on two extender boards.

7. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON, and key in

(2-22GHz), (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 100 M

HZ

, (FREQUENCY

SPAN

] 0 HZ,

(mBW) 1 kHz, [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) -10 dBm.

8. Connect the active probe to the probe power supply and the

RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure

3-50. On the second spectrum analyzer, key in 1-1,



~CENTER

FREQUENCY

) 21.4 MHz, CFREQUENCY SPAN] 50 kHz, fj’j]

10 kHz, [

REFERENCE LEVEL

) -30 dBm.

9.

Connect the tip of the active probe to A4A6A2TP4. On the second spectrum analyzer, press CREFERENCE

LEVEL

] and use the

DATA knob to position the peak of the displayed 2 1.4 MHz signal near the top CRT graticule line.

10.

On the second spectrum analyzer, key in (jj’ 2 dB,

MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ] and record the level of the displayed 21.4

MHz signal:

Signal level at A4A6A2TP4: dBm

11.

On the second spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER [al,

~CENTER

FREQUENCY

] 3 MHZ .

12.

Connect the tip of the active probe to A4A6A2Pl-9. On the second spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

] and record the level of the displayed 3 MHz signal:

Signal level at A4A6A2Pl-9: dB

13.

The 3 MHz signal level at A4A6A2Pl-9 measured in step 12 should be 10.0 dB f0.6 dB lower than the 21.4 MHz signal level at A4A6A2TP4 measured in step 10. If not, change the value of factory-select resistor A4A6A2R33. A 10% decrease in the value of A4A6A2R33 increases the signal level at A4A6A2Pl-9 by approximately 0.6 dB. Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A4A6A2R33 and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers.

14.

Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY.

15.

Remove A4A6 Down/Up Converter Assembly from the two extender boards and reinstall in the IF-Display Section.

21.4 MHz Gain

16.

17.

Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press C-1.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in [

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 100 MHz,

~FREQUENCY SPAN_) 10 kHz, (RES] 1 kHz, [

REFERENCE

LEVELS -7 dBm, and press the LIN pushbutton.

18.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

),

MARKER Ia], (jj- 1 MHz.

19.

Adjust A4A6AlR29 WIDE GAIN for a MKR A indication of 1.00 X, aligning the two markers on the CRT display. See Figure 3-51 for the adjustment location.

18.4 MHz Null

Adjustment

20.

Disconnect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT from the RF

INPUT.

21.


REFERENCE

LEVELI) -70 dBm,

(jj) 1 kHz, MARKER (OFF).

22.

On the second spectrum analyzer, key in c-1, [ START FREQ] 5

MHz, CsTopFREQ) 50 MHz, IjREs) 100 kHz.



23. Connect the tip of the active probe to A4A4TP7, and adjust

A4A6AlC31 18.4 MHz NULL for minimum amplitudes of the displayed 18.4 MHz and 36.8 MHz signals on the second spectrum analyzer. The level of the displayed 18.4 MHz signal should be below -10 dBm.

If A4A6AlC31 has insufficient adjustment range, increase the value of factory-select resistor A4A5RlO. See Figure 3-49 for the location of A4A5RlO. Refer to ‘Ikble 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A4A5RlO and to lkble 3-4 for HP part numbers.


12. 10 MHz

Standard

Adjustment (SN


Reference

Description

Equipment

RF-Section:

A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard

A22A2 Frequency Standard Regulator

The frequency of the internal 10 MHz Frequency Standard is compared to a known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum frequency error. This procedure does not adjust the short-term stability or long-term stability of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator, which are determined by characteristics of the particular oscillator and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been recently exposed. The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously

(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize.

Frequency Standard

(10 iW?Yz with aging rate of -~flX10-‘~) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 5061B

Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5334A/B

Cables:

BNC cable, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10503A

Procedure

Note

Note

The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously (not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal

Oscillator to stabilize. Adjustment should not be attempted before the oscillator is allowed to reach its specified aging rate. Failure to allow sufficient stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment.

The A22Al 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator (HP P/N 0960-0477) will typically reach its specified aging rate again within 72 hours after being switched off for a period of up to 24 hours. If extreme environmental conditions were encountered during storage or shipment (i.e. mechanical shock, temperature extremes) the oscillator could require up to 30 days to achieve its specified aging rate.

1. Set the rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch on the spectrum analyzer RF Section to INT.

The +22 Vdc STANDBY supply provides power to the heater circuit in the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard assembly whenever line power is applied to the RF Section. This allows the A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard oven to remain at thermal equilibrium, minimizing frequency drift due to temperature variations. The OVEN COLD


Note

Note

12. 10 MHz Standard Adjustment (SN 2637A and Below) message should typically appear on the spectrum analyzer display for

10 minutes or less after line power is first applied to the RF Section.

The rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch enables or disables the RF

Section +20 Vdc switched supply, which powers the oscillator circuits in the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard. This switch must be set to

INT and the spectrum analyzer must be switched ON continuously

(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours before adjusting the frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard.

2. Set the LINE switch to ON. Leave the spectrum analyzer ON

(not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for at least 48 hours to allow the temperature and frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard to stabilize.

‘lb prolong CRT life, press ISHIFT) [CLEAR-WRITES to turn off the CRT display while the spectrum analyzer is unattended, and (m’

[my to turn the CRT back on.

3. Connect the (Cesium Beam) Frequency Standard to the Frequency

Counter rear-panel TIMEBASE IN/OUT connector as shown in

Figure 3-52.

FREQUENCY COUNTER IN/OUT FREQUENCY STANDARD l9

Figure 3-52. 10 MHz Frequency Standard Adjustments Setup

4. Disconnect the short jumper cable on the RF Section rear panel from the FREQ REFERENCE INT connector. Connect this output

(FREQ REFERENCE INT) to INPUT A on the Frequency Counter.

A REF UNLOCK message should appear on the CRT display.

5. Set the Frequency Counter controls as follows:

FUNCTION/DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREQ A

INPUT A: x10ATTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OFF

AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (DC coupled)

500 Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OFF (1 MO input impedance)

AUTO TRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

100 kHz FILTER A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

INT/EXT switch (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT

6. On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by frequency by -10.0 MHz by pressing MATH (

SELECT

/

ENTER

(CHS/EEX) 10 C-1 6 @ELECT/ENTER) (SELECT/ENTER). T!te


12. 10 MHz Standard Adjustment (SN 2637A and Below)

Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal (A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard) and 10.0 MHz with a displayed resolution of 1 mHz

(0.001 Hz).

7. Wait at least two gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle, and record the frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard as reading #l .

mHz Reading # 1:

8. Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered (not in

STANDBY) and undisturbed for an additional 24 hours.

9. Repeat steps 3 through 7 and record the frequency of the A22 10

MHz Frequency Standard as reading #2.

Reading #2: mHz

10. If the difference between reading #2 and reading #l is greater than 1 mHz, the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard has not achieved its specified aging rate; the spectrum analyzer should remain powered (not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for an additional 24-hour interval. Then, repeat steps 3 through 7, recording the frequency of the 10 MHz Frequency Standard at the end of each 24-hour interval, until the specified aging rate of 1 mHz/day ( lX1O-g/day) is achieved.

Reading #3:

Reading #4:

Reading #5:

Reading #6:

Reading #7:

Reading #8:

Reading #9:

Reading #lo:

Reading # 11: mHz mHz mHz mHz mHz mHz mHz mHz mHz

11. Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown in Figure 3-52,and remove the bottom cover. Typically, the frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard will shift slightly when the spectrum analyzer is reoriented. Record this shifted frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard.

Reading # 11: mHz

12. Subtract the shifted frequency reading in step 11 from the last recorded frequency in step 10. This gives the frequency correction factor needed to adjust the A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard.

Frequency Correction Factor: mHz

13. On the Frequency Counter, select a 1 second gate time by pressing

(GATETIME_) 1 C-TIME). The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.01 Hz (10 mHz).


Note

12. 10 MEtz Standard Adjustment (SN 2637A and Below)

14. Remove the two adjustment cover screws from the A22 10 MHz

Frequency Standard. Refer to Figure 3-53 for the location of the

A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard.

Do not use a metal adjustment tool to tune an oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO). The metal will conduct heat away from the oscillator circuit, shifting the operating conditions.

A 2 2

1 0 M H z m /Standard

TOP VIEW

Figure 3-53. Location of 10 MHz Standard Adjustments

15. Use a nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the 16-turn FINE frequency adjustment on the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard for a Frequency Counter indication of 0.00 Hz. If the FINE frequency adjustment has insufficient range, center the adjustment and then adjust the COARSE frequency adjustment for a Frequency

Counter indication of 0.00 Hz.

16. On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by pressing (GATE) 10 C-1. The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the

INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.001 Hz (1 mHz).

17. Wait at least 2 gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle, and then adjust the 16-turn FINE adjustment on the A22 10 MHz

Frequency Standard for a stable Frequency Counter indication of

(0.000 + Frequency Correction Factor) f0.010 Hz.

18. Replace the two adjustment cover screws on the A22 10 MHz

Frequency Standard.

19. Replace the RF Section bottom cover and reconnect the short jumper cable between the FREQ REFERENCE INT and EXT connectors.


12. 10 MHz

Standard

Adjustment (SN


Reference

RF-Section:

A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard

A22Al Frequency Standard Regulator

A22A2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator

Description

The frequency of the internal 10 MHz Frequency Standard is compared to a known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum frequency error. This procedure does not adjust the short-term stability or long-term stability of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator, which are determined by characteristics of the particular oscillator and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been recently exposed. The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously

(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize.

Equipment

Frequency Standard

(10 MHz with aging rate of -ctlX1O-lo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.HP 5061B

Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5334A/l3

Cables:

BNC cable, 122 cm

(48 in)

(2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP 10503A

Procedure

Note

The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously (not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize.

Adjustment should not be attempted before the oscillator is allowed to reach its specified aging rate. Failure to allow sufficient stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment.

The A22A2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator (HP P/N 10811-60111) will typically reach its specified aging rate again within 72 hours after being switched off for a period of up to 30 days, and within

24 hours after being switched off for a period less than 24 hours. If extreme environmental conditions were encountered during storage or shipment (i.e. mechanical shock, temperature extremes) the oscillator could require up to 30 days to achieve its specified aging rate.


Note

Note

Note

12. 10 MHz Standard Adjustment (SN 2728A and Above)

Replacement oscillators are factory-adjusted after a complete warmup and after the specified aging rate has been achieved. Readjustment should typically not be necessary after oscillator replacement, and is generally not recommended.

1. Set the rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch on the spectrum analyzer RF Section to INT.

The +22 Vdc STANDBY supply provides power to the heater circuit in the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard assembly whenever line power is applied to the RF Section. This allows the A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard oven to remain at thermal equilibrium, minimizing frequency drift due to temperature variations. The OVEN COLD message should typically appear on the spectrum analyzer display for

10 minutes or less after line power is first applied to the RF Section.

The rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch enables or disables the RF

Section +20 Vdc switched supply, which powers the oscillator circuits in the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard. This switch must be set to

INT and the spectrum analyzer must be switched ON continuously

(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours before adjusting the frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard.

2. Set the LINE switch to ON. Leave the spectrum analyzer ON

(not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for at least 48 hours to allow the temperature and frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard to stabilize.

To prolong CRT life, press (SHIFT] (CLEAR-WRITES) to turn off the

CRT display while the spectrum analyzer is unattended, and (SHIFT]

(NlAXy to turn the CRT back on.

3. Connect the (Cesium Beam) Frequency Standard to the Frequency

Counter rear-panel TIMEBASE IN/OUT connector as shown in

Figure 3-54.

F FREQUENCY STANDARD

\ / /

Figure 3-54. 10 MHz Frequency Standard Adjustments Setup



4. Disconnect the short jumper cable on the RF Section rear panel from the FREQ REFERENCE INT connector. Connect this output

(FREQ REFERENCE INT) to INPUT A on the Frequency Counter.

A REF UNLOCK message should appear on the CRT display.

5. Set the Frequency Counter controls as follows

FUNCTION/DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREQ A

INPUT A: x10 A’ITN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OFF

AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (DC coupled)

508 Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (1 Mfl input impedance)

AUTO TRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

100 kHz FILTER A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

INT/EXT switch (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT

6. On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by pressing L-1 10 [GATE]. Offset the displayed frequency by - 10.0 MHz by pressing MATH @

ELECT

/

ENTER

]

T 10 [ZTZZKJ 6 & h / ENTER ) ( SELECT / ENTER ].

e

Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal (A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard) and 10.0 MHz with a displayed resolution of 1 mHz

(0.001 Hz).

7. Wait at least two gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle, and record the frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard as reading #l.

Reading # 1: mHz

Note

The A22A2 Quartz Crystal Oscillator has a typical adjustment range of

10 MHz f10 Hz. The oscillator frequency should be within this range after 48 hours of continuous operation.

8. Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered (not in

STANDBY) and undisturbed for an additional 24 hours.

9. Repeat steps 3 through 7 and record the frequency of the A22 10

MHz Frequency Standard as reading #2.

Reading #2: mHz


Note


10.

If the difference between reading #2 and reading #l is greater than 1 mHz, the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard has not achieved its specified aging rate; the spectrum analyzer should remain powered (not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for an additional 24-hour interval. Then, repeat steps 3 through 7, recording the frequency of the 10 MHz Frequency Standard at the end of each 24-hour interval, until the specified aging rate of 1 mHz/day (lX1O-g/day) is achieved.

Reading #3:

Reading #4: mHz mHz

Reading #5:

Reading #6:

Reading #7: mHz mHz mHz

11.

Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown in

Figure 3-54, and remove the bottom cover. Typically, the frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard will shift slightly when the spectrum analyzer is reoriented. Record this shifted frequency of the A22 10 MHz Frequency Standard.

Reading #8: mHz

12.

Subtract the shifted frequency reading in step 11 from the last recorded frequency in step 10. This gives the frequency correction factor needed to adjust the A22 10 MHz Frequency

Standard.

Frequency Correction Factor: mHz

13.

On the Frequency Counter, select a 1 second gate time by pressing

[GATE] 1 [GATE]. The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.01 Hz (10 mHz).

Do not use a metal adjustment tool to tune an oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO). The metal will conduct heat away from the oscillator circuit, shifting the operating conditions.

14. Use a nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the 18-turn FREQ

ADJ capacitor on the A22A2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for a Frequency Counter indication of 0.00 Hz. Refer to Figure 3-55 for the location of the A22A2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator.


12. 10 MHZ Standard Adjustment (SN 2728A and Above)

L.

TOP VIEW

Figure 3-55. Location of 10 MHz Standard Adjustments

15. On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by pressing (GATE-1 10 C-1. The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the

INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.001 Hz (1 mHz).

16. Wait at least 2 gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle, and then adjust the FREQ ADJ capacitor on the A22A2 10

MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for a stable Frequency Counter indication of (0.000 + Frequency Correction Factor) fO.O1O Hz.

17. Replace the RF Section bottom cover and reconnect the short jumper cable between the FREQ REFERENCE INT and EXT connectors.

3-l 12 Adjustments

13. Sweep, DAC, and Main Coil Driver Adjustments

13. Sweep, DAC, and Main Coil

Driver

Adjustments

Reference

Related Performance

Tests

Description

Note

RF-Section:

Al6 Scan Generator

A19 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)

A20 Main Coil Driver

Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test

Frequency Span Accuracy Test

Sweep Time Accuracy Test

The Sweep Time is adjusted first by viewing the Scan Ramp on an oscilloscope and adjusting for proper levels. Next, the AUX OUT Ramp

(SWEEP RECORDER OUTPUT) is adjusted to produce a continuous stepped ramp over multi-band sweeps. Offset adjustments are performed on both the Al6 Scan Generator and A19 DAC Assemblies to set the start voltages of the various sweep and span ramps. The

A20 Main Coil Driver Assembly is adjusted to set the two frequency end-points of the YIG-tuned oscillator. Finally, frequency span accuracy for YTO Spans (>5 MHz) is adjusted by adjusting the Sweep

Attenuator gains on the Al6 Scan Generator Assembly and the 5.8

and 12.5 GHz Band Overlap adjustments on the A19 DAC Assembly.

Adjustments in this procedure affect YTO/YTX tracking. Adjustment

Procedure 2 1, “Frequency Response Adjustments” should be performed after this procedure to ensure specified performance.

Equipment

Universal Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5316A

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 8340A/B

Digitizing Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 54501A

1O:l Divider Probe, 10 MHz/7.5 pF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 10432A

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3456A

Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5343A

Adapters:

Adapter, BNC (f) to SMA (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 1250-1200

Cables:

Low-Loss Microwave Test Cable (APC 3.5) . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8120-4921



Procedure

1. Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown in

Figure 3-56, with bottom cover removed. Remove RF Digital

Section cover over the Al2 through Al6 assemblies. Jumper

A12TP2 to A12TP3 (Lock Indicator Disable).

SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER

:R

GA18

SPECTRW ANALTZER

Figure 3-56. Sweep and DAC Adjustments Setup

2. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON.

3. Key in @iZTEiZGHz_), [ SWEEP TIME ] 500 ms.

4. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to A16TP3 (Scan Ramp).

Connect rear panel SWEEP + TUNE OUT to the oscilloscope channel 2 input.


Press (CHAN)

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on

probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1O:l amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3.5 V coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..d c

Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 mVldiv offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-1.2 5 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..d c probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l:l

Press [TRIG)

EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . auto, edge source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Channel 2 level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.375 V, rising edge

Press (TIME) time Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..50ms/di v



Press [j) connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press ($K%ij hp s t o p p e d

1 2 . 0 0 V/div offset: 3 . 5 0 0 v

10.00 : I dc

2 f 1.375 v

Figure 3-57. OV to + 1OV Sweep Ramp at A16TP3

Sweep Time

6. Connect universal counter INPUT A to the spectrum analyzer rear

Adjustment (Preferred panel PENLIFT RECORDER OUTPUT.

Procedure)

7. Set universal counter controls as follows:

Counter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..TI A-B

FILTER NORM/100 kHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .FILTER NORM

SEPKOM A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COM A

GATE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fully ccw

Channel A/Channel B:

Trigger Slope (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .in (negative)

Trigger Slope (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . out (positive)

TRIGGER LEVEL/SENSITIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . out

AC/DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC

ATTEN Xl/X20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .X20

8. Adjust universal counter channel A and channel B TRIGGER

LEVEL controls as necessary to trigger both channels on PENLIFT

RECORDER OUTPUT signal.

9. Adjust A16R67 SWEEP TIME adjustment for counter time interval indication of 500 fl ms. See Figure 3-58 for the location of

A16R67.



A19

DAC

Al6

SCAN

GENERATOR

TOP VIEW

A19 (85660-60212)

Al6 (85660-60247)

Figure 3-58. Location of Sweep and DAC Adjustments

Sweep Time

10. Adjust A16R67 SWEEP TIME adjustment for sweep ramp of 500

Adjustment (Alternate ms duration (not including dead time at beginning and end of

Procedure) each ramp) as measured on the oscilloscope.

Aux Out Adjustment

11. Press (2-22).

12. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 to A16TP4 (AUX OUT). Display should be a stepped series of 4 sweep ramps similar to that shown in Figure 3-59.


h, s t o p p e d


1 2 . 0 0 V/div offset: 3 . 5 0 0 v

10.00 : I dc

; i ; ; :

I ..- ~. T

/ ./. i i 1 / ;

. + _.... + _......._....... /: .._.......... + ._._......,.__; .._..... _

[ ; / i 1 1;: k $-.---

/ 1 I

] : i i .._...._.... i .,,. i I ...._._._.I..._ i .._. I......_.._.._..._ i .._.............. i .._._........... i ..___........... /

I

- 1 . 0 0 0 0 0 s 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 s

2 0 0 nsldiv

1 . 0 0 0 0 0 s

2 f 1.375 v

Figure 3-59. Properly Adjusted DC Levels Between Sweep Ramps

13. Adjust A16R68 AUX adjustment to align dc level of 3 dead time steps with upper dc level of each preceding sweep ramp. Refer to Figure 3-59 and Figure 3-60 for typical display of proper and improper adjustment.

h, s t o p p e d

1 2 . 0 0 V/div offset: 3 . 5 0 0 v

10.00 : I dc b

; . ..!.” + . ../ .( .j...... / i iI:

4 ,...

:.. I 1_.....,........,.. :I:.

i i . ...+...! .++.~ t- ...,,..,(,,,, ~11111’:1:::~~~,~ ,__,,,,, 1,

2 0 0 ms/div

2 f 1.375 v

Figure 3-60. Improperly Adjusted DC Levels Between Sweep Ramps

14. Disconnect the oscilloscope (and universal counter) from the spectrum analyzer.



Offset and YTO DAC

15. Perform this step only if the Al6 Scan Generator is P/N

Adjustments 85660-60134 or 85660-60034. (HP 85660AB with serial number prefix 2235A or below.) a.

Connect DVM to A16TP3 and DVM ground to A16TPl GND.

b.

Key in (jZZi%J SWEEP (SINGLE), (SHIFT) (RES)r (forces spectrum analyzer to reset Scan Ramp to 0 Vdc after each single sweep).

C.

Press SWEEP (ZiYZXQ.

d.

After sweep has completed, adjust A16R74 Scan Reset

OFFSET for stable DVM indication of 0.0000 f0.0005 Vdc.

e.

Repeat steps c through d until no further adjustment is necessary.

f.

Connect DVM to A16TP5 and DVM ground to Al6TP6 GND.

8.

Key in [W] (iEZT)), [

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 4 GHz,

(

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 2.4 GHz, [SAVE) 1, ( FREQUENCY SPAN ) 260 MHz,

@EJ 2, @~EENCY SPAN ) 240 MHz, m 3, [

FREQUENCY SPAN

)

80 MHz, IsAvE_] 4.

h.

Key in (-1 1 and note stable DVM indication after sweep has completed.

i.

Key in (jj] 2 and note change in stable DVM indication from previous step.

j.

Adjust A16R75 Scan Width DAC OFFSET while alternating between (-1 1 and [RECALL_) 2 so that stable DVM indication varies less than 1 mVdc.

k.

Connect DVM to A16TP8 and DVM ground to A16TP7 GND.

1.

Key in C-1 3 and note stable DVM indication after sweep has completed.

m.

Key in @ZXiIiJ 4 and note change in stable DVM indication from previous step.

n.

Adjust A16R76 Integer Number Attenuator OFFSET while alternating between [mj 3 and (j-1 4 so that stable

DVM indication varies less than 1 mVdc.

16. Perform this step only if the Al6 Scan Generator is P/N

85660-60188, 85660-60198, or 85660-60247. (HP 85660AB with serial number prefix 2240A or above.) a. Connect DVM to Al6TP8 and DVM ground to A16TP7.

b. Key in (2--22j, SWEEP [SINGLE], CSHIFT) (REsBWr (forces instrument to reset Scan Ramp to 0 Vdc after each single sweep).

c. Press SWEEP [SINGLEI).

d. After sweep is completed, adjust A16R62 RAMP OFFSET for stable DVM indication of 0.0000 f0.0005 Vdc.

e. Repeat steps c through d until no further adjustment is necessary.



17. Perform this step only if the A19 Digital-to-Analog Converter is P/N 85660-60164 or 85660-60038. (HP 85660A/B with serial number prefix 2407A or below.) a. Connect DVM to A19TP2 and DVM ground to A19 GND.

b. Key in C-1, [SHIFT) [ml), SWEEP C-J, LSHIFT)

@EiGT~, @TART

FREQ

) 2.5 GHz, LsTopFREQ) 4.9 GHz, (SAVE_) 1,

@KFEij-- 2.51 GHz, (SAVE) 2, [sTop) 22 GHz, m 3,

[FREQUENCY

SPAN

) 0 HZ , &ENTER FREQUENCY) 2.0 GHZ, (SAVE_) 4,

(

CENTER FREQUENCY

] 6.2 GHz, IsAVEJ 5, [

CENTER FREQUENCY

] 2.3

GHz, (SAVE) 6.

c. Key in (ml 1 and note stable DVM indication after sweep has completed (approximately -7.5 Vdc).

d. Key in @ZZXiJ 2 and note change in stable DVM indication from previous step.

e. Adjust A19R19 Summing Amplifier OFFSET while alternating between@=] 1 and (m) 2 so that stable DVM indication varies less than 1 mVdc.

f. Key in (RECALL] 1 and note stable DVM indication after sweep has completed.

g. Key in (w) 3 and note change in stable DVM indication from previous step.

h. Adjust A19R41 25 GHz SPAN OFFSET while alternating between @ZiiQ 1 and [RECALL_) 3 so that stable DVM indication varies less than 3 mVdc.

i. Key in (?ZZZiIQ 4 (to set YTO Pretune DAC to 0).

j. After sweep has completed, adjust A19R5 DC for stable DVM indication of -6.0000 f0.0005 Vdc.

k. Key in Cm] 5 (to set YTO Pretune DAC to 4095).

1. After sweep has completed, adjust A19R2 AV for stable DVM indication of -18.6000 f0.0005 Vdc.

m. Key in km) 6 (to set YTO Pretune DAC to 293).

n. After sweep has completed, readjust Al9R5 DC for stable

DVM indication of -6.9010 f0.0005 Vdc.

o. Repeat steps k through n until no further adjustments are necessary.

18. Perform this step only if the A19 Digital-to-Analog Converter is

P/N 85660-60212. (HP 85660A/EI with serial number prefix 2409A and above.) a. Connect DVM to A19TP5 and DVM ground to A19TP3.

b. Key in C-J, CsHlFTJ [IZZXQ), SWEEP (WJ, (SHIFT)

(jRESy, [ FREQUENCY SPAN ) 0 HZ , (CENTER F REQUENCY ]

2 GHz, (SAVE) 1, [ CENTER FREQUENCY ) 6.2 GHz, m 2,

[

CENTER FREQUENCY

_) 2.3 GHz,w 3, [

START FREQ

) 2.5 GHz,

@EEiKQ 2.51 GHz, ISAVE) 4, c-1 5 GHz, m 5,

(sTopI 10 GHz, LSAVE) 6.



C.

Key in @Z?XiYj 1 (to set YTO Pretune DAC to 0).

d.

Adjust A19R50 for DVM indication of + 10.0000 f0.0005 Vdc.

e.

Connect DVM to A19TP2 (DVM ground to A19TP3).

f.

Key in [RECALL] 2 (to set YT.0 Pretune DAC to 4095).

8.

After sweep has completed, adjust A19R9 for stable DVM indication of -18.6000 f0.0005 Vdc.

h.

Key in [RECALL_) 3 (to set YTO Pretune DAC to 293).

i.

After sweep has completed, adjust A19R19 Summing Amplifier

OFFSET for a stable DVM indication of -6.9010 f0.0005 Vdc.

.i.

Repeat steps f through i until no further adjustments are necessary.

k.

Key in (ml 4 and note stable DVM indication after sweep has completed.

1.

Key in (RECALL) 5 and note change in stable DVM indication from previous step.

m.

Adjust A19R56 2.5 GHz SPAN OFFSET while alternating between (RECALL_) 4 and (m) 5 so that stable DVM indication varies less than 1 mVdc.

n.

Key in [RECALL) 4 and note stable DVM indication after sweep has completed.

0.

Key in (jj] 6 and note change in stable DVM indication from previous step.

P.

Adjust A19R41 25 GHz SPAN OFFSET while alternating between (RECALL) 4 and [Wj 6 so that stable DVM indication varies less than 1 mVdc.

YTO Main Coil Driver 19.

Adjustments

(Preferred Procedure)

20.

Jumper A20TP5 GND to A21TP2 and disconnect DVM from

A19TP2 and A19TP3.

Disconnect the cable 8 (grey) from All YTO Loop Assembly at

AllJl 0 DET OUT.

21.

Connect frequency counter to front-panel 1ST LO OUTPUT as shown in Figure 3-61.

FREOUENCY COUNTER

ADAPTER i-

Figure 3-61. YTO Main Coil Driver Adjustments Setup



22. Key in (2--22), [SHIFT) I-]), SWEEP C-J, m

@i%EiF~, CFREQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz, (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 2.3 GHz,

ISAVE_) 1, [

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 6.15 GHz, IsAvE_) 2.

23. Key in Cm] 1.

24. Adjust A20R34 2.3 GHz adjustment for frequency counter indication of 2300.0 fO.l MHz, allowing time for frequency counter display to settle. Refer to Figure 3-62 for location of adjustments.

A 2 0

M A I N C O I L D R I V E R

A l l J l

0 D E T

O U T

0 D E T

2.;

I

A 2 0

Figure 3-62. Location of YTO Main Coil Driver Adjustments

25. Key in Cm) 2.

26. Adjust A20R25 6.15 GHz adjustment for frequency counter indication of 6150.0 fO.l MHz, allowing time for frequency counter display to settle.

27. Repeat steps 23 through 26 several times until no further adjustments are necessary.

28. Remove jumpers from between A20TP5 and A21TP2 and between

A12TP2 and A12TP3. Reconnect cable 8 (grey) to AllJl 0 DET

OUT. Disconnect frequency counter from front-panel 1ST LO

OUTPUT and reconnect 5012 load.

YTO Main Coil Driver

29. Disconnect cable 8 (grey) from AllJl O/ DET OUT. Jumper

Adjustments A20TP5 GND to A21TP2 and disconnect DVM from A19TP2 and

(Alternate Procedure) A19TP3.

30. Connect front-panel CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT as shown in

Figure 3-63.



SPECTRLU ANALYZER

Figure 3-63.

YTO Main Coil Driver Adjustments Setup (Alternate

Piocedure)

31.

Key in @Z?iTKJ, CCENTER

FREQUENCY

) 0 Hz (Frequency Span readout should indicate 2 GHz).

32.

Adjust A20R25 6.15 GHz adjustment to obtain two comb teeth

(f100 MHz harmonics of CAL OUTPUT signal) per division on display. Comb teeth should be evenly spaced but not necessarily aligned with CRT graticule lines (counterclockwise rotation of adjustment increases spacing between comb teeth).

33.

Adjust A20R34 2.3 GHz adjustment to align LO feedthrough signal

(0 Hz) with center CRT graticule line. It might be necessary to disconnect RF INPUT to locate LO feedthrough signal

(counterclockwise rotation of adjustment moves signal to right).

34.

Repeat steps 32 through 33 until comb teeth are spaced two per division and aligned with CRT graticule lines (every other comb tooth will align with a graticule line).

35.

Key in ( CENTER FREQUENCYI) 2 GHz, [ FREQUENCY SPAN) 100 MHz,

(RES) 30 KHz, (SAVE_] 1, [CENTER] (SHIFT) (WJ .9

GHz, m 2, & ENTER FREQUENCY ] 2 GHz, ~EQUENCY SPANS 10

MHz, &iEEiiij 10 kHz, ISAVE_) 3, (C

ENTER FREQUENCY

) CsHlFTl [=J

.9 GHz, (SAVE) 4.

36.

Key in [RECALL] 1. With CAL OUTPUT connected to RF INPUT, at least one comb tooth should be visible on display.

37.

Adjust A20R25 6.15 GHz to align nearest comb tooth with center

CRT graticule line.

38.

Key in [j?EZXQ 2.

39.


CRT graticule line.

40.

Repeat steps 36 through 39 until no further adjustments are necessary.

41.

Key in (RECALL) 3.



42.


CRT graticule line.

43.

Key in (RECALL) 4.

44.


CRT graticule line.

45. Repeat steps 41 through 44 until no further adjustments are necessary.

46.

Reconnect cable 8 (grey) to AllJl O/ DET OUT. Remove jumpers from between A12TP2 and A12TP3 and between A20TP5 GND and A21TP2. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 to A21TP2.

47.

Key in C-13.

48.

Adjust A20R25 6.15 GHz for oscilloscope indication of 0.0 f0.2

Vdc.

49.

Key in (RECALL) 4.

50.

Adjust A20R34 2.3 GHz for oscilloscope indication of 0.0 f0.2

Vdc.

51. Repeat steps 47 through 50 until no further adjustments are necessary.

52. Disconnect the oscilloscope from A21TP2.

Sweep Attenuator 53.

Gain Adjustments

54.

Key in (jZ?TKj, m, [PRESEL PEAK]=, (

START FREQ

) 3928 MHz,

(STOP) 4008 MHz.

Connect synthesized sweeper RF OUTPUT to front-panel RF

INPUT with low-loss microwave test cable. Set synthesized sweeper for output of 4000.000 MHz at 0 dBm.

55. Signal should be visible at right side of CRT display. Press

( PEAK SEARCH ), MARKER C-1 to place display marker on signal peak.

56. Alternately press (

PEAK SEARCH

) and adjust A16R72 GAIN 1 for marker frequency of 4.000 00 GHz as indicated by display annotation.

Note

If adjustment A16R72 GAIN 1 has insufficient range, perform

Adjustment Procedure 22, “Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments” to ensure that adjustments A3ASR6 OFFS and A3ASR5 GAIN are properly set (for a 0.00 V dc to 10.00 V dc Scan Ramp). If adjustment

A16R72 GAIN 1 still has insufficient range, check the value of factory-select precision resistor A16R46, which has allowable values of 74.25K (HP Part Number 0699-0311) or 73.874K (HP Part Number

0699-0380).

57. Key in (

START

FREQ] 3784 MHz, [sTopFREQ) 4024 MHz.

58. Signal should be visible at right side of CRT display. Press

(

PEAK SEARCH

), MARKER (-1 to place display marker on signal peak.



59.

Alternately press [

PEAK SEARCH

) and adjust A16R71 GAIN 2 for marker frequency of 4.000 GHz as indicated by display annotation.

Band Overlap

6 0 .

Adjustments

61.

Key in (2--22GHz), (SHIFT), [

PRESEL PEAK

)=, (

START

FREQ) 4.5 GHz,

(sTopFREQI) 7.1 GHz.

Adjust A19R43 25 GHz SPAN and A19R32 2.5 GHz SPAN fully counterclockwise.

62.

For HP 8566A, set synthesized sweeper for output of 5.820 GHz at 0 dBm. For HP 8566B, set synthesized sweeper for output of

5.805 GHz at 0 dBm.

63.

Two separate signal peaks should be visible on display. Readjust

A19R43 25 GHz SPAN until separate peaks are barely discernible from each other.

64.

Use synthesized sweeper TUNING control to vary synthesized sweeper output frequency f50 MHz from frequency in step 62, pressing [PRESEL

PEAK

) both times to peak preselector on each side of band overlap point.

65.

Use synthesized sweeper TUNING control to vary synthesized sweeper output frequency f50 MHz (from frequency in step

62) in 1 MHz steps. Readjust A19R43 25 GHz SPAN slightly as necessary so that amplitude of displayed signal peak varies less than 3 dB over entire f50 MHz range bracketing band overlap point.

66.

67.


5.800 GHz at 0 dBm.

Key in [

START FREQ

) 5.55 GHz, CsTopj 6.05 GHz, [REsBW_) 300 kHz.

68.

Two separate signal peaks should be visible on display. Readjust

A19R32 2.5 GHz SPAN until separate peaks are barely discernible from each other.

69.

Use synthesized sweeper TUNING control to vary synthesized sweeper output frequency -5 MHz (from frequency in step 66) in 100 kHz steps. Readjust A19R32 2.5 GHz SPAN slightly as necessary so that amplitude of displayed signal peak varies less than 3 dB over entire f5 MHz range bracketing band overlap point.

70.


12.510 GHz at 0 dBm.

71.

Key in m), (PRESEL PEAK )=, (START FREQ) 11.2 GHz, Cm)

13.8 GHz, RES BW (AUTO.

72.

Use synthesized sweeper TUNING control to vary synthesized sweeper output frequency flO0 MHz from frequency in step 70, pressing (PRESEL PEAK ) both times to peak preselector on each side of band overlap point.



73. Use signal generator TUNING control to vary signal generator output frequency flO0 MHz (from frequency in step 70) in 1 MHz steps. Readjust A19R43 25 GHz SPAN slightly as necessary so that amplitude of displayed signal peak varies less than 3 dB over entire flO0 MHz range bracketing band overlap point.

74. Key in (SHIFT), [PRESEL

PEAK

)=.

75. Verify that jumper between A12TP2 and A12TP3 (Lock Indicator

Disable) has been removed. Replace RF Digital Section cover over

Al2 through Al6 assemblies.


14. 100 MHz

Adjustments

VCXO

Reference

RF-Section:

A7A2 100 MHz VCXO

Related Performance

Tests

Noise Sidebands Test

Residual Responses Test

Description

The open loop frequency and maximum power output of the 100 MHz

VCXO is centered around 100 MHz. The 400 MHz signal is adjusted for maximum 400 MHz output with minimum spurious output. The 400

MHz output is set to -10 dBm by selecting proper resistor values for the attenuator network A7A2R67, R68, and R69.

Equipment

Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 5343A


Precision Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 6114A

Adapters:

Adapter, SMB (snap-on) (m) (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-0672

Cables:

BNC to SMB Snap-On Test Cable (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . .85680-60093

Procedure

Note

The A7A2 100 MHz VCXO Assembly must be installed in the RF

Section with all cover screws in place during this adjustment procedure.


Figure 3-64, and remove the bottom cover.

SPECTRW ANALYZER

FREWENCY CCUNTER

Figure 3-64. 100 MHz VCXO Adjustment Setup

2. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. Verify that the rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch is set to INT and that the


14. 100 MFIz VCXO Adjustments short BNC jumper cable W15 is connected between 52 FREQ

REFERENCE EXT and 53 FREQ REFERENCE INT.

3. Set the dc power supply for an output of -8 Vdc. Connect the -8

Vdc output of the dc power supply to the A7A2TPl TUNE test point. Refer to Figure 3-65 for the location of the A7A2 100 MHz

VCXO Assembly and test point A7A2TPl TUNE.

A7A2

1 0 0 M H Z v c x o

(Adlustment l o c a t i o n s lobled 9” c o v e r )

TOP VIEW A7A2

Figure 3-65. Location of 100 MHz VCXO Adjustments

4. Disconnect the cable 83 (gray/orange) from A7A2J2 100 MHz OUT, and connect the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to

A7A2J2 using a BNC to SMB snap-on test cable.

5. Press (2--22GHz) on the second spectrum analyzer, and then set the controls as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 kHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +3 dBm

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/div

TRACE A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR-WRITE

TRACE B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX HOLD

6. Adjust A7A2C4 100 MHz slowly through its full range while monitoring the display of the second spectrum analyzer. A7A2C4

100 MHz should provide enough adjustment range to shift the frequency of the 100 MHz VCXO a minimum of f300 Hz from 100

MHz (99.999700 MHz to 100.000300 MHz), and the output power should not vary by more than 1 dB within this range, as shown in

Figure 3-66.


14. 100 MHz VCXO Adjustments


Note

Note

CENTER iD8.000 00 MHZ

RES BW 1 kHZ “BW 3 ktiZ

\ I

SPAN 3.00 kHZ

SWP 3Em msec

Figure 3-66. Typical Tuning Range of A7A2 100 MHz VCXO

If the output power of the 100 MHz VCXO drops off by more than 1 dB within f300 Hz of 100 MHz, select a new value for factoryselect component A7A2L4. An increase of A7A2L4 by one standard value will shift the tuning range of the 100 MHz VCXO lower in frequency by approximately 500-600 Hz; conversely, a decrease in the value of A7A2L4 will shift the 100 MHz VCXO tuning range higher in frequency by the same amount. Refer to Table 3-7 for the acceptable range of values and corresponding HP part numbers for A7A2I.4, and to Figure 3-65 for the location of A7A2L4.

If A7A2C4 100 MHz does not have sufficient adjustment range to tune the 100 MHz VCXO +300 Hz to 100.000300 MHz, select a lower value for factory- selected component A7A2C8; conversely, select a higher value for A7A2C8 if A7A2C4 does not have sufficient range to tune the 100 MHz VCXO -300 Hz to 99.999700 MHz. Refer to ‘lhble 3-3 for the acceptable range of values, and to ‘Ihble 3-4 for HP part numbers; refer to Figure 3-65 for the location of A7A2C8.

Table 3-7. Standard Values for A7A2L4

Value HP Fart Number

560 nH 9100-2256

470 nH

390 nH

330 nH

270 nH

9100-2255

9100-2254

9100-0368

9100-2252

220 nH 9100-2251

7. Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,200 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +3 dBm

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/div


TRACE A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR-WRITE

TRACE B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLANK

8. Adjust A7A2C4 100 MHz slowly through its full range while monitoring the display of the second spectrum analyzer. The output of the 100 MHz VCXO should be a single output signal near 100 MHz, with no spurious oscillations at other frequencies.

If spurious oscillations are present, increase the value of factoryselected component A7A2R3 by one standard value and check again for spurious oscillations. Refer to ‘lhble 3-3 for the acceptable range of values, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers; refer to Figure 3-65 for the location of A7A2R3.

9. Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from A7A2J2 100 MHz

OUT, and connect the frequency counter to A7A2J2.

10. Adjust A7A2C4 100 MHz for a frequency counter indication of

100.0000 fO.0001 MHz (f100 Hz).

11. Disconnect the dc power supply from the A7A2TPl TUNE test point, and jumper A7A2TPl TUNE to ground.

12. Verify that the frequency counter indication is less than 100.0000

MHz. If it is not, repeat, steps 3 through 11.

13. Disconnect, the jumper from A7A2TPl TUNE and ground. Set the dc power supply for an output of -25 Vdc, and connect the -25

Vdc output of the dc power supply to A7A2TPl TUNE.

14. Verify that the frequency counter indication is greater than

100.0000 MHz. If it is not, repeat steps 3 through 13.

15. Disconnect the dc power supply from A7A2TPl TUNE, and reconnect the cable 83 (gray/orange) to A7A2J2 100 MHz OUT.

400 MHz output

16. Disconnect the cable 96 (white/blue) from A7A3Jl 400 MHz IN,

Adjustment and connect this cable to the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer using a BNC-to-SMB snap-on test cable and an SMB male-to-male adapter.


CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/div

TRACE A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLEAR-WRITE

18. The 400 MHz output signal should be visible on the display of the second spectrum analyzer, along with other harmonics of

100 MHz. Adjust the A7A2C3, A7A2C2, and A7A2Cl 400 MHz adjustments in sequence to maximize the power level of the 400

MHz output signal and minimize all other harmonics of 100 MHz.

Be sure to perform the adjustments in the proper sequence; it might be necessary to repeat the sequence more than once.

19. Note the level of any 100 MHz harmonics displayed on the second spectrum analyzer relative to the power level of the 400 MHz


14. 100 MHz VCXO Adjustments output signal. Verify that the 100 MHz harmonics do not exceed the levels listed in ‘Iable

3-8

‘Ihble 3-8. Limits for 100 MHz Harmonics



CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Hz

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/div

21. Slightly readjust the A7A2C3, A7A2C2, and A7A2Cl 400 MHz adjustments in sequence to maximize the power level of the 400

MHz output signal, and then verify that the maximized power level of the 400 MHz output signal is -10 dBm f2 dB. If it is not, note the amplitude and change the values of attenuator network resistors A7A2R67, A7A2R68, and A7A2R69 as necessary.

‘Iable 3-9 contains a list of attenuations in 1-dB steps and the corresponding values for the attenuator resistors to adjust the 400 MHz output power level to -10 dBm. Refer to Table 3-10 for HP part numbers, and to Figure 3-65 for the location of A7A2R67,

A7A2R68, and A7A2R69.

‘Ihble 3-9.

Selection Chart for Attenuator Resistors

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 9

Attenuation (dB)

1

R67

Resistors

R68 R69

0 open short open

1

- 1

- 2

825

422

6.8

12.1

825

422

261

215

178

147

133

121

110

17.8

23.7

31.6

38.3

46.4

51.1

61.9

261

215

178

147

133

121

110


‘able 3-10. Resistor Values

178

215

261

422

825

61.9

110

121

133

147

Resistor FIP Fart Number

6.8

12.1

17.8

23.7

0683-0685

0757-0379

0757-0294

0698-343 1

0757-0180 31.6

38.3

46.4

51.1

0698-3435

0698-4037

0757-0394

0757-0276

0757-0402

0757-0403

0698-3437

0698-3438

0698-3439

0698-3441

0698-3132

0698-3447

0757-042 1


CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/div

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 kHz

VIDEO BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 kHz

23. Check for 10 MHz sidebands on the 400 MHz output signal at 390

MHz and 410 MHz. If 10 MHz sidebands are visible, they should be greater than 70 dB down (>-70 dBc) from the power level of the 400 MHz output signal.

24. Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from the A7A2 100 MHz

VCXO Assembly. Reconnect the cable 96 (white/blue) to A7A3Jl

400 MHz IN.

Adjustments 3-l 3 1

15. M/N Loop

Adjustments

Reference

Description

The M/N VCO tuning range end points and output level are set and checked to ensure an adequate RF output level across the tuning range of the M/N phase-lock loop.

Equipment

RF-Section:

A7A4 M/N Output





15x2 Extender Board (semvice accessory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08505-60041

Adapters:

Adapter, SMB Male-to-Male (serwice accessov) . . . . 1250-0669

Cables:

BNC to SMB Test Cable (service accessory) . . . . . . . . . . . .085680-60093

Procedure


Figure 3-67. Remove the bottom cover of the RF Section.

2. Connect the frequency counter’s rear-panel 10 MHz FREQ STD

OUT connector to the RF Section’s rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE

EXT connector. See Figure 3-67. Set the RF Section’s rear-panel switch to EXT.

3. Connect a jumper between A12TP2 and A12TP3 (LOCK

INDICATOR DISABLE) in the RF Section. Refer to Figure 3-68 for the location of A12TP2 and A12TP3.

PRECISION

PMKR SUPPLY

DIGITAL VDLTKTER

SPECTRW ANALYZER

(Devise Under Tort)

Figure 3-67. M/N Loop Adjustment Setup


15. M/N Loop Adjustments

A7A4

M/N

O U T P U T

AlZTPZ/A12TP3

L O C K I N D I C A T O R

D I S A B L E

AlAlCl

F R E O A D J

TPl

T U N E

AlAlC5

POWER

A2J3

AlA2Wl

A7A4

I

Figure 3-68. Location of PLL Adjustments

4. Disconnect the cable 93 (white/orange) from A7A4J2 M/N OUT in the RF Section. Refer to Figure 3-68 for the location of the A7A4

M/N Output Assembly.

5. Connect the frequency counter BNC input to A7A4J2 M/N OUT using a BNC to SMB Snap-on Test Cable. Set the input selector switch on the frequency counter to (lo HZ - 500 MHZ , and set the impedance switch to m.

6. Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON and press @ZZiZj.

Key in (SHIFT) (RESBWY, [ CENTER FREQUENCY ) 6090.000 MHz,

( FREQUENCY SPAN ) 0 Hz. The frequency counter indication should be 197.419355 MHz fl count.

7. Connect the DVM to A7A4TPl TUNE test point.

8. Adjust A7A4AlAlCl FREQ ADJ tuning slug for a DVM indication of -35.0 f0.5 Vdc. Slightly loosen the hex locking nut before adjusting the FREQ ADJ tuning slug, and tighten the nut after the appropriate voltage is set.

9. Key in ( CENTER FREQUENCY ) 2100.000 MHz on the RF Section.

The frequency counter indication should be 177.500000 MHz fl count, and the DVM indication should be -2.3 f0.5 Vdc.

10. Set the RF Section LINE switch to STANDBY.

11. Disconnect the frequency counter and DVM from the A7A4 M/N

Output Assembly.

12. Disconnect the cable 92 (white/red) from A7A4Jl 355-395 MHz

OUT on the A7A4 M/N Output Assembly. Remove the A7A4

M/N Output Assembly from the RF Section, and install it on an extender board.

13. Press @ZGX~ on the second spectrum analyzer. Connect the CAL

OUTPUT signal to the RF INPUT on the second spectrum analyzer, and press ljjj 8.


15. M/N Loop Adjustments

Caution

14. Adjust the AMPTD CAL control on the second spectrum analyzer for a -10.00 dBm displayed signal, and then press (SHIFT)

(

F

RE

QUENCY

SPAN]~.



FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 dB/DIV

16.

Disconnect the cable 9 (white) A7A4AlA2Wl from A7A4A2J3 on the A7A4 M/N Output Assembly. Refer to Figure 3-68 for the location of A7A4AlA2Wl and A7A4A2J3. Use an SMB male-to-male adapter and a BNC to SMB Snap-on Test Cable to connect the white cable to the input of the second spectrum analyzer.

17. Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON.

Damage might occur to the M/N VCO tuning diodes on A7A4 M/N

Output Assembly if a positive voltage is applied to A7A4TPl TUNE test point.

18. Set the dc power supply for an output of -35.0 f 0.5 Vdc.

Connect the positive lead of the dc power supply to the RF

Section chassis (ground). Then, connect the negative lead to

A7A4TPl TUNE test point.

19. Adjust A7A4AlAlC5 PWR for an M/N VCO output level of 0.0

dBm f 2.0 dB as indicated on the second spectrum analyzer display. Refer to Figure 3-68 for the location of A7A4AlAlC5

PWR adjustment.

20. Slowly reduce the output voltage of the dc power supply from

-35.0 Vdc to -2.3 Vdc while monitoring the M/N VCO output level displayed on the second spectrum analyzer. The M/N VCO output level at A7A4A2J3 should be greater than -2.0 dBm between 355 MHz (-2.3 Vdc) and 395 MHz (-35 Vdc).


22. Reconnect the white cable to A7A4A2J3 on the A7A4 M/N Output

Assembly, and then reinstall the A7A4 M/N Output Assembly in the RF Section. Reconnect the cable 92 (white/red) to A7A4Jl

355-395 OUT.


24. Reconnect the cable 93 (white/orange) to A7A4J2 M/N OUT.

25. Remove the LOCK INDICATOR DISABLE jumper from A12TP2 and A12TP3. Disconnect the frequency counter from the RF

Section rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE INT connector, and reconnect the short jumper cable between the FREQ REFERENCE

INT and EXT connectors. Set the RF Section rear-panel switch to

INT.


16. YTO Loop Adjustments

16. YTO Loop

Adjustments

Reference

RF-Section:

Al lA5 Sampler

AllA YTO Loop Interconnect

Related Performance

Tests

Average Noise Level Test

Description

The output power level of the AllAl Coupler/Isolator/Amplifier (CIA) is checked over the 2.2 GHz to 6.2 GHz tuning range of the All YTO

Loop, and the Al lA3 YTO is tuned to the minimum power frequency.

Then, the CIA GATE BIAS is adjusted for a -5.0 dBm output power level at the coupled output of the AllAl CIA. The YTO Loop AllA

Sampler is driven by a synthesized sweeper and the dc output of

Sampler Al 1Ul is monitored with an oscilloscope. The Sampler Driver circuit is adjusted for maximum amplitude and flatness over the range of the M/N Loop. The YTO Loop Sampler IF amplifiers are then adjusted for correct output level and frequency response.

Equipment



Digitizing Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 545OlA

Power Meter/Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 436A/8481A

SMA (m) 50 ohm Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1810-0118

Adapters:

Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744

Adapter, BNC to Alligator Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1292

Cables:

Low-loss Microwave Test Cable, APC 3.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8120-4921

BNC TO SMB Snap-On Test Cable (2 required) . . . . . . . . . .85680-60093

Procedure

1. Set the spectrum analyzer (DUT) LINE switch to STANDBY. Turn the spectrum analyzer over to position the RF Section on top, as shown in Figure 3-69. Remove the RF Section’s bottom cover.

2. Disconnect semi-rigid coax cable Wll from AllAl CIA Assembly’s

YTO OUT connector. Disconnect the opposite end of Wll from

AT2 (for RF Sections 2526A and below, disconnect from cable

A6W6). See Figure 3-70 for the location of AllAl, Wll, A6W6, and AT2.




I

SPECTRW ANALYZER

Figure 3-69. YTO Loop Adjustment Setup

AllAl

Wll

AZlTP2

AllJl

AllJ2

AllJ3

A12TP2

A12TP3

AllJ5

A l l J 4 e .

.

e . -a-,

AT2,'A6W6

Figure 3-70. Location of Assemblies, Cables, and Test Points

3. On the All YTO Loop Assembly, disconnect the cable 8 (gray) from AllJl PHASE DET OUT, the cable 93 (white/orange) from

AllJ2 M/N IN, and the cable 5 (green) from AllJ3 20/30 IN.

Disconnect cable 0 (black) from AllJ4 IF IN and AllJ5 IF OUT.

See Figure 3-70.

4. Connect a jumper between A12TP2 and A12TP3 (LOCK

INDICATOR DISABLE) on the Al2 Front Panel Interface Assembly in the RF Section. Connect a jumper between A21TP2 TUNE

VOLTAGE and the RF Section chassis ground. See Figure 3-70.

5. Install the All YT.0 Loop Assembly in the Service Position by removing the three screws (marked with the letter A) securing the

Al 1 YTO Loop Assembly in the RF Section. Figure 3-71 shows the

All service position. Grasp the two metal extractors on the All assembly, and slide the assembly upwards until it just clears the

RF Section. Rotate the assembly 90” towards the front. of the RF

Section and secure the Servicing Support Screw to the threaded

16. YTO Loop Adjustments mounting hole located on the chassis divider next, to the AlOAl

PLLl VCO Assembly.

Figure 3-71. All YTO Loop Service Position

6. Remove the SMA 50 ohm termination from the RF Section frontpanel 1ST LO OUTPUT connector. Install the termination on the YTO OUT connector of Al 1Al CIA Assembly.

CIA Gate Bias

Adjustment

Note

Al lA7 6.20 GHz Lowpass Filter/Attenuator/Cable Assembly and semirigid cable W 11 can both be damaged if the semi-rigid coax cable is bent excessively in the following steps.

7. Disconnect Al lA7 6.20 GHz Lowpass Filter/Attenuator/Cable

Assembly from the COUPLED OUT connector of AllAl CIA

Assembly. See Figure 3-71 for the location of AllA7.

8. Carefully unclip AllA from the YTO Loop cover allowing the cable’s free end to be moved to one side.

9. Connect the SMA male end of Wll to the COUPLED OUT connector of AllAl CIA Assembly. (Wll was removed from the

YTO OUT connector in step 2.)

10. Connect a low-loss microwave test cable to the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer using a Type N to APC 3.5 adapter.

Connect the opposite end of the cable to the SMA female end of

Wll (on the COUPLED OUT connector of AllAl CIA Assembly).

11. On the RF Section, adjust AllA2R2 GATE BIAS ADJ fully counterclockwise. See Figure 3-71 for the location of AllA2R2.

12. Press @ZZi$ on the second spectrum analyzer. Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer as follows:

START FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2 GHz

STOP FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.2 GHz



REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

13.

Set the Spectrum Analyzer (DUT) LINE switch to ON, and key in @REQUENCY

SPAN

] 0 Hz, (

CENTER FREQUENCY

] 5.6786 GHz. This tunes the Al lA3 YTO to approximately 6.00 GHz.

14.

On the second spectrum analyzer, key in (SHIFT) TRACE A

@iiKiEE], ISHIFT) LGHz) 1, [

PEAK SEARCH

) to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 6.00 GHz signal. Press ~PRESEL

PEAK

) on the second spectrum analyzer, and wait for the preselector peaking routine to complete.

15.

On the Spectrum Analyzer (DUT), key in (

CENTER FREQUENCY

)

3.6786 GHz. This tunes the AllA YTO to approximately 4.00

GHz.

16.

On the second spectrum analyzer, key in [ PEAK SEARCH ) to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 4.00 GHz signal. Press

[PRESEL

PEAK

) on the second spectrum analyzer and wait for the preselector peaking routine to complete.

17.

On the second spectrum analyzer. kes in LOG SCALE

ENTER

dB/DIv) 2-dB, TRACE Ei (CLEAR-WRITE], TRACE B (j-j, k-1.

18.

On the spectrum analyzer (DUT), key in SWEEP (SINGLE),

[SWEEP

TIME

] 200 set, (mj SWEEP (CONT) t. A “HARMONIC

LOCK 1” message should appear on the CRT display of the spectrum analyzer (DUT).

19.

On the spectrum analyzer (DUT), key in [ START FREQUENCY _) 1.8786

GHz, (STOP FREQUENCY ) 5.8786 GHz, IsAvE_) 4, SWEEP C-1. This tunes the AllA YTO from approximately 2.20 GHz to 6.20 GHz.

Wait for the sweep to complete (200 seconds) and the SWEEP

LED to turn off.

20.

On the Spectrum Analyzer (DUT), key in [ FREQUENCY SPAN ] 0 Hz,

(CF STEP SIZE ) 100 MHz, [ CENTER FREQUENCY ]. Using the DATA knob and step keys, tune the AllA YTO to position the TRACE

A signal at the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform on the display of the second spectrum analyzer. See Figure 3-72. Key in lsAVEl5 on the SDectrum AnaIszer (DUT).

-

1 . ,



ST‘\RT 2

Figure 3-72.

Typical YTO Loop Swept Frequency Response at AllAl

21. On the second spectrum analyzer, key in [

PEAK SEARCH

) to position a marker on the peak of the TRACE A displayed signal. Press

[PRESEL

PEAK

] on the second spectrum analyzer and wait for the preselector peaking routine to complete.

22. On the Spectrum Analyzer (DUT), key in (j-14 and wait for the sweep to complete (200 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn

Off.

23. On the Spectrum Analyzer (DUT), key in (RECALL] 5,

[

CENTER FREQUENCY

). Use the DATA knob to tune the AllA YTO to position the TRACE A signal at the lowest point on the TRACE

B waveform on the display of the second spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure 3-72.

24. Repeat steps 21 through 23 as necessary until the lowest point in the TRACE B waveform does not change.

25. On the spectrum analyzer (DUT), key in ISHIFT_) [MKR + REF LVL)

R to activate the Frequency Diagnostics function. Six lines of numerical data should appear in the upper left corner of the spectrum analyzer CRT; the top line is the 10 digit YTO Start

Frequency, ranging from 2.000 000 000 GHz to 6.200 000 000 GHz.

Note the currently-selected YTO Start Frequency (the minimum power frequency of the All YTO Loop). This frequency should be approximately the same as the marker frequency displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

All YTO Loop Minimum Power Frequency:

GHz

26. Disconnect the low-loss microwave test cable from the SMA female end of Wll and from the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer.

27. Connect the power sensor to the power meter’s POWER REF output, and zero and calibrate the power meter. Determine the power sensor cal factor for the Al 1 YTO Loop Minimum Power



Frequency determined in step 25, and set the power meter CAL

FACTOR control accordingly. Connect the power sensor to the

SMA female end of W 11 (W 11 should still be connected to the

COUPLED OUT connector of AllAl CIA Assembly).

28. Adjust AllA2R2 GATE BIAS ADJ for a power meter indication of

-5.0 dBm fO.l dB.

29. Disconnect the power sensor from semi-rigid coax cable Wll.

Disconnect semi-rigid coax cable W 11 from the COUPLED OUT connector of AllAl CIA Assembly, and reconnect AllA to the

AllAl CIA Assembly.

YTO Sampler

30. Remove the cover from AllA YTO Loop Sampler Assembly.

Adjustments Locate DRIVER MATCHING adjustments Al lA5Cl and Al lA5C2,

SAMPLER DC test point AllA5TP1, and IF GAIN adjustment

AllA5Rl. These parts are indicated on the cover of the AllA

YTO Loop Sampler Assembly and in Figure 3-73.

AllA c2

C l

>

I M P E D A N C E

M A T C H

R22

TPl c22

Rl

I F G A I N

Figure 3-73. Al lA5 Adjustment Locations

31. On the oscilloscope, key in [RECALL) [CLEAR) to perform a soft reset.




Press (CHAN_):

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on

amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 mV/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-3OO.OOOmV

coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc

Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.00 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..O.OOOOO V coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc

Press LTRIG):

EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trig’d, edge source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Channel4

level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -3.00000 V, rising edge

Press [TlNlE): time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2.00msec/div reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..left

Press (DISPLAY_): connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press [SHOW)

33. Press [INSTR PRESET ) on the synthesized sweeper. Set the synthesized sweeper controls as follows:

START FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87.5 MHz

STOP FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287.5 MHz

POWER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +3.0 dBm

FREQUENCY MARKER Ml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,160 MHz

FREQUENCY MARKER M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,210 MHz

FREQUENCY MARKER M3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187.5 MHz

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ms

AMPTD MKR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

34. Connect the RF OUTPUT of the synthesized sweeper to AllJ2

M/N IN using a BNC to SMB snap-on test cable.

35. Use a BNC to alligator clip adapter to connect the oscilloscope

Channel 1 input to the RF Section AllA5TPl test point, and connect the Channel 1 ground to the All YTO Loop cover.

Connect the oscilloscope Channel 4 input to the synthesized sweeper rear-panel NEG BLANKING output. Adjust the oscilloscope triggering as necessary for a stable display, and then key in (CHAN) Channel 4 off, [SHOW).

36. The AllA5TPl SAMPLER DC waveform displayed on the oscilloscope should be similar to Figure 3-74. The left, middle, and right vertical spikes visible on the voltage waveform correspond to synthesized sweeper marker frequencies of 160 MHz, 187

MHz, and 210 MHz, respectively. Adjust AllA5C2 to widen the waveform as far to the left as possible.



3-142 Adjustments hp running j . .._..........^_.._..._.....................................~.......~.................

~__ _.._.........._.....~-~-.~..............................................-..............!

.+

;l 2 0 0 mV/div

~offset~-300.0 liv

I .i

0 . 0 0 0 0 0 s 1 0 . 0 0 0 0 IIS

2 . 0 0 rs/div

VrarkerPC 1 )

VmarkerlC 1 I delta V( 1 I

275.000mV

-712.500nV

9a7.500nv

..-...... I

2 0 . 0 0 0 0 IS

4 f - 3 . 0 0 0 v

Figure 3-74. Sampler Waveform at AllA5TPl

37. Adjust AllA5Cl for a minimum voltage level at the 210 MHz

(right) marker. Readjust AllA5C2 to make the voltages at the

160 MHz (left) and 210 MHz (right) markers equally negative.

Carefully readjust AllA5Cl and AllA5C2 as necessary for maximum flatness and lowest possible voltage of the displayed waveform between the 160 MHz and 210 MHz markers.

38. On the oscilloscope, press CaTav], and turn on the voltage markers for the Channel 1 input. Place one voltage marker at the level of the 160 MHz (left) and 210 MHz (right) markers, and place the second voltage marker at the maximum voltage level of the displayed waveform, as shown in Figure 3-74. The voltage level of the displayed waveform between the 160 MHz and 210

MHz markers should be a minimum of 0.50 Vdc lower than the maximum voltage level.

39. Disconnect the oscilloscope’s Channel 1 input from AllA5TPl

SAMPLER DC.

40. On the spectrum analyzer (DUT), note the fourth line of numerical data appearing in the upper left corner of the spectrum analyzer

CRT; this is the g-digit M/N Loop Frequency, ranging from 177.500

000 MHz to 197.419 355 MHz. Note the currentlyselected M/N

Loop Frequency (corresponding to the minimum power YTO Start

Frequency from step 25).


All YTO Loop Frequency: MHz

41.

On the synthesized sweeper, press Icw) and key in the M/N Loop

Frequency from step 40.

42.

Press @Z?ZiZ) on the second spectrum analyzer. Connect the CAL

OUTPUT signal on the second spectrum analyzer to the RF INPUT on the second spectrum analyzer, and press Cm] 8.

43.

Adjust the AMPTD CAL control on the second spectrum analyzer for a -10.00 dBm displayed signal. Then, key in (2-221, (SHIFT_)

[

FREQUENCY SPAN

) w on the second spectrum analyzer and wait for the self-correction routine to complete. Key in [m) TRACE A

[MAX) on the second spectrum analyzer.

44. Use a second BNC to SMB snap-on test cable to connect the RF

INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to AllJ5 IF OUT.


START FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MHz

STOP FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 10 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

RESOLUTION BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 kHz

46. The IF OUT fundamental and second harmonics should be visible at approximately 30 MHz and 60 MHz on the display of the second spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure 3-75. Key in MARKER

L-1 30 MHz to position a marker at 30.03 MHz on the display of the second spectrum analyzer.

START 5 a MHZ

RES BW 300 kHZ “BW 1 MHZ

STOP 70 0 MHZ

SWP 2B.e) nlsec

Figure 3-75.

30 MHz YTO Loop Sampler Response at A 1155 IF OUT

47. On the Spectrum Analyzer (DUT), turn the DATA knob as necessary to tune the IF OUT fundamental to 30.0 MHz f 0.5

MHz, as indicated by the marker on the display of the second spectrum analyzer.



Note

48. On the second spectrum analyzer, key in (

ENTER

dB/DIv) 2 dB,

(j-1 3 MHz, MARKER (jNORMALj, (

PEAK SEARCH

] to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 30 MHz fundamental signal.

Adjust AllA5Rl IF GAIN for an IF OUT power level (the 30 MHz fundamental signal) of +4.0 dBm.

If AllA5Rl IF GAIN does not have sufficient adjustment range, change the value of factory-select component AllA5LlO. An increase in the value of AllA5LlO will increase the IF OUT power level at

Al 155 IF OUT. Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for AllA5L10, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-73 for the location of AllA5LlO.

49. On the second spectrum analyzer, press TRACE A c-1,

TRACE B (

CLEAR

-

WRITE

].

50. On the synthesized sweeper, key in [SHIFT) Icw) m to set the

CW RES to 0.001 MHz. Then, use the ENTRY knob to gradually tune the synthesized sweeper up and down from the frequency set in step 41, tuning the IF OUT fundamental (displayed on the second spectrum analyzer) from 5 MHz to 70 MHz as shown in

Figure 3-76.


Figure 3-76. Tuning the IF OUT Fundamental

5 1. On the second spectrum analyzer, press MARKER (NORMAL), and use the DATA knob to verify the power level of the displayed fundamental signal over the frequency ranges listed in ‘Iable 3-11.

‘Ihble 3-11. Power Level of Fundamental Signal

1 Freauencs Range 1 Power Level

5 MHz to 20 MHz -3 dBm 2 level 5 + 10 dBm

30 MHz to 70 MHz -10 dBm 2 power level 5 + 10 dBm

Note


If the power level of the displayed fundamental below 20 MHz is too low, decrease the value of factory-select component AllA5C22. If the power level of the displayed fundamental between 20 MHz and

30 MHz is too low, decrease the value of factory-select component

AllA5R22. If the power level of the displayed fundamental above

30 MHz is too high, increase the value of factory-select component

AllA5LlO. Refer to ‘Pable 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for AllA5C22, AllA5R22, AllA5L10, and to ‘Ihble 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-73 for the location of AllA5C22, AllA5R22, and Al lA5LlO.

52. Set the Spectrum Analyzer (DUT) LINE switch to STANDBY.

Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from the RF Section

AllJ5 IF OUT. Disconnect the synthesized sweeper from the RF

Section AllJ2 M/N IN.

53. Replace the cover on AllA YTO Loop Sampler Assembly. Loosen the Servicing Support Screw holding the All YTO Loop Assembly in the Service Position. Grasp the two metal extractors on the

All YTO Loop Assembly and slide the assembly back into the RF

Section, mating the two guide pins with the corresponding guide sleeves on the A23 Motherboard Assembly. Replace the three screws (marked with the letter A) securing the All YTO Loop

Assembly in the RF Section.

54. Reconnect cable 8 (gray) to Al 1Jl PHASE DET OUT, cable 93

(white/orange) to Al 152 M/N IN, and the cable 5 (green) to Al 153

20/30 IN. Reconnect the cable 0 (black) to AllJ4 IF IN and Al 155

IF OUT.

55. Remove the SMA 50 ohm termination from the YTO OUT connector of AllAl CIA Assembly. Install the termination on the

RF Section front-panel 1ST LO OUTPUT connector.

56. Reconnect semi-rigid coax cable W 11 to the YTO OUT connector of AllAl CIA Assembly. Reconnect the opposite end of Wll to

AT2 (for RF Sections 2526A and below, Wll connects to cable

A6W6).

57. Remove the jumper from between A21TP2 and ground. Remove the jumper between A12TP2 and A12TP3 (LOCK INDICATOR

DISABLE).

58. Replace the RF Section’s bottom cover.


17. 20/30 Loop

Phase Lock

Adjustments

Reference

RF-Section:

A10 20/30 Synthesizer

AlOAl PLLl VCO

AlOA3 PLLl IF

AlOA4 PLL3 Up Converter

AlOA5 PLL2 VCO

A 1 OA8 PLL2 Discriminator

Description Phase Lock Loop 1 (PLU): On the AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly, the

Loop Amplifier 40 kHz LPF is first adjusted for >65 dB rejection of the 50 kHz subharmonics from fractional-n division. A frequency synthesizer is used to inject a signal into the 40 kHz LPF, and the filter output is measured with a spectrum analyzer using a high-impedance active probe. Then, the centering and tuning range of the PLLl

VCO is checked and adjusted as required. On the AlOA3 PLLl IF

Assembly, the 140 MHz Lowpass Filter is checked and adjusted for maximum rejection of mixing products between 160 MHz and 166

MHz. A synthesized sweeper is substituted for the PLLl VCO, and the output of the AlOA3 PLLl IF Assembly is measured with a spectrum analyzer.

Phase Lock Loop 2 (PLU): On the AlOA5 PLL2 VCO Assembly and A10A8 PLL2 Discriminator Assembly, four interactive biasing adjustments are used to set the centering and tuning range of the

PLL2 VCO. PLL2 VCO biasing is adjusted by setting up proper voltage levels at AlOA8TP5 VCO TUNE and adjusting for corresponding PLL2

VCO frequencies at AlOA5J4 (SCAN 1.1 MHz OUT). If PLL2 will not phase lock (PL2 UNLOCK indicated), the AlOA6 PLL2 Phase Detector

Assembly is first disabled for coarse biasing adjustments. Fine biasing adjustments of the PLL2 VCO are made with the AlOA6 PLL2 Phase

Detector Assembly installed. Then, span accuracy for narrow spans is checked and adjusted by positioning the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal on the 9th CRT graticule line.

Phase Lock Loop

3

(PIL3):

On the AlOA4 PLL3 Up Converter

Assembly, the 160 MHz BPF is adjusted for maximum output of the

1.6 Frequency Multiplier. The PLL3 VCO biasing is then adjusted by setting up proper voltage levels at AlOA4TP3, and the PLL3 VCO output power level is verified.


Equipment

17. 20/30 Loop Phase Lock Adjustments


High-frequency Active Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 41800A

Probe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 1122A





Digital Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3456A

15x2 Extender Board (serwice acces.sory~ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08505-60041

Adapters:

Adapter, SMB (m)(m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0672

Adapter, BNC to Alligator Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1292

Cables:

BNC to SMB Test Cable (2 required) (service accessory) 85680-60093

Procedure

Phase Lock Loop 1

WJJ)

1. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Turn the spectrum analyzer over to position the RF Section on top, as shown in Figure 3-77 and remove the RF Section bottom cover.

PRECISIDR

PWER SUPPLY

DIBITAL VOLTMETER

SYNTHESIZER/LEVEL /

I I I I

SPECTRUl ANALYZER

UPOmR SUPPLY

SPECTRUM ANIALYZER

Figure 3-77. 20/30 PLL Adjustment Setup

2. Remove the AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly from the spectrum analyzer. Disconnect cable 1 (brown) from AlOA5J5 SCAN .l-5

MHz OUT, cable 5 (green) from AlOAlJ2 OUT 20-30 MHz, and the yellow cable from AlOAlJ3 OUT 200-300 MHz.



Note

3. Set the frequency synthesizer for a 20 kHz, 0 dBm output.

Connect the frequency synthesizer 50-ohm OUTPUT to AlOAlTP3 using a BNC to Alligator clip adapter. Connect the ground lead of the adapter to the metal cover of the AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly.

4. Connect the high-frequency active probe to the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer and to the probe power supply, as shown in Figure 3-77.

5. Press @ZZZJ on the second spectrum analyzer. Connect the active probe tip to the CAL OUTPUT signal, and press (RECALL].

6. Adjust the AMPTD CAL control on the second spectrum analyzer for a -10.00 dBm displayed signal, and then press ISYIFT)

[FREQUENCY wAN)~.


CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 kHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 kHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

VIDEO BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Hz

8. Connect the active probe tip to the lead of A10AlL7 closest to

AlOAlC22, as indicated in Figure 3-78. The 20 kHz signal (from the 40 kHz LPF) should be visible on the display of the second spectrum analyzer.

9. Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

], ~MKR +

REF

LVL] on the second spectrum analyzer to position the peak of the 20 kHz signal at the top graticule line. Press MARKER la] on the second spectrum analyzer.

10. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 50 kHz.

Adjustments AlOAlL7 and AlOAlL8 are sealed at the factory and normally do not require readjustment unless a component failure has occurred. To verify their proper adjustment, skip to step 12.

11. Adjust AlOAlL7 and AlOAlL8 50 kHz NULL adjustments to minimize the amplitude of the 50 kHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-78 for the location of

AlOAlL7 and AlOAlL8 50 kHz NULL adjustments.



A l O A l

PLLl v c o

AlOA3

PLLl I F

\ n/

Ll3 170MHz

N U L L

L12 160MHz

N U L L

Lll 165MHz

N U L L

C26*

Al OA3

TOP VIEW AlOAT

T P 3

P l a c e A c t

P r o b e h e r

L 7 5OkHz

N U L L e ive

LN8UL5LOkHZ

Figure 3-78. Location of PLLl Adjustments

12. On the second spectrum analyzer, press [ CENTER FREQUENCY ) 100

MHz [

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 6 MHz MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

) to place the second marker on the displayed 50 kHz signal. This level should be at least 65 dB down from the level of the 20 kHz signal in step

9.

13. Disconnect the active probe and frequency synthesizer from

AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly.

14. Install AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly in the RF Section using an extender board. Reconnect the cable 1 (brown) to AlOA5J5 SCAN

.l-5 MHz OUT and the cable 5 (green) to AlOAlJ2 OUT 20-30

MHz.

15. Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON, and key in @Z!Zi@,

[ FREQUENCY SPAN] 0

HZ

.

16. Disconnect the active probe from the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer.

17. Press @ZZiZ] on the second spectrum analyzer. Connect the CAL

OUTPUT signal to the RF INPUT on the second spectrum analyzer, and press (RECALL].

18. Adjust the AMPTD CAL control on the second spectrum analyzer for a -10.00 dBm displayed signal, and then press m

CFREQUENCY sPAN)~.

19. Use a BNC to SMB Snap-on Test Cable to connect the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to AlOAlJ3 OUT 200-300 MHz.



20. Press CmGHz_ on the second spectrum analyzer. Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +3 dBm

21. Set the dc power supply for an output of + 16.0 f 0.1 Vdc.

Connect the positive lead of the dc power supply to AlOAlTP3 and the negative lead to the RF Section chassis (ground).

22. Press MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ) on the second spectrum analyzer.

The output frequency of the PLLl VCO should be 310 MHz f 10

MHz as indicated by the marker on the display of the second spectrum analyzer. If it is not, remove the metal shield from

AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly and increase or decrease the spacing between turns of coil AlOAlL4.

The PLLl VCO frequency is increased by spreading the turns of A10AlL4 apart (decreasing the inductance), and decreased by compressing the turns of AlOAlL4 together (increasing the inductance). Adjust AlOAlL4 for a PLLl VCO output frequency of approximately 308 MHz, since the metal shield increases the

PLLl VCO frequency approximately 2 MHz when reinstalled.

23. Set the dc power supply for an output of +4.0 f 0.1 Vdc.

24. Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

] on the second spectrum analyzer.

The frequency of the PLLl VCO output signal should drop below

200 MHz, and the power level should be at least -7 dBm, as indicated by the marker on the display of the second spectrum analyzer.


26. Set the RF Section LINE switch to STANDBY. Replace the metal shield on AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly if it was removed, and reinstall AlOAl PLLl VCO Assembly in the RF Section. Reconnect the cable 1 (brown) to AlOA5J5 SCAN .l-5 MHz OUT and the cable 5 (green) to AlOAlJ2 OUT 20-30 MHz.

27. Remove AlOA3 PLLl IF Assembly from the RF Section, and install it on an extender board. Reconnect the cable 6 (blue) to AlOA4J2 OUT 160-166 MHz. Leave the cable 4 (yellow) disconnected from AlOAlJ3 OUT 200-300 MHz, and the cable 3

(orange) disconnected from AlOA3J3 OUT PLLl IF.

28. Use a BNC to SMB Snap-on Test Cable to connect the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to AlOA3J3 OUT PLLl IF


Note

17. 20130 Loop Phase Lock Adjustments

29.

Set the controls of the second spectrum anaiyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 MHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 kHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I0 dB/DIV

MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

30. Press QNSTR

PRESET

) on the synthesized sweeper, and key in @

330.3 MHz, (

POWER LEVEL

) 0 dBm.

31. Use a second BNC to SMB Snap-on Test Cable and an SMB adapter to connect the cable 4 (yellow) from AlOA3Jl IN 200-300 MHz to the RF OUTPUT of the synthesized sweeper.

32. Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON, and key in L-j,

(

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 42.57 MHz, (

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 0 Hz.

Adjustments AlOA3Lll 165 MHz NULL, AlOA3L12 160 MHz NULL, and AlOA3L13 170 MHz NULL are sealed at the factory and normally do not require readjustment unless a component failure has occurred.

lb verify their proper adjustment, skip to step 39.

33.

Adjust AlOA3Lll 165 MHz NULL, AlOA3L12 160 MHz NULL, and

AlOA3L13 170 MHz NULL fully clockwise.

34.

Adjust AlOA3Ll3 170 MHz NULL to minimize the amplitude of the 170 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

Refer to Figure 3-78 for the location of AlOA3L3 170 MHz NULL adjustment.

35.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw) 325.3 MHz.

36.

Adjust AlOA3Lll 165 MHz NULL to minimize the amplitude of the 165 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

Refer to Figure 3-78 for the location of AlOA3Lll 165 MHz NULL adjustment.

37.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw) 320.3 MHz.

38.

Adjust AlOA3L12 160 MHz NULL to minimize the amplitude of the 160 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

Refer to Figure 3-78 for the location of AlOA3L12 160 MHz NULL adjustment.

39.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw] 260.3 MHz.

40.

On the second spectrum analyzer, press [ CENTER FREQUENCY ) 100

MHz CFREQUENCY

SPAN

) 6 MHz MARKER (PEAK

SEARCH

) to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 100 MHz signal, and verify that the output power level of the PLLl IF is at least -14 dBm.

If it is not, a lower value can be selected for factory-select component AlOA3C26 to improve the impedance match between the double-balanced mixer AlOA3Ul and the IF Input Amplifier circuit on AlOA3 PLLl IF Assembly. Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for AlOA3C26, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers; refer to Figure 3-78 for the location of AlOA3C26.

41.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in [

START

FREQ] 300.3 MHz.



42.

On the second spectrum analyzer, press ( CENTER FREQUENCY ) 140

MHz MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

] to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 140 MHz signal, and verify that the output power level of the PLLl IF is at least -14 dBm.

If it is not, slightly readjust AlOA3Lll 165 MHz NULL to increase the amplitude of the 140 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer to -14 dBm. Refer to Figure 3-78 for the location of AlOA3Lll 165 MHz NULL adjustment.

43.

Key in MARKER (SPEAK

SEARCH

], [MKR +

REF

LVL) on the second spectrum analyzer to position the peak of the 140 MHz signal at the top graticule line. Press MARKER la] on the second spectrum analyzer.

44.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in CSTART

FREQ

) 320.3 MHz

(sTop) 326.3 MHz [sWEEPI 100 s Icw] 320.3 MHz.

45.

Press [

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 163 MHz TRACE A (j-1 on the second spectrum analyzer. Allow the synthesized sweeper to tune slowly from 320.3 MHz to 326.3 MHz, noting the corresponding

160 MHz to 166 MHz signal on the display of the second spectrum analyzer.

Note

The corresponding 160 MHz to 166 MHz signal might be below the displayed noise level on the second spectrum analyzer.

46. On the second spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ) to position the second marker on the peak response between 160

MHz and 166 MHz. This level should be at least 60 dB down from the level of the 140 MHz signal in step 42.

47. Set the RF Section LINE switch to STANDBY. Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from AlOA3J3 OUT PLLl IF, and disconnect the synthesized sweeper from the cable 4 (yellow).

48. Reinstall AlOA3 PLLl IF Assembly in the RF Section. Reconnect the cable 6 (blue) to AlOA4J2 OUT 160-166 MHz, the cable 4

(yellow) to AlOAlJ3 OUT 200-300 MHz, and the cable 3 (orange) to AlOA3J3 OUT PLLl IF.



Phase Lock Loop 2 wJ4

Note

If PLL2 is phaselocked, proceed to step 12. If PLL2 will not phaselock

(PL2 UNLOCK indicated on CRT), start with step 1.

1. Set the RF Section LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove AlOA6

PLL2 Phase Detector Assembly from its connector on the A23

Motherboard Assembly. It is not necessary to completely remove the AlOA6 PLL2 0 Detector Assembly from the RF Section.

2. Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON and press @ZZQ

3. Disconnect the cable 7 (violet) from AlOA5J4 SCAN I.1 MHz

OUT, and connect the frequency counter BNC input to AlOA5J4 using a BNC to SMB Snap-on Test Cable. Set the input selector switch on the frequency counter to (lo HZ

- 500

MHZ

), and set the impedance switch to 150.

4. On the RF Section, key in (STOP] 10 MHz, &TART FREQ )

8.600 MHz, (SHIFT) (MKR+

REF

LVL~, SWEEP [j!ZZZj, TRACE A

[CLEAR-WRITE].

5. Connect the DVM to AlOA8TP5 VCO TUNE. Refer to Figure 3-79 for the location of AlOA8TP5 VCO TUNE.



AlOA5 P L L 2 V C O

\

AlOA8 PLLZ

D I S C R I M I N A T O R

R2 150MHz

AlOA8

R 4 1OOMHz

TOP VIEW

I


Note

AlOA5

Figure 3-79. Location of PLL2 Adjustments

6. Adjust AlOA5R2 150 MHz adjustment for a DVM indication of

+3.0 f 0.5 Vdc. Refer to Figure 3-79 for the location of AlOA5R2

150 MHz adjustment.

7. Adjust AlOA8R9 .3 MHz adjustment for a frequency counter indication of 0.300 MHz f 0.001 MHz. Refer to Figure 3-79 for the location of AlOA8R9 .3 MHz adjustment.

8. On the RF Section, key in [

START

FREQ] 8.599 MHz, SWEEP

@iKKJ, TRACE A (CLEAR-WRITEJ

The CRT annotation will round off to 8.59 MHz, but the RF Section is actually set to a start frequency of 8.599 MHz.

9. Adjust AlOA5R4 100 MHz adjustment for a DVM indication of + 15.0 f 0.5 Vdc. Refer to Figure 3-79 for the location of

AlOA5R4 100 MHz adjustment.

10. Adjust AlOA8R41 .2 MHz adjustment for a frequency counter indication of 0.200 f 0.001 MHz. Refer to Figure 3-79 for the location of AlOA8R41 .2 MHz adjustment.

Note


11.

Set the RF Section LINE switch to STANDBY. Disconnect the frequency counter from AlOA5J4 SCAN I.1 MHz OUT. Reinstall

AlOA6 PLL2 Phase Detector Assembly in the RF Section and reconnect the cable 7 (violet) to AlOA5J4 SCAN I.1 MHz OUT.

12.

Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON, and key in (jZZ@,

(STOP) 10 MHz, ( START FREQ) 8.600 MHz, SWEEP @KKK),

TRACE A (

CLEAR

-

WRITE

).

13.

Connect the DVM to AlOA8TP5 VCO TUNE.

14.

Adjust AlOA5R2 150 MHz adjustment for a DVM reading of +3.00

f 0.05 Vdc.

15.

Connect the DVM to AlOA6TP7 PHASE DET OUT, located on the cover of the AlOA6 PLL2 Phase Detector Assembly.

16.

Press SWEEP ICONT). Adjust AlOA8R9 .3 MHz adjustment for a

DVM indication of + 3.50 f 0.05 Vdc.

17.

On the RF Section, key in ( START FREQ] 8.599 MHz, SWEEP

(GKQ, TRACE A ( CLEAR WRITE ).

The CRT annotation will round off to 8.60 MHz, but the RF Section is actually set to a start frequency of 8.599 MHz.

18.

Connect the DVM to AlOA8TP5 VCO TUNE.

19.

Adjust AlOA5R4 100 MHz adjustment for a DVM indication of

+ 15.00 f 0.05 Vdc.

20.

21.

Connect the DVM to AlOA6TP7 PHASE DET OUT.

Adjust AlOA8R41 .2 MHz adjustment for a DVM indication of 3.50

f 0.05 Vdc.

22.

Repeat steps 12 through 21 as necessary until no further adjustment is required.

23.

On the RF Section, connect the front-panel CAL OUTPUT signal to the RF INPUT.

24.

On the RF Section, key in (sTopI 100.5 MHz, (

START

FREQ]

95.5 MHz, SWEEP LCONT), [

SWEEP

TIME) 100 ms.

25.

Adjust AlOA8R27 5 MHz SCAN to center the 100 MHz CAL

OUTPUT signal on the center graticule line. Refer to Figure 3-79 for the location of AlOA8R27 5 MHz SCAN adjustment.

26.

On the RF Section, key in [STOP] 100.05 MHz, ( START FREQ]

99.55 MHz, [

SWEEP TIME

] 500 msec.

27.

Adjust AlOA8R25 .5 MHz SCAN to center the 100 MHz CAL

OUTPUT signal on the center graticule line. Refer to Figure 3-79 for the location of AlOA8R25 .5 MHz SCAN adjustment.



Phase Lock Loop 3

(P=9

1. Set the RF Section LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove AlOA4

PLL3 Up Converter Assembly from the RF Section, and install it on an extender board. Reconnect the cable 7 (violet) to AlOA5J4

SCAN I.1 MHz OUT and the cable 8 (gray) to AlOA4J3 IN 100

MHz.

2.

Connect the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to SMB test connector AlOA4J4. Refer to Figure 3-80 for the location of test connector AlOA4J4.

AlOA4

PLLJ U P

C O N V E R T E R


Note

TOP VIEW AlOA4

CA,10

Figure 3-80. Location of PLL3 Adjustments

3.

Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON, and key in (j-1,

[FREQUENCY SPAN ) 0 HZ .

4.

On the second spectrum analyzer, key in @Z-G@, LSHIFT)

@TART FREQ~. Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 kHz

RES BW (MANUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 kHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 dBm

In addition to the displayed 160 MHz signal, other signals should be present at AlOA4J4 at approximately 160.3 MHz and 300 kHz.

5. On the second spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

),

MKR

+

REF

LVL to position the peak of the displayed 160 MHz signal at the top CRT graticule line. Then, key in [

ENTER

dB/DIv)

2 dB, [

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 50 kHz, [REFERENCELEVEL) STEP @‘j @

@) on the second spectrum analyzer to lower the peak of the displayed signal by three major graticule divisions.

Note

17. 20130 Loop Phase Lock Adjustments

.Adjustments AlOA4L16 160 MHz PEAK and AlOA4L17 160 MHz

PEAK are sealed at the factory and normally do not require readjustment unless a component failure has occurred. lb verify their proper adjustment, skip to step 7.

6. Adjust AlOA4L16 160 MHz PEAK and AlOA4L17 160 MHz PEAK to maximize the amplitude of the 160 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer. The two adjustments are interactive; repeat the adjustment as necessary to ensure maximum signal amplitude. Refer to Figure 3-80 for the location of AlOA4L16 160

MHz PEAK and AlOA4L17 160 MHz PEAK adjustments.

7. Adjust AlOA4C50 160 MHz PEAK to maximize the amplitude of the 160 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer. If after adjustment AlOA4C50 is completely open, select a lower value for factory-selected component AlOA4C49; conversely, if after adjustment AlOA4C50 is completely closed, select a higher value for factory-selected component AlOA4C49. Refer to

‘Ihble 3-12 for the acceptable range of values and corresponding

HP part numbers for AlOA4C49, and to Figure 3-80 for the location of AlOA4C50 160 MHz PEAK and AlOA4C49.

‘Ihble 3-12. Standard Values for AlOA4C49

HP Part Number

0160-3874

0160-4520

0160-4521

0160-4522

0160-4289

8. On the RF Section, key in (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 42.450 MHz,

(

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 100 kHz, SWEEP cm), TRACE A

(CLEARWRITE).



FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAUTO)

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

10. On the second spectrum analyzer, press MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ) to position the marker on the peak response. If this level is not at least -42 dBm, repeat steps 3 through 10.

11. Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from SMB test connector AlOA4J4. Connect the second spectrum analyzer to

AlOA4J2 OUT 160 - 166 MHz. Connect the DVM to AlOA4TP3.

Refer to Figure 3-80 for the location of AlOA4TP3.




CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -14 dBm

MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (j-j

Note

Adjustment AlOA4Lll PLL3 VCO ADJ is sealed at the factory and normally does not require readjustment unless a component failure has occurred. AlOA4Lll PLL3 VCO ADJ should be adjusted with the metal shield installed over the PLL3 VCO on AlOA4 PLL3 Up

Converter Assembly.

13. A 166 MHz signal should be centered on the display of the second spectrum analyzer, indicating that PLL3 is phaselocked. If not, coarse adjust AlOA4Lll PLL3 VCO ADJ to center the signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer and phaselock PLL3.

14. With PLL3 phaselocked, readjust AlOA4Lll PLL3 VCO ADJ as necessary for a DVM indication of -7.0 f 0.1 Vdc.

15. On the RF Section, key in CCENTER FREQUENCY ] 42.569999 MHz,

[ FREQUENCY SPAN ] 0

HZ , S WEEP (SINGLE), TR AC E A (CLEARWRITE].

The DVM indication should be -3.5 f 0.6 Vdc.

16. On the RF Section, key in ( CENTER FREQUENCY ) 42.6499

MHz, (

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 100 kHz, SWEEP (?iIGZ], TRACE A

( CLEARWRITE ).


CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164.001 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -14 dBm

18. On the second spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

) and verify that the output power level of the PLL3 VCO at

164.001 MHz is -20 dBm f 2 dB as indicated by the marker.

If it is not, note the amplitude and change the values of factory-select resistors AlOA4R29 and AlOA4R33 as necessary.

Refer to ‘Iable 3-13 for a list of standard resistor values and corresponding change in circuit gain to adjust the PLL3 VCO output power level to -20 dBm, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers.

‘lhble 3-13.

Standard Values for AlOA4R29 and AlOA4R33

T

Resistors

R29 R33

68.1 68.1

68.1 75

75 75

68.1 82.5

75 90.9



19. Set the RF Section LINE switch to STANDBY. Disconnect the DVM from AlOA4TP3 and the second spectrum analyzer from AlOA4J2

OUT 160-166 MHz.

20. Reinstall AlOA4 PLL3 Up Converter Assembly in the RF Section.

Reconnect the cable 7 (violet) to AlOA5J4 SCAN 5.1 MHz OUT, the cable 6 (blue) to AlOA4J2 OUT 160-166 MHz, and the cable 8

(gray) to AlOA4J3 IN 100 MHz.


18. RF Module

Phase Lock

Adjustments

Reference

RF-Section:

A6A9 Phase Lock

Description

The 3.3 GHz Heterodyne Phase Lock Loop sampler circuits and 300

MHz Tripler circuits on the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly are adjusted and checked for proper operation. The match between the Sampler

Driver circuit and the A6A9Ul Sampler is adjusted. Then, the output balance of the A6A9Ul Sampler is set. A second spectrum analyzer is used to adjust the output match between the Tripler circuit and the

300 MHz Power Amplifier. Tripler match is adjusted for maximum 300

MHz output signal with all harmonics more than 15 dB down.

Equipment


Digitizing Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 545OlA


15x2 Extender Board (service accessory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08505-60041

BNC 50-ohm Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11593A

Cables:

BNC to SMB Cable (service accessory) . . . . . . . . . . . . .85680-60093

Procedure

1. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Turn the spectrum analyzer over to position the RF Section on top, as shown in Figure 3-81, and remove the RF Section bottom cover.

2. In the RF Section, disconnect the cable 84 gray/yellow from

A6A12Jl and the cable 82 (gray/red) from A6A12J2. Remove the cover from the A6 RF Module, and then reconnect the cable 84

(gray/yellow) to A6A12Jl and the cable 82 (gray/red) to A6A12J2.

Refer to Figure 3-82 for the location of the A6A12 YTX Driver

Assembly and the A6 RF Module.

Sampler Match and

HET Unlock Detector

Delay Adjustments

Caution

A6A9Ul Sampler is very susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). Be sure to use proper grounding techniques when handling A6A9 Phase Lock assembly and when disconnecting and connecting cables to A6A9J5 3.3 GHz INPUT and test points

A6A9AlE5 and A6A9AlE6.


SPECTRUU ANALYZER

18. RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments

DIGITIZING

SPECTRM ANALYZER

Figure 3-81. RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments Setup

A 6

A5%&3kI E S

A6A9

P H A S E

COCK u

TOP VIEW

A6A9

R 2 7 = 1 0 . 0 kQ ( 8 5 6 6 0 A ) 56.2kQ (856608)

Figure 3-82. Location of RF Module Phase Lock Adjustments

3. Disconnect the cable 2 (red) from A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT, the cable 0 (black) from A6A9J2 CAL OUTPUT, the cable 85

(gray/green) from A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT, the cable 4 (yellow) from A6A9J4 VCO TUNE, and the cable 5 (green) from A6A9J5

3.3 GHz INPUT. Remove the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly from the

RF Section.

4. Remove the front cover from the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly, and install it in the RF Section on an extender board. Reconnect the cable 85 (gray/green) to A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT, the cable 4

(yellow) to A6A9J4 VCO TUNE, and cable 5 (green) to A6A9J5 3.3

GHz INPUT.

5. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON, and press

@izEiFGHz).



6. Connect the DVM to A6A9AlE5, and connect the DVM ground to the metal case/shield of the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly. Refer to

Figure 3-82 for the location of A6A9AlE5 and A6A9AlE6.

7. Note the DVM indication at A6A9AlE5.

Voltage at A6A9AlE5:

8. Connect the DVM to A6A9AlE6, and note the DVM indication.

Vdc

Voltage at A6A9AlE6:

9. Add the voltage measured in step 7 to the voltage measured in step 8. The absolute value of the resulting sum should be less than 0.20 Vdc. If the resulting sum is greater than 0.20

Vdc, suspect a failure of A6A9Ul Sampler or related circuit components.

Vdc

Note

The voltage at A6A9AlE5 should fall in the range of -0.55 Vdc and

-0.85 Vdc, and the voltage at A6A9AlE6 should fall in the range of 0.55 Vdc to 0.85 Vdc. If either of the voltages at A6A9AlE5 and A6A9AlE6 do not fall within these ranges, change the value of factory-select component A6A9AlR5. Decreasing the value of A6A9AlR5 decreases the magnitude of the voltages at both

A6A9AlE5 and A6A9AlE6. Conversely, an increasing the value of A6A9AlR5 increases the magnitude of the voltages at both

A6A9AlE5 and A6A9AlE6. Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6A9AlR5, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers.

Refer to Figure 3-82 for the location of A6A9AlR5.

For example, if the voltage measured at A6A9AlE5 is -0.87 Vdc and the voltage measured at A6A9AlE6 is 0.86 Vdc, then the absolute value of the resulting sum is -0.87 + 0.86 = 0.01 Vdc. Since the resulting sum is less than 0.20 Vdc, the A6A9Ul Sampler is probably not faulty. For this example, the value of A6A9AlR5 should be reduced to decrease the magnitude of both measured voltages to within the recommended ranges. The magnitudes of the voltages measured at A6A9AlE5 and A6A9AlE6 are:

Voltage at A6A9AlE5 = -0.87 = 0.87 Vdc

Voltage at A6A9AlE6 = 0.86 = 0.86 Vdc

Note

10. Verify that the loaded value of factory-select resistor A6A9AlR27 is 56.2K ohms. Refer to Figure 3-82 for the location of

A6A9AlR27.

Factory-select resistor A6A9AlR27 must be loaded with a value of

56.2K ohms for proper operation of the HET UNLOCK Detector circuit in HP 85660B RF Sections (A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly HP Part

Number 85660-60226 and 85660-60256). A6A9AlR27 must be loaded with a value of 10K ohms for use in HP 85660A RF Sections.



18. RF’ Module Phase Lock Adjustments

12.

Disconnect cable 85 (gray/green) from A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT, cable 4 (yellow) from A6A9J4 VCO TUNE, and cable 5 (green) from A6A9J5 3.3 GHz INPUT. Remove the A6A9 Phase Lock

Assembly from the extender board in the RF Section, and replace the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly front cover.

100 MHz Tripler

13.

Adjustments

Install the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly in the RF Section on an extender board. Reconnect cable 0 (black) to A6A9J2 CAL

OUTPUT, cable 85 (gray/green) to A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT, cable

4 (yellow) to A6A9J4 VCO TUNE, and cable 5 (green) to A6A9J5

3.3 GHz INPUT.

14.

Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press

(j-1. Connect a 50-ohm termination to the RF Section front-panel CAL OUTPUT connector.

15.

Press CsGHz) on the second spectrum analyzer. Connect the

CAL OUTPUT signal on the second spectrum analyzer to the RF

INPUT on the second spectrum analyzer, and press [RECALL_) 8.

16.

Adjust the AMPTD CAL control on the second spectrum analyzer for a -10.00 dBm displayed signal, and then press m

[F REQUENCY SPAN)~.

17.

Connect the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to the RF

Section A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT. Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +25 dBm

A’ITEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 dB

LOG dB/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB

18.

The 300 MHz output signal should be visible on the display of the second spectrum analyzer, along with other harmonics of

100 MHz. Press MARKER CPEAK

SEARCH

) to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 300 MHz signal. Adjust A6A9AlC29

TRIPLER MATCH to maximize the power level of the 300 MHz signal.

19.

Press MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

) and verify that the power level of the 300 MHz signal is greater than + 16.5 dBm. Press MARKER

Ia], and then press the m and meys (or turn the DATA knob) to position the second marker on the peak of each of the other displayed harmonics in succession, and verify that the level of each harmonic is greater than 15 dB down relative to the peak of the 300 MHz signal.

20.

Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from the RF Section

A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT. Remove the 50-ohm termination from the RF Section front-panel CAL OUTPUT connector.



Sampler Output

2 1. Use a BNC to SMB snap-on test cable to connect the oscilloscope

Balance Adjustment Channel 1 input to the RF Section A6A9J4 VCO TUNE connector.

22. On the oscilloscope, key in (j%ZiLQ [?KK) to perform a soft reset.


Press m):

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lO.OV/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1O.OOOOV

coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc

Press (TlME): time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l msec/div reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..left

Press (TRIG):

EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . auto, edge source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l

level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - lO.OOOOV, rising edge

Press (5iZKYj: connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

24. On the oscilloscope press (SHOW). The VCO TUNE waveform displayed on the oscilloscope should be similar to Figure 3-83.

Use the oscilloscope (aTav] markers to measure the waveform maximum and minimum voltages, and the dead time between consecutive voltage ramps.


5 . 0 0 V/div l.OOOrl d c

0 . 0 0 0 0 0 s

Vmarker2Cl )

VnarkerlC 1) d e l t a V( 1 )

5 . 0 0 0 0 0 IS

1 . 0 0 ns/div

3 . 7 5 0 0 0 v

- 2 4 . 5 3 1 3 V

2 8 . 2 8 1 3 V s t o p m a r k e r : s t a r t m a r k e r :

1 0 . 0 0 0 0 IS

6.840001s

3.34000ns

1 f - I O . 0 0 v

Figure 3-83. A Sampler Balance Adjustment Waveform


18. RF’ Module Phase Lock Adjustments

25. Adjust A6A9AlR38 BALANCE for a dead time between consecutive voltage ramps of 3.5 f 0.1 msec. Each voltage ramp should have a “flattened” top and reach a maximum voltage of approximately +3.7 Vdc. The minimum voltage between consecutive voltage ramps should be approximately -24.4 Vdc.

26. Set the spectrum ananlyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Disconnect the oscilloscope from the RF Section A6A9J4 VCO TUNE.

Disconnect cable 0 (black) from A6A9J2 CAL OUTPUT, the cable

85 (gray/green) from A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT, and cable 5 (green) from A6A9J5 3.3 GHz INPUT.

27. Remove the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly from the extender board, and remove the extender board from the RF Section. Reinstall the

A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly in the RF Section.

28. Disconnect cable 84 (gray/yellow) from A6A12Jl and the cable 82

(gray/red) from A6A12J2. Replace the cover to the A6 RF Module, and then reconnect cable 84 (gray/yellow) to A6A12Jl and cable

82 (gray/red) to A6A12J2.

29. Reconnect cable 2 (red) to A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT, cable 0

(black) to A6A9J2 CAL OUTPUT, cable 85 (gray/green) to A6A9J3

100 MHz INPUT, cable 4 (yellow) to A6A9J4 VCO TUNE, and cable

5 (green) to A6A9J5 3.3 GHz INPUT on the A6A9 Phase Lock

Assembly.

30. Perform adjustment procedure 19, “CAL Output Adjustment”.


19. CAL Output

Adjustment

Reference

Description

Equipment

Procedure

, RF-Section:

A6A9 Phase Lock

Related Performance Test:

Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test

A power meter is used to measure the output level of the 100 MHz

CAL OUTPUT signal. The 100 MHz Calibrator circuit on the A6A9

Phase Lock Assembly is adjusted as necessary for a -10.00 dBm output level. The harmonic level of the calibrator output signal is then checked using a second spectrum analyzer.

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436A

Power Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP8481A

Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8566B

1. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown in Figure 3-84, and remove the RF Section bottom cover.

PQWER METER

SPECTRIJU ANALYZ!ZR

(Device Under Tamt

Figure 3-84. Cal Output Adjustment Setup

2. Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON, and allow the RF Section and power meter/power sensor to warm up for at least 5 minutes.

3. Connect the power sensor to the power meter POWER REF output, and zero and calibrate the power meter. Connect the power meter/power sensor to the RF Section front-panel CAL

OUTPUT connector.

4. Adjust A6A9AlRll CAL OUTPUT fully clockwise for maximum circuit gain and verify that the power meter indication is

-9.0 dBm or greater. Adjust A6A9AlRll CAL OUTPUT fully counterclockwise for minimum circuit gain and verify that the power meter indication is - 11 .O dBm or less.


A 6

ASSEMBL I ES

C O V E R

A6A9AlRll

C A L A D J

19. CAL Output Adjustment c29

TRIPLER M A T C H

Rll

C A L O U T P U T RlO

Note

A6A9Al

Figure 3-85. Location of CAL OUTPUT Adjustment

A6A9AlRll CAL OUTPUT should have at least 2.0 dB of adjustment range, centered at a front-panel CAL OUTPUT signal level of -10.0

dBm. If A6A9AlRll CAL OUTPUT does not have sufficient range to adjust the CAL OUTPUT signal level to -9.0 dBm, decrease the value of factory-select component A6A9AlRlO; conversely, increase the value of A6A9AlRlO if A6A9AlRll CAL OUTPUT does not have sufficient range to adjust the CAL OUTPUT signal level to - 11 .O dBm.

Select the value of factoryselect component A6A9AlRlO to center the range of A6A9AlRll CAL OUTPUT as close as possible to the range of

-9.0 dBm to -11.0 dBm. Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6A9AlR10, and Table 3-4 for HP part numbers. Refer to Figure 3-85 for the location of A6A9AlRlO.

5. Adjust A6A9AlRll CAL OUTPUT for a power meter indication of

-10.00 f 0.01 dBm.

6. Disconnect the power meter/power sensor from the RF Section front-panel CAL OUTPUT connector.

7. Press (2-22) on the second spectrum analyzer. Connect the CAL

OUTPUT signal on the second spectrum analyzer to the RF INPUT on the second spectrum analyzer, and press (j) 8.

8. Adjust the AMPTD CAL control on the second spectrum analyzer for a -10.00 dBm displayed signal, and then press (*)

CFREQUEN~Y SPAN]~.

9. Connect the second spectrum analyzer RF input to the RF Section front-panel CAL OUTPUT connector. Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

LOG dB/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB


19. CAL Output Adjustment


CENTER 550 MHZ

RES BW 3 MHZ “BW 3 MHZ

SPAN 1 an GHZ

SWP 25.a msec

Figure 3-86. CAL OUTPUT Harmonics

10. On the second spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

),

[al to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 100

MHz signal. Then, press the Q) key (or turn the DATA knob) to position the second marker on the peak of each displayed harmonic of the 100 MHz signal in succession, and verify that the level of each harmonic is greater than 25 dB down relative to the peak of the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal. See Figure 3-86.

If the level of each harmonic of the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT is not greater than 25 dB down perform the following steps: a.

b.

C.

d.

e.

f.

On the second spectrum analyzer, press the Qf) and (7D keys to place the second marker on the peak of the highest harmonic of the 100 MHz signal.

Adjust A6A9AlC29 TRIPLER MATCH only as much as required to lower the level of the highest harmonic to greater than 25 dB down relative to the peak of the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT signal. Refer to Figure 3-85 for the location of A6A9AlC29

TRIPLER MATCH.

Disconnect cable 2 (red) from A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT on the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly. Connect the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT.

On the second spectrum analyzer, key in PREFERENCE

LEVEL

] +25 dBm, [ATTEN] 40 dB, MARKER IOFF), MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

) to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 300 MHz signal.

Readjust A6A9AlC29 TRIPLER MATCH as necessary for a 300

MHz signal level of at least + 16.5 dBm.

Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from A6A9Jl 300

MHZ OUTPUT, and reconnect cable 2 (red) to A6A9Jl 300 MHz

OUTPUT.

Repeat steps 9 through 10E until no further adjustment is required.

11. Replace the RF Section bottom cover.

20. Last Converter Adjustments

20. Last Converter

Adjustments

Reference

Description

Equipment

Procedure

RF-Section:

A6A3 Last Converter

A 321.4 MHz signal from a synthesized sweeper is applied to the 321.4

MHz IF input of the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly, and the 321.4

MHz Bandpass Filter is adjusted. Then, a 310.7 MHz signal is applied to the 321.4 MHz IF input, and the 10.7 MHz Notch Filter is adjusted to null 10.7 MHz subharmonic spurious responses.

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 8340A/B

Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8566B

15x2 Extender Board (service accessorgj . . . . . . . . . . . . . .08505-60041

Probe (SMB Male Bulkhead Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250-0691

Cables:

BNC to SMB Cable (2 required) (semice accessow) . . . . . 85680-60093

1. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Turn the spectrum analyzer over to position the RF Section on top, as shown in Figure 3-87, and remove the RF Section bottom cover.

2. In the RF Section, disconnect cable 84 (gray/yellow) from

A6A12Jl and cable 82 (gray/red) from A6A12J2. Disconnect cable 2 (red) from A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT, cable 0 (black) from

A6A9J2 CAL OUTPUT, cable 85 (gray/green) from A6A9J3 100

MHz INPUT, cable 4 (yellow) from A6A9J4 VCO TUNE, and cable

5 (green) from A6A9J5 3.3 GHz INPUT.

3. Remove the cover from the A6 RF Module. Remove the A6A9

Phase Lock Assembly, the A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver

Assembly, the A6All Slope Generator Assembly, and the A6A12

YTX Driver Assembly from the RF Section.



SPECTRW ANALYZER

Figure 3-87. Last Converter Adjustments Setup

4. Remove the RF Section right side cover (now on the left), and remove the two screws attaching the A6A3 Last Converter

Assembly to the RF Section chassis.

5. Disconnect cable 1 (brown) from A6A3Jl 321.4 MHz IN, cable 2

(red) from A6A3J2 300 MHz IN, and cable 81 (gray/brown) from

A6A3J3 (21.4 MHz OUT) on the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly.

Remove the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly from the RF Section.

6. Adjust the five variable capacitors A6A3AlC8, A6A3AlC9,

A6A3AlC10, A6A3AlC11, and A6A3AlC12 in the 321.4 MHz

Bandpass Filter for maximum capacitance. The capacitors are visible through five evenly-spaced, unlabeled access holes in the bottom cover of the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly; position each capacitor with its adjustment slot vertical and plates fully meshed. Refer to Figure 3-88 for the location of A6A3AlC8,

A6A3AlC9, A6A3AlC10, A6A3AlC11, and A6A3AlC12.

7. Install the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly in the RF Section using an extender board. Reconnect cable 2 (red) to ABA3J2 300 MHz

IN.

8. Reinstall the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly, the A6AlO

Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver Assembly, the A6All Slope

Generator Assembly, and the A6A12 YTX Driver Assembly in the

RF Section.

9. Reconnect cable 2 (red) to A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT and cable 85

(gray/green) to A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT.



R I G H T

SIDE

C O V E R

ASSE&L I ES

C O V E R

A6A3

L A S T

C O N V E R T E R

A6A3AlC23

1 0 . 7 MHz N O T C H

F I L T E R A D J U S T

Note

I L

\

A6A3ilC12 A6A3A.lClO

A6A3ilC8

,

Y

3 2 1 . 4 M H z B P F A D J U S T

Figure 3-88. Location of Last Converter Adjustments

10. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON, and key in

C-1, SWEEP [m). A HET UNLOCK message should appear on the CRT display.

11. Connect a BNC to SMB snap-on test cable and probe (SMB male bulkhead connector) to the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer.

12. Press (2--22GHz) on the second spectrum analyzer. Set the controls of the second spectrum analyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321.4 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 kHz


13. Press 1-j on the synthesized sweeper, and key in Icw) 321.4

MHz, [

POWER

LEVEL) -20.0 dBm. Connect the RF OUTPUT of the synthesized sweeper to A6A3Jl 321.4 MHz IN using a second BNC to SMB snap-on test cable.

In the following steps, an SMB male bulkhead connector is used as an input probe for the second spectrum analyzer. The probe tip is partially inserted through access holes in the bottom cover of the

A6A3 Last Converter Assembly. If the probe tip is allowed to touch one of the adjustable capacitors, false readings will result as indicated by a sudden jump in the amplitude of the 321.4 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

14. Partially insert the probe connected to the second spectrum analyzer into the access hole above A6A3AlC9 (the second access hole from the right). Using a non-metallic adjustment tool, adjust

A6A3AlC8 (the right-most of the five access holes) to maximize the amplitude of the 321.4 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

Adjustments 3-17 1


15. Move the probe to the access hole above A6A3AlC8 (the rightmost access hole). Adjust A6A3AlC9 (second access hole from the right) to minimize the amplitude of the 321.4 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

16. With the probe still in the access hole above A6A3AlC8, adjust

A6A3AlClO (center access hole) to maximize the amplitude of the

32 1.4 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

17. Adjust A6A3AlCll (second access hole from the left) to minimize the amplitude of the 321.4 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

18. Adjust A6A3AlC12 (left-most of the five access holes) to maximize the amplitude of the 321.4 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.

19. Remove the probe from the access hole above A6A3AlC8, and disconnect the probe from the BNC to SMB snap-on test cable.

Use the BNC to SMB snap-on test cable to connect the RF INPUT of the second spectrum analyzer to A6A3J3 (21.4 MHz OUT).

20. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 MHz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 kHz


21. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw) 310.7 MHz, [

POWER LEVEL

]

-40 dBm.

22. Locate the 10.7 MHz Notch Filter adjustment, visible through the remaining unlabeled access hole near the center of the bottom cover of the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly (refer to Figure 3-88).

Adjust A6A3AlC23 to minimize the amplitude of the 10.7 MHz signal displayed on the second spectrum analyzer.


24. Disconnect the synthesized sweeper from A6A3Jl 321.4 MHz IN.

Disconnect the second spectrum analyzer from A6A3J3 (21.4 MHz

OUT).

Disconnect cable 2 (red) from A6A3J2 300 MHz IN.

25. Disconnect cable 2 (red) from A6A9Jl 300 MHz OUTPUT and cable 85 (gray/green) from A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT. Remove the

A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly, the A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay

Driver Assembly, the A6All Slope Generator Assembly, and the

A6A12 YTX Driver Assembly from the RF Section.

26. Reinstall the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly in the RF Section, and replace the two screws attaching the A6A3 Last Converter

Assembly to the RF Section chassis. Replace the RF Section right side cover.

27. Reconnect cable 1 (brown) to A6A3Jl 321.4 MHz IN, cable 2 (red) to A6A3J2 300 MHz IN, and cable 81 (gray/brown) to A6A3J3

(21.4 MHz OUT) on the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly.

28. Reinstall the A6A9 Phase Lock Assembly, the A6AlO

Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver Assembly, the A6All Slope



Generator Assembly, and the A6A12 YTX Driver Assembly in the

RF Section. Replace the cover on the A6 RF Module.

29. Reconnect cable 84 (gray/yellow) to A6A12Jl and cable 82

(gray/red) to A6A12J2. Reconnect cable 2 (red) to A6A9Jl 300

MHz OUTPUT, cable 0 (black) to A6A9J2 CAL OUTPUT, cable

85 (gray/green) to A6A9J3 100 MHz INPUT, cable 4 (yellow) to

A6A9J4 VCO TUNE, and cable 5 (green) to A6A9J5 3.3 GHz

INPUT.

30. Replace the RF Section bottom cover.


2 1. Frequency

Response

Adjustments

Reference

RF Section:

A6A3 Last Converter

A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver

A6All Slope Generator

A6A12 YTX Driver

Related Performance

Test

Description

Frequency Response Test

Sweep + Tune Output Test

The frequency response (flatness) and amplitude adjustments are performed for each of the spectrum analyzer frequency bands listed in ‘Iable 3-14.

‘Ihble 3-14. Frequency Bands

Bands Harmonic Mixing Frequency Range

Number/Mode

IF Frequency

OBandA l-

Preselected Mixing Bands:

1BandB

2BandC l-

2+

100 Hz - 2.5 GHz 3.6214 GHz

2.0 GHz - 5.8 GHz 0.3214 GHz

5.8 GHz - 12.5 GHz 0.3214 GHz

3BandD

6 W

3+ 12.5 GHz - 18.6 GHz 0.3214 GHz

4BandE 4+ 18.6 GHz - 22.0 GHz 0.3214 GHz

External Mixing Bands (Band F; nominal conversion losses listed):

6+ 18.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz 0.3214 GHz 18 dB

7 (4

8

(Q>

9 uJ>

10 (V

8+ lO+ lO+

14+

26.5 GHz - 40.0 GHz 0.3214 GHz 20 dB

33.0 GHz - 50.0 GHz 0.3214 GHz 22 dB

40.0 GHz - 60.0 GHz 0.3214 GHz 24 dB

50.0 GHz - 75.0 GHz 0.3214 GHz 26 dB

11 (El

12

w>

13 09

16+

18+

24+

60.0 GHz - 90.0 GHz 0.3214 GHz 28 dB

75.0 GHz - 110 GHz 0.3214 GHz 30 dB

90.0 GHz - 140 GHz 0.3214 GHz 32 dB

14 CD)

15 ((3

16

17

U)

(J)

30+

36+

44+

54+

110 GHz - 170 GHz 0.3214 GHz 34 dB

140 GHz - 210 GHz 0.3214 GHz 36 dB

170 GHz - 260 GHz 0.3214 GHz 38 dB

170 GHz - 325 GHz 0.3214 GHz 40 dB

In Band A (100 Hz - 2.5 GHz), the A6A6 First Converter Assembly functions as the spectrum analyzer input mixer. In Bands B, C, D, and

E (2 GHz - 22 GHz), the A6A8 YIG-Tuned Mixer (YTX) Assembly functions as both a tracking preselector and an harmonic input mixer.

A preselector is a YIG-tuned bandpass filter that tunes in synchronism with the tuning of the spectrum analyzer’s 1st LO. This prevents undesired mixing products from being generated in the harmonic


Equipment

2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments input mixer. In Band F (the external mixing bands), the output of an external harmonic mixer is connected to the front-panel 321.4 MHz IF

INPUT, bypassing the two internal mixers.

The frequency response of the spectrum analyzer is mainly determined by the two input mixers - the A6A6 First Converter

Assembly and A6A8 YTX Assembly - and the associated A6A5

Amplifier/Coupler/Load Unit (ACLU) Assembly. Additional signal path components that affect frequency response include the A6J3

RF INPUT Connector Assembly, A6Al Coaxial RF Switch, A6A2 RF

Attenuator, A6A14 Limiter, and semi-rigid cables A6W1, A6W2,

A6W3, A6W4, A6W5, and A6W20. When any of these components is adjusted or replaced, the spectrum analyzer frequency response must be verified and adjusted as necessary.

To adjust frequency response, an externally-leveled synthesized sweeper is used as a reference signal source. The synthesized sweeper output is connected to the spectrum analyzer RF INPUT using a low-loss microwave cable, a precision resistive splitter, and a power sensor or planar-doped, barrier diode detector. The power meter or detector output is connected to the synthesized sweeper LEVELING

EXT INPUT to precisely level the signal power at the input of the spectrum analyzer. Since the synthesized sweeper and spectrum analyzer both sweep independently of each other, one must be swept quickly relative to the other to review the frequency response across a given frequency band.

The f9 Vdc precision reference is initially checked and adjusted.

Then, the drive current to the A6A4 Second Converter 3.3 GHz oscillator is set at 15 mA, and the SWEEP+TUNE offset is adjusted for Band A.

Over each frequency band, the leveled reference signal from the synthesized sweeper is used to adjust the spectrum analyzer for optimum flatness and amplitude. In Band A (100 Hz - 2.5 GHz, not preselected), overall RF gain and flatness are adjusted. In Bands B,

C, D, and E (2 GHz - 22 GHz), the adjustments necessary to align the A6A8 YIG-Tuned Mixer (YTX) include YTX mixer diode biasing,

YTX/YTO tracking and linearity, and YTX delay compensation. After the A6A8 YTX is aligned in each of these four preselected bands,

RF Gain and flatness are then optimized with the Preselector DAC centered at the default setting of 32 and the YTX modulated with a

20 Hz sinusoid. In the external mixing bands (Band F), the conversion loss is set to 30 dB and the spectrum analyzer RF gain is adjusted with a 321.4 MHz, -30 dBm reference signal connected to the front panel

32 1.4 MHz IF INPUT.

Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8340A/B

Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..HP436 A

Power Sensor (50 MHz to 18 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8481A



Pulse/Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8116A

Planar-doped Barrier Diode Detector (10 MHz to 33 GHz) . . . . . . . . HP

8473D/8474C

Power Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 11667B


2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments

Adapters:

Type N (f) to BNC (m) . . . . .

Type N (f) to APC 3.5 (f) . .

APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) . . .

SMB (m) to SMA (f) . . . . . . . . . .

APC 3.5 (m) to Type N (f) . .

APC 3.5 (m) to Type N (m) . .

BNC (f) to Dual Banana Plug

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. .

. .

.

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. . . . .

. . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

.

. . . . .

. . . . .

. HP 1250-1477

. HP 1250-1745

. HP 1250-1749

. HP 1250-0674

. HP 1250-1750

. HP 1250-1743

. HP 1251-2277

Cables:

Low Loss Microwave Test Cable (APC 3.5) . . . . . . . . . . HP 8120-4921

BNC to SMB Snap-on Test Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85680-60093

Note

Adjustment procedure 13, “Sweep, DAC, and Main Coil Driver

Adjustments” should be performed prior to this procedure, particularly if the Al6 Scan Generator Assembly, A19 DAC Assembly,

A20 Main Coil Driver Assembly, or AllA YTO are adjusted, repaired, or replaced. The YTX TUNE/YTO TUNE 1 (-3 V/GHz) signal from the

A19 DAC Assembly directly affects the tuning of both the AllA YTO and A6A8 YTX. Adjustments on the Al6 Scan Generator Assembly,

A19 DAC Assembly, and A20 Main Coil Driver Assembly have a direct affect on YTX/YTO tracking in the preselected (2 GHz - 22 GHz) frequency bands.

Procedure

Preliminary

Adjustments

1. Set the spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY. Turn the spectrum analyzer over to position the RF Section on top, as shown in Figure 3-89 and remove the RF Section bottom cover.

PCWR KTER

SYNTHESIZED SWZEPER

PWER SENSOR

DIGITAL VOLTMETER

Figure 3-89.

Frequency Response Preliminary Adjustments Setup

2. Connect a jumper between A12TP2 to A12TP3 (LOCK

INDICATOR DISABLE) on the Al2 Front Panel Interface

Assembly in the RF Section. See Figure 3-90 for the location of

A12TP2 and A12TP3.


Note


A12TP2,TP3

L O C K I N D I C A T O R

D I S A B L E

/

R 8 4 G A I N

R48 A l

03

02

R 5 1

R2

R 6 9 82

R 5 4 C l

R 7 2 C2

Dl

R 7 5

R60

\R78 E2

Dl

\

L

B

D

E

5.8GHz

\R66 2GHz

R 6 4

Z E R O

3 - 9 V

A6All A6A12

Figure 3-90. Location of Frequency Response Adjustments

3. In the RF Section, disconnect cable 84 (gray/yellow) from

A6A12Jl and cable 82 (gray/red) from A6A12J2. Remove the cover from the A6 RF Module, and then reconnect cable 84

(gray/yellow) to A6A12Jl and cable 82 (gray/red) to A6A12J2.

See Figure 3-90 for the location of the A6A12 YTX Driver

Assembly and the A6 RF Module.

The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously (not in STANDBY) and set to the (2--22-j settings for at least 30 minutes prior to performing the following adjustment procedure to allow the temperature and tuning of the A6A8 YTX and associated circuitry to fully stabilize.

4. Set the RF Section LINE switch to ON, and allow the spectrum analyzer to warm up for at least 30 minutes.

5. Connect the power sensor to the power meter POWER REF output, and zero and calibrate the power meter. Connect the power meter/power sensor to the RF Section front-panel CAL

OUTPUT connector using a Type N (f) to BNC (m) adapter, and


Rl IO

RQ V E

R 1 2 V D

R 1 5 V C

R18 V B

R2i G A

R86

R 2 3 G B

R 2 5 G C

R 2 7 GD

R87

R 2 9 G E

R81 G F

R 8 9

R 3 1 LRl

R90

R 3 4 L R 2

R 3 7 L R 3

R 7 6 L R 4

R 4 0 L B 1

R 4 1 L B 2

R 4 2 L B 3

R 7 0 L B 4

2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments verify that the power meter indication is -10.00 dBm fO.10

dB. If the 100 MHz CAL OUTPUT power level is not within this tolerance, perform adjustment procedure 19, “CAL OUTPUT

Adjustment”, before continuing with this adjustment procedure.

6. Disconnect the power meter/power sensor from the speqtrum analyzer front-panel CAL OUTPUT connector.

7. Press (2-22) on the synthesized sweeper. Set the synthesized sweeper controls as follows:

CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21.4 MHz

POWER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - 15.0 dBm

8. Connect the low-loss microwave test cable to the frequency synthesizer RF OUTPUT using an APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) adapter. Connect the power meter/power sensor to the opposite end of the test cable using a Type N (f) to APC 3.5 (f) adapter.

9. On the synthesized sweeper, press ( POWER LEVEL ) and adjust the


dB at 21.4 MHz.

10. Disconnect cable 81 (gray/brown) Wl from A6A3J3 (21.4 MHz

OUT) on the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly. Disconnect the power sensor from the low-loss microwave test cable, and connect the test cable to cable 81 (gray/brown) Wl using an

SMB (m) to SMA (f) adapter. See Figure 3-90 for the location of

A6A3J3 (21.4 MHz OUT).

11. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [j) 8. Verify that the displayed signal amplitude indicated by the MARKER is -10.00

dBm f0.40 dB. If the displayed signal amplitude is not within this tolerance, perform the following adjustment procedures as necessary to adjust the overall RF gain of the HP 85662A

IF/Display Section before continuing with this adjustment procedure:

5. Log Amplifier Adjustments

6. Video Processor Adjustments

10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments

8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments

11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments

12. Disconnect the low-loss microwave test cable from cable 81

(gray/brown) Wl, and reconnect cable 81 (gray/brown) Wl to

A6A3J3 (21.4 MHz OUT) on the A6A3 Last Converter Assembly.

13. Connect the DVM to AGAlOTPl, and connect the DVM ground to

A6AlOTP2. See Figure 3-90 for the location of AGAlOTPl and

A6AlOTP2.

14. Adjust AGAlORl IO (3.3 GHz Oscillator Drive, to IE on A6A4

Second Converter) for a DVM indication of -0.15 ho.01 Vdc. See

Figure 3-90 for the location of AGAlORl.

15. Connect the DVM to A6A12TP3 (-9 V), and connect the

DVM ground to A6A12TP2 (YTX COM) in the RF Section. See

Figure 3-90 for the location of A6A12TP3 and A6A12TP2.


Note

Band A, 10 MHz to 2.5

GHz

2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments f9 Vdc Reference Supplies adjustment A6A12R113

-9

V affects

YTX/YTO tracking, YTX diode bias, and Slope Generator Upper/Lower

Segment frequency breakpoints in all preselected frequency bands

(Bands B, C, D, and E, 2 GHz - 22 GHz).

16. Adjust 17-turn potentiometer A6A12R113 -9 V for a DVM indication of -9.000 fO.OO1 Vdc. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6A12R113.

17. Press C2--22J on the spectrum analyzer. Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows:

CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz

FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O Hz

SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINGLE

18. Use a BNC cable and a BNC (f) to dual banana plug adapter to connect the DVM to the RF Section rear-panel SWEEP+TUNE

OUT connector.

19. Adjust 25-turn potentiometer A6A12R98 ZERO for a DVM indication of 0.000 fO.OO1 Vdc. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6A12R98.

20. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-91, with one resistive output of the power splitter connected to the power meter/power sensor using an APC 3.5 (m) to Type N (f) adapter, and the second resistive output connected to the spectrum analyzer RF INPUT using an APC 3.5 (m) to Type N (m) adapter.

Connect the power meter rear panel RECORDER OUTPUT to the synthesized sweeper front panel LEVELING EXT INPUT.

21. Press ~NSTR PRESET ) on the synthesized sweeper. Set the controls of the synthesized sweeper as follows:

CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz

POWER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -9.0 dBm

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INT

I: f-4

POmR SPLITTER

POmR METER

SPECTRW ANALYZER

Figure 3-91.

Frequency Response Adjustments Setup (10 MHz to 2.5 GHz)



22. On the synthesized sweeper, press CPOWER LEVEL ] and adjust the ENTRY knob as necessary for a power meter indication of

-15.00 dBm *2.00 dB at 100 MHz.

23. On the power meter, press ( RANGE HOLD ) (turning it on).


POWER LEVEL

) and adjust the


dB at 100 MHz.

25. On the synthesized sweeper, press [mj LEVELING and adjust the ENTRY knob (REF in dBV with ATN: 0 dB) for a power meter indication of -10.00 dBm ho.03 dB at 100 MHz.

Note

Do not vary the synthesized sweeper POWER LEVEL setting

(internal leveling) or METER REF and METER ATN settings (external power meter leveling) for the remaining steps in this section of the adjustment procedure. The frequency response adjustments are referenced to the -10.00 dBm power level at 100 MHz.

Note

26. Press [2--22) on the spectrum analyzer. Set the RF Section front-panel AMPTD CAL control to the approximate center of its adjustment range.

Do not vary the spectrum analyzer front-panel AMPTD CAL control setting for the remaining steps in this adjustment procedure.

27. Set (Band A Lower Segment) A6AllR48 Al and (Band A Upper

Segment) A6AllR66 A2 each to the approximate center of its adjustment range.

Then, adjust A6AllR84 GAIN fully clockwise for maximum

RF gain. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6AllR48 Al,

A6AllR66 A2, and A6AllR84 GAIN.

28. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @E5iCiJ 8, [ REFERENCE LEVEL )

-4 dBm and then press the @) and @‘J keys as necessary to position the peak of the displayed 100 MHz signal within one division of the top graticule line. Key in MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

),

MARKER [nl on the spectrum analyzer to position two markers on the peak of the displayed 100 MHz signal.

29. Readjust A6AllR84 GAIN counterclockwise to decrease the RF gain 5.00 dB *0.02 dB, as indicated by the MARKER A indication on the spectrum analyzer display.

30. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (RECALL) 8.

31. Adjust 17-turn potentiometer (Band A Step Gain) A6AlOR21

GA to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 100 MHz signal to

- 10.00 dBm *O. 10 dB. Adjust A6AlOR21 GA counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level. If A6AlOR21 GA does not have sufficient range, adjust the amplitude of the 100 MHz displayed signal as close as possible to

-10.00 dBm.



32. On the spectrum analyzer, key in 1-1, (SHIFT] TRACE A

@iXKKK] b. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 GHz

RESBW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3MHz


LOG SCALE ............................................ 1 dB/DIV

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2s

33. Set the synthesized sweeper controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 GHz

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INT

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ms

SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONT

34. On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE A @

LEAR

-

WRITE

),

(SWEEP TIME) 2S, MARKER (j-1 500 MHZ, IHOLD). AS the spectrum analyzer completes each sweep, a series of approximately 18 new responses should be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-92. The peaks of these responses coarsely outline the spectrum analyzer frequency response.

Figure 3-92.

Typical Coarse Frequency Response (10 MHz - 2.5 GHz)

35. Gradually readjust (Band A Lower Segment) A6AllR48 Al and

(Band A Upper Segment) A6AllR66 A2 for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses. The adjustments are interactive, with A6AllR48 Al having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals below approximately 500 MHz (the marker position), and A6AllR66 A2 having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals above approximately 500 MHz. Adjust

A6AllR48 Al counterclockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses below 500 MHz. Adjust A6AllR66 A2


2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments clockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses above 500 MHz.

Note

It might be helpful to increase or decrease the spectrum analyzer

[

SWEEP TIME

) setting while adjusting A6AllR66 A2 and A6AllR48 Al, particularly when making fine adjustments. An increase in spectrum analyzer sweep time results in closer spacing of the displayed responses, but slows the adjustment.

36.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in (jZ%?] LEVELING,

[

SWEEP

TIME_) 150s, S

WEE

P Cm], SW

EEP

(SINGLEI).

37.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in SWEEP TIME m), TRACE B

( CLEAR WRITE ], TRACE B [NlAXj.

38.

On the synthesized sweeper, press SWEEP L-1 and wait for a sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off. As the synthesized sweeper tunes from 10 MHz to 2.5 GHz, the input signal should be displayed as a TRACE A response, and the spectrum analyzer frequency response should be displayed as

TRACE B, as shown in Figure 3-93.

1 <

PO!


Note

S T A R T i* M H Z

RES 8W 3 MHZ “SW 3 MHZ

S T O P 2 58 GHZ

SWP 5 2 . 3 msec

Figure 3-93.

Typical Frequency Response (10 MHz - 2.5 GHz)

39.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B m, TRACE A

(ml, MARKER (j-1 and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform. Then, press MARKER Ia], MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

) to position a second marker on the highest point on the TRACE B waveform. Total peak-to-peak deviation of the displayed trace should be less than

1.20 dB.

To provide the spectrum analyzer with a 10 MHz to 2.5 GHz input signal of sufficient flatness for measuring frequency response, the synthesized sweeper must be leveled externally with a power meter with a relatively slow sweep time (at least 40 seconds). However, relative flatness adjustments are made with the synthesized sweeper

2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments set to internal leveling, which introduces minor leveling errors but permits much faster sweep times.

40. Repeat steps 33 through 39 as necessary until the total peak-to-peak deviation of the TRACE B waveform is less than

1.20 dB. Leave the TRACE B reference waveform in VIEW for steps 33 through 36 to indicate which portions of the frequency response waveform require relative adjustment.

If necessary, change the value of factory-select component

A6AlOR2 to shift the Band A frequency breakpoint determining the adjustment ranges of A6AllR48 Al and A6AllR66 A2. A decrease in the value of A6AlOR2 shifts the Band A frequency breakpoint higher in frequency, widening the Band A Lower

Segment and narrowing the Band A Upper Segment. Conversely, an increase in the value of A6AlOR2 shifts the Band A frequency breakpoint lower in frequency. See Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6AlOR2, and Table 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR2.

41. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw) 100 MHz, (jjj

LEVELING.

42. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [mj 8, MARKER

[

PEAK SEARCH

) to position a marker on the peak of the displayed

100 MHz signal.

43.

With the RF Section front-panel AMPTD CAL control still set to the approximate center of its adjustment range, readjust 17-turn potentiometer (Band A Step Gain) A6AlOR21 GA to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 100 MHz marker to -10.00 dBm fO.O1 dB. Adjust A6AlOR21 GA counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level.

For A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver Assembly, HP P/N

85660-60322 (HP 85660A/B RF Sections with serial number prefix

2747A or above):

If A6AlOR21 GA does not have sufficient range to adjust the amplitude of the 100 MHz displayed signal to -10.00 dBm, change the value of factory-select component A6AlOR86.

Increase the value of A6AlOR86 to decrease the signal level, and decrease the value of A6AlOR86 to increase the signal level. See

Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6AlOR86, and

‘Iable 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR86.

44.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in m LEVELING, RF (OFF).

Disconnect the power splitter from the spectrum analyzer RF

INPUT.

45.

On the power meter, press LRANGE HOLD ] (turning it off).

Disconnect the power meter rear panel RECORDER OUTPUT from the synthesized sweeper front panel LEVELING EXT

INPUT.



Band B, 2.0 GHz to 5.8

46. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @?iTEiC), CFREQUENCY

SPAN

) 0

GHz Hz, ( CENTER FREQUENCY ) 4 GHz, SWEEP @iKZ].

47. Connect the DVM to A6AlZTP3 (-9 V), and connect the

DVM ground to A6A12TP2 (YTX COM) in the RF Section. See

Figure 3-90 for the location of A6A12TP3 and A6A12TP2.

Note f9 Vdc Reference Supplies adjustment A6A12R113 -9 V affects

YTX/YTO tracking, YTX diode bias, and Slope Generator Upper/Lower

Segment frequency breakpoints in all preselected frequency bands

(Bands B, C, D, and E, 2 GHz - 22 GHz).

Note

48. If necessary, readjust 17-turn potentiometer A6A12R113 -9 V for a DVM indication of -9.000 fO.OO1 Vdc.

49. Connect the DVM to A6A12TP5 (-525 V/GHz). Leave the DVM ground connected to A6A12TP2 (YTX COM). See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6A12TP5.

50. Adjust 22-turn (YTX IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R85 B for a

DVM indication of -2.100 f0.001 Vdc. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6A12R85 B.

YTX Linearity adjustments A6AlOR40 LBl, A6AlOR41 LB2,

A6AlOR42 LB3, A6AlOR70 LB4, A6AlOR31 LRl, A6A610R34 LR2,

A6AlOR37 LR3, and A6AlOR76 LR4 affect YTX/YTO tracking in all preselected frequency bands (Bands B, C, D, and E, 2 GHz - 22 GHz).

These adjustments overlap and have a cumulative effect on YTXKI’O tracking with increasing frequency.

51. If the A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver Assembly or A6A7

YTX Current Driver Assembly has been repaired or replaced, or if the A6A8 YTX has been replaced, adjust 22-turn (YTX

Linearity) potentiometers A6AlOR40 LBl, A6AlOR41 LB2,

A6AlOR42 LB3, A6AlOR70 LB4, A6AlOR31 LRl, A6A610R34

LR2, A6AlOR37 LR3, and A6AlOR76 LR4 fully counterclockwise.

See Figure 3-90 for the location of YTX Linearity adjustments

A6AlOR40 LBl, A6AlOR41 LB2, A6AlOR42 LB3, A6AlOR70

LB4, A6AlOR31 LRl, A6A610R34 LR2, A6AlOR37 LR3, and

A6AlOR76 LR4.

52. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @=!ZTiCJ, m CPRESEL

PEAK

_)

=, ISHIFT_) TRACE A c-1 b. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.0 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 GHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms

53. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-94, with one resistive output of the power splitter connected to the power meter/power sensor using an APC 3.5 (m) to Type N (f) adapter, and the second resistive output connected to the diode detector.

Connect the diode detector SMC output to the synthesized


2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments sweeper front panel LEVELING EXT INPUT using a BNC to SMB snap-on test cable.

Note

Note

POmR SENSOR

Figure 3-94.

Frequency Response Adjustments Setup (2.0 GHz to 22.0

GW

54. Press (2-22j on the synthesized sweeper. Set the controls of the synthesized sweeper as follows:

CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz

POWER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -4.0 dBm

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .INT

55. On the synthesized sweeper, press ~POWER

LEVEL

] and adjust the


dB at 100 MHz. Then, press IXTAL) LEVELING and adjust the

ENTRY knob (REF in dBV with ATN: 0 dB) for a power meter indication of -10.00 dBm *0.03 dB at 100 MHz.

Do not vary the synthesized sweeper POWER LEVEL setting

(internal leveling) or XTAL REF and XTAL ATN settings (external diode detector leveling) for the remaining steps in this adjustment procedure. The frequency response adjustments are referenced to the

-10.00 dBm power level at 100 MHz.

56. Disconnect the power sensor from the power splitter, and connect this power splitter resistive output to the spectrum analyzer RF INPUT using an APC 3.5 (m) to Type N (m) adapter.

57. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw) 5.7 GHz.

YTX Drive adjustments A6A12R63 5.8 GHz and A6A12R66 2 GHz are interactive and affect YTX/YTO tracking in all preselected frequency bands (Bands B, C, D, and E, 2 GHz - 22 GHz).

58. Adjust 25-turn (YTX Drive) potentiometer A6A12R63 5.8 GHz and 17-turn (Band B YTX Diode Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR18

VB as necessary to maximize the amplitude of the 5.7 GHz


21. Frequency Response Adjustments signal on the spectrum analyzer display. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6A12R63 5.8 GHz and A6AlOR18 VB.

Note

If A6A12 YTX Driver Assembly is HP P/N 85660-60235 (HP 85660AB

RF Sections serial number prefixed 2503A or above), and A6A12R63

5.8 GHz does not have sufficient adjustment range in this step (or steps 61, 66, or 75), check the value of factory-select component

A6A12R64. The normal value of 15K ohms (HP P/N 0698-7133) for

A6A12R64 provides sufficient adjustment range of A6A12R63 5.8

GHz for most A6A8 YTX assemblies. The alternate value of 13.35613

ohms (HP P/N 0698-8079) for A6A12R64 provides additional range of A6A12R63 5.8 GHz in cases where the adjustment will otherwise not peak the A6A8 YTX tracking sufficiently. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6Al2R64.

5 9 .

On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw) 2.1 GHz.

60.

Adjust 25-turn (YTX Drive) potentiometer A6A12R66 2 GHz as necessary to maximize the amplitude of the 2.1 GHz signal on the spectrum analyzer display. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6A12R66 2 GHz.

61.

Repeat steps 57 through 60 as necessary until no further adjustment is necessary.

62.


63.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER C-J, MARKER

(

PEAK SEARCH

) to position a marker at the peak of the displayed

3.9 GHz signal. Adjust 17-turn (Band B Step Gain) potentiometer

A6AlOR23 GB as necessary to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 3.9 GHz marker to -10.00 dBm fO.10 dB. Adjust

A6AlOR23 GB counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level. If A6AlOR23 GB does not have sufficient range, adjust the amplitude of the displayed 3.9

GHz marker as close as possible to -10.00 dBm. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR23 GB.

64.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in LOG SCALE [ ENTER dB/DIv) 2 dB, MARKER t-1.

65.

On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw] 5.7 GHz.

66.


PEAK SEARCH

] to position a marker at the peak of the displayed 5.7 GHz signal.

Readjust 25-turn (YT.X Drive) potentiometer A6A12R63 5.8 GHz as necessary to maximize the amplitude of the 5.7 GHz signal on the spectrum analyzer display.

67.

68.



PEAK SEARCH

) to position a marker at the peak of the displayed 2.1 GHz signal.

Readjust 25-turn (YTX Drive) potentiometer A6A12R66 2 GHz as necessary to maximize the amplitude of the 2.1 GHz signal on the spectrum analyzer display.

69.

Repeat steps 65 through 68 as necessary until no further adjustment is necessary.




START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.0 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 GHz

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .XTAL

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ms

SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONT

71. On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE A [ CLEAR WRITE ),

CSWEEP

TIME

] 2s, MARKER (OFF), IHOLD). As the spectrum analyzer completes each sweep, a series of approximately 22 new responses should be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-95. The peaks of these responses coarsely outline the spectrum analyzer frequency response.

Note

Figure 3-95.

Typical Coarse Frequency Response (2 GHz - 5.8 GHz)

72. Gradually adjust (Band B Lower Segment) A6AllR51 Bl and

(Band B Upper Segment) A6AllR69 B2 for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses. The adjustments are interactive, with A6AllR51 Bl having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals below mid-band (approximately 3.9 GHz), and A6AllR69 B2 having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals above mid-band. Adjust A6AllR51 Bl counterclockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses below mid-band. Adjust A6Al lR69 B2 clockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses above mid-band. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6AllR51 Bl and

A6Al lR69 B2.

It might be helpful to increase or decrease the spectrum analyzer

[SWEEP TIME ) setting while adjusting A6AllR66 B2 and A6AllR48 Bl, particularly when making fine adjustments. An increase in spectrum analyzer sweep time results in closer spacing of the displayed responses, but slows the adjustment.



73. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [SWEEP TIME ) 5s, LOG SCALE

[

ENTER dB/Divj 1 dB, TRACE B IVIEW), m 4, C-1 2s,

TRACE B [j], IHOLD).

74. Readjust 17-turn (YTX Diode Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR18 VB to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 2.0 GHz to 5.8 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

75. Readjust 25-turn (YTX Drive) potentiometers A6A12R63 5.8

GHz and A6A12R66 2 GHz to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 2.0 GHz to 5.8 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

76. Gradually readjust (Band B Lower Segment) A6AllR51 Bl and (Band B Upper Segment) A6AllR69 B2 as necessary for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses.

77. On the spectrum analyzer, key in SWEEP @FEE], & WEEP TIME )

15Os, TRACE A @KKQ, TRACE B (jj), (SAVEI) 6, TRACE B

(

CLEAR

-

WRITE

], m 5, (jT5E).

78. Press SWEEP [SINGLE] on the spectrum analyzer and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off. As the spectrum analyzer tunes from 2.0 GHz to 5.8 GHz, the spectrum analyzer frequency response should be displayed as



S T ART

SW

Figure 3-96.

Typical Frequency Response (2.0 GHz - 5.8 GHz)

79. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (RECALL) 4, (HOLD) and repeat steps 74 through 76 as necessary.

80. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [RECALL) 5 and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn

Off.

Note

Note


81.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in [=I 4, m IGHz) / and use the DATA knob to gradually change the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from 32, maximizing the level of the TRACE A displayed signal responses at the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Note the PRESELECTOR DAC setting.

82.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in L-1 6, LSHIFT) (GHz) / and enter in the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from step 81.

Press SWEEP (SINGLE) and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off.

83.

Repeat steps 81 and 82 until the level of the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform does not change. Repeat step 82 with a

PRESELECTOR DAC value of 30 and 34.

84.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B [VIEW), MARKER

(NORMAL_) and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform. Then, press MARKER

Ln], MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH

) to position a second marker on the highest point on the TRACE B waveform. Note the total peak-to-peak deviation of the displayed trace.

Band B total peak-to-peak deviation: dB

85.

On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER @ZZiXj and note the frequency of the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Band B highest point: GHz

86.

Repeat steps 79 through 85 if necessary until the total peak-to-peak deviation of the TRACE B waveform is less than

3.40 dB. See the TRACE B reference waveform to indicate which portions of the frequency response waveform require relative adjustment.

87.

88.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (RECALL) 4, IHOLD).

On the synthesized sweeper, press [cw) and enter the frequency recorded in step 85, positioning the displayed TRACE A signal response at the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.

The RF Section front-panel AMPTD CAL control should still be set to the approximate center of its adjustment range from step 26.

89. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER (j-1, MARKER

[

PEAK SEARCH


TRACE A signal response. Adjust 17-turn (Band B Step Gain) potentiometer A6AlOR23 GB to adjust the amplitude of the marker to -10.00 dBm + (l/2 of Band B total peak-to-peak deviation) f0.01 dB. Adjust A6AlOR23 GB counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level.

If the A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver Assembly is HP P/N


2747A or above), and A6AlOR23 GB does not have sufficient range, change the value of factory-select component A6AlOR87. Increase the value of A6AlOR87 to decrease the signal level, and decrease the value of A6AlOR87 to increase the signal level. See ‘Iable 3-3 for the


2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments acceptable range of values for A6AlOR87, and Table 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR87.

Band C, 5.8 GHz to

90. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @=TEZT@, @iYiE] [PRESEL PEAK_)

12.5 GHz

=, [SHIFT] TRACE A (HOLD] b. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 GHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms

91. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw] 6.0 GHz.

Note

The POWER LEVEL of the synthesized sweeper should still be leveled to a calibrated -10.00 dBm at 100 MHz at the spectrum analyzer RF

INPUT from step 55.

92.

Adjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R84 C and

17-turn (YTX Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR15 VC for maximum signal amplitude at 6.0 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6A12R84 C and A6AlOR15 vc.

93.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER (j-1, MARKER

[ PEAK SEARCH ) to position a marker at the peak of the displayed

6.0 GHz signal. Adjust 17-turn (Band C Step Gain) potentiometer

A6AlOR25 GC as necessary to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 6.0 GHz marker to -10.00 dBm fO.10 dB. Adjust

A6AlOR25 GC counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level. If A6AlOR25 GC does not have sufficient range, adjust the amplitude of the displayed 6.0

GHz marker as close as possible to -10.00 dBm. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR25 GC.

94.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in LOG SCALE dB, MARKER fjNORMAL).

( ENTER dB/DIv] 2

95.

Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R84 C as necessary to maximize the amplitude of the 6.0 GHz signal on the spectrum analyzer display.

96.

Set the synthesized sweeper controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.8 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 GHz

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .XTAL

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ms

SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONT

97.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE A CCLEAR-WRITE),

(

SWEEP TIME

) 2s, MARKER (OFF, IHOLD). As the spectrum analyzer completes each sweep, a series of approximately 23 new resnonses should be disnlaved. as shown in Figure 3-97. The


2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments peaks of these responses coarsely outline the spectrum analyzer frequency response.

Note

Note

I I I II I I I I II I II I

START 5.88 GHZ

I I I II I I II I I I u

STOP 12.58 GHZ

Figure 3-97.

Typical Coarse Frequency Response (5.8 GHz - 12.5 GHz)

It might be helpful to temporarily change the spectrum analyzer

@

WEEP TIME

] setting while adjusting frequency response, particularly when making fine adjustments. An increase in spectrum analyzer sweep time results in closer spacing of the displayed responses, but slows the adjustment. Do not decrease the (

SWEEP TIME

) setting below

1s. before the YTX Delay Compensation adjustments have been made.

98. Gradually adjust (Band C Lower Segment) A6AllR54 Cl and

(Band C Upper Segment) A6AllR72 C2 for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses. The adjustments are interactive, with A6AllR54 Cl having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals below mid-band (approximately 9.1 GHz), and A6Al lR72 C2 having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals above mid-band. Adjust A6AllR54 Cl counterclockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses below mid-band. Adjust A6Al lR72 C2 clockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses above mid-band. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6AllR54 Cl and

A6Al lR72 C2.

If the displayed signals at the high end of the band drop off by more than 2-3 dB, center A6AllR72 C2 and proceed to step 99.

99. On the spectrum analyzer, key in ( SWEEP TIME] 5s, LOG SCALE

(

ENTER dB/biv] 1 dB, TRACE B (VIEW), (SAVE] 4, (

SWEEP TIME

] 2s,

TRACE B (jj], [HOLD).

100. Readjust 17-turn (YTX Diode Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR15 VC to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 5.8 GHz to 12.5 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

Then, adjust A6AlOR15 VC clockwise until signal responses at the high end of the band drop in amplitude by approximately 0.5

dB.



101.

Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R84 C as necessary to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 5.8 GHz to 12.5 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display. If the displayed signal responses above mid-band drop off in amplitude and peak at a different setting of A6A12R84 C perform the following steps: a. Perform step 51 if it has not already been performed.

b. Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R84 C to maximize the displayed signal responses at the low end of the band.

c. Key in MARKER @Z!ZiJ and position the marker at the point in the band where the signal responses begin to fall off from their maximum value.

d. Adjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometer A6AlOR40 LB1 clockwise until the displayed signal responses at the high end of the band begin to drop. Continue to adjust A6AlOR40

LB1 until the rolloff point aligns with the position of the marker. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6AlOR40 LB1 and A6AlOR31 LRl.

e. Readjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometer A6AlOR31

LRl clockwise to maximize the displayed signal responses at the high end of the band.

f. Readjust A6A12R84 C and A6AlOR31 LRl as necessary to maximize the displayed signal responses from 5.8 GHz to 12.5

GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

102.

Gradually readjust (Band C Lower Segment) A6AllR54 Cl and (Band C Upper Segment) A6AllR72 C2 as necessary for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses.

103.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in SWEEP C@iKEJ (

SWEEP TIME

]

15Os, TRACE A (BLANK], TRACE B [MAXHOLD), m 6, TRACE B

(CLEAR-WRITE), m 5, (HOLD).

104.

Press SWEEP [ml on the spectrum analyzer and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off. As the spectrum analyzer tunes from 5.8 GHz to 12.5 GHz, the spectrum analyzer frequency response should be displayed as




START

I I

5 . 8 0 GHZ

I

RES ew 3 M”Z “BW 3 MHZ

I

STOP 1 2 50 GHZ

I

SWP 150 set

5Pi

Figure 3-98.

.cal Frequency Response (5.8 GFh - 12.5 GHz)

105. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [FiQ 4, m and repeat steps 100 through 102 as necessary.

106. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @ZZQ 5 and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn

Off.

107. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (RECALL) 4, m LGHz) / and use the DATA knob to gradually change the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from 32, maximizing the level of the TRACE A displayed signal responses at the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform.


108. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (jj) 6, ISHIFT) IGHz) 1 and enter in the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from step 107.

Press SWEEP (-1 and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off.

109. Repeat steps 107 and 108 until the level of the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform does not change. Repeat step 108 with a


110. On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B [VIEW), MARKER

@XYXiJ and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform. Then, press MARKER

[a, MARKER @EAK SEARCH ) to position a second marker on the highest point on the TRACE B waveform. Note the total peak-to-peak deviation of the displayed trace.

Band C total peak-to-peak deviation: dB

111. On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER @i?ZZXj and note the frequency of the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Band C highest point:

112. Repeat steps 105 through 111 if necessary until the total peak-to-peak deviation of the TRACE B waveform is less than

GHz



3.40 dB. See the TRACE B reference waveform to indicate which portions of the frequency response waveform require relative adjustment. 113. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (ml 4, m).

113. On the synthesized sweeper, press Icw) and enter the frequency recorded in step 111, positioning the displayed TRACE A signal response at the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Note


Note


[

PEAK SEARCH


TRACE A signal response. Adjust 17-turn (Band C Step Gain) potentiometer A6AlOR25 GC to adjust the-amplitude of the ’ marker to -10.00 dBm + (l/2 of Band C total peak-to-peak deviation) f0.01 dB. Adjust A6AlOR25 GC counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level.

If A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver Assembly is HP P/N

85660-60322 (HP 85660AB RF Sections with serial number prefix

2747A or above), and A6AlOR25 GC does not have sufficient range, change the value of factory-select component A6AlOR88. Increase the value of A6AlOR88 to decrease the signal level, and decrease the value of A6AlOR88 to increase the signal level. See ‘Ihble 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6AlOR88, and ‘Iable 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR88.

Band D, 12.5 to 18.6

GHz

Note

115. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [WI, (SHIFT) (PRESEL

PEAK

)

= , (SHIFT) TRACE A (jhnAx) b. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6 GHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz


LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms

116. On the synthesized sweeper, key in @ 15.0 GHz.


INPUT from step 55.

117.

Adjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R83 D and

17-turn (YTX Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR12 VD for maximum signal amplitude at 15.0 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6A12R83 D and A6AlOR15

VD.

118.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER (NORMAL),

MARKER [PEAKSEARCH) to position a marker at the peak of


Note

2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments the displayed 15.0 GHz signal. Adjust 17-turn (Band D Step

Gain) potentiometer A6AlOR27 GD as necessary to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 15.0 GHz marker to -10.00 dBm fO.10 dB. Adjust A6AlOR27 GD counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level.

If A6AlOR27 GD does not have sufficient range, adjust the amplitude of the displayed 15.0 GHz marker as close as possible to -10.00 dBm. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR27

GD.

119. On the spectrum analyzer, key in LOG SCALE ( ENTER dB/Div) 2 dB, MARKER L@Z%Zj.

120. Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R83 D as necessary to maximize the amplitude of the 15.0 GHz signal on the spectrum analyzer display.


START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6 GHz

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XTAL

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ms

SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONT


(

SWEEP TIME

) 2s, MARKER (OFF), (HOLD. As the spectrum analyzer completes each sweep, a series of approximately 22 new responses should be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-98. The peaks of these responses coarsely outline the spectrum analyzer frequency response.

123. Gradually adjust (Band D Lower Segment) A6AllR57 Dl and

(Band D Upper Segment) A6AllR75 D2 for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses. The adjustments are interactive, with A6AllR57 Dl having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals below mid-band (approximately 15.5

GHz), and A6AllR75 D2 having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals above mid-band. Adjust A6AllR57 Dl counterclockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses below mid-band. Adjust A6AllR75 D2 clockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses above mid-band. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6AllR57 Dl and

A6Al lR75 D2.

If the displayed signals at the high end of the band drop off by more than 2-3 dB, center A6AllR75 D2 and proceed to step 125.

124. On the spectrum analyzer, key in @WEEP

TIME

) 5s, LOG SCALE

[ ENTER dB/Div) 1 dB, TRACE B [VIEW), (SAVE) 4, c-1 2s,

TRACE B [BLANK), [ml.

125. Readjust 17-turn (YTX Diode Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR12 VD to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

Then, adjust A6AlOR12 VD clockwise until signal responses at



126.

the high end of the band drop in amplitude by approximately

0.75 dB.

Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R83 D as necessary to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display. If the displayed signal responses peak at widely different settings of A6A12R83 D, perform the following steps: a. Adjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometers A6AlOR41

LB2, A6AlOR42 LB3, A6AlOR70 LB4, A6A610R34 LR2,

A6AlOR37 LR3, and A6AlOR76 LR4 fully counterclockwise if they have not already been so adjusted; do not readjust

A6A12R40 LB1 or A6AlOR31 LRl.

b. Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R83 D as necessary to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses at the low end of the band.

c. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER (j-1 and position the marker at the point in the band where the signal responses begin to fall off from their maximum value.

d. Adjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometer A6AlOR41 LB2 clockwise until the displayed signal responses at the high end of the band begin to drop. Continue to adjust A6AlOR41 LB2 until the rolloff point aligns with the position of the marker.

See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR41 LB2, A6AlOR42

LB3, A6AlOR34 LR2 and A6AlOR37 LR3.


LR2 clockwise to maximize the displayed signal responses for approximately 3 divisions to the right of the marker.

f. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER [NORMAL) and position the marker at the point in the band where the signal responses begin to fall off from their maximum value.

g. Readjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometer A6AlOR42

LB3 clockwise until the displayed signal responses at the high end of the band begin to drop. Continue to adjust A6AlOR42

LB3 until the rolloff point aligns with the position of the marker.

h. Readjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometer A6AlOR37

LR3 clockwise to maximize the displayed signal responses at the high end of the band.

i. Readjust A6A12R83 D, A6AlOR34 LR2, and A6AlOR37 LR3 as necessary to maximize the displayed signal responses from

12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

127.

Gradually readjust (Band D Lower Segment) A6AllR57 Dl and (Band D Upper Segment) A6AllR75 D2 as necessary for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses.

128.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in SWEEP (SINGLE), [

SWEEP TIME

)

15Os, TRACE A [BLANK), TRACE B [MAX]), I-1 6, TRACE B

[CLEAR-WRITE], lsAVEJ 5, m).

129.

Press SWEEP CRINGLE] on the spectrum analyzer and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off. As the spectrum analyzer tunes from 12.5 GHz to 18.6 GHz, the spectrum analyzer frequency response should be displayed as

TRACE B.


Note

21. Frequency Response Adjustments

130.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (j-1 4, (HOLD) and repeat steps 126 through 128 as necessary.

131.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (ml 5 and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn

Off.

132.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (mj 4, m (GHz) / and use the DATA knob to gradually change the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from 32, maximizing the level of the TRACE A displayed signal responses at the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform.


133.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in L-16, m IGHz) / and enter in the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from step 132.

Press SWEEP (SINGLE_) and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off.

134.


PRESELECTOR DAC setting of 30 and 34.

135.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B (VIEW), MARKER

(m) and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform. Then, press MARKER

[n, MARKER SPEAK

SEARCH


Band D total peak-to-peak deviation: dB

136.

On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER [NORMAL] and note the frequency of the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Band D highest point: GHz

137.

Repeat steps 130 through 136 as necessary until the total peak-to-peak deviation of the TRACE B waveform is less than

4.40 dB. See the TRACE B reference waveform to indicate which portions of the frequency response waveform require relative adjustment.

138.

139.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (jj) 4, IHOLD).

On the synthesized sweeper, press Icw) and enter the frequency recorded in step 136, positioning the displayed TRACE A signal response at the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.



(

PEAK

SEARCH] to position a marker at the peak of the displayed

TRACE A signal response. Adjust 17-turn (Band D Step Gain) potentiometer A6AlOR27 GD to adjust the amplitude of the marker to -10.00 dBm + (l/2 of Band D total peak-to-peak deviation) fO.O1 dB. Adjust A6AlOR27 GD counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level.



Note



2747A or above), and A6AlOR27 GD does not have sufficient range, change the value of factory-select component A6AlOR88. Increase the value of A6AlOR89 to decrease the signal level, and decrease the value of A6AlOR89 to increase the signal level. See Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6AlOR89, and Table 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR89.

Band E, 18.6 GHz to

141. On the spectrum analyzer, key in C-J, LSHIFT) [PRESEL PEAK]

22 GHz

= , (-1 TRACE A (MAX] b. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.6 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 GHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -7 dBm

LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dB/DIV

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ms

142. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw 20.0 GHz.

Note


INPUT from step 55.

143. Adjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R82 E and

17-turn (YTX Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR9 VE for maximum signal amplitude at 20.0 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6A12R82 E and A6AlOR95

VE.

144. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER @?ZiZiJ,

MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

] to position a marker at the peak of the displayed 20.0 GHz signal. Adjust Ill-turn (Band E Step

Gain) potentiometer A6AlOR29 GE as necessary to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 20.0 GHz marker to -10.00 dBm fO.10 dB. Adjust A6AlOR29 GE counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level.

If A6AlOR29 GE does not have sufficient range, adjust the amplitude of the displayed 20.0 GHz marker as close as possible to -10.00 dBm. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR29

GE.

145. On the spectrum analyzer, key in LOG SCALE C ENTER dB/Dw] 2 dB, MARKER (NORMAL).

146. Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R82 E as necessary to maximize the amplitude of the 20.0 GHz signal on the spectrum analyzer display.


START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18.6 GHz

STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.0 GHz

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .XTAL


Note


SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ms

SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONT


(SWEEP TIME) 2s, MARKER (OFF), I=]. As the spectrum analyzer completes each sweep, a series of approximately 23 new responses should be displayed. The peaks of these responses coarsely outline the spectrum analyzer frequency response.

149. Gradually adjust (Band E Lower Segment) A6AllR60 El and

(Band E Upper Segment) A6AllR78 E2 for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses. The adjustments are interactive, with A6AllR60 El having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals below mid-band (approximately 20.3 GHz), and A6AllR78 E2 having the most effect on the level of the displayed signals above mid-band. Adjust A6AllR60 El counterclockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses below mid-band. Adjust A6AllR78 E2 clockwise to increase the level of the displayed signal responses above mid-band. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6AllR60 El and

A6Al lR78 E2.

If the displayed signals at the high end of the band drop off by more than 3-4 dB, center A6AllR78 E2 and proceed to step 150.


SWEEP TIME

) 5s, LOG SCALE

C

ENTER

dB/DIv] 1 dB, TRACE B (VIEW), IsAvE_) 4, C-1 2s,

TRACE B [BLANK), (HOLD].

151. Readjust 17-turn (YTX Diode Bias) potentiometer A6AlOR95 VE to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 18.6 GHz to 22.0 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

Then, adjust A6AlOR95 VE clockwise until signal responses at the high end of the band drop in amplitude by approximately 1.5

dB.

152. Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R82 E as necessary to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses from 18.6 GHz to 22.0 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display. If the displayed signal responses peak at widely different settings of A6A12R82 E, perform the following steps: a. Adjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometers A6AlOR70 LB4 and A6AlOR76 LR4 fully counterclockwise if they have not already been so adjusted; do not readjust A6A12R40 LBl,

A6AlOR41 LB2, A6AlOR42 LB3, A6AlOR31 LRl, A6A610R34

LR2, or A6AlOR37 LR3.

b. Readjust 22-turn (IF Offset) potentiometer A6A12R82 E as necessary to maximize the overall level of the displayed signal responses at the low end of the band.

c. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER (NORMAL) and position the marker at the point in the band where the signal responses begin to fall off from their maximum value.

d. Readjust 22-turn (YTX Linearity) potentiometer A6AlOR70

LB4 clockwise until the displayed signal responses at the high end of the band begin to drop. Continue to adjust A6AlOR70

LB4 until the rolloff point aligns with the position of the


2 1. Frequency Response Adjustments marker. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of A6AlOR70 LB4 and A6AlOR76 LR4.


LR4 clockwise to maximize the displayed signal responses at the high end of the band.

f. Readjust A6A12R82 E and A6AlOR76 LR4 as necessary to maximize the displayed signal responses from 18.6 GHz to

22.0 GHz on the spectrum analyzer display.

153.

Gradually readjust (Band E Lower Segment) A6AllR60 El and (Band E Upper Segment) A6AllR78 E2 as necessary for maximum flatness of the displayed signal responses.

154.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in SWEEP @KEEJ (

SWEEP TIME

]

150s TRACE A (BLANJ TRACE B CMAX], ISAVE) 6, TRACE B

[CLEAR-WRITE], ISAVE) 5, LHOLD).

155.

Press SWEEP cm] on the spectrum analyzer and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off. As the spectrum analyzer tunes from 18.6 GHz to 22.0 GHz, the spectrum analyzer frequency response should be displayed as

TRACE B.

156.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (‘14, IHOLD) and repeat steps 152 through 154 as necessary.

157.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in (jjj 5 and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn

Off.

158.

159.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in [jJ 4, m [GHz) / and use the DATA knob to gradually change the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from 32, maximizing the level of the TRACE A displayed signal responses at the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform.


On the spectrum analyzer, key in (j-1 6, [m] @ / and enter in the PRESELECTOR DAC setting from step 158.

Press SWEEP (SINGLE) and wait for the sweep to complete (150 seconds) and the SWEEP LED to turn off.

160.



161.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in TRACE B (VIEW), MARKER

@ZiZZYQ and use the DATA knob to position a marker on the lowest point on the TRACE B waveform. Then, press MARKER

(ZJ, MARKER (

PEAK SEARCH


Band E total peak-to-peak deviation: dB

162.

On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER (j-1 and note the frequency of the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.

Band E highest point: GHz

163.

Repeat steps 156 through 162 if necessary until the total peak-to-peak deviation of the TRACE B waveform is less than


Note

Note

21. Frequency Response Adjustments

4.40 dB from 18.6 GHz to 20.0 GHz, and 6.00 dB from 20.0 GHz to 22.0 GHz. See the TRACE B reference waveform to indicate which portions of the frequency response waveform require relative adjustment.

164. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (jjj 4, (HOLD).

165. On the synthesized sweeper, press Icw] and enter the frequency recorded in step 163, positioning the displayed TRACE A signal response at the highest point on the TRACE B waveform.


166. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER C-1, MARKER

CPEAK

SEARCH

] to position a marker at the peak of the displayed

TRACE A signal response. Adjust 17-turn (Band E Step Gain) potentiometer A6AlOR29 GE to adjust the amplitude of the marker to -10.00 dBm + (l/2 of Band E total peak-to-peak deviation) fO.O1 dB. Adjust A6AlOR29 GE counterclockwise to increase the signal level, and clockwise to decrease the signal level.

IF A6AlO Miscellaneous Bias/Relay Driver Assembly is HP P/N


2747A or above), and A6AlOR29 GE does not have sufficient range, change the value of factory-select component A6AlOR90. Increase the value of A6AlOR90 to decrease the signal level, and decrease the value of A6AlOR90 to increase the signal level. See ‘Iable 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6AlOR90, and ‘Iable 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR90.

YTX Delay

Compensation, 2.0

GHz - 22 GHz

Note

YTX Delay Compensation adjustments A6A12R25 D2, A6A12R24 D3, and factory-select components A6A12C1, A6A12C2, A6A12Cl1, and A6A12C23 affect YTX/YTO dynamic tracking in all preselected frequency bands (Bands B, C, D, and E, 2 GHz - 22 GHz) for

(

SWEEP TIME

) settings faster than approximately Is/frequency band.

Note

YTX Delay Compensation adjustment A6A12R26 Dl is used in

HP 85660A RF Sections only, and has no effect in HP 85660B RF

Sections (A6A12C3 is not installed in the HP 85660B). YTX Delay

Compensation adjustments A6A12R25 D2 and A6A12R24 D3 have very little effect in HP 85660B RF Sections, and are usually set near the counterclockwise end of their adjustment range.

167. On the spectrum analyzer, key in (2--221, (WI (PRESEL PEAK ) controls as follows:

START FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12.5 GHz



STOP FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6 GHz

RES BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz


LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 dB/DIV

SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 set

168. On the synthesized sweeper, key in Icw] 13.1 GHz.

Note


INPUT from step 55.

169.

If the AllA YT.0, A6A8 YTX, or A6A12 YTX Driver

Assembly have been repaired or replaced, adjust (YTX Delay

Compensation) potentiometers A6A12R25 D2 and A6A12R24 D3

45” clockwise from fully counterclockwise.

170.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

), (SH’FT)

IGHz)/.

171.

On the spectrum analyzer, press (PRESEL PEAK ) and wait for the preselector peaking routine to complete. Record the Preselector

DAC value in the 1 second SWEEP TIME column of ‘lhble 3-15.

‘lhble 3-15.

Preselector Delay Compensation DAC Values

1

Trial Number

Preselector DAC Value

5

Average Value

172.

Repeat step 171 to record four additional Preselector DAC value entries in the 1s SWEEP TIME column of ‘Iable 3-15.

173.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in SWEEP TIME (Z), MARKER

( PEAK SEARCH_).

174.

On the spectrum analyzer, press (PRESEL PEAK] and wait for the preselector peaking routine to complete. Record the Preselector

DAC value in the m SWEEP TIME column of ‘Ihble 3-15.

175.

Repeat step 174 to record four additional Preselector DAC value entries in the IAUTO) SWEEP TIME column of Table 3-15.

176.

Calculate the average Preselector DAC value for the 1 second

SWEEP TIME and (AUTO) SWEEP TIME settings, and enter them in ‘Iable 3-15. Subtract the average Preselector DAC value for 1 second SWEEP TIME from the value for (AUTO] SWEEP TIME, and record the difference in the following line: preselector DAC value difference:



177. If the Preselector DAC value difference recorded in step 176 is greater than f0.5, remove the A6A12 YTX Driver Assembly from the RF Section and determine the current values of factory-select components A6A12C1, A6A12C2, A6A12Cl1, and

A6A12C23. Then, refer to Table 3-16 to determine the final capacitor values to install for A6A12C1, A6A12C2, A6A12Cl1, and A6A12C23. Find the line in the table that corresponds to the current values of the four factory-select capacitors

(A6A12Cl and A6A12C2 are in parallel, and A6A12Cll and

A6A12C23 are in parallel). Add the difference recorded in step

176 to the line number corresponding to the current values to determine the line number of the final capacitor values to install for A6A12C1, A6A12C2, A6A12Cl1, and A6A12C23. See ‘Ihble

3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the locations of

A6A12C1, A6A12C2, A6A12Cl1, and A6A12C23.

For example, if the average Preselector DAC value for [AUTO)

SWEEP TIME is 35.4 and the average value for [

SWEEP TIME

)

1s is 32.0, the difference recorded in step 177 is +3.4. Assume that the currently installed value of A6A12Cl is 0.33 pF, the value of A6A12Cll is 0.22 PF, and that A6A12C2, A6A12C3, and A6A12C23 are not installed. These values correspond to line 0 of ‘lkble 3-16. The final capacitor values are listed in line

3, determined by adding the difference of +3.4 to line number

0. The value of A6A12Cl is correct already, and A6A12Cll is changed to a 0.1 ,QF capacitor.

‘lhble 3-16.

A6A12 YTX Driver Assembly Fhctory-Select

Capacitor Values

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 8

- 7

- 6

- 5

0

+l

+2

+3

+4

+5

+6

+7

+8

Line

T

Capacitor Value

A6A12Cl A6A12C2 A6A12Cll

0.33

0.33

0.22

0.22

0.22

0.22

0.33

0.33

0.33

0.22

open open

0.22

0.22

0.22

0.33

open 0.22

0.33

0.33

open open

0.22

0.22

0.33

0.33

0.33

0.33

0.15

open open open open open

0.22

0.22

0.15

0.10

0.22

0.33

open open open open open open open open

0.22

0.22

0.15

5 (PI

A6A12C23

0.33

0.22

0.22

0.33

0.33

0.22

0.15

0.10

open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open open

A6A12C3 open open open open open open open open

1


Note


LOG SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB/DIV

187. Press MARKER (-1 and adjust (IF Step Gain) potentiometer

A6AlOR81 GF for a marker indication of 0.00 dBm fO.O1 dB.



2747A or above), and A6AlOR81 GF does not have sufficient range, change the value of factory-select component A6AlOR91. Increase the value of A6AlOR91 to decrease the signal level, and decrease the value of A6AlOR91 to increase the signal level. See Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for A6AlOR91, and ‘Ihble 3-4 for HP part numbers. See Figure 3-90 for the location of A6AlOR91.

188.

Disconnect the low-loss microwave test cable from the spectrum analyzer front panel 321.4 MHz IF INPUT connector. Reconnect the jumper cable between the spectrum analyzer front panel

32 1.4 MHz IF INPUT and IF OUTPUT connectors.

189.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in m Q) u, 6 Hz, m

( REFERENCE LEVEL ) z -12 dBm.

190.

In the RF Section, disconnect cable 84 (gray/yellow) from

A6A12Jl and cable 82 (gray/red) from A6A12J2. Replace the cover to the A6 RF Module, and then reconnect cable 84

(gray/yellow) to A6A12Jl and cable 82 (gray/red) to A6A12J2.

191.

Remove the jumper between A12TP2 and A12TP3 (LOCK

INDICATOR DISABLE) on the Al2 Front Panel Interface

Assembly in the RF Section.

192.

Replace the RF Section bottom cover.


22.

Analog-To-Digital

Converter

Adjustments

Reference

A3A8 Analog-to-Digital Converter

Description

The Analog-to-Digital Ramp Converter is adjusted at zero and full-scale by injecting a 0 V dc input and + 10 V dc input and adjusting the OFFS and GAIN controls until the ramp output at A3A8TPll toggles high to low. This sets the horizontal end points for the CRT trace display; when the sweep ramp input is at 0 V dc (the left graticule edge), trace position 1 is set, and when the sweep ramp input is at + 10 V dc (the right graticule edge), trace position 1000 is set.

This procedure requires a + 10 V dc source which is stable and noise-free. A simple supply circuit which can be built with common components is illustrated in Figure 3-108. If these components are unavailable, the alternate procedure provided below (using only the digital voltmeter) can then be used.

LW-NO I SE

D C S U P P L Y

--l

D I G I T A L VOLTWTER

Equipment

Figure 3-100. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments Setup

Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 545OlA


Low-Noise DC Supply (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Figure 3-108

1O:l Divider Probe, 10 MG/7.5 pF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 10432A


Procedure

1. Position spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure 3-100 and remove IF-Display Section top cover.

2. Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press C-1.

3. Procedure using Low-Noise DC Supply is illustrated in Figure 3-108.

a. Key in (-1 TRACE A and SWEEP (-1.

b. Disconnect cable 0 (black) from sweep ramp input A3A8Jl.

c. Short A3A8TP4 to A3A8TP5 or connect SMB snap-on short to

A3A8Jl.

22. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments d. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1, 10: 1 probe to A3A8TPll and ground the probe ground to the A3 section’s card cage.

e. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:

Press (CHAN)

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..lO.l

amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 V coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc

Press (TRIG)

EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . auto, edge source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Channell

Press (TlME) time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5 @div

Press Display connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on

Press (SHOW) f. Adjust A3A8R6 OFFS for a square wave displayed on the oscilloscope. The square wave sould be approximately 4 V,,.


g. Remove short from A3ASTP4 and A3A8TP5 or disconnect the

SMB snap-on short from A3A8Jl.

h. Press CO-2.5).

i. Press MARKER @ZZZZ), 1498 (MHz), and (=I (SINGLE) “.

j. Connect DVM to A3A8TP5 and ground to A3A8TP4. Set DVM for V dc.

k. Connect output of the Low-Noise DC Supply to A3A8Jl. Adjust the Low-Noise DC Supply for DVM indication of + 10.000

f.OOlV dc.

1. Adjust A3A8R5 GAIN for a square wave displayed on the oscilloscope. The square wave sould be approximately 4 V,+,.


m. Disconnect low-noise dc supply from A3A8Jl. Reconnect 0 cable to A3A8J 1.


22. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments

A3A8

A N A L O G - T O - D I G I T A L C O N V E R T E R

( B e n e a t h C o v e r )

TPll G::N T P 4 T P 5

A3A8

GA,,,

Figure 3-101.

Location of Analog-lb-Digital Converter Adjustments

Alternate Procedure

4 .

Procedure without using Low-Noise DC Supply: a.

Press (2-22].

b.

Key in TRACE A ljZZZ] and SWEEP [w).

C.

Disconnect cable 0 (black) from sweep ramp input A3ASJl.

d.

Short A3ASTP4 to A3ASTP5 or connect SMB snap-on short to

A3ASJl.

e.

Connect DVM to A3ASTPll and ground to A3ASTP4. Set DVM for V ac.

f.

Adjust A3ASR6 OFFS until the level at A3ASTPll is at a maximum ac voltage as indicated by the DVM (approximately

2.0 V ac). See Figure 3-101 for location of adjustment.

g.

Remove short from A3ASTP4 and A3ASTP5. Reconnect cable 0

(black) to A3ASJl.

h.

Press [O-2.5].

i.

Connect DVM to A3ASTP5 and ground to A3ASTP4. Set DVM for V dc.

i Press SWEEP Cm]. Note DVM reading at end of the sweep.

The voltage will begin to drift immediately after the sweep ends. Therefore, the first indication after the sweep ends is the valid indication. It may be helpful to press Cm) several times to ensure a valid indication at the end of the sweep.

k.

If DVM indication is + 10.020 f0.005 V dc at the end of the sweep, no further adjustment is necessary. Otherwise, adjust

A3ASR5 GAIN and repeat step until the voltage at the end of the sweep is + 10.020 f0.005 V dc.


23. Track and Hold Adjustments

23. Track and Hold

Adjustments

Reference

A3A9 Track and Hold

Description

The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT. The spectrum analyzer is placed in zero frequency span to produce a dc level output from the IF-Video section and this dc level is regulated by adjusting the reference level. The Offsets and Gains on the Track and Hold assembly are adjusted for proper levels using a DVM.

Equipment

Figure 3-102. Track and Hold Adjustments Setup

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 345612

Procedure

1 .

Place spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure 3-102 with

IF-Display Section top cover and A3 Digital Storage covers removed.

2.

Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press C-1.

3.


4.

Connect DVM to A3A9TP3 and ground to A3A9TPl.

5.

Key in [ CENTER FREQUENCY ) 100 MHz, ( FREQUENCY SPAN ] 0 Hz.

6.

Disconnect cable 7 (violet) from A4AlJl.

7.

Short A3A9TPl to A3A9TP3, or use an SMB snap-on short to

A3A9Jl. DVM indication should be 0.000 fO.OO1 V dc.

8.

Key in Cm), TRACE A (

CLEAR

-

WRITE

), MARKER (j-j,

MARKER Ln], SWEEP CCONT];(SHIFT) TRACE A ljjj e.

9.

Adjust A3A9R59 (T/H) OFS until MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between .OO

and .lO dB. See Figure 3-103 for location of adjustment.



A3A9

T R A C K A N D H O L D

( B e n e a t h C o v e r )


A3A9

Figure 3-103. Location of Track and Hold Adjustments

10. Key in [m) TRACE A (jj) b.

11. Adjust A3A9R44 OFFS POS until MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between .OO

and .lO dB.

12. Key in ISHIFT_) TRACE A (VIEW) d.

13. Adjust A3A9R36 OFS NEG until MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between .OO

and .lO dB.

14. Key in (SHIFT) TRACE A (jj) e.

15. Remove short from between A3A9TPl and A3A9TP3 or remove the SMB short from A3A9Jl. Reconnect cable 7 (violet) to

A4AlJl.

16. Connect the DVM to A4AlTP3. Connect DVM’s ground to the IF section’s casting.

17. Press (

REFERENCE LEVEL

] and adjust DATA knob and front-panel

AMPTD CAL adjust for a DVM indication of +2.000 fO.OO1 V dc at A4AlTP3.

18. Disconnect DVM from instrument.

19. Key in Cm), TRACE A CCLEAR-WRITE], MARKER Cj),

MARKER a], SWEEP ICONT).

20. Adjust A3A9R57 T/II GAIN for GAIN for MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation of 100 fO.l dB.

21. KeyinmTRACEA(jNIAX)b.

22. Adjust A3A9R39 GPOS for MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation of 100 fO.l dB.

23. Key in m TRACE A IVIEW) d.

24. Adjust A3A9R52 GNEG for MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation of 100 f0.1 dB.




24. Digital Storage

Display

Adjustments

Reference

Description

A3A 1 Trigger

A3A2 Intensity Control

A3A3 Line Generator

First, preliminary CRT graticule adjustments are performed to position the graticule on the CRT. These preliminary adjustments assume that repair has been performed on the associated circuitry. If no repair has been performed on the assemblies listed under REFERENCE, the preliminary adjustments are not necessary.

Next, the Sample and Hold Balance adjustments are performed. The horizontal and vertical Offset and Gain adjustments are performed, then the final CRT graticule adjustments are performed.

Last, the CRT annotation adjustments are performed to place the CRT annotation in proper location with respect to the CRT graticule.

Equipment

Procedure

Figure 3-104. Digital Storage Display Adjustments Setup

Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP 3456A

Digitizing Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 54501A

10: 1 Divider Probe, 10 MW7.5 pF (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . HP lOA32A

1. Place spectrum analyzer upright as shown in Figure 3-104 with IF-Display Section top cover and A3 Digital Storage cover removed.

2. Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON and press (2-22)


24. Digital Storage Display Adjustments

Preliminary Graticule

3. Press TRACE A @KiiKJ

Adjustments

4. Adjust A3A3R4 X GAIN and A3A3R5 Y GAIN to place graticule information completely on CRT. See Figure 3-105 for location of adjustment.

5. Adjust A3A2R12 LL THRESH fully clockwise. See Figure 3-105 for location of adjustment.

A3A1

T R I G G E R

&,?A?

I N T E N S I T Y

C O N T R O L

A3A3

L I NE

G E N E R A T O R

\ \ \ z z

R12

L L T H R E S H

R 5 1

Y S & H B A L

R 5 0

X S & Ii BAL

R 3 4

S W P O F F S E T

A3Al

Figure 3-105.

Location of Digital Storage Display Adjustments

6. Adjust A3A3R6 XLL so that horizontal graticule lines just meet the vertical graticule lines at the left and right sides of the graticule. See Figure 3-105 for location of adjustment.

7. Adjust A3A3R9 YLL so that vertical graticule lines just meet the horizontal graticule lines at the top and bottom of the graticule.


8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until horizontal and vertical lines are adjusted so that they meet the edges of the graticule but do not overshoot.

9. Adjust A3A2R12 LL THRESH fully counterclockwise.

10. Adjust A3A3R7 XSL so that horizontal graticule lines just meet the vertical graticule lines at the left and right sides of the graticule.



11.

Adjust A3A3R8 YSL so that the vertical graticule lines just meet the horizontal graticule lines at the top and bottom of the graticule.

12.

Repeat steps 10 and 11 until horizontal and vertical graticule lines are adjusted so that they meet at the edges of the graticule but do not overshoot.

Sample and Hold 13.

Balance Adjustments 14.


Place A3A3 Line Generator on extender boards.

15.

Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON. Press C2-221.

16.

Key in (SHIFT) 0 Z (RECORDER LOWER LEFT) 0 IHz). Press (SHIFT)

0 1 (RECORDER UPPER RIGHT) 1028 IHL).

17.

Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:

Press ICHANl

Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on

probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1O:l amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 mV/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..O V coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc

Channel 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1O:l amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 V/div offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OV

coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc

Press (TRIG) source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel 4 level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 mV, edge

Press CTlME] time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ns/div delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -400 ns

Press [DISPLAY) connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on

Press L-1

18.

Adjust A3A2R50 X S&H BAL for minimum dc offset between the level of the signal inside the two pulses to the signal level outside the two pulses. Figure 3-106 shows a properly adjusted waveform. Figure 3-107 shows the waveform before adjustment.

Refer to Figure 3-105 for location of adjustment.



1 5 0 . 0 nV/div offset: 0 . 0 0 0 v

10.00 : I dc i ..__...~~~....... -.- _.._.._.__._.....__. - ._._........._._ i ..~.....-” . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . ” .._.......,,.,..,.,.,,,,,.,,,,.,,,,..,.,,,,,,,.,... *

- 2 . 9 0 0 0 0 us - 4 0 0 . 0 0 0 ns

5 0 0 ns/div

2 . 1 0 0 0 0 us

4 f 3 0 0 . 5 IV

Figure 3-106. Sample and Hold Balance Adjustment Waveforms hf r u n n i n g

!

!

!

: ._.. .._. -.__- ._......._.................................~..~.............. _...~ _.._........................., - .

..~....... - .

.f

.f

.+

-: j.

i

.I.

/..p

..!

; r--“c-$---l

1

5 0 . 0 W/div offset: 0 . 0 0 0 v

10.00 : I dc

.i...i

_I.

..-...-...........-.-....-...-................- z ._.._....... - ._....._..............-.--..-........-............................ - _.__....... i

- 2 . 9 0 0 0 0 us - 4 0 0 . 0 0 0 ns

5 0 0 ns/div

2 . 1 0 0 0 0 us

I

4 f 300.5 l l

Figure 3-107. Waveform Before Adjustment

19. Connect the oscilloscope Channel 1 probe to A3A3TP7.

20. Adjust A3A2R51 Y S&H BAL for minimum dc offset between the level of the signal inside the two pulses to the signal level outside the two pulses.

21. Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to STANDBY.

22. Reinstall A3A3 Line Generator in spectrum analyzer without extender boards.

23. Set spectrum analyzer LINE switch to ON.



X and Y Offset and 24.

Gain Adjustments

25.

Press (2-22].

Key in (

FREQUENCY SPAN

] 0 Hz, [

SWEEP TIME

] 100 ps.

26.

Disconnect cable 9 (white) from A3A9J2 and connect to A3A2J2

LG/FS test connector on A3A2 Intensity Control; the other end of the cable remains connect connected to A3A2Jl.

27.

Select TRIGGER (VIDEO) and adjust front-panel LEVEL control for a stable display on instrument CRT.

28.

Adjust A3AlR34 SWP OFFSET so that the signal trace begins at the left edge graticule line. Refer to Figure 3-105 for location of adjustment.

29.

Adjust A3A3R4 X GAIN for twenty cycles displayed on the

CRT graticule. This may be made easier by adjusting A3AlR34

SWP OFFSET so that the first peak is centered on the left edge graticule line, then adjusting A3A3R4 X GAIN for two cycles per division with the twenty-first cycle being centered on the right edge graticule line. A3AlR34 SWP OFFSET must then be readjusted so that the trace begins at the left edge graticule line.

See Figure 3-105. for location of adjustment.

30.

Remove the cable 9 (white) from A3A2J2 LG/FS test connector and reconnect to A3A9J2.

31.

Remove cable 7 (violet) from A4AlJl. Short A3A9TPl to

A3A9TP3 or connect an SMB snap-on short to A3A9Jl.

32.

33.

Connect DVM to A3A9TP3 and DVM ground to A3A9TPl.

Press LIN pushbutton.

34.

DVM indication should be 0.000 f0.002 V dc.

35.

36.

Adjust A3A3R43 YOS to align the bottom graticule line with the fast sweep signal trace.

Remove the short between A3A9TPl and A3A9TP3 (or the SMB snap-on short) and reconnect cable 7 (violet) to A4AlJl.

37.

Key in [

CENTER FREQUENCY

) 100 MHz. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF

INPUT. Press LOG [ ENTER dB/DIv) 10 dB.

38.

Connect the DVM to A4AlTP3 and the DVM ground to the IF casting.

39.

Press (

REFERENCE LEVEL

) and adjust DATA knob and the frontpanel

AMPTD CAL adjust for DVM indication of +2.000 f0.002 V dc.

40.

Adjust A3A3R5 Y GAIN to align the top graticule line with the fast sweep signal trace.



Final Graticule

41. Press @??ZiZJ, TRACE A ~~~.

Adjustments

42. Set A3A2R12 LL THRESH fully clockwise.

43. Adjust A3A3R6 XLL and A3A3R9 YLL to align horizontal and vertical lines so that each line meets the edge line (right, left, top, or bottom) but does not overshoot.

44. Adjust A3A2R12 LL THRESH fully counterclockwise.

45. Adjust A3A3R7 XSL and A3A348 YSL to align horizontal and vertical graticule lines so that each line meets the edge line (right, left, top, or bottom) but does not overshoot.

46. Adjust A3A2R12 LL THRESH clockwise until all graticule lines switch over to long lines. This is indicated by a noticeable increase in graticule line intensity. (All graticule lines should increase in intensity.)

X and Y Expand

47. Press (j2j.

Adjustments

48. Key in MARKER (m].

49. Adjust A3A3Rl X EXP to center the letter “F” in “REF” (CRT annotation in upper left corner of display) over the left edge graticule line.

50. Adjust A3A3R2 Y EXP to align the remainder of the CRT annotation so that the upper annotation (MARKER data) is above the top graticule line and the lower annotation (START and STOP data) is below the bottom graticule line. Adjust for equal spacing above and below the graticule pattern.


Low-Noise DC

SUPPlY

The Low-Noise DC Supply shown in Figure 3-108 can be constructed using the parts listed in ‘Ihble 3-17.

O U T P U T

OVdc, +2Vdc o r +10 V d c

Figure 3-108. Low-Noise DC Supply

Sl

Ul

VRl

VR2

R5

R6

R7

R8

Rl

R2

R3

R4

‘hble 3-17. Parts for Low-Noise DC Supply

-

Reference/Designation HP Fart Number Description

Cl 0160-2055

9

CAPACITOR FXD .Ol pf

Jl 1250-0083 1 CONNECTOR BNC

0698-0083

0757-0442

0757-0442

0757-0465

0757-0290

8

9

9

6

5

RESISTOR FXD 1.96K 1% .125W

RESISTOR FXD 10K 1% .125W


RESISTOR FXD 1OOK 1% .125W

2100-2733

0757-0280

0757-0280

6

3

3

RESISTOR FXD 6.19 K 1% .125W

RESISTOR VARIABLE 50K 20%



3101-1792

1826-0092

1902-0049

1902-0049

8

3

2

SWITCH TOGGLE, 3-POSITION

IC DUAL OP-AMP

DIODE BREAKDOWN 6.19V

RESISTOR FXD 1.96K 1% .125W


Cm&al Filter

Bypass Network

Configuration

Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration

The Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration shown in

Figure 3-109 can be constructed using the parts listed in Table 3-18 and Table 3-19. Table 3-18 list the parts required for the construction of 21.4 MHz IF crystal-filter bypass networks used with the A4A4 and A4A8 assemblies. Two 21.4 MHz bypass networks are required.

‘Iable 3-19 list the parts required for the construction of 3 MHz IF crystal-filter bypass networks used with the A4A7 assembly. Four 3

MHz bypass networks are required.

2 1 . 4 M H z

BYPASS CAPAC I TOR

CA,PP; ‘&OR RE;;;y;

RECEPTACLES

Figure 3-109. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configurations

‘Ihble 3-18.

Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for

A4A4 and A4A8 (21.4 MHz)

I

Part 1 Value Qty. 1 HP Fort Number

Resistor 31.69

2 0698-7200

Capacitor 100 pF 2

Capacitor 910 pF 2

0160-4801

0160-6146

Receptacle 4 1251-3720

‘0ble 3-19.

Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for

A4A7 (3MEz)

I Part

1 Value 1 Qty. 1 HP Fart Number I

Resistor 2.79

4 0683-0275

Capacitor 0.047 PF 4

Receptacle 8

0170-0040

1251-3720


Option 462

Introduction

4

This chapter contains modified performance tests and adjustment procedures for Option 462 instruments. When working on Option

462 instruments, substitute the procedures in this chapter for the standard versions contained in chapters two and three. For earlier

Option 462 instruments (HP 85662A serial prefixes below 3341A) in which impulse bandwidths are specified, use the tests and adjustment under “Impulse Bandwidths”.The procedures included in this chapter are listed below:

6 dB Bandwidths:

Performance Tests

Test 3, 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . 4-2

Test 4, 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test . . . . . . .4-10


Adjustment 9, 6 dB Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23

Impulse Bandwidths:

Performance Tests

Test 3, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test . . .4-4

Test 4, Impulse and Resolution Selectivity Test . . . . . . .4-13

Test 5, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching

Uncertainty Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4- 16


Adjustment 9, Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments.. . . .4-26

Option 462 4-l

3. 6 dB Resolution

Bandwidth

Accuracy ‘I&t

Related Adjustment

Specification

6 dB Bandwidth Adjustments f20%, 3 MHz bandwidth f lO%, 30 Hz to 1 MHz bandwidths

+ 50%, -0%, 10 Hz bandwidth

30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidth accuracy figures only applicable 590%

Relative Humidity, 140” C .

Description

Equipment

Procedure

The 6 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting is measured with the MARKER function to determine bandwidth accuracy. The CAL OUTPUT is used for a stable signal source.

None required

1.

Press (2).

2.


3.

Key in spectrum analyzer settings as follows:

[

CENTER FREQUENCY

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHZ

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MHz km, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 MHz

[

REFERENCE

LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 dBm

4.

Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press CsHlFT), [my (resolution bandwidth) for units in dBm.

5.

Adjust [ REFERENCE LEVEL ) to position peak of signal trace at (or just below) reference level (top) graticule line. Press SWEEP @iYZZJ

6.

Press MARKER C-1 and place marker at peak of signal trace with DATA knob. Press MARKER la] and position movable marker

6 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive-going edge of the signal trace (the MARKER A amplitude readout should be

-6.00 dB f0.05 dB). It may be necessary to press SWEEP (m) and adjust ( CENTER FREQUENCY _) to center trace on screen.

7.

Press MARKER La] and position movable marker 6 dB down from the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the trace (the

MARKER Aamplitude readout should be .OO dB f0.05 dB). The 6 dB bandwidth is given by the MARKER A frequency readout. (See

Figure 4-l.) Record this value in Table 4-l.

4-2 Option 462

3. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

MKR a 3.103 MHZ pEEi--

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

[

FREQUENCY SPAN

]

TI :

MARKER

A

Readout of 6 dB Bandwidth 1

Min Actual

5 MHz 2.400 MHz

2 MHz 900 kHz

500 kHz 270.0 kHz

200 kHz 90.0 kHz

50 kHz 27.00 kHz

20 kHz 9.00 kHz

5 kHz 2.700 kHz

2 kHz 900 Hz

500 Hz 270 Hz

200 Hz 90 Hz

100 Hz 27.0 Hz

100 Hz 10.0 Hz

3.600 MHz

1.100 MHz

330.0 kHz

110.0 kHz

33.00 kHz

11.00 kHz

3.300 kHz

1.100 kHz

330 Hz

110 Hz

33.0 Hz

15.0 Hz

Option 462 4-3

3. Impulse and

Resolution

Bandwidth

Accuracy T&t

Related Adjustment

Specification

Description

Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments f20%, 3 MHz bandwidth f 1096, 1 MHz to 1 kHz bandwidths

-0, +50%, 300 Hz to 10 Hz (6 dB bandwidths)

A frequency synthesizer and pulse/function generator are used to input pulses to the spectrum analyzer. The amplitude of the pulses is measured, and the impulse bandwidths are calculated for each impulse bandwidth from 3 MHz to 1 kHz. The 6 dB resolution bandwidths are then measured using the spectrum analyzer (JiiKK] function. The CAL OUTPUT signal is used as a stable signal source to measure the 6 dB resolution bandwidths.


PULSE/FUNCTION

GENERATOR

SYNTHES I ZEA

LEVEL GENERATOR

I

I

OUTPUT

Equipment

Figure 4-2. Impulse Bandwidth Test Setup


Pulse/Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 8116A

4.4 Option 462

Procedure

Note

3. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

1. Set the frequency synthesizer for a 15 MHz, + 13 dBm output.

Connect the output of the frequency synthesizer to the EXT

INPUT of the pulse/function generator.

2. Set the pulse/function generator controls as follows:

MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRIG

EXT INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . positive-going

EXT INPUT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . midrange

OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pulse

LOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ov

HIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.4V

WIDTH (WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ns

DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off

The spectrum analyzer [

REFERENCE LEVEL

] setting should remain at

0 dBm throughout steps 4 through 38 to prevent possible IF gain compression of the pulse signal.

3.

On the spectrum analyzer, press t2-22) and set the controls as follows:

.......................................

.......................................

15 MHz

12 MHz

.......................................

......................................

..20dB

3 MHz (i)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..3 MHz

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OdBm

4.

On the spectrum analyzer, press m, [ATTEN) [x) D, SWEEP t-1 MARKER ( PEAK SEARCH ). Note the MARKER amplitude for the 3 MHz filter in the HIGH FREQUENCY REPITITION RATE column in ‘Ihble 4-2.

5.

Set the frequency synthesizer CFREQUENCY] to 300 kHz.

6.

On the spectrum analyzer, press [

FREQUENCY SPAN

] 0 Hz,

[

SWEEP TIME

] 0.5 seconds, SWEEP I-1.

7.

Press MARKER [PEAK

SEARCH

). Note the MARKER amplitude for the 3 MHz filter in the LOW FREQUENCY REPITITION RATE column in Table 4-2.

8.

Calculate the Impulse Bandwidth of the 3 MHz Alter using the formula shown below and record the results for the 3 MHz filter in ‘Ihble 4-2.

BW(i) = High frequency rep rate (15 MHz) x (Low frequency reading (step 7)/Hi frequency reading(step 4))

9.

Set the frequency synthesizer ( FREQUENCY ] to 10 MHz.

10.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in [

CENTER FREQUENCY

] 10 MHz,

I-1 1 MHz (i), ~FREQUENCY SPAN ) 4 MHz, SWEEP TIME (AUTO],

SWEEP (SINGLE), MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ). Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4-2

11.

Set the frequency synthesizer [FREQUENCY) to 100 kHz.

12.


FREQUENCY

SPAN_) 0 Hz,

[

SWEEP TIME

) 0.5 seconds, SWEEP (SINGLE_).

Option 462 4-5

3. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

13.

Press MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

). Record the MARKER amplitude in

‘lhble 4-2.

14.

Calculate the impulse bandwidth of the 1 MHz filter using the formula in step 8. Record the result in ‘Iable 4-2.

15.

Set the frequency synthesizer [

FREQUENCY

] to 3 MHz. Set the pulse/function generator WID to 33.3 ns.

16.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in: (jj] 300 kHz (i),

[ CENTER FREQUENCY ] 3

MHZ , [FREQUENCY SPAN ) 1.2 MHZ , SWE E P

TIME IAUTO), SWEEP (SINGLE), MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ]. Record

MARKER amplitude in Table 4-2.

17.

Set the frequency synthesizer [ FREQUENCY ) to 30 kHz. On the spectrum analyzer key in (

FREQUENCY SPAN

] 0 Hz, (

SWEEP TIME

]

0.5 seconds, SWEEP Cm], MARKER @%AK

SEARCH

]. Record

MARKER amplitude in lttble 4-2.

18.

Calculate the Impulse BW of the 300 kHz filter using the formula in step 8. Record in Table 4-2.

19.

Set the frequency synthesizer ~FREQUENCY) to 1 MHz. Set the pulse/function generator WID to 100 ns.

20.

On the spectrum analyzer key in: @GFFBW) lO( 1 kHz (i), (VIDEO)

1 MHz, [

CENTER FREQUENCY

] 1 MHz, I [ FREQUENCY SPAN] 400 kHz,

SWEEP TIME m, SYi JEEP c-1, MARKER SPEAK

SEARCH

].

Record MARKER amplit ude in ‘Ihble 4-2.

21.

Set the frequency synthesizer [ FREQUENCY ] to 10 kHz. On the spectrum analyzer, key in: CFREQUENCY

SPAN

) 0 Hz, [SWEEP

TIME

]

0.5 seconds, SWEEP (j-J, MARKER [

PEAK SEARCH

]. Record

MARKER amplitude in ‘Iable 4-2.

22.

Calculate the Impulse BW of the 100 kHz filter using the formula in step 8. Record in Table 4-2.

23.

Set the frequency synthesizer (

FREQUENCY

] to 300 kHz. Set the pulse/function generator WID to 333 ns.

24.

On the spectrum analyzer, key in: WBW] 30 kHz (i), CVIDEO BWJ

300 kHz, CCENTER FREQUENCYI 300 kHz. ( FREQUENCY &AN] 120 kHz,

SWEEP TIME F, [ PEAK SEARCH ).

Record MARKER amplit ude in Table 4-2.

25.

Set the frequency synthesizer [ FREQUENCY ] to 3 kHz. On the spectrum analyzer, key in: ~FREQUENCY SPAN ] 0 Hz, ( SWEEP TIME )

0.5 seconds, SWEEP @iXZFJ MARKER CPEAK SEARCH ). Record


26.

Calculate the Impulse BW of the 30 kHz filter using the formula in step 8. Record in ‘Ihbie 4-2.

27.

Set the frequency synthesizer [v) to 100 kHz. Set the pulse/function generator WID to 1 p.s.

28.

On the

100 kHz, CCENTER z, [

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 40 kHz,

SWEEP TIME @LF ( PEAK SEARCH ).

Record MARKER an kplitude in Table 4-2.

4-6 Option 462


29. Set the frequency synthesizer (FREQUENCYI to 1 kHz. On the

REQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz, [SWEEP TIME)

0.5 seconds, SWEEP (G FEAK

SEARCH

). Record

MARKER amplitude in Table ! 4-2.

30. Calculate the Impulse BW of the 10 kHz filter using the formula in step 8. Record in Table 4-2.

31. Set the frequency synthesizer (

FREQUENCY

) to 30 kHz. Set the pulse/function generator WID to 3.33 ps.

32. On the spectrum analyzer key in: C-1 3 kHz (i), [Video]

30 kHz, &ENTER

FREQUENCY

) 30 kHz, [

FREQUENCY SPAN

] 12 kHz,

SWEEP TIME [AUTO], SWEEP (j-1, MARKER [ PEAK SEARCH ).

Record MARKER amplitude in ‘Ihble 4-2.

33. Set the frequency synthesizer CFREQUENCY] to 300 Hz. On the spectrum analyzer key in: (

FREQUENCY SPAN

] 0 Hz, @WEEP

TIME

)

0.5 seconds, SWEEP @ZZJ MARKER SPEAK

SEARCH

]. Record


34. Calculate the Impulse BW of the 3 kHz filter using the formula in step 8. Record in ‘Iable 4-2.

35. Set the frequency synthesizer ~FREQUENCY] to 10 kHz. Set the pulse/function generator WID to 10 pus.

36. On the spectrum analyzer key in (BW) 1 kHz (i), ( VIDEO SW] 10 kHz, [CENTER EQUENCY) 10 kHZ, (-SPAN) 4 kHZ SWEEP

TIME L [

PEAK SEARCH

). Record

MARKER ai nplitude in ‘Iable 4-2.

37. Set the frequency synthesizer [FREqUl spectrum analyzer key in:

I

[

FREQUENCY SPAN

) 0 HZ . @WEEP

TIME

]

0.5 seconds, SWEEP (SINGLE, MA .RKER CPEAK SEARCH ]. Record

MARKER amplitude in ‘R able ‘Ihble 4-2.

38. Calculate the Impulse BW of the 1 kHz filter using the formula in step 8. Record in Table 4-2.

39. On the spectrum analyzer, press &!Z%j.

40. Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.


(

CENTER FREQUENCY

) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100 MHZ

.5 MHz

&TEZj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 MHz (i)

[

REFERENCE

LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 dBm

42. On the spectrum analyzer, press SCALE (LIN). Press ISHIFT) RES

BW (AUTO) *, for units in dBm.

43. On the spectrum analyzer, press the [ REFERENCE LEVEL ) and use the


(top graticule line). Press SWEEP (m].

44. On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER C-J, and place the marker at the signal peak with the DATA knob. Press MARKER la] and position the movable marker 6 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace

(the MARKER Ln] amplitude readout should be -6.00 dB f0.05

Option 462 4-7

3. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test dB). ‘lb center the trace on screen, it may be necessary to press

SWEEP (ZGY) and adjust (

CENTER FREQUENCY

).

45. Press MARKER Ia] and position movable marker 6 dB down from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the trace (the

MARKER [nl amplitude readout should be 0.00 dB *O.O5dB). The

6 dB bandwidth is given by the MARKER [nl frequency readout.

(See Figure 4-3.) Record in Table 4-2.

Note

6 dB resolution bandwidth measurements are used in Performance

Test 4, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test.

MKR A 3.103 MHz

0.00 dB u,I

/

/

A I I I I I I I I \

I

CENTER 100.00 MHz

RES BW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz

SPAN 5.00 MHz

SWP 20.0 rnsec

Figure 4-3. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Measurement

46. Select the spectrum analyzer (RESBW_) and [ FREQUENCY SPAN ) settings according to ‘Ihble 4-3. Press SWEEP C-j and measure the 6 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting using the procedure of steps 43 through 45 and record the value in ‘Ihble 4-3. The measured bandwidths for 300 Hz, 100

Hz, 30 Hz, and 10 Hz should fall between the limits shown in the table.

4-6 Option 462

1 MHz (i)

300 kHz (i)

100 kHz (i)

30 kHz (i)

10 kHz (i)

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

3 MHz

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz


‘Ihble 4-2. Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy

Marker Readouts for:

Low Frequency

Repetition Rate

1 Calculated Impulse Bandwidth

Maximum

2.40 MHz 3.60 MHz

900 kHz 1.1 MHz

270 kHz

90 kHz

330 kHz

110 kHz

27 kHz 33 kHz

9 kHz

2.7 kHz

11 kHz

3.3

kHz

900 Hz 1.1 kHz

Res

BW

‘I&ble 4-3. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

1 Frequency

Span

3 MHz (i)

1 MHz (i)

00 kHz (i)

00 kHz (i)

30 kHz (i)

10 kHz (i)

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

5 MHz

2 MHz

500 kHz

200 kHz

50 kHz

20 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

300 Hz (i)

100 Hz (i)

30 Hz (i)

10 Hz (i)

500 Hz

200 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

300

30

Hz

100 Hz

Hz

10 Hz

450 Hz

150 Hz

-45 Hz

15 Hz

Option 462 4-9


Bandwidth

Selectivity Tkst

Related Adjustments




Specification

Description

Equipment

Note


<ll:l, 3 MHz to 100 kHz bandwidths

<8: 1, 30 kHz to 30 Hz bandwidths

60 dB points on 10 Hz bandwidths are separated by ~100 Hz



None required

Performance Test 3, 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test, must be performed before starting this test.

Procedure

1. Press (jYZZ@.


3. Key in analyzer control settings as follows:

( CENTER FREQUENCY ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHZ

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MHz

1-1 ~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MHz

VIDEO BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..lOOHz

SWEEP @ZZ”

4. Press MARKER C-1 and position marker at peak of signal trace. Press MARKER (ZJ and position movable marker 60 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive-going edge of the signal trace (the MARKER A amplitude readout should be

-60.00 dB fl.OO dB). It may be necessary to press SWEEP [CONT) and adjust (

CENTER FREQUENCY

) so that both 60 dB points are displayed. (See Figure 4-4.)

5. Press MARKER [nl and position movable marker 60 dB down from the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the signal trace (the

MARKER A amplitude readout should be .OO dB f0.50 dB).

6. Read the 60 dB bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth setting from the MARKER A frequency readout (Figure 4-4) and record the value in ‘Ihble 4-4.

4-10 Option 462

4. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test

7. Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 4-4. Press

SWEEP (SINGLE) and measure the 60 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 4 through

6. Record the value in Table 4-4.

8. Record the 6 dB bandwidths from Table 4-l in Table 4-4.

9. Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing the 60 dB bandwidth by the 6 dB bandwidth. The bandwidth ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in

‘fable 4-4.

10. The 60 dB bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting should be less than 100 Hz.

~~dB~‘i 0 .O/ dBm , ATT/ EN 10 dB

MKR LI 14.04 MHz

-0.30 UB


Option462 4-11

4. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test able 4-4. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

Spectrum Analyzer jZGiiF) [FREQuENCY~PAN) ( V I D E O ]

Measured Measured Bandwidth

60 dB 6 d B

Bandwidth Bandwidth (60 dB BW +

Maximum

Selectivity Selectivity Ratio

SdBBW)

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

20 MHz 100 Hz

15 MHz 300 Hz

5 MHz AUTO

2 MHz AUTO

11:l

11:l

11:l

11:l

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

500 kHz AUTO

200 kHz AUTO

50 kHz AUTO

10 kHz AUTO

5 kHz AUTO

2 kHz AUTO

500 Hz AUTO

100 HZ AUTO 60 dB points separated by cl00 Hz

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

4-12 Option 462

4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test

4. Impulse and

Resolution

Bandwidth

Selectivity !kst

Related Adjustment

Specification

Description

Note


2 1.4 Bandwidth Filter Adjustments



<ll:l, 3 MHz to 100 kHz

<8: 1, 30 kHz to 30 Hz

60 dB points on 10 Hz bandwidth are separated by ~100 Hz



Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test must be performed before this test.

Equipment

Procedure

None required

1. On the spectrum analyzer press C2-22) and connect the CAL

OUTPUT to RF INPUT.

2. Key in spectrum analyzer control settings as following:

[ CENTER FREQUENCY ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100

MHZ

FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.20 MHz

!m, j. .,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,“,g

VIDEO BW

SWEEP . . . :: :::::: :: ::: :::: ::: ::::::: ::: :::::: .‘.‘.‘.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~ .‘.‘cm]

3. On the spectrum analyzer, press MARKER CNORMAL-] and position the marker at the peak of the signal trace using the DATA knob.

Press MARKER In] and position the movable marker 60 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace (the MARKER Ia] amplitude readout should be -60.00 dB fl.OO dB). It may be necessary to press SWEEP ICONT) and to adjust

( CENTER FREQUENCY ) so that both 60 dB points are displayed

(see Figure 4-5).

Option 462 4-13


REF f?P

10 dB/

0.0 dBrn ATTEN 10 dB

MKR A 14.04 MHz

-0.30 dB

CENTER

I II

100.0 MHZ

RES BW 3 MHz VBW 100 HZ

SPAN 20.0 MHz

SWP 500 msec


4.

Press MARKER [al and position the positive movable marker 60 dB down from the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the signal trace (the MARKER Ia] amplitude readout should be 0.00 dB f0.50

dB).

5.

Read the 60 dB bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth setting from the MARKER m frequency readout (see Figure 4-5) and record the value in ‘fable 4-5.

6.

Select the spectrum analyzer

(RES?iEEQ [ FREQUENCY SPAN), and

CVlDEo] according to Table 4-5. Measure the 60 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 3 through 5 and record the value in Table 4-5.

7.

Record the 6 dB bandwidths for each resolution bandwidth setting from Table 4-l in Table 4-5.

8.

Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing the

60 dB bandwidth by the 6 dB bandwidth. The bandwidth ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in Table 4-5.

9.

The 60 dB bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting should be less than 100 Hz.

4-14 Option 462

r


‘Ihble 4-5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity


T

Measured

Res

BW

1

Frequency

Span

Video

BW

60dB

Bandwidth


6dB

Selectivity

Bandwidth (60 dB BW

+6dBBW)

Maximum

Selectivity

Ratio

3

MHz (i)

1 MHz (i)

300 kHz (i)

100 kHz (i)

30 kHz (i)

10 kHz (i)

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

300 Hz (i)

100 Hz (i)

30

Hz (i)

10 Hz (i)

20 MHz

15 MHz

5

2

500

200

50

10 kHz

5

2

MHz

MHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz

500 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

300 Hz

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

AUTO

11:l

11:l

11:l

11:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

I

8:l

8:l

8:l

I 8:l

50 dB points separated by cl00 Hz

I

Option 462 4-l 5

5. Impulse and

Resolution

Bandwidth

Switching


Related Adjustment

Specification

Description

Equipment

Procedure



Down/Up Converter Adjustments f2.0 dB, 10 Hz bandwidth

*0.8 dB, 30 Hz bandwidth f0.5 dB, 100 Hz to 1 MHz bandwidth fl.O dB, 3 MHz bandwidth

30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidth switching uncertainty figures only applicable 590% Relative Humidity.

The CAL OUTPUT signal is applied to the input of the spectrum analyzer. The deviation in peak amplitude of the signal trace is then measured as each resolution bandwidth filter is switched in.

None required

1. Press [2--22].


3. Key in the following control settings:

[CENTER FREQUENCY) ....................................... 100

[ F R E Q U E N C Y SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.5

REFERENCE LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. - 8

&ii, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MHz

MHz dBm

MHz

4. Press LOG

[ ENTER dB/olv) and key in 1 dB. Press MARKER

( PEAK SEARCH) a.

5. Key in settings according to Table 4-6. Press MARKER

[ PEAK SEARCH ) at each setting, then read the amplitude deviation from the MARKER La] readout at the upper right of the display

(see Figure 4-6).The allowable deviation for each resolution bandwidth setting is shown in the table.

4-16 Option 462

5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test h!

REF -8.0 dEm

I I I

ATTEN 10 dB

I I I I I I

MKR ~3 0 Hz

0.00 dB

I I

CENTER

I I n

I I

100.00 MHz

RES q W 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz

SPAN 5.00 MHz

SWP 20.0 m3ec

Figure 4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement

Table 4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

Res

BW

1 MHz (i)

3 MHz (i)

Frequency Deviation Allowable

Span (MKR A

Readout, dB)

Deviation w-9

5 MHz 0 (ref.) 0 (ref.)

5 MHz f 1.0

;OO kHz (i)

00 kHz (i)

30 kHz (i)

10 kHz (i)

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

300 Hz (i)

100 Hz (i)

30 Hz (i)

10 Hz (i)

5 MHz

500 kHz

500 kHz

50 kHz

50 kHz

10 kHz

1 kHz

1 kHz

200 Hz

100 Hz f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.8

f 2.0

Option 462 4-17

Tkst 3. 6 dB

Resolution

Bandwidth

Accuracy ‘J&t (p/o

Sble 2-24,


Record)

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

Step 8. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

Min

5 MHz 2.400 MHz

2 MHz

500 kHz

200 kHz

50 kHz

20 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

900 kHz

270.0 kHz

90.0 kHz

27.00 kHz

9.00 kHz

2.700 kHz

900 Hz

L Readout of 3 dB Bandwidth

Actual

3.600 MHz

1.100 MHz

330.0 kHz

110.0 kHz

33.00 kHz

11.00 kHz

3.300 kHz

1.100 kHz

500 Hz

200 Hz

270 Hz

90 Hz

330 Hz

110 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

27.0 Hz

10.0 Hz

33.0 Hz

15.0 Hz

4-18 Option 462

Test 3. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test (p/o ‘Ihble 2-24, Performance Test Record)

T&t 3. Impulse and Resolution

Bandwidth

Accuracy Wst (p/o able 2-24,


Record)

Steps 1 through 38. Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy

(-pziiq lJ7EzGJ Marker Readouts for: Calculated Impulse Bandwidth

High Frequency Low Frequency Minimum Actual Maximum

Repetition Rate Repetition Rate

3 MHz (i)

1 MHz (i)

3 MHz

3 MHz

300 kHz (i)

100 kHz (i)

3 MHz

1 MHz

30 kHz (i) 300 kHz

10 kHz (i) 100 kHz

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

30 kHz

10 kHz

2.40 MHz

900 kHz

270 kHz

90 kHz

27 kHz

9 kHz

2.7 kHz

900 Hz

3.60 MHz

1.1 MHz

330 kHz

110 kHz

33 kHz

11 kHz

3.3 kHz

1.1 kHz

Option 462 4-19

Test 3. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test (p/o ‘able 2-24, Performance Test Record)

Steps 39 through 46. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth

Accuracy

3 MHz (i)

1 MHz (i) iO0 kHz (i)

00 kHz (i)

30 kHz (i)

10 kHz (i)

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

5 MHz

2 MHz

500 kHz

200 kHz

50 kHz

20 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

300 Hz (i)

100 Hz (i)

30 Hz (i)

10 Hz (i)

500 Hz

200 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

450 Hz

150 Hz

45 Hz

15 Hz

4-20 Option 462

Test 4. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity (p/o ‘Ihble 2-24, Performance Test Record)

Ikst 4. 6 dB

Resolution

Bandwidth

Selectivity (p/o able 2-24,


Record)

Step 9. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity


( F R E Q U E N C Y SPANJ [ V I D E O ]

~ Measured

6 0 d B 6dES

Bandwidth Bandwidth

Bandwidth

Selectivity

(60 dB BW t

SdBBW)

Maximum

Selectivity Ratio

3 MHz

1 MHz

300 kHz

100 kHz

30 kHz

10 kHz

3 kHz

1 kHz

300 Hz

100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

20 MHz 100 Hz

15 MHz 300 Hz

5 MHz AUTO

2 MHz AUTO

500 kHz AUTO

200 kHz AUTO

50 kHz AUTO

10 kHz AUTO

5 kHz AUTO

2 kHz AUTO

500 Hz AUTO

100 HZ AUTO 60 dB point

11:l

11:l

11:l

I

I

11:l

I

8:l

8:l

I

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

I

8:l separated by cl00 Hz

Option462 4-21

Tkst 4. Impulse and Resolution

Bandwidth

Selectivity (p/o able 2-24,

Performance T&t

Record)

Steps 5 through 9. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth

Selectivity

Specr rum Analyl er

Res

BW

Frequency Video

Span BW

Measured

60 dB

Bandwidth


6 d B Selectivity

Bandwidth (60 dB BW

+6dBBW)

Maximum

Selectivity

Ratio

3 MHz (i)

1 MHz (i)

300 kHz (i)

LOO kHz (i)

30 kHz (i)

10 kHz (i)

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

300 Hz (i)

100 Hz (i)

30 Hz (i)

10 Hz (i)

20 MHz 100 Hz

15 MHz 300 Hz

5 MHz AUTO

2 MHz AUTO

500 kHz AUTO

200 kHz AUTO

50 kHz AUTO

10 kHz AUTO

5 kHz AUTO

2 kHz AUTO

500 Hz AUTO

100 Hz AUTO

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

8:l

60 dB points separated b: <lOO Hz

11:l

11:l

11:l

11:l

8:l

4-22 Option 462

Test 5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty (p/o ‘Ihble 2-24, Performace Test Record)

Tkst 5. Impulse and Resolution

Bandwidth

Switching

Uncertainty (p/o

‘lhble 2-24,

Performace Tkst

Record)

Step 5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth

Switching Uncertainty

Res

BW

1 MHz (i)

3 MHz (i)

Frequency

Span

5 MHz

Deviation

(MKR A

Readout, dB)

0 (ref.)

300 kHz (i) 5 MHz

100 kHz (i)

30 kHz (i) 500 kHz

10 kHz (i) 50 kHz

3 kHz (i)

1 kHz (i)

300 Hz (i)

100 Hz (i)

30 Hz (i)

10 Hz (i)

5 MHz

500 kHz

50 kHz

10 kHz

1 kHz

1 kHz

200 Hz

100 Hz

Allowable

Deviation

WV

0 (ref.) f 1.0

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.5

f 0.8

f 2.0

Option 462 4-23


Bandwidth

Adjustments

Reference

IF-Display Section

A4A9 IF Control

6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

Related Performance

Test

Description

Equipment

Procedure

The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT. Each of the adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the proper bandwidth.


1.

Position the instrument upright and remove the top cover.

2.

Set the LINE switch to On and press (2--22).

3.


4.

Key in

( CENTER FREQUENCY ]

100 MHz,

( FREQUENCY SPAN ]

5 MHz

CREs] 3 MHz, and LLIN).

5.

Press

( REFERENCE LEVEL ) and adjust the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top CRT graticule. The signal should be centered about the center line on the graticule.

6.

Press

PEAK SEARCH

, MKR -+ [CF, and MARKER [nl.

7.

Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 6 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates

.500 x

8.

Adjust A4A9R60 3 MHz for MKR [al indication of 1.5 MHz while maintaining the marker at .500 X using the DATA knob. Refer to

Figure 4-7 for the adjustment location.

9.

Press MARKER a. Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

X. There are now two markers; one on each side of the signal at the 6 dB point.

10.

CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 3

MHz bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 3.00 MHz f0.60

MHz

11.

Key in

(RES”’

1 MHz,

( FREQUENCY SPAN )

2 MHz,

( PEAK SEARCH ), and (MKR). If necessary, readjust by pressing

( REFERENCE LEVEL ) and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule.

12.

Press MARKER m then MARKER a].

4-24 Option 462

9. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments

13. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 6 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates

A500 x.

A4A9

I F C O N T R O L

\

A4A9

Figure 4-7. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments

14. Adjust A4A9R61 1 MHz for MKR A indication of 500 kHz while maintaining the marker at 0.500 X using the DATA knob. Refer to


15. Press MARKER la]. Adjust marker to the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicate 1.00 X). There are now two markers; one on each of the signal at the 6 dB point.

16. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 1 MHz bandwidth filter. The 6 dB bandwidth should be 1.00

MHz fO.10 MHz.

17. Key in

@EFEiVBW)

300 kHz,

( FREQUENCY SPAN )

500 kHz,

[ PEAK SEARCH ), and (j-1. If necessary, readjust by pressing

[REFERENCE LEVEL]] and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak at the top of the graticule.

18. Press MARKER m then MARKER [nl.

19. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one the displayed signal to the 6 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates .500 X.

20. Adjust A4A9R62 300 kHz for MKR A indication of 150 kHz while maintaining marker at .500 X using the data knob. Refer to


21. Press MARKER Ln]. Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

Xl.

22. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the bandwidth of the

300 kHz bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 300.00 f30.00

kHz.

23. Key in fjREsBW)

10 kHz,

[ FREQUENCY SPAN )

20 kHz,

(PEAK SEARCH ], and (MKR-CF). If necessary, readjust by pressing

( REFERENCE LEVEL ) and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule.

Option 462 4-25

9. 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments

24. Press MARKER IOFF), then MARKER [nl.

25. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 6 dB point; CRT MKR annotation indicates

.500 x.

26. Adjust A4A9R65 10 kHz for MKR A indication of 5.00 kHz while maintaining the marker at .500 X using the DATA knob. Refer to


27. Press MARKER a]. Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

Xl.

28. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 10 kHz bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 10.0 fl.O

kHz *

29. Key in

@EGi)

3 kHz,

[ FREQUENCY SPANS

5 kHz,

CPEAK SEARCH~, and

&ilGGZ=). If necessary, readjust by pressing

( REFERENCE LEVEL_) and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule.

30. Press MARKER m and MARKER a].

31. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 6 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates .500 X.

32. Adjust A4A9R66 3 kHz for MKR A indication of 1.5 kHz while maintaining the marker at .500 X using the DATA knob. Refer to


33. Press MARKER la]. Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

Xl.

34. The CRT MKR [al annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 3 kHz bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 3.00

fO.30 kHz

4-26 Option 462

9. Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments

9. Impulse

Bandwidth

Adjustments

Reference

IF-Display Section

A4A9 IF Control

Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy Test

Related Performance

Test

Description

The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT. Each of the adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the proper impulse bandwidth.

Equipment

Procedure


1.

Position the instrument upright and remove the top cover.

2.

Set the LINE switch to On and press (-1.

3.


4.

Key in

[ CENTER FREQUENCY )

100 MHz,

[ FREQUENCY SPAN]

5 MHz

(RES- 3 MHz, and m.

5.

Press

[ REFERENCE LEVEL ] and adjust the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top CRT graticule. The signal should be centered about the center line on the graticule.

6.

Press

[ PEAK SEARCH ],

MKR + (CF), and MARKER [nl.

7.

Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 7.3 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0.430 X

8.

Adjust A4A9R60 3 MHz for MKR la] indication of 1.5 MHz while maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to


9.

Press MARKER Ia]. Adjust the marker to the 7.3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

X. There are now two markers; one on each side of the signal at the 7.3 dB point.

10.

CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 3 MHz bandwidth. Impulse bandwidth should be 3.00 MHz ztO.60 MHz

11.

Key in

(jjj

1 MHz,

[ FREQUENCY SPAN )

2 MHz,

CPEAK SEARCH ), and CMKR). If necessary, readjust by pressing

CREFERENCE LEVEL ] and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule.

12.

Press MARKER (OFF) then MARKER [n.

Option 462 4-27


13. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 7.3 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0.430 X.

A4A9

I F C O N T R O L

\

4-28 Option 462

Figure 4-8. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments

14. Adjust A4A9R61 1 MHz for MKR A indication of 500 kHz while maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to


15. Press MARKER a]. Adjust marker to the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicate 1.00 X). There are now two markers; one on each of the signal at the 7.3 dB point.

16. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 1 MHz bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth should be 1.00

MHz fO.10 MHz.

17. Key in (REs] 300 kHz, (FREQUENCY SPAN] 500 kHz,

[PEAK SEARCH), and (MKRj. If necessary, readjust by pressing

[REFERENCE LEVEL]] and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak at the top of the graticule.

18. Press MARKER m then MARKER a].

19. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one the displayed signal to the 7.3 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0.430

X.

20. Adjust A4A9R62 300 kHz for MKR A indication of 150 kHz while maintaining marker at 0.430 X using the data knob. Refer to


21. Press MARKER [nl. Adjust the marker to the 7.3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

a.

22. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 300 kHz bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth should be

300.00 f30.00 kHz.

23. Key in @ETiii) 10 kHz, CFREQUENCY SPAN) 20 kHz, [PEAK SEARCH), and (MKR). If necessary, readjust by pressing


[REFERENCE LEVEL_) and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule.

24. Press MARKER IOFF), then MARKER a].

25. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 7.3 dB point; CRT MKR annotation indicates 0.430 X.

26. Adjust A4A9R65 10 kHz for MKR A indication of 5.00 kHz while maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to


27. Press MARKER la]. Adjust the marker to the 7.3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

x>.

28. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 10 kHz bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth should be 10.0

fl.O kHz

29. Key in (RESBW) 3 kHz, (FREQUENCY SPAN) 5 kHz, (PEAK SEARCH), and

CMKR’. If necessary, readjust by pressing [REFERENCE LEVEL] and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule.

30. Press MARKER m and MARKER Ia].

31. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 7.3 dB point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0.430 X.

32. Adjust A4A9R66 3 kHz for MKR A indication of 1.5 kHz while maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to


33. Press MARKER la). Adjust the marker to the 7.3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00

Xl.

34. The CRT MKR La] annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 3 kHz bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth should be 3.00 f0.30 kHz

Option 462 4-29

Option 857

Introduction

This chapter contains the modified amplitude fidelity performance test for Option 857 instruments. This chapter also contains the modified amplitude fidelity portion of the Test Record for Option 857 instruments.

5

Option 857 5-1

8. Option 857

Amplitude Fidelity


Related Adjustment


Specification Log:

Incremental f0.1 dB/dB over 0 to 80 dB display

Cumulative

3 MHz to 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth: sf0.6 dB max over 0 to 70 dB display (20 to 30°C)

24~ 1.5 dB over 0 to 90 dB display

10 Hz Resolution Bandwidth: sf0.8 dB over 0 to 70 dB display (20 to 30°C) sf2.1 dB over 0 to 90 dB display

Linear: f3% of Reference Level for top 9 l/2 divisions of display

Description

Amplitude fidelity in log and linear modes is tested by decreasing the signal level to the spectrum analyzer in 10 dB steps with a calibrated signal source and measuring the displayed amplitude change with the analyzer’s MARKER A function.

ENC TEE

Figure 5-1. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup

5-2 Option 857

8. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Performance Test

Equipment

Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 3335A

Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0780

BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Procedure

Log Fidelity

1.

On the spectrum analyzer, connect the CAL OUTPUT to the

RF INPUT. Press (jj] 9 and adjust the FREQ ZERO pot for maximum amplitude.

2.

Press (:!I on the analyzer. Key in analyzer settings as follows:

(CENTER FREQUENCY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 MHz

[FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 HZ

[REFERENCE LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + 10 dBm

3.

Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20.000

MHz and an output power level of + 10 dBm. Set the amplitude increment for 10 dB steps.

4.

Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5-l.

5.

Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH), (jMKRj, CMKR ---f REF LVL) to center the signal on the display.

6.

Press SWEEP (SINGLE) on the spectrum analyzer and wait for the sweep to be completed.

7.

Press MARKER CPEAK SEARCH), MARKER Ia]. Step the frequency synthesizer output amplitude down 10 dB.

8.

On the spectrum analyzer, press SWEEP C-1 and wait until the sweep is completed. Press MARKER CPEAK SEARCH), and record the marker A amplitude (a negative value) in column 2 of ‘Ihble

5-1.

9.

Repeat steps 8 and 9, decreasing the output of the frequency sythesizer in 10 dB steps from -10 dBm to -80 dBm.

10.

Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for each setting to find the fidelity error.

11.

Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10 dB to -70 dB. The results should be s&O.8 dB.

dB

12.

Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10 dB to -90 dB. The results should be sf2.1 dB.

dB

13.

Set the frequency synthesizer amplitude to + 10 dBm.

Option 857 5-3



FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 kHz

SWEEP ICoNTl

15. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH], fjj], CMRK + REF LVL~ to center the signal on the display.


FREQUENCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O Hz k-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Hz

17. Press MARKER A. Step the frequency synthesizer output amplitude from + 10 dBm to -80 dBm in 10 dB steps, noting the MARKER A amplitude (a negative value) at each step and recording it in column 2 of Table 5-2. Allow several sweeps after each step for the video filtered trace to reach its final amplitude.

18. Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for each setting to find the fidelity error.

19. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10 dB to -70 dB. The result should be SO.6 dB dB

20. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10 dB to -90 dB. The result should be 51.5 dB dB

‘Ihble 5-l.

Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 Hz RBW; Option 857)

- 1 0

- 2 0

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

- 6 0

- 7 0

- 8 0

Frequency 1 2 Fidelity Error

Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude (Column 2 - Column 1)


Wm) Step

W9 P)


0 - 1 0

- 6 0

- 7 0

- 8 0

- 9 0

- 2 0

-30

- 4 0

- 5 0

5-4 Option 857


‘lhble 5-2.

Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 kHz RRW; Option 857)

- 1 0

- 2 0

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

-60

- 7 0

- 8 0


Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude (Column 2 - Column 1:


(mm) Step

WV (W


0 - 1 0

- 2 0

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

- 6 0

-70

- 8 0

- 9 0

Linear Fidelity


@iEiET] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Hz

FREQUENCY SPAN) ......................................... .20 kHz k&TV, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10kHz

22. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of + 10 dBm.

23. Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH],

(j-1 to center the signal on the display.

24. Set [FREQUENCY SPAN) to 0 Hz and [VIDEO] to 1 Hz. Press (SHIFT_), m (resolution bandwidth), MARKER a.

25. Decrease frequency synthesizer output amplitude by 10 dB steps, noting the MARKER A amplitude and recording it in column 2 of

Table 5-3.

‘Ihble 5-3. Linear Amplitude Fidelity

Frequency MARKER A Allowable Range

Synthesizer Amplitude (f3% of Reference Level)

Amulitude (dm

1 bm) 1 - ’

Min l&%X

0

-10

-10.87 -9.21

-23.10 -17.72

Option 857 5-5


Record

Hewlett-Packard Company

Model HP 8566B

Serial No.

IF-Display Section

RF Section

Tested by

Report No.

Date

5-6 Option 857

Test 8. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity

Ykst 8. Option 857

Amplitude Fidelity

Step 9. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 Hz RRW)

- 2 0

- 3 0

- 4 0

- 5 0

- 6 0

- 7 0



Amplitude Amplitude ww

Step

WV PI

+ 10

0

0 (ref)

-10

0 (ref) 0 (ref)

- 1 0 -20

Cumulative Cumulative

Error Error

0 to

70 dB 0 to 90 dB

VW W)

- 3 0

-40

-50

- 6 0

- 7 0

-80

- 8 0 -90 s&O.8 dB sf2.1 dB

Step 18. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 kHz RRW)

- 5 0

- 6 0

- 7 0

- 8 0

-10

-20

-30

- 4 0

Frequency ww

1



Step

2

WV

Fidelity Error

VW


0 -10

Cumulative Cumulative

Error Error

0 to 70 dB 0 to

90 dl3

WV WI

-20

-30

- 4 0

- 5 0

-60

-70

-80

-90 s&O.6 dB sf1.5 dB

Option 857 5-7

Test 8. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity

Step 26. Linear Amplitude Fidelity

Frequency MARKER

Synthesizer Amplitude

Amplitude

Wm)

WI

A Allowable Range

(f3% of Reference Level)

Min

0

-10

- 10.87

-9.21

-23.10 - 17.72

5-R Option 857

Major Assembly and Component Locations

IF-Display Section

Figure Index

Assembly See Figure

AlAl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4; 6-5

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlAlO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

AlAlOCl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlAlOC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlAlOC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlAlOC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

AlAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4

AlTl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5 6-7

AlVl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5 6-6, 6-7

A3Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-4.6- 5

A3A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A3A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A3A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A3A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A3A7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A3A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A3A9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A3AlO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7 .

A4Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4A9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

A4AlO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

FL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4, 6-5

Wl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-6 w2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-6 w3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-6

W6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4 w7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-4

W8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..6-6.6- 7 w9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-6

W21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

..6-4.6- 5

Major Assembly and Component locations 6-l

6

W23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

W24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

W25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

W26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

W27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

W28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

W29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

W32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7

RF Section Figure

Index

Assembly See Figure

A5Al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I................. 6-2

A5A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

A5SWl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A6A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A6A13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A6Jl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

A6J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

A6J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

A6J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

A6J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

A6Rl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2

A7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A l l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

Al2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

Al5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

Al6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

Al7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

Al8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3

A23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A23Cl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1, 6-3

A23C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1, 6-3

A23C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1, 6-3

A23C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1, 6-3

A23Ql . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A23Q2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A23Q3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A23Q4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A23W5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1, 6-2

A23W6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A23W7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1, 6-2

A23Ul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

A24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

Tl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3 w15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-l

6-2 Major Assembly and Component locations

A23W5

A 2 4

F A N

A23C4 A23C3

A23Ul (+5V) A23Q4 W15(+2OV) A2303

A 2 3Q2

A 2 3Ql

A23C2

/ (-4OV)

.--....--.-------

0

A 2 3

’ M O T H E R B O A R D

- A23W6

\

\

A6A13

R F M O D U L E

M O T H E R B O A R D

A23W7 A6A6

F I R S T C O N V E R T E R

Figure 6-1. RF Section, Top View

Major Assembly and Component locations 6-3

A6J5 A6J4 A6J2

A6Jl ld:“T O&T ::fPb? C A L O U T P U T

A6Rl

A M P T D C A L

A6J3

R F I N P U T

A5A2

RPG A23W7 A23W5

A5A 1

K E Y B O A R D

A5SWl

S T A N D B Y / O N

Figure 6-2. RF Section, Front View


A23C 1

(-IOV)

A23C2 A23C3 A23C4

(-40V)(+20V) (+5V) A 2 4

A 2 2

A l 7

TH;F?yGH Fd~Q#%CY

S T A N D A R D

M/N-REFEREN:;

T R A N S F O R M ; ;

Al 1

/YTo

A l 2

42

R F MOD”?:

Figure 6-3. RF Section, Bottom View

\A10

2 0 3 0 b

GA15-3L


AlAlOC4

AIAIOCI

AlA AlA AlA AlA F L 1 AITI

A l AlOC2

AlAlOC3

AlA w 7 w21

AlA

AIAI 1

W 6 w 2 1

AlA

AIVI

AlA I

8 I

Figure 6-4. IF Section, Top View (SN 3001A and Below)

.

A4A 1

A3A9

A3A8

A3A7

A3A6

A3A5

A3A4

A3A3

A3A2

I ‘A3Al

A4A9

A4A8

A4A7

A4A6

A4A5

A4A4

A4A3

A4A2


AIAIOCI

AlAlOC4

AlAlOC2

AlAlOC3

AlA AlA AlA F L 1 AITI

AlA

AIVI

AlA

,A4A9

,A4A8

,A4A7

,A4A6

,A4A5

,A4A4

,A4A3

,A4A2

,A4Al

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Figure 6-5. IF Section, ‘Ibp View (SN 3004A and Above)

L

L lA3A9

‘A3A8

‘A3A7

‘A3A6

-------A3A5

\A3A4

‘A3A3

‘A3A2

‘A3Al


AIVI

Wi AlAl ti2

Figure 6-6. IF Section, Front View

W 8


I

L I

AIAIO

I

/ w29

, W 2 4

A4AlO

\

W 8

‘W23

W 8

A3AlO w i 4 W 2 3 W 2 5 Wi6 W 2 7

Figure 6-7. IF Section, Bottom View

J

‘W32

( S N 3 0 0 4 A a n d a b o v e )

\ AIVI
